User Manual The content of this manual has been carefully revised, however the full compliance of its content with the technical and functional characteristics of the product it is referred to, can not be assured, as typing or other errors can not be completely ruled out. The information given is regularly reviewed any necessary correction or additional explanation will be included in future revisions of this document. Due to continuous development, the content of this manual can be changed without notice. We appreciate any correction or improvement suggestion. PREFACE Previous note Throughout the text you may find some references to EFACEC Sistemas de Electrónica, S.A. or its logotype . This is justified by the fact that this document original version was completed before the company and logotype has been changed. Objective This manual describes the operation, installation, configuration and maintenance of the TPU S420, a Medium Voltage feeder protection and control unit. Scope This manual is destined for protection engineers, specialized personnel responsible for the installation, configuration and commissioning of the equipment and staff from the energy transport and distribution companies in charge of its operation. Application The information in this manual is valid for the following equipment of EFACEC: TPU S420, Edition 1, firmware 3.x or higher Safety Instructions This manual does not cover all safety measures required to operate the equipment because additional procedures can be necessary in specific circumstances. Yet, all safety instructions given in this manual must be followed. Any intervention regarding the equipment’s installation, commissioning or operation must be carried out by authorized technical personnel. The equipment should not be used for purposes other than those specified in this document. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. This product complies with the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive) as well as with the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 2004/108/EC (Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive). The conformity is proved by several actions including tests conducted by EFACEC and by independent entities, in accordance with the standards EN 61000-6-2 (2005) and EN 61000-64 (2007) concerning the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive and in accordance with the standards EN60950-1 (2006) + A11 (2009) and EN 60255-5 (2001) concerning the Low Voltage Directive. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 i Organization This manual is organized in chapters so that is easier to find the desired information and is adjusted to the different target readers it is meant for: Chapter 1 – Introduction: Summary of the unit’s characteristics and functions; Chapter2 - Installation: instructions for the unit’s correct assembly and the execution of all necessary connections; Chapter3 - Human Machine Interface: guide for the use of the local human-machine interface unit and PC interface program; Chapter4 - Configuration: description of the base configurations and the customization of the unit functions; Chapter5 - Communications: application of the functions associated with the local area network communications and its configuration; Chapter6 - Protection and Control Functions: description of the operating principle, configuration and associated logic for each function; Chapter7 - Operation: instructions for the unit operation when in service; Chapter8 - Commissioning: procedures to test the unit functions; Chapter9 - Maintenance: indication of corrective and maintenance actions and solution of frequent problems; Chapter10 - Technical Specifications: summary of all functional characteristics of the equipment; Chapter11 - Annexes: compilation of the necessary information to configure the TPU S420. This manual contains warnings related to specific aspects of the equipment installation, configuration or operation with different importance levels: The failure to comply with the safety instruction may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. The failure to comply with the safety or operational instruction may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420. Additional information with special interest for an easier protection configuration or operation, not relevant for personnel and/or equipment safety. Answer to a frequent question about the equipment’s configuration or operation for quick problem solving. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 ii Manual Revisions Revision Date Changes 1.0 2006-10-23 Initial version 2.0 2008-10-28 - Introduction to the IEC61850 option Comments - Oscillography data update - Correction of typing errors - Changing of the functions “Earth Overcurrent Protection”, “Second Phase Overcurrent Protection” and “Second Earth Overcurrent Protection” 2.1 2010-12-20 Updates based on 2.1 Portuguese version 2.2.0 2011-12-28 General formatting TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 iii GLOSSARY A/D Analogue / Digital BDM Background Debug Mode BDD Distributed Database CPU Central Processing Unit DNP Distributed Network Protocol I/O Input / Output IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group (Time Synchronization Module ) LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Cristal Display LED Light Emiting Diode MAC Medium Access Controller MII Medium Independent Interface PC Personal Computer PECL Positive Emitter Coupled Logic PHY Physical Layer Entities Inch (’’) An inch is a length unit of the British unit system and it isn’t embraced by the international system of units (SI). It is sometimes used throughout this document once it is often used by technicians. An inch is equal to 2.54 cm or 25.4 mm. PUR 2.1 Protocol for remote units used on Efacec local area networks RS232 Serial protocol of Data Transmission by DB9 serial cable RS485 Protocol of Data Transmission by 485 twisted pair bus SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition STP Shielded Twisted Pair TI Current Transformer TPU Terminal Protection Unit – EFACEC digital protection units TT Voltage Transformer UA Acquisition Unit UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UC Redondant Central Unit URT Remote Telecontrol Unit URT500 EFACEC Remote Telecontrol Unit UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair μC Microcontroller TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1. APPLICATION..........................................................................................................1-3 1.2. VERSIONS ..............................................................................................................1-4 1.3. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................1-5 1.4. FUNCTIONALITIES.....................................................................................................1-7 1.5. OPERATION PRINCIPLE.............................................................................................1-13 2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 2-1 2.1. PRESENTATION AND DIMENSIONS..................................................................................2-3 2.1.1. Case .............................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2. Dimensions..................................................................................................................2-7 2.2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................2-8 2.2.1. General Description.....................................................................................................2-8 2.2.2. Board Description ........................................................................................................2-9 2.2.3. Configuration of the supply voltage and digital I/O................................................ 2-24 2.3. ASSEMBLY............................................................................................................2-25 2.3.1. Embedded assembly ................................................................................................ 2-25 2.3.2. Assembly in 19’’ rack ............................................................................................... 2-27 2.4. CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................2-29 2.4.1. Connectors description ............................................................................................ 2-31 2.4.2. Description of connector pins.................................................................................. 2-33 2.4.3. Wiring connections diagram .................................................................................... 2-36 2.4.4. Power Supply Connection ........................................................................................ 2-39 2.4.5. Current and voltage connections............................................................................. 2-40 2.4.6. Digital input and output connections ...................................................................... 2-43 2.4.7. Local network connections ...................................................................................... 2-44 2.4.8. Serial ports................................................................................................................ 2-47 2.4.9. Serial port of the Ethernet communication board ................................................... 2-49 3. HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE ....................................................................... 3-1 3.1. FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION........................................................................................3-3 3.2. LOCAL INTERFACE OPERATION ....................................................................................3-5 3.2.1. Start-up .......................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.2. Keys..............................................................................................................................3-7 3.2.3. Local Interface Modes..................................................................................................3-9 3.3. MENUS INTERFACE OPERATION ..................................................................................3-11 3.3.1. Changing the value of a parameter ......................................................................... 3-12 3.3.2. Passwords ................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.3.3. Menus Content ......................................................................................................... 3-16 3.3.4. Other Actions in Menus Interface ............................................................................ 3-28 3.4. OPERATION OF THE SUPERVISION AND COMMAND INTERFACE ............................................3-32 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 v 3.4.1. Alarms Page.............................................................................................................. 3-32 3.4.2. Mimic ........................................................................................................................ 3-32 3.5. USE OF WINPROT ..................................................................................................3-37 3.6. WEBPROT USE ......................................................................................................3-42 4. CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 4-1 4.1. DATE AND TIME ......................................................................................................4-3 4.1.1. Time Synchronization..................................................................................................4-3 4.1.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................4-4 4.1.3. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................4-7 4.2. MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS...................................................................................4-8 4.2.1. Configuration...............................................................................................................4-8 4.2.2. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................4-9 4.3. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS..................................................................................4-11 4.3.1. Inputs ........................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.3.2. Outputs ..................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.3.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-15 4.3.4. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-19 4.4. LOCAL INTERFACE..................................................................................................4-21 4.4.1. Display ...................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.4.2. Alarms Page.............................................................................................................. 4-21 4.4.3. Mimic ........................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.4.4. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-28 4.4.5. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-30 4.5. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ...........................................................................................4-31 4.5.1. Logical Variables....................................................................................................... 4-31 4.5.2. Logic Inference ......................................................................................................... 4-35 4.5.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-36 4.6. OPERATION MODES................................................................................................4-42 4.6.1. Operation Modes Types ........................................................................................... 4-42 4.6.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-42 4.6.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-44 4.7. OSCILLOGRAPHY ...................................................................................................4-50 4.7.1. Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 4-50 4.7.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-50 4.7.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-51 5. COMMUNICATIONS..................................................................................... 5-1 5.1. SERIAL COMMUNICATION...........................................................................................5-3 Architecture............................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1. Modem connection......................................................................................................5-3 5.1.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................5-4 5.2. TCP/IP COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................5-5 5.2.1. Architecture .................................................................................................................5-5 5.2.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................5-5 5.2.3. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................5-7 5.3. SCADA PROTOCOLS ...............................................................................................5-8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 vi 5.4. DISTRIBUTED DATABASE ..........................................................................................5-10 5.5. LONWORKS PROTOCOL ...........................................................................................5-11 5.5.1. General Architecture................................................................................................. 5-11 5.5.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-13 5.5.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-15 5.5.4. Communication with WinProt .................................................................................. 5-18 5.5.5. Lonworks Distributed Database............................................................................... 5-19 5.5.6. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-24 5.6. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL .............................................................................................5-26 5.6.1. General Architecture................................................................................................. 5-26 5.6.2. Operation Principle................................................................................................... 5-26 5.6.3. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-27 5.6.4. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-30 5.6.5. Communication with WinProt .................................................................................. 5-33 5.7. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL ..............................................................................5-34 5.7.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-34 5.7.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-35 5.7.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-38 5.7.4. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-42 5.8. ETHERNET DISTRIBUTED DATABASE ............................................................................5-43 5.8.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-43 5.8.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-43 5.8.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-44 5.8.4. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-48 5.9. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ..........................................................................................5-50 5.9.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-50 5.9.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-50 5.9.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-55 5.10. SNTP PROTOCOL................................................................................................5-56 5.10.1. Architecture ............................................................................................................ 5-56 5.10.2. Operation Principles ............................................................................................... 5-56 5.10.3. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 5-56 5.10.4. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 5-57 6. PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ....................................................... 6-1 6.1. COMMON CHARACTERISITCS ......................................................................................6-5 6.1.1. Functions Modular Organization ................................................................................6-6 6.1.2. Configuration Sets.......................................................................................................6-7 6.1.3. Configuration...............................................................................................................6-8 6.1.4. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................6-8 6.2. PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ...................................................................6-11 6.2.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-18 6.2.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-20 6.3. EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ...................................................................6-24 6.3.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-24 6.3.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-26 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 vii 6.3.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-28 6.4. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION..................................................6-31 6.4.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-31 6.4.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-33 6.4.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-34 6.5. DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .................................................6-36 6.5.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-36 6.5.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-38 6.5.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-40 6.6. SECOND PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .................................................................6-42 6.6.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-42 6.6.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-42 6.6.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-44 6.7. SECOND EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION........................................................6-46 6.7.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-46 6.7.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-46 6.7.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-48 6.8. RESISTIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION..........................................................................6-50 6.8.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-50 6.8.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-52 6.8.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-52 6.9. PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ............................................................................6-54 6.9.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-54 6.9.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-55 6.9.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-55 6.10. ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION..............................................................6-58 6.10.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-58 6.10.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-59 6.10.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-60 6.11. PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ........................................................................6-62 6.11.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-62 6.11.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-63 6.11.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-64 6.12. UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION..................................................6-67 6.12.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-67 6.12.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-68 6.12.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-70 6.13. PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION..............................................................6-73 6.13.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-73 6.13.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-74 6.13.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-76 6.14. OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................................................................6-79 6.14.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-79 6.14.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-81 6.14.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-82 6.15. AUTOMATIC RECLOSING ........................................................................................6-84 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 viii 6.15.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-84 6.15.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-88 6.15.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-90 6.16. SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK .......................................................................6-92 6.16.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-92 6.16.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-94 6.16.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-98 6.17. VOLTAGE RESTORATION......................................................................................6-103 6.17.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-103 6.17.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-105 6.17.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-106 6.18. FREQUENCY RESTORATION ...................................................................................6-108 6.18.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-108 6.18.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-110 6.18.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-111 6.19. CENTRALISED VOLTAGE RESTORATION ....................................................................6-113 6.19.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-113 6.19.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-115 6.19.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-115 6.20. CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION .................................................................6-118 6.20.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-118 6.20.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-120 6.20.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-120 6.21. BLOCKING BY LOGICAL SELECTIVITY ........................................................................6-123 6.21.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-123 6.21.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-124 6.21.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-124 6.22. FAULT LOCATOR ...............................................................................................6-125 6.22.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-125 6.22.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-126 6.22.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-128 6.23. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE....................................................................................6-129 6.23.1. Operation method................................................................................................ 6-129 6.23.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-130 6.23.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-130 6.24. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION ...................................................................................6-133 6.24.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-133 6.24.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-134 6.24.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-134 6.25. PROTECTIONS TRIP TRANSFER ...............................................................................6-135 6.25.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-135 6.25.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-136 6.25.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-136 6.26. CIRCUIT-BREAKER SUPERVISION .............................................................................6-138 6.26.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-138 6.26.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-139 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 ix 6.26.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-140 6.27. DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION................................................................................6-148 6.27.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-148 6.27.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-149 6.27.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-150 7. OPERATION ............................................................................................... 7-1 7.1. MEASURES .............................................................................................................7-3 7.1.1. Read Measures ............................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2. Clear Measures ............................................................................................................7-6 7.1.3. Remote Access ............................................................................................................7-8 7.1.4. Export ..........................................................................................................................7-9 7.2. EVENT LOGGING....................................................................................................7-10 7.2.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.2.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-11 7.2.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-11 7.2.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3. FAULT LOCATOR ...................................................................................................7-14 7.3.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.3.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.3.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-15 7.3.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-16 7.4. LOAD DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................7-17 7.4.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-18 7.4.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.5. OSCILLOGRAPHY ...................................................................................................7-21 7.5.1. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.5.2. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.6. HARDWARE INFORMATION .......................................................................................7-25 7.6.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-26 7.6.2. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-27 7.7. OPERATION MODES................................................................................................7-28 7.8. MIMIC ................................................................................................................7-29 7.8.1. Apparatus ................................................................................................................. 7-29 7.8.2. Commands ............................................................................................................... 7-30 7.8.3. Measures................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.8.4. Parameters ................................................................................................................ 7-31 7.9. SCREENSAVER .......................................................................................................7-32 8. COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................ 8-1 8.1. INITIAL CHECKS.......................................................................................................8-3 8.2. ANALOGUE INPUTS...................................................................................................8-7 8.2.1. Connections.................................................................................................................8-7 8.2.2. Measures Value ...........................................................................................................8-7 8.3. DIGITAL INPUTS.......................................................................................................8-9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 x 8.4. DIGITAL OUTPUTS .................................................................................................8-11 8.5. ALARMS PAGE ......................................................................................................8-12 8.6. INTERFACE WITH THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK.................................................................8-13 8.7. PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................................8-15 8.8. PUT INTO SERVICE..................................................................................................8-16 9. MAINTENANCE........................................................................................... 9-1 9.1. ROUTINE CHECKS ....................................................................................................9-3 9.1.1. Torque .........................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.2. Logs .............................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.3. System Menu ...............................................................................................................9-4 9.2. FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................................................................9-13 9.3. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................................9-15 9.3.1. Hardware .................................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.2. Software.................................................................................................................... 9-27 9.3.3. Calibration ................................................................................................................ 9-27 9.4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) .......................................................................9-32 10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................... 10-1 11. ANNEXES................................................................................................. 11-1 ANNEX A. ORDERING FORM.........................................................................................11-3 ANNEX B. MEASUREMENTS TABLE ..................................................................................11-5 ANNEX C. INPUTS OPTIONS TABLE .................................................................................11-9 ANNEX D. OUTPUT OPTIONS TABLE .............................................................................11-13 ANNEX E. ALARM OPTIONS TABLE................................................................................11-18 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xi FIGURES LIST FIGURE 1.1. TPU S420 HARDWARE STRUCTURE. .....................................................................1-13 FIGURE 1.2. SAMPLING AND FILTERING OF ANALOGUE DIGITAL SIGNALS. ..........................................1-14 FIGURE 2.1. FRONT VIEW OF THE TPU S420. ...........................................................................2-4 FIGURE 2.2. BACK VIEW OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTORS ARRANGEMENT).......................................2-5 FIGURE 2.3. BACK VIEW OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). .......................................2-6 FIGURE 2.4. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND FIXATION SCREWS OF THE TPU S420. .................................2-7 FIGURE 2.5. INTERNAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BOARDS.................................................................2-8 FIGURE 2.6. BACK VIEW OF THE CT & VT BOARD OF TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ...........2-10 FIGURE 2.7. BACK VIEW OF THE LONWORKS COMMUNICATIONS BOARD OF TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT)...............................................................................................................2-11 FIGURE 2.8. BACK VIEW OF THE ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD OF TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT)...............................................................................................................2-12 FIGURE 2.9. BACK VIEW OF THE PROCESSING BOARD (CPU) OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ..................................................................................................................................2-13 FIGURE 2.10. BACK VIEW OF THE PROCESSING BOARD (CPU) OF THE TPU S420 WITH PIGGY-BACKS FOR PLASTIC OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ..................................................2-14 FIGURE 2.11. BACK VIEW OF THE PROCESSING BOARD (CPU) OF THE TPU S420 WITH PIGGY-BACKS FOR GLASS OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ............................................................2-15 FIGURE 2.12. BACK VIEW OF THE PROCESSING BOARD (CPU) OF THE TPU S420 WITH PIGGY-BACK FOR RS485 INTERFACE (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ....................................................................2-16 FIGURE 2.13. BACK VIEW OF THE PROCESSING BOARD (CPU) OF THE TPU S420 WITH PIGGY-BACK FOR RS232 INTERFACE (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ....................................................................2-17 FIGURE 2.14. BACK VIEW OF THE I/O BOARD + POWER SUPPLY OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT)...............................................................................................................2-18 FIGURE 2.15. BACK VIEW OF EXPANSION BOARD I OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). .....2-19 FIGURE 2.16. BACK VIEW OF THE EXPANSION BOARD 2 OF THE TPU S420 (CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT). ..220 FIGURE 2.17. PLACEMENT OF THE BOARDS IN THE TPU S420 (VERSION LONWORKS).........................2-22 FIGURE 2.18. PLACEMENT OF THE BOARDS ON THE TPU S420 (VERSION ETHERNET). ........................2-23 FIGURE 2.19. CUT TO MAKE EMBEDDED ASSEMBLY....................................................................2-26 FIGURE 2.20. ASSEMBLY IN 19’’ RACK. .................................................................................2-27 FIGURE 2.21. 7U FRONT PLANE FOR ASSEMBLY IN 19’’ RACK. ......................................................2-28 FIGURE 2.22. 7U FRONT PLANE FOR ASSEMBLY IN 19’’ RACK. ......................................................2-28 FIGURE 2.23. CONNECTORS IN THE BACK OF THE TPU S420 (VERSION LONWORKS). ........................2-29 FIGURE 2.24. CONNECTORS IN THE BACK OF THE TPU S420 (VERSION ETHERNET). ..........................2-30 FIGURE 2.25. GENERAL WIRING CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM OF THE TPU S420, BASE CONFIGURATION.......2-37 FIGURE 2.26. GENERAL WIRING CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM OF THE TPU S420, EXPANSION MODES (OPTIONAL). ..................................................................................................................................2-38 FIGURE 2.27. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS OF TPU S420. .......................................................2-39 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xii FIGURE 2.28. CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM (TOROID). .....................................2-41 FIGURE 2.29. CURRENTS AND CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM (HOLMGREEN CONNECTION). .........................2-42 FIGURE 2.30 DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS OF TPU S420 (BASE BOARD). .....................2-43 FIGURE 2.31. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS OF THE LONWORKS NETWORK BOARD. ...........................2-44 FIGURE 2.32. CONNECTIONS OF THE ETHERNET NETWORK BOARD. ...............................................2-46 FIGURE 2.33. SERIAL PORT FOR OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE. ..........................................................2-47 FIGURE 2.34. SERIAL PORT FOR RS485 INTERFACE...................................................................2-48 FIGURE 2.35. SERIAL PORT FOR RS232 INTERFACE...................................................................2-49 FIGURE 3.1. FRONT PANEL APPEARANCE WHEN THE TPU S420 IS NOT ENERGIZED. ..............................3-3 FIGURE 3.2. FRONT PANEL APPEARANCE WHEN THE TPU S420 IS STARTED-UP. .................................3-6 FIGURE 3.3. FRONT PANEL APPEARANCE WHEN THE TPU S420 IS STARTED-UP ..................................3-7 FIGURE 3.4. MENUS INTERFACE – MAIN MENU APPEARANCE........................................................3-11 FIGURE 3.5. PARAMETERS CHANGE PROCESS............................................................................3-13 FIGURE 3.6. ENTERING PASSWORD PROCESS. ...........................................................................3-14 FIGURE 3.7. PASSWORD CHANGING PROCESS ...........................................................................3-16 FIGURE 3.8. MAIN MENU...................................................................................................3-16 FIGURE 3.9. MEASUREMENTS MENU......................................................................................3-17 FIGURE 3.10. ACCESS MEASUREMENTS MENU. ........................................................................3-18 FIGURE 3.11. EVENT LOGGING MENU. ..................................................................................3-19 FIGURE 3.12. SEE EVENT LOGGING MENU. .............................................................................3-19 FIGURE 3.13. FAULT LOCATOR MENU...................................................................................3-20 FIGURE 3.14. FAULT 1 MENU. ............................................................................................3-20 FIGURE 3.15. LOAD DIAGRAM MENU....................................................................................3-20 FIGURE 3.16. POWER DIAGRAM MENU. .................................................................................3-21 FIGURE 3.17. APPARATUS SUPERVISION MENU.........................................................................3-21 FIGURE 3.18. CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION MENU. ................................................................3-22 FIGURE 3.19. INFORMATION MENU (CIRCUIT BREAKER)..............................................................3-22 FIGURE 3.20. DELETE INFORMATION MENU (CIRCUIT BREAKER)....................................................3-23 FIGURE 3.21. INSULATION DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION MENU....................................................3-23 FIGURE 3.22. INFORMATION MENU (INSULATION DISCONNECTOR)................................................3-23 FIGURE 3.23. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS MENU.........................................................................3-24 FIGURE 3.24. PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MENU............................................................3-24 FIGURE 3.25. AUTOMATION MENU. .....................................................................................3-25 FIGURE 3.26. PROTECTION TRIP TRANSFER MENU. ...................................................................3-25 FIGURE 3.27. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS MENU. ...........................................................................3-26 FIGURE 3.28. COMMUNICATIONS MENU. ...............................................................................3-26 FIGURE 3.29. HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE MENU. .................................................................3-26 FIGURE 3.30. SET DATE AND TIME MENU. .............................................................................3-27 FIGURE 3.31. INFORMATION MENU. .....................................................................................3-27 FIGURE 3.32. COMMAND EXECUTION PROCESS. .......................................................................3-29 FIGURE 3.33. DATE CHANGE PROCESS..................................................................................3-30 FIGURE 3.34. APPEARANCE OF THE DISPLAY WITH THE SAMPLE MIMIC. ............................................3-33 FIGURE 3.35. USE OF SEL KEY ............................................................................................3-35 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xiii FIGURE 4.1. PARAMETERS MENU (SET DATE AND TIME). ..............................................................4-5 FIGURE 4.2. MEASUREMENT CONVERTERS MENU........................................................................4-9 FIGURE 4.3. DIGITAL INPUTS FILTERING (EXAMPLE: CONFIRMATIONS NR. EQUAL TO 5)..........................4-12 FIGURE 4.4. DIGITAL INPUTS VALIDATION (EXAMPLE: MAXIMUM NR. OF STATE CHANGES PER SECOND EQUAL TO 5). ..............................................................................................................................4-12 FIGURE 4.5. COMPLEMENTARY INPUTS VALIDATION. ..................................................................4-13 FIGURE 4.6. OUTPUTS OPERATION MODES. .............................................................................4-14 FIGURE 4.7. PARAMETERS MENU (BASE I/O BOARD). ................................................................4-15 FIGURE 4.8. INPUTS RELATED MENUS.....................................................................................4-16 FIGURE 4.9. OUTPUTS RELATED MENUS..................................................................................4-17 FIGURE 4.10. DOUBLE INPUTS PARAMETERS MENU. ..................................................................4-17 FIGURE 4.11. LCD VISUALIZATION MODES. ............................................................................4-21 FIGURE 4.12. ALARMS OPERATION MODES..............................................................................4-22 FIGURE 4.13. APPARATUS TYPE OBJECTS CONFIGURATION. ..........................................................4-23 FIGURE 4.14. COMMAND TYPE OBJECTS CONFIGURATION............................................................4-25 FIGURE 4.15. PARAMETER TYPE OBJECT CONFIGURATION. ...........................................................4-26 FIGURE 4.16. MEASUREMENT TYPE OBJECTS CONFIGURATION.......................................................4-27 FIGURE 4.17. DISPLAY CONFIGURATION MENU........................................................................4-28 FIGURE 4.18. ALARMS PAGE CONFIGURATION MENU ................................................................4-29 FIGURE 4.19. AUTOMATION LOGIC ORGANIZATION...................................................................4-32 FIGURE 4.20. MODULAR ORGANIZATION OF THE AUTOMATION LOGIC. ...........................................4-33 FIGURE 4.21. DELAY LOGICAL VARIABLE TYPES. ......................................................................4-33 FIGURE 4.22. TIMER AND PULSE LOGICAL VARIABLE TYPES........................................................4-34 FIGURE 4.23. LOGICAL VARIABLE CONSTITUTION. .....................................................................4-34 FIGURE 4.24. EXAMPLE OF LOGIC INFERENCE SCHEME.................................................................4-36 FIGURE 4.25. AUTOMATION LOGIC CONFIGURATION WITH WINLOGIC ............................................4-37 FIGURE 4.26. LOOP EXAMPLE..............................................................................................4-38 FIGURE 4.27. INITIALIZATION OF GATES INPUTS WITH AND TYPE VARIABLES. ....................................4-38 FIGURE 4.28. INITIALIZATION OF GATES INPUTS WITH NEGATED OUTPUTS.........................................4-39 FIGURE 4.29. DESCRIPTIONS CONFIGURATION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES WITH WINLOGIC. .................4-39 FIGURE 4.30. OPERATION MODES MENU. ..............................................................................4-43 FIGURE 4.31. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE OPERATION MODES MODULE (PART 1). ..................................4-47 FIGURE 4.32. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE OPERATION MODES MODULE (PART 2). ..................................4-48 FIGURE 4.33. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE OPERATION MODES MODULE (PART 3). ..................................4-49 FIGURE 4.34. PARAMETERS MENU (OSCILLOGRAPHY). ...............................................................4-51 FIGURE 4.35. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE OSCILLOGRAPHY MODULE. ..............................................4-52 FIGURE 5.1. CONFIGURATION MENU OF THE SERIAL COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS. ............................5-4 FIGURE 5.2. CONFIGURATION MENU OF THE ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS. ........................5-6 FIGURE 5.3. TYPICAL ARCHITECTURE OF THE PROTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM................................5-8 FIGURE 5.4. DISTRIBUTED DATABASE ARCHITECTURE. ................................................................5-10 FIGURE 5.5. LONWORKS COMMUNICATION INFORMATION MENU WITH DEBUG INFORMATION. ..............5-15 FIGURE 5.6. LOCATION STRING CONFIGURATION MENU. ............................................................5-15 FIGURE 5.7. SEND SERVICE PIN AND RESET NEURON CHIP COMMANDS ACCESS MENU. ........................5-16 FIGURE 5.8. DATA STRUCTURE OF THE DISTRIBUTED DATABASE. ..................................................5-19 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xiv FIGURE 5.9. EXAMPLE OF THE DISTRIBUTED DATABASE CONFIGURATION. .........................................5-23 FIGURE 5.10. DNP 3.0 COMMUNICATION INFORMATION MENU WITH DEBUG INFORMATION. ...............5-29 FIGURE 5.11. CONFIGURATION MENU OF THE DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS..............................5-30 FIGURE 5.12. IEC104 COMMUNICATION INFORMATION MENU WITH DEBUG INFORMATION. ................5-38 FIGURE 5.13. CONFIGURATION MENU OF THE IEC60870-5-104 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS. ..............5-38 FIGURE 5.14. TIME SCHEMATIC OF SENDING THE DDB TO THE NETWORK.........................................5-45 FIGURE 5.15. EXAMPLE OF THE DISTRIBUTED DATABASE CONFIGURATION. .......................................5-48 FIGURE 5.16. CONFIGURATION WINDOW OF A DATASET.............................................................5-51 FIGURE 5.17. CHOOSING WINDOW OF THE PUBLISHED GOCB.......................................................5-52 FIGURE 5.18. CONFIGURATION WINDOW OF AN INPUT DATASET. ..................................................5-53 FIGURE 6.1. FUNCTION MODULAR STRUCTURE. ..........................................................................6-6 FIGURE 6.2. SET CONFIGURATION MENU (PHASE OVERCURRENT)....................................................6-8 FIGURE 6.3. LOGIC DIAGRAM COMMON TO THE DIFFERENT MODULES. ..............................................6-9 FIGURE 6.4. LOGIC OF SIMULTANEOUS CHANGE OF ACTIVE SETTING GROUPS IN MORE THAN ONE FUNCTION...610 FIGURE 6.5. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH INVERSE TIME. .........6-15 FIGURE 6.6. DYNAMIC RESET CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INVERSE TIME PROTECTION............................6-18 FIGURE 6.7. OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTIC OF THE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION..............................6-18 FIGURE 6.8. SET 1 MENU (PHASE OVERCURRENT).....................................................................6-19 FIGURE 6.9. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE.................6-23 FIGURE 6.10. SET 1 MENU (EARTH OVERCURRENT). .................................................................6-27 FIGURE 6.11. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. ......................6-30 FIGURE 6.12. FAULTS BETWEEN PHASES IN A NETWORK WITH SELF-PRODUCERS. ................................6-31 FIGURE 6.13. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. .........................................6-32 FIGURE 6.14. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (DIRECTIONAL PHASE). ....................................................6-33 FIGURE 6.15. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE (VERSION I AND C). ..........................................................................................................6-35 FIGURE 6.16. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE (VERSION S)....................................................................................................................6-35 FIGURE 6.17. PHASE-TO-EARTH FAULTS IN A DISTRIBUTION NETWORK. ..........................................6-36 FIGURE 6.18.OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTIC OF THE EARHT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION.....................6-37 FIGURE 6.19. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (DIRECTIONAL EARTH).....................................................6-39 FIGURE 6.20. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE (VERSIONS I AND C). .........................................................................................................6-41 FIGURE 6.21. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE (VERSION S)....................................................................................................................6-41 FIGURE 6.22. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (2ND PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION). ...................6-43 FIGURE 6.23. LOGICCAL DIAGRAM OF THE SECOND PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. .6-45 FIGURE 6.24. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (2ND EARTH OVERCURRENT). .............................................6-47 FIGURE 6.25. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE SECOND EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. ..............6-49 FIGURE 6.26. RESISTIVE EARTH PROTECTION CHARACTERISTIC. ...................................................6-51 FIGURE 6.27. SET 1MENU (RESISTIVE EARTH)..........................................................................6-52 FIGURE 6.28. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE RESISTIVE EARTH PROTECTION MODULE.................................6-53 FIGURE 6.29. SET 1 MENU (PHASE OVERVOLTAGE)...................................................................6-55 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xv FIGURE 6.30. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE PHASES OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION MODULE. ........................6-57 FIGURE 6.31. SET 1 MENU (EARTH OVERVOLTAGE). .................................................................6-59 FIGURE 6.32. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION MODULE. .............6-61 FIGURE 6.33. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE). ................................................6-63 FIGURE 6.34. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE PHASES UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION MODULE. ......................6-66 FIGURE 6.35. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (FREQUENCY)................................................................6-69 FIGURE 6.36. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION MODULE. .6-72 FIGURE 6.37. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (PHASE BALANCE). .........................................................6-75 FIGURE 6.38. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. ..........6-78 FIGURE 6.39. TRIP CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OVERLOAD PROTECTION...........................................6-80 FIGURE 6.40. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (OVERLOAD).................................................................6-81 FIGURE 6.41. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE OVERLOAD PROTECTION MODULE........................................6-83 FIGURE 6.42. AUTOMATIC RECLOSING OPERATION SEQUENCE. ....................................................6-86 FIGURE 6.43. SUCCESSFUL FAST RECLOSING............................................................................6-87 FIGURE 6.44. UNSUCCESSFUL FAST RECLOSING........................................................................6-87 FIGURE 6.45. UNSUCCESSFUL FAST RECLOSING FOLLOWED BY SECOND SUCCESSFUL RECLOSING. ............6-88 FIGURE 6.46. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (RECLOSING).................................................................6-89 FIGURE 6.47. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF AUTOMATIC RECLOSING......................................................6-91 FIGURE 6.48. OPERATION EXAMPLE (SYNCHRONISM CONDITIONS FULFILLED). ...................................6-94 FIGURE 6.49. OPERATION EXAMPLE (SYNCHRONISM CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED). .............................6-94 FIGURE 6.50. OPERATION EXAMPLE (SYNCHRONISM CONDITIONS PRESENT DURING THE COMMAND TIME)..6-94 FIGURE 6.51. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (SYNCHRONISM CHECK). ..................................................6-97 FIGURE 6.52. PART 1 OF THE LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK MODULE......6101 FIGURE 6.53. PART 2 OF THE LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK MODULE......6102 FIGURE 6.54. UNITS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE INSERTED ON THE VOLTAGE RESTORATION.................6-103 FIGURE 6.55. TIME DIAGRAM OF VOLTAGE RESTORATION. .......................................................6-104 FIGURE 6.56. SEQUENCE OF THE LOAD SHEDDING AND VOLTAGE RESTORATION OPERATION. .............6-105 FIGURE 6.57. SET 1 MENU (LOAD SHEDDING/ VOLTAGE RESTORATION). ....................................6-106 FIGURE 6.58. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF VOLTAGE RESTORATION. ......................................................6-107 FIGURE 6.59. UNITS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE INSERTED ON THE FREQUENCY RESTORATION..............6-108 FIGURE 6.60. FREQUENCY RESTORATION TIME DIAGRAM. .........................................................6-109 FIGURE 6.61. OPERATION SEQUENCE OF THE FREQUENCY SHEDDING AND RESTORATION. ..................6-110 FIGURE 6.62. SET 1 MENU ( FREQUENCY SHEDDING / RESTORATION). ........................................6-111 FIGURE 6.63. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE FREQUENCY RESTORATION...............................................6-112 FIGURE 6.64. VOLTAGE CENTRALISED RESTORATION FUNCTIONING. ...........................................6-113 FIGURE 6.65. OPERATION SEQUENCE OF LOAD SHEDDING AND VOLTAGE CENTRALISED RESTORATION..6-114 FIGURE 6.66. SET MENU 1 (LOAD SHEDDING/VOLTAGE RESTORATION). ......................................6-115 FIGURE 6.67. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE VOLTAGE CENTRALISED RESTORATION. ...............................6-117 FIGURE 6.68. FREQUENCY CENTRALISED RESTORATION FUNCTIONING. ........................................6-118 FIGURE 6.69. OPERATION SEQUENCE OF THE LOAD SHEDDING AND FREQUENCY CENTRALISED RESTORATION. ................................................................................................................................6-119 FIGURE 6.70. SETTING GROUP MENU 1 (LOAD SHEDDING/FREQUENCY RESTORATION).....................6-120 FIGURE 6.71. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION. ............................6-122 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xvi FIGURE 6.72. FAULT ELIMINATION ON THE BUS-BAR................................................................6-123 FIGURE 6.73. FAUTL ELIMINATION ON AN OUTPUT (LOGIC SELECTIVITY)........................................6-124 FIGURE 6.74. FAULT LOCATOR MENU.................................................................................6-126 FIGURE 6.75. PARAMETERS MENU (LINE). ............................................................................6-127 FIGURE 6.76. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE FAULT LOCATOR MODULE................................................6-128 FIGURE 6.77. TIME DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE OPERATION........................................6-129 FIGURE 6.78. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE). ...........................................6-130 FIGURE 6.79. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE MODULE. ...............................6-132 FIGURE 6.80. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION. ............................................................................6-133 FIGURE 6.81. TIME DIAGRAM OF THE TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION OPERATION..................................6-133 FIGURE 6.82. SUBSTATION TOPOLOGY WITH BYPASS BUSBAR. .....................................................6-135 FIGURE 6.83. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (PROTECTION TRIP TRANSFER).........................................6-136 FIGURE 6.84. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE PROTECTION TRIP TRANSFER MODULE.................................6-137 FIGURE 6.85. TIME DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION OPERATION. ..................................6-138 FIGURE 6.86. TIME DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SPRING SUPERVISION OPERATION. ...................6-139 FIGURE 6.87. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (CIRCUIT BREAKER).......................................................6-140 FIGURE 6.88. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT-BREAKER MODULE (OPENING COMMANDS).................6-144 FIGURE 6.89. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT-BREAKER MODULE (STATE)....................................6-145 FIGURE 6.90. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT-BREAKER MODULE (POSITION). ...............................6-146 FIGURE 6.91. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE CIRCUIT-BREAKER MODULE (CLOSING COMMANDS). ................6-147 FIGURE 6.92. LINE BAY CONFIGURATION. .............................................................................6-148 FIGURE 6.93. TIME DIAGRAM OF DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION OPERATION. ...................................6-149 FIGURE 6.94. SETTING GROUP 1 MENU (INSULATION DISCONNECTOR). ........................................6-150 FIGURE 6.95. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE EARTH DISCONNECTOR MODULE (COMMANDS). .................6-153 FIGURE 6.96. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE EARTH DISCONNECTOR MODULE (STATE)..........................6-154 FIGURE 6.97. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE INSULATION DISCONNECTOR MODULE (COMMANDS)............6-155 FIGURE 6.98. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE INSULATION DISCONNECTOR MODULE (STATE). ..................6-156 FIGURE 6.99. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BYPASS DISCONNECTOR MODULE (COMMANDS)..................6-157 FIGURE 6.100. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BYPASS DISCONNECTOR MODULE (STATE). ......................6-158 FIGURE 6.101. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR MODULE (COMMANDS). ..............6-159 FIGURE 6.102. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR MODULE (STATE).......................6-160 FIGURE 6.103. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR 1 MODULE (COMMANDS). ...........6-161 FIGURE 6.104. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR 1 MODULE (STATE)....................6-162 FIGURE 6.105. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR 2 MODULE (COMMANDS). ...........6-163 FIGURE 6.106. LOGICAL DIAGRAM OF THE BUSBAR DISCONNECTOR 2 MODULE (STATE)....................6-164 FIGURE 7.1. DISPLAY MEASURES MENU....................................................................................7-4 FIGURE 7.2. INFORMATION MENU – CIRCUIT BREAKER. ................................................................7-5 FIGURE 7.3. INFORMATION MENU – DISCONNECTOR. ..................................................................7-6 FIGURE 7.4. MEASURES MENU...............................................................................................7-6 FIGURE 7.5. CLEAR INFORMATION MENU – CIRCUIT BREAKER. .......................................................7-7 FIGURE 7.6. CLEAR INFORMATION MENU – DISCONNECTOR. .........................................................7-7 FIGURE 7.7. WINREPORTS – MEASURES WINDOW........................................................................7-8 FIGURE 7.8. WINREPORTS – MEASURES CHANGE WINDOW............................................................7-9 FIGURE 7.9. FILE EXPORTED FROM MEASURES RECORD.................................................................7-9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xvii FIGURE 7.10. VISUALIZATION OF EVENT LOGGING. ...................................................................7-10 FIGURE 7.11. WINREPORTS – LIST OF EVENTS LOGS. .................................................................7-11 FIGURE 7.12. WINREPORTS – VISUALISATION OF THE EVENTS LOGS. ..............................................7-12 FIGURE 7.13. WINREPORTS – CLEAR LOAD LOGS. ....................................................................7-12 FIGURE 7.14. FILE EXPORTED FROM THE EVENT LOG..................................................................7-13 FIGURE 7.15. VISUALIZATION OF FAULT LOCATOR....................................................................7-14 FIGURE 7.16. WINREPORTS FAULT LOCATOR WINDOW. .............................................................7-15 FIGURE 7.17. WINREPORTS – CLEAR FAULT LOCATOR...............................................................7-16 FIGURE 7.18. FILE EXPORTED FROM THE FAULT LOCATOR LOG. ....................................................7-16 FIGURE 7.19. VISUALIZATION OF THE LOAD DIAGRAM IN THE LOCAL INTERFACE. ..............................7-17 FIGURE 7.20. WINREPORTS – LOAD DIAGRAMS LIST. ................................................................7-18 FIGURE 7.21. WINREPORTS – VISUALIZATION OF THE LOAD DIAGRAMS. .........................................7-19 FIGURE 7.22. WINREPORTS – CLEAR LOAD DIAGRAMS. .............................................................7-19 FIGURE 7.23. FILE EXPORTED FROM THE LOAD DIAGRAM LOG......................................................7-20 FIGURE 7.24. WINREPORTS – OSCILLOGRAPHIES LIST. ...............................................................7-22 FIGURE 7.25. WINREPORTS – VISUALIZATION OF OSCILLOGRAPHIES...............................................7-23 FIGURE 7.26. WINREPORTS – CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHIES. ............................................................7-23 FIGURE 7.27. FILES EXPORTED IN COMTRADE FORMAT FROM THE OSCILLOGRAPHY LOG ...................7-24 FIGURE 7.28. HARDWARE INFORMATION LOG INTERFACE............................................................7-26 FIGURE 7.29. FILE EXPORTED FROM THE HARDWARE INFORMATION LOG .........................................7-27 FIGURE 7.30. POSSIBLE ASPECT OF THE LOCAL MODE/REMOTE MODE LEDS. ..................................7-28 FIGURE 7.31. POSSIBLE ASPECT OF THE MANUAL MODE/AUTOMATIC MODE LEDS............................7-28 FIGURE 7.32. EXAMPLE MIMIC. ...........................................................................................7-29 FIGURE 7.33. CIRCUIT-BREAKER STATE ASPECTS: OPEN/CLOSED/UNDEFINED..................................7-29 FIGURE 7.34. CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION ASPECTS: EXTRACTED/INSERTED/UNDEFINED POSITION. ........7-30 FIGURE 7.35. DISCONNECTOR STATE ASPECTS: OPEN/CLOSED/UNDEFINED. ...................................7-30 FIGURE 7.36. COMMAND STATE ASPECTS: STATE 0 / STATE 1.....................................................7-30 FIGURE 7.37. MEASURE ASPECT. .........................................................................................7-31 FIGURE 7.38. PARAMETER STATE ASPECTS IN VISUALIZE MODE......................................................7-31 FIGURE 7.39. PARAMETER STATE ASPECT IN CHANGE MODE. .......................................................7-31 FIGURE 8.1. WINLOGIC – LOGICAL COMMANDS. ........................................................................8-9 FIGURE 9.1. SYSTEM MENU. .................................................................................................9-4 FIGURE 9.2. SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU................................................................................9-5 FIGURE 9.3. MASTER INFORMATION MENU. ..............................................................................9-5 FIGURE 9.4. EXCEPTION INFORMATION MENU – MASTER. .............................................................9-6 FIGURE 9.5. FRAME 1 MENU...............................................................................................9-7 FIGURE 9.6. INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS STATUS. ....................................................................9-7 FIGURE 9.7. CLEAR MEMORY LOGS MENU. ...............................................................................9-8 FIGURE 9.8. RESTORE DEFAULT PARAMETERS MENU....................................................................9-9 FIGURE 9.9. HARDWARE TEST MENU. ...................................................................................9-10 FIGURE 9.10. HARDWARE TEST MENU. .................................................................................9-10 FIGURE 9.11. CALIBRATION MENU. ......................................................................................9-11 FIGURE 9.12. LOCATION OF FUSES (FU4 AND FU5) IN THE I/O+ POWER SUPPLY BASE BOARD..............9-17 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xviii FIGURE 9.13. LOCATION OF FUSE (FU1) IN THE COMMUNICATIONS BOARD. .....................................9-18 FIGURE 9.14. LOCATION OF THE DIP-SWITCH (INT1) IN THE COMMUNICATIONS BOARD......................9-19 FIGURE 9.15. LOCATION OF THE JUMPERS IN THE ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD. ......................9-22 FIGURE 9.16. LOCATION OF THE JUMPERS IN THE PROCESSING BOARD.............................................9-24 FIGURE 9.17. LOCATION OF THE JUMPER IN THE PIGGY-BACK BOARD FOR OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE. .......9-25 FIGURE 9.18. LOCATION OF THE JUMPERS IN THE PIGGY-BACK BOARD FOR RS485 INTERFACE (REVISION A)..926 FIGURE 9.19. PHASE OVERCURRENT MENU – DEFAULT VALUES....................................................9-27 FIGURE 9.20. CONFIGURATION OF THE INPUTS/OUTPUTS BASE BOARD FOR CALIBRATION....................9-28 FIGURE 9.21. PHASES CALIBRATION. ....................................................................................9-29 FIGURE 9.22. NEUTRAL CALIBRATION. ..................................................................................9-30 FIGURE 9.23. CALIBRATION MENU – DEFAULT CALIBRATION RESTORE. ..........................................9-31 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xix TABLES LIST TABLE 2.1. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION...................................................................................2-5 TABLE 2.2. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION. ..................................................................................2-6 TABLE 2.3. TYPES OF EXPANSION BOARDS...............................................................................2-20 TABLE 2.4. SOME CONFIGURATIONS FOR I/O BOARDS................................................................2-21 TABLE 2.5. RANGES OF OPERATING VOLTAGES FOR THE POWER SUPPLY. ..........................................2-24 TABLE 2.6. OPERATING VOLTAGES AND OPERATION SETS OF DIGITAL INPUTS.....................................2-24 TABLE 2.7. COMMAND BUTTONS OF THE LONWORKS NETWORK BOARD.........................................2-45 TABLE 2.8. LED OF THE LONWORKS NETWORK BOARD. ............................................................2-45 TABLE 2.9. LED OF THE ETHERNET NETWORK BOARD. ..............................................................2-46 TABLE 2.10. PIN ALLOCATION TO RS485 SERIAL PORTS. ...........................................................2-48 TABLE 2.11. PIN ALLOCATION TO RS232 SERIAL PORTS. ...........................................................2-48 TABLE 2.12. PIN ALLOCATION TO SERIAL PORTS. ......................................................................2-49 TABLE 4.1. TIME PARAMETERS...............................................................................................4-6 TABLE 4.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE TIME MODULE LOGICAL VARIABLES. ................................................4-7 TABLE 4.3. MEASUREMENT CONVERTERS PARAMETERS. ................................................................4-9 TABLE 4.4. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS MODULE.......4-9 TABLE 4.5. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS PARAMETERS (BASE BOARD). ..........................................4-18 TABLE 4.6. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS PARAMETERS (EXPANSION BOARDS 1 AND 2). .....................4-18 TABLE 4.7. COMPLEMENTARY INPUTS PARAMETERS. ..................................................................4-19 TABLE 4.8. LOGICAL VARIABLE DESCRIPTION OF THE BASE BOARD MODULE. ......................................4-19 TABLE 4.9. LOGICAL VARIABLE DESCRIPTION OF THE EXPANSION BOARD1 MODULE. ............................4-19 TABLE 4.10. LOGICAL VARIABLE DESCRIPTION OF THE EXPANSION BOARD 2 MODULE. .........................4-20 TABLE 4.11. DISPLAY PARAMETERS. .....................................................................................4-29 TABLE 4.12. ALARMS PAGE PARAMETERS. ..............................................................................4-29 TABLE 4.13. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE ALARMS MODULE.........................................4-30 TABLE 4.14. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE AUXILIARY LOGIC MODULE 1. ..........................4-41 TABLE 4.15. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE AUXILIARY LOGIC MODULE 2. ..........................4-41 TABLE 4.16. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE TIME DELAY MODULE.....................................4-41 TABLE 4.17. OPERATION MODES PARAMETERS.........................................................................4-43 TABLE 4.18. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATION MODES MODULE. ..........................4-44 TABLE 4.19. OSCILLOGRAPHY PARAMETERS. ...........................................................................4-51 TABLE 4.20. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE OSCILLOGRAPHY MODULE...............................4-52 TABLE 5.1. SERIAL COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS. ....................................................................5-4 TABLE 5.2. ETHERNET PARAMETERS........................................................................................5-6 TABLE 5.3. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES IN THE ETHERNET MODULE. ................................5-7 TABLE 5.4. LIST OF CAUSES ................................................................................................5-12 TABLE 5.5. LONWORKS PROTOCOL PARAMETERS......................................................................5-18 TABLE 5.6. PARAMETERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DISTRIBUTED DATABASE.........................................5-22 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xx TABLE 5.7. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE LONWORKS MODULE. ............................5-24 TABLE 5.8. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS. .......................................................................5-32 TABLE 5.9. LIST OF CAUSES. ...............................................................................................5-35 TABLE 5.10. IEC60870-5-104 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS. ......................................................5-41 TABLE 5.11. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE IEC104 MODULE. .......................................5-42 TABLE 5.12. ETHERNET DISTRIBUTED DATABASE PARAMETERS. .....................................................5-46 TABLE 5.13. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE LONWORKS MODULE. ..........................5-48 TABLE 5.14. IEC61850 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS. ..................................................................5-53 TABLE 5.15. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE IEC61850 MODULE. ...................................5-55 TABLE 5.16. CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE OF THE SNTP PROTOCOL. ...............................................5-57 TABLE 5.17. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE ETHERNET MODULE ASSOCIATED WITH THE SNTP PROTOCOL.....................................................................................................................5-57 TABLE 6.1. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES COMMON TO THE DIFFERENT MODULES. .................6-8 TABLE 6.2. CONSTANTS OF THE INVERSE TIME CURVES ACCORDING TO STANDARD IEC 60255-3.........6-12 TABLE 6.3. CONSTANTS OF THE INVERSE TIME CURVES ACCORDING TO STANDARD IEEE 37.112. .........6-12 TABLE 6.4. PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .............................................6-20 TABLE 6.5. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. .......................................................................................................................6-21 TABLE 6.6. EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .....................................................6-28 TABLE 6.7. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE...629 TABLE 6.8. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. ...........................6-33 TABLE 6.9. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. ......................................................................................................6-34 TABLE 6.10. DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .........................6-39 TABLE 6.11. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. ......................................................................................................6-40 TABLE 6.12. PARAMETERS OF THE SECOND PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION. ......................6-43 TABLE 6.13. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE SECOND PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. .......................................................................................................................6-44 TABLE 6.14. SECOND EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. ........................................6-47 TABLE 6.15. LOGIC VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE SECOND EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. .648 TABLE 6.16. RESISTIVE EARTH PROTECTION PARAMETERS...........................................................6-52 TABLE 6.17. DESCRIPTION OF LOGIC VARIABLES OF THE RESISTIVE EARTH PROTECTION MODULE. ...........6-53 TABLE 6.18. PHASES OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION PARAMETERS. ..................................................6-55 TABLE 6.19. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE PHASES OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION MODULE......6-56 TABLE 6.20. ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .......................................6-59 TABLE 6.21. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE ZERO SEQUENCE PROTECTION MODULE..............6-60 TABLE 6.22. PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION PARAMETERS. ..................................................6-64 TABLE 6.23. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION MODULE. ..................................................................................................................................6-64 TABLE 6.24. UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION PARAMETERS. ...........................6-69 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xxi TABLE 6.25. LOGIC VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION MODULE. .......................................................................................................................6-70 TABLE 6.26. PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .......................................6-76 TABLE 6.27. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODULE. .......................................................................................................................6-76 TABLE 6.28.OVERLOAD PROTECTION PARAMETERS. .................................................................6-81 TABLE 6.29. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE OVERLOAD PROTECTION MODULE. ...................6-82 TABLE 6.30. AUTOMATIC RECLOSING PARAMETERS. .................................................................6-89 TABLE 6.31. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE AUTOMATIC RECLOSING MODULE. ..........6-90 TABLE 6.32. NECESSARY CONDITIONS FOR EACH TYPE OF SYNCHRONISM. .......................................6-93 TABLE 6.33. SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETERS.....................................6-97 TABLE 6.34. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK MODULE. ...6-98 TABLE 6.35. VOLTAGE RESTORATION PARAMETERS.................................................................6-106 TABLE 6.36. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE VOLTAGE RESTORATION MODULE...................6-106 TABLE 6.37. FREQUENCY RESTORATION PARAMETERS..............................................................6-111 TABLE 6.38. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE FREQUENCY RESTORATION MODULE................6-111 TABLE 6.39. CENTRALISED VOLTAGE RESTORATION. ..............................................................6-115 TABLE 6.40. LOGICAL VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE CENTRALISED VOLTAGE RESTORATION MODULE. 6-116 TABLE 6.41. CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION PARAMETERS............................................6-120 TABLE 6.42. LOGIC VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION. ...........6-121 TABLE 6.43. PRE-SELECTION OF LOOPS DEPENDING ON THE FAULT PHASES. ...................................6-125 TABLE 6.44. FAULT LOCATOR PARAMETERS..........................................................................6-127 TABLE 6.45. LINE PARAMETERS. ........................................................................................6-127 TABLE 6.46. LOGIC VARIABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE FAULT LOCATOR MODULE...............................6-128 TABLE 6.47. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PARAMETERS. .............................................................6-130 TABLE 6.48. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE MODULE.......6-131 TABLE 6.49. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION PARAMETERS..............................................................6-134 TABLE 6.50. PROTECTION TRIP TRANSFER PARAMETERS. ..........................................................6-136 TABLE 6.51. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE PROTECTION TRIP TRANSFER MODULE. ..6-136 TABLE 6.52. CIRCUIT BREAKER MANOEUVRES SUPERVISION PARAMETERS. .....................................6-140 TABLE 6.53. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION MODULE. 6-141 TABLE 6.54. DISCONNECTORS MANOEUVRES SUPERVISION PARAMETERS.......................................6-150 TABLE 6.55. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGICAL VARIABLES OF THE INSULATION DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION MODULE. .....................................................................................................................6-151 TABLE 9.1. POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE COMMUNICATIONS BOARD. ....................................9-19 TABLE 9.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE DIFFERENT JUMPERS OF THE ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD. .......9-20 TABLE 9.3. POSSIBLE HARDWARE DEFAULT OPERATION MODES FOR TRANSCEIVERS TP1AND FO1...........9-21 TABLE 9.4. POSSIBLE HARDWARE DEFAULT OPERATION MODES FOR TRANSCEIVERS TP2 AND FO2. .........9-21 TABLE 9.5. POSSIBLE HARDWARE DEFAULT OPERATION MODES FOR TRANSCEIVERS TP1, TP2, FO1 AND FO2. ..................................................................................................................................9-22 TABLE 9.6. DESCRIPTION OF THE DIFFERENT JUMPERS OF THE PROCESSING BOARD. .............................9-23 TABLE 9.7. DESCRIPTION OF THE DIFFERENT JUMPERS OF THE PIGGY-BACK BOARD FOR OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE. ....................................................................................................................9-25 TABLE 9.8. DESCRIPTION OF THE JUMPERS OF THE PIGGY-BACK BOARD FOR RS485 INTERFACE. ............9-26 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xxii TABLE 9.9. PHASES CALIBRATION VALUES. .............................................................................9-29 TABLE 9.10. NEUTRAL CALIBRATION VALUES..........................................................................9-30 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 xxiii 1 Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION In this chapter it is introduced the TPU S420, a Medium Voltage feeder protection and control unit. There are presented the product main characteristics and its range of application. It is also made a brief description of the several functionalities and it is presented its operation basic principle. Chapter 1 - Introduction TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1.1. APPLICATION..........................................................................................................1-3 1.2. VERSIONS ..............................................................................................................1-4 1.3. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................1-5 1.4. FUNCTIONALITIES.....................................................................................................1-7 1.5. OPERATION PRINCIPLE.............................................................................................1-13 Total of pages of the chapter: 15 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-2 Chapter 1 - Introduction 1.1. APPLICATION TPU S420 was designed as a protection and terminal unit for supervision and control of aerial lines and underground cables in radial electric networks with isolated, compensated, solid or with limiting impedance neutral connection. It can also be used on the connection to small power producers. Besides these applications, the TPU S420 can be used as a reserve protection of others equipments, such as transformers and High Voltage lines. TPU S420 performs a wide range of automation and protection functions. It has an extensive range of user programming options, offering a high accuracy of regulation on the currents, voltages, temporisations and optional characteristics. All protection and automation settings are independent among themselves, having four sets of parameterizations for each function. The possibility to define logical interlockings to complement the existing protection and control functions, and the possibility to chose, besides the default options lists, of inputs, outputs and alarms with attributable logical mean add an additional configuration facility of the protection, that can be used to adapt it to the user needs. The TPU S420 local interface integrates a graphic display where it is presented a synoptic with the state of all devices as well as its respective measurements. This synoptic is totally defined by the user, which allows adjusting it to the specific configuration of the panel where the protection is installed. On the front panel there are also several functional keys that enable an easier operation of the protection for the most frequent exploitation situations. As a terminal unit, the TPU S420 does accurate measurements of all values of a line related with currents, voltages, power values, power factors, energy and frequency, and several faults monitoring functions, including Oscillography and Event Chronological Log. The ability to do complete monitoring of a panel analogue values and digital states allow the TPU S420 to be integrated as Remote Unit in Efacec’ Supervision Command and Control Systems. For that purpose an optical fibre interface is available that ensures the horizontal communication between different units on the local area network (LAN). Simultaneously, three serial ports are offered to a PC connection. Together with the TPU S420 is supplied an integrated software package for PC interface with the protection– WinProt – either locally or through the local communication network. This application enables, among others functionalities, the access and changing of all relay settings and configurations and also the gathering and detailed analysis of the produced logs. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-3 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction 1.2. VERSIONS There are three different versions of TPU S420 that offers the user the flexibility to choose the suitable relay for to each case. The product basic version is the TPU S420-I, and it has as main functionalities the Directional Overcurrent Protections, of Phase and Earth Faults, and the automatic Reclosing automatism. Its natural application will be for a protection of Medium Voltage outputs. It can also be used as a reserve on other equipments protection. The TPU S420-C is based on the version I but adding the possibility of doing Load Shedding/ Restoration for Undervoltage and Underfrequency. These automatisms are based on the interaction of the LAN with a protection unit and bus-bar control, the TPU S420, not requiring protection voltage and frequency functions. At last, the TPU S420-S is the complete version for the aerial or underground lines protection, including the Phase Balance Protection for the detection of broken conductors, and a second Overcurrent Protection function with only a definite/ inverse universal stage, which performs four stages of overcurrent for phase and earth faults. About the automatisms, additionally to version I, it has the Over and Undervoltage Protections, the Over and Underfrequency, the associated Voltage and Frequency Restoration and the Synchronism Check and Voltage Presence. On the Annex A. - Ordering Form the two different versions of the TPU S420 can be compared concerning the executed functions. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-4 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction 1.3. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS The feeder protection and control unit TPU S420 belongs to Efacec’s TPU x420 digital technology protections family. All protections which are part of this family are characterised by a similar set of functionalities and they are based on a common platform which enables uniform and highly integrated solutions for the protection and automation of substations in power systems. Powerful modular architecture, constituted by a processing board with three 32 bit microcontrollers. Acquisition up to a maximum of 8 analogue values with 12 bit digital conversion at a rate of 40 samples per cycle (sampling frequency of 2 kHz for a nominal frequency of 50 Hz). High number of digital inputs and outputs for complete acquisition of all panel and equipment status and for the commands execution over circuit-breakers or other indications, respectively. Integration of a vast set of protection, control and monitoring functions, appropriate to each application, covering the most common situations of usage. Modular structure and object-oriented of the different sets of parameters and protection configurations. 4 sets of independent parameters for each protection and automation function, interchangeable by specific logic or user’s command. Possibility of changing the automation logic programmed by default for the implementation of interlockings and other logic conditions, additional to the protection and control functions. Graphic editor of programmable logic and associated descriptions with the possibility of editing, configuring, testing and printing of logic directly from the diagram over the logic gates. Easy and accessible visualization, changing and automation logic testing, directly from the graphic editor of logic gates which constitute the different functions. Easiness of recording and/ or updating the protection firmware. Usage of high ability flash memory, for non-volatile storage of all protection parameters and configurations, as well as all the logs resulting from its application. Logs of the currents and voltages oscillographies with a sampling frequency of 20 samples per cycle and up to 40 digital channels, with a total storage capacity of almost one and a half minute. Events log with the selection of logical variables and its descriptions editable by the user, dated with a precision of one millisecond. Real-time clock with own battery, with the possibility of time synchronization through the local area network interface or by the SNTP protocol. Possibility of configuring the regional time parameters associated to the country or zone of the globe where the protection is installed. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-5 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction Sophisticated local interface, constituted by a graphic display, alarms with user-settable logic meaning and functional keys for an easier protection operation. Possibility of editing the synoptic presented on the frontal panel’s display, with the representation of the equipment and measurement status. Interface by optic fibre or copper in LonWorks or Ethernet architectures for complete integration in Efacec SCADA systems, with simple configuration of digital and analogue information reporting to the Control Centre. Piggy-back interfaces type supported by the CPU board, in optical fibre, RS232 or RS485 to support the DNP 3.0 Serial protocol. Horizontal communication of logic information and another type of information among different units in the same local area network, for the implementation of complex automatisms, totally programmable by the user. A frontal serial port and two back serial ports for communicating with a PC. Availability of a specific interface application for PC - WinProt - with parameterization functions, configuration and protection logs reading functions, communicating by serial port or through the local area network. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-6 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction 1.4. FUNCTIONALITIES 1 Phase Overcurrent Protection High stage zone with high-speed trip to rapidly eliminate violent faults. Temporized low stage zone, of definite or inverse time, prepared for chronometric coordination with other protection elements. Inverse time features according to IEC and IEEE standards. Optional dynamic reset when the inverse time option is selected. Third extended range definite time stage setting, complementing the two previous stages. Working in parallel (full scheme) of the 9 virtual relays (3 per phase). Configured directionality for each one of the stages independently. Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Same number of stages and similar characteristics as the Phase Overcurrent Protection. Independent settings from those used for phase faults protection. Parallel functioning (full scheme) of the 3 virtual relays. Residual current obtained from the internal sum of the three phase currents or directly from the fourth current input. Possibility of configuring each one of the protection stages against earth faults to optionally work with the sum of the three currents obtained internally or with the current observed on the forth current input. Directionality configured for each one of the stages independently. Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Interaction with the Phase Overcurrent Protection. Directionality activation and selection of the operation direction for each stage independently. Operational characteristic associated to polarization voltages that ensure the sensitivity maximization and operation of the function for all types of phase faults. Pre-fault polarization voltages memorization in case of their annulment. Possibility of defining the function behaviour, by stage, after the memory time exhausts. Directional Earth Protection Interaction with Earth Overcurrent protection. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-7 Chapter 1 - Introduction Directionality activation and selection of operation direction for each stage independently. Possibility of configuring each one of the Directional protection stages to optionally work with the sum of the three currents obtained internally or with the current observed on the fourth current input. Operational characteristic ensuring the direction discrimination for phase-to-earth faults in any neutral system. Zero sequence voltage using as a polarization value. Possibility of defining the function behaviour, by stage, in case of annulment of the polarization voltage value. Second Phase Overcurrent Protection Additional stage of temporized low threshold, of definite or inverse time, according with the same standards that the main Overcurrent function. Directionality criteria similar to what was configured for the third stage of the Phase Overcurrent protection. Second Earth Overcurrent Protection Additional stage of temporized low threshold, of definite or inverse time, according with the same standards that the main Overcurrent function. Using, optionally, the sum of the three currents obtained internally or from the current observed on the fourth current input. Directionality criteria similar to what was configured for the third stage of the Earth Overcurrent protection. Resistive Earth Fault Protection Independent functioning and regulation from those from the Overcurrent protection against earth faults. Inverse time feature in agreement with the EPATR standard, presenting high sensitivity to eliminate very resistive earth faults. Actuation according with the residual current observed on the fourth current input. Automatic calibration to compensate the measurements faults on the residual current , in case of Holmgreen assembly. Phase Overvoltage Protection Two independent stages of definite time. Phase-to-phase voltages using, calculated from the earth-to-phase voltages observed on the analogue inputs. Working in parallel (full scheme) of the 6 virtual relays (2 per each couple of voltages). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-8 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection Two independent definite time stages. Calculation of the residual voltage in the line from the earth-to-phase voltages observed on the analogue inputs. Working in parallel (full scheme) of the 2 virtual relays. Phase Undervoltage Protection Two independent definite time stages. Phase-to-phase voltages using, calculated from the earth-to-phase voltages observed on the analogue inputs. Working in parallel (full scheme) of the 6 virtual relays (2 per each couple of voltages). Possibility of three-phase actuation for both stages. Possibility of function additional locking configuration by checking the voltage value of the current phases. Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection Two independent stages of Underfrequency. Configuration possibility of one of Underfrequency stages as a virtual relay of negative frequency variation rate. Two independent Overfrequency stages. Configuration possibility of one of the Overfrequency stages as a relay of positive frequency variation rate. Frequency measurement accuracy for all settings range. Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection High threshold with an instantaneous trip to rapidly eliminate violent faults. Temporized low threshold stage, of definite or inverse time, prepared for chronometric coordination with other protection elements. Inverse time characteristics according with the IEC and IEEE standards. Dynamic reset, when the inverse time option is selected. Definite time third stage, working using the components reason of inverse sequence and direct from the currents. Third stage, of definite time, which operation depends on the current inverse and direct sequence components. Functioning in parallel (full scheme) of the 3 virtual relays. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-9 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction Overload Protection Trip curves according with the IEC 60255-8 standard, replying the dynamic behaviour of the evolution of the conductors’ temperature. 1 Calculation of the effect of the pre-overload current on the moment of the function trip. Alarm levels and reset configurable by the user according the trip level. Possibility of choosing the protection operation according the average or maximum value of the image of the calculated temperature for each one of the phases. Automatic Reclosing Up to 5 reclosing cycles, with independent parameterizations per cycle. Fast and slow reclosing, parameterized per cycle. Circuit-breaker switching monitoring, after opening and closing commands. Indication of the available definite trip. Indication of the available definite trip. Possibility of a trip time definition of fast reclosing, in order to avoid switching actions due to short-time transients. Possibility of configuring the specific conditions of start-up through the programmable logic. Synchronism Checking and Voltage Presence Possibility of selecting the voltage sign to compare among one of the phase-to-phase or earth-to-phase voltages. Independent activation of the closing permission by Synchronism Check (LLLB) and for Voltage Presence Check (for LLDB, DLLB, DLDB conditions). Voltage maximum value and thresholds associated to the presence or absence of userregulated voltages. Independent configurations for manual commands or commands generated by Automatic Reclosing. Synchronism conditions detection by checking the amplitude, phase and frequency differences of the voltage signs. Stability confirmation time of the configurable synchronism conditions. Voltage Restoration Load restoration after the voltage trip. Associated to the Undervoltage protection. Possibility of a delay time definition, after the confirmation time of stable voltage. Possibility of configuring the specific conditions of restoration through the programmable logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-10 Chapter 1 - Introduction Frequency Restoration Load restoration after frequency trip. Associated to the Underfrequency protection. 1 Possibility of definition of a delay time, after the confirmation time of stable frequency. Possibility of configuring the specific conditions of restoration through the programmable logic. Voltage Centralised Restoration Available only on the version C. It requires the existence of a bus-bar protection unit, TPU B420. Interaction with the TPU B420 through the communication network. Possibility of configuring the specific conditions of restoration through the programmable logic. Frequency Centralised Restoration Available only in version C. It requires the existence of a bus-bar protection unit, TPU B420. Available only in the version C. It requires the existence of a bus-bar protection unit, TPU B420. Interaction with the TPU B420 through the communication network. Possibility of configuration of the specific conditions of restoration through the programmable logic. Logical Trip Lock High speeding of the reserve Overcurrent protection of the downstream protections. A specific input is available for logic interlocking. Fault Locator Possibility of configuring the function start-up conditions, either for faults eliminated by the protection itself as by other network protections. Logging of the fault distance and the associated loop for the last 10 eliminated faults. Presentation of the distance calculated in ohm, kilometres (or miles) and percentage of the line total length. Independent functioning concerning to the Overcurrent Protection. Circuit-Breaker Failure Reset supervision of the protection functions after the trip command. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-11 Chapter 1 - Introduction Trip Circuit Supervision Specific inputs available for the surveillance of the trip circuit continuity of the circuit-breaker coil. Interaction with the Circuit-breaker protection, for its immediate trip in case of detecting circuit damage after trip of any protection function. Protections Transfer Transfer of the opening circuit-breaker command by protection functions operation, in case of bypass disconnector closing or user command. Circuit-Breaker Switching Supervision Circuit-breaker opening and closing times supervision. Circuit-breaker spring supervision. Counting of the circuit breaker opening switch actions. Sum of the square currents switched off by each circuit-breaker pole supervision. Disconnectors Switching Supervision Available for a maximum of 6 disconnectors. Supervision of the disconnector opening and closing times. Opening switch actions counting for each disconnector. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-12 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction 1.5. OPERATION PRINCIPLE TPU S420 presents hardware architecture prepared for the digital processing of the analogue inputs and for the implementation of several protection algorithms, with the correspondent actuation by means of binary outputs. The equipment basic internal configuration is shown in Figure 1.1. Figure 1.1. TPU S420 hardware structure. The acquisition and analogue/ digital conversion system guarantees the protection galvanic insulation toward the exterior. It also guarantees the conditioning of the available input signs concerning the admissible levels by the internal electronics, as well as the filtering and sampling of signals for subsequent treatment by protection and measurement algorithms. In each input there a measurement transformer which assures both first aforementioned objectives. For the current inputs, an additional sampling resistance allows to get an equivalent voltage signal. After TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-13 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction that there is a low-pass analogue filter dimensioned in order to have the adequate bandwidth for the protection algorithms. TPU S420 has 4 current analogue inputs and 4 voltage analogue inputs. Three of the current inputs are used to phase currents measurements. The fourth current input is intended to the output residual current measurement, being obtained through the direct connection to a toroidal transformer or through the Holmgreen assembly, that is, through the sum by hardware of the phase currents. The three voltage inputs are intended to phase-to-earth voltages measurement, being the residual voltage obtained by internal calculation on the TPU S420. The fourth voltage input can be used to do the surveillance of an extra voltage, for example for logical interlockings. The different channels are multiplexed and sampled at a frequency of 40 samples per cycle. Then, a first digital filter that corresponds to the average of each pair of subsequent samples, from which a 20 sample set per cycle is obtained for the protection and measurement functions, as well as for the oscillography. From these samples the fundamental component values from the different channel phasors are obtained, by using adequate estimation algorithms which remove the other harmonic and transient components that are present on the signals (Figure 1.2). From the different sampled phasor values other relevant measures are calculated, be it specific characteristics of those signs (their amplitude, for example), or measures derived from them, such as the respective symmetric components, the frequency, the currents, etc. these measures are calculated regularly to be used in protection and measuring algorithms. They are compared with thresholds and other characteristics defined by the user and timeouts are set after some of those conditions are checked. Figure 1.2. Sampling and filtering of analogue digital signals. The central processing system is also responsible for the management of other protection interfaces with the exterior, particularly the digital inputs and outputs and the local and remote human-machine interface. It is also responsible for the management of several system resources and of all information obtained. The digital inputs are sampled every millisecond and submitted to a filtering process to eliminate transitions due to noise. The digital outputs are changed by certain events internal to the protection, such as a circuit-breaker opening instruction by some protection function. The human-machine interface management includes the display and alarms refreshment on the local interface, the communication by the serial ports and the communication through the local area network with the SCADA system. Other executed functions are, for example, the inference of the automation logic as a result of the performance of the different functions and of the input status, as well as parameters and TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-14 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction other configurations updating. Finally, the logging of information related to occurred faults and memory management are also performed. 1 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 1-15 2 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION This chapter describes the construction, constitution and installation of the TPU S420. It describes its enclosure, constitution, assembly and connections, as well as the type of these connections. There is an indication concerning the type of conductors to be used and the procedures to make all connections properly. Chapter 2 - Installation TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.1. PRESENTATION AND DIMENSIONS..................................................................................2-3 2.1.1. Case .............................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2. Dimensions..................................................................................................................2-7 2.2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................2-8 2.2.1. General Description.....................................................................................................2-8 2.2.2. Board Description ........................................................................................................2-9 2.2.3. Configuration of the supply voltage and digital I/O................................................ 2-24 2.3. ASSEMBLY............................................................................................................2-25 2.3.1. Embedded assembly ................................................................................................ 2-25 2.3.2. Assembly in 19’’ rack ............................................................................................... 2-27 2.4. CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................2-29 2.4.1. Connectors description ............................................................................................ 2-31 2.4.2. Description of connector pins.................................................................................. 2-33 2.4.3. Wiring connections diagram .................................................................................... 2-36 2.4.4. Power Supply Connection ........................................................................................ 2-39 2.4.5. Current and voltage connections............................................................................. 2-40 2.4.6. Digital input and output connections ...................................................................... 2-43 2.4.7. Local network connections ...................................................................................... 2-44 2.4.8. Serial ports................................................................................................................ 2-47 2.4.9. Serial port of the Ethernet communication board ................................................... 2-49 Total of pages of the chapter: 49 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-2 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.1. PRESENTATION AND DIMENSIONS The TPU S420 is presented in a 6U height proprietary case for embedded assembly in case of a cell or for the assembly in a 19’’ cabinet. This section describes the case and presents its dimensions. Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions shall be presented in milimeters. 2.1.1. CASE The TPU S420 has a proprietary case with a width of about half rack and a height of 6U. It has a front panel with the local user interface and a back panel with the connectors for interface with the installation. The case has no openings or slits. The access to the electronic boards is made through the back of the TPU S420, after the back panel has been removed which is done by removing the ten screws that fix it to the case of the TPU S420. Once the panel is removed the electronic boards are accessible and they may vary from four to seven according to the configuration. These boards have double Eurocard standard format, and are interconnected by a Backplane type board, which is in the interior. The complete user interface is located on a board parallel to the front panel which is also connected to the Backplane board. The front panel, to which is fixed the board containing the user interface, can be removed after removing the six screws that fix it to the body of the enclosure. The removal of the front panel does not allow access to the electronic boards, only to the user interface. So it should be removed only for maintenance. Before removing the back lid to access the interior of the TPU S420, all connectors must be disconnected in order to avoid the risk of electrical shock. This warning is also applicable for the removal of the front panel (user interface). Any intervention in the interior of the TPU S420 should be carried out by authorised technical personnel. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Figure 2.1., Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.3 present respectively the front panel and the back panels of the TPU S420. The panels are briefly described. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-3 2 Chapter 2 - Installation Front Panel Figure 2.1. presents the front panel of the TPU S420. The TPU S420 assembly is made by four screws in the back of the front frame. The front panel is covered by a film of silk screened polycarbonate where the user interface is located. This interface is constituted by the graphical display, 8 programmable alarm leds, 2 leds indicating the operation status of the TPU S420 and of the LAN, as well as 4 leds indicating the operation modes. There are 4 navigation keys in the menus, 3 keys for selection and operation of apparatus, 2 keys for selection of Operation Modes and one last key for alarm acknowledgement. Finally there is a front serial port type DB9 female for local communication with a personal computer. This communication is dedicated to the WinProt application, which is the interface software with the TPU S420. For detailed information on local interface and its use, see Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Figure 2.1. Front view of the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-4 2 Chapter 2 - Installation Back Panel (version LAN LonWorks) Figure 2.2 presents the back panel of the TPU S420. It is shown the back connectors arrangement with their respective identification. Table 2.1 briefly describes the connectors. Details on the connectors are given in section 2.4 - Connections. 2 Figure 2.2. Back view of the TPU S420 (connectors arrangement). Table 2.1. Connectors Description. Connector Description Observations COM1, COM2 Back serial ports See section 2.4 FO1 Connectors for LAN connection (optical fibre) Optional IO1, IO2 Connections of base I/O board + Power Supply See section 2.4 IO3, IO4 Connections of Expansion board 1 Optional, Type I, Type II or Type III IO5, IO6 Connections of Expansion board 2 Optional, Type I, Type II or Type III IRIG-B Digital input of the IRIG-B synchronization signal See section 2.4 P1 Power Supply of the Lonworks communications board Optional T1, T2 Current and voltage analogue inputs See section 2.4 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-5 Chapter 2 - Installation Back panel (version LAN Ethernet) Figure 2.3 presents the back panel of the TPU S420. It is shown the back connectors arrangement with their respective identification. Table 2.2 briefly describes the connectors. Details on the connectors are given in section 2.4 - Connections. 2 Figure 2.3. Back view of the TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Table 2.2. Connectors description. Connector Description Observations COM1, COM2, COM4 Back serial ports See section 2.4 FO1, FO2 Connectors for LAN connection (optical fibre) Optional IO1, IO2 Connections of base I/O board + Power Supply See section 2.4 IO3, IO4 Connections of the Expansion board 1 Optional, Optional I, Optional II or Optional III IO5, IO6 Connections of the Expansion board 2 Optional, Optional I, Optional II or Optional III IRIG-B Digital input of the IRIG-B synchronization signal See section 2.4 T1, T2 Current and voltage analogue inputs See section 2.4 TP1,TP2 Connectors for LAN connection (twisted pair) Optional TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-6 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.1.2. DIMENSIONS 2 Figure 2.4. External dimensions and fixation screws of the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-7 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION This section describes the hardware that constitutes the TPU S420, and presents the possible configurations in terms of electronic boards. 2 2.2.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 2.5. presents a simplified diagram of the constitution of the TPU S420, which shows the electronic boards. The boards in dotted lines are optional, they can exist or not depending on hardware configuration. Figure 2.5. Internal arrangement of the boards. Its architecture is modular and multiprocessing, three 32-bit processors and one 8-bit processor are used in order to achieve high performance of the TPU S420. A hard real-time operating system is used to guarantee the demanding time requirements necessary to its correct operation. The communication among processors is made by a serial high speed synchronous bus. The technology and components used allow meeting and exceeding the electromagnetic compatibility and security standards applicable. All signals that interface with the installation are properly isolated from the most sensitive electronics and are physically separated as all connections to the installation are made in the back of the unit, and the sensitive internal signals circulate in a Front-Plane that interconnects all boards and is located immediately behind the local user interface. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-8 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.2.2. BOARD DESCRIPTION Front-End Board This board supports the local interface of the TPU S420. It is associated to the front panel and is only accessible by the front. It contains the graphical display, all LEDs, keys and the front serial port. The graphical display has a 240 x 128 pixel resolution and is back lighted by a cold cathode lamp. The serial port is internally isolated by means of optical isolators for security reasons and also to avoid mass rings. It allows communications from 4800 up to 19200 baud. This board should only be accessed for maintenance purposes because it does not have any accessible configuration. Front-Plane Board The Front-Plane board is destined to interconnect the other boards, supplying electrical and mechanical support to them. It provides different supply voltages necessary to the operation of the TPU S420, as well as analogue signals, communications among microcontrollers, signals regarding digital I/O and also the signals for the local user interface. It does not have any configuration and its access is only possible by fully dismounting the TPU S420. CT & VT Board This board houses the current and voltage measurement transformers and/ or measurement converters. In case of the TPU S420 it has eight measurement transformers, four for current and four for voltage. The nominal values can be 0.04 A, 0.2 A, 1 A or 5 A for currents, and 100 V, 110 V, 115 V, or 120 V for voltages. There are 3 transformers for phase currents, one for the fourth current input, and four transformers for voltages measurement of the three phases and an additional voltage transformer. Associated to this board there is a metal screen to help the assembly. The measurement transformers have special structure, based on electromagnetic screen in order to avoid that exterior disturbances are passed on to the interior of the unit. They also supply galvanic isolation and allow adjusting the measurements to the internal electronics. This board also includes the sample resistances of the current transformers. This board doesn’t include any type of configuration, and their access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-9 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.6. Back view of the CT & VT board of TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Analogue Acquisition Board (A/D) This board houses all analogue electronics and analogue-digital converting electronics; it accepts as inputs the outputs of the measurement transformers the Analogue Inputs board. It houses eight analogue inputs, the respective low pass analogue filters, analogue multiplexer, instrumentation amplifier, sample & hold, analogue-digital converter with a 12-bit resolution and a microcontroller to manage the board and format the samples to send to the processing board (CPU). The analogue inputs are sampled at a 2000 Hz frequency and have a band width of 460 Hz. The samples are then pre-processed, before being sent to the processing board (CPU) every millisecond. This communication is processed at a rate of 1Mbit/s, in serial format. This board does not have any configuration and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. Communications Board (LonWorks) This board is optional and has two options: with or without auxiliary power supply. It houses the Lonworks communication processor as well as the transceiver for the physical media, which can be optical fibre or twisted pair. The option with auxiliary power supply is mainly destined for the optical fibre option as it allows the supply of the optical transceiver, keeping the optical ring closed even when the unit’s supply is off during maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-10 Chapter 2 - Installation This board should be configured according to the type of transceiver used and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The configuration details of this board are presented in Chapter 9 - Maintenance. 2 Figure 2.7. Back view of the LonWorks communications board of TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Communications Board (Ethernet) This board is optional and has two options: Redundant 100BaseTX or Redundant 100BaseTX+100BaseFX. It can house up to four ports for the physical media, two for optical fibre and two for twisted pair. It accepts SC or ST type connectors for optical fibre, and RJ45 for twisted pair (UTP or STP, Cat.5). It contains a 32-bit processing module and associated RAM and FLASH memories for operation data, settings, firmware, etc. It also has a serial port and another port dedicated to download firmware and make the diagnosis of the processing module. As an option, this board has redundancy management, so the processing module constantly monitors the Link information of the two available ports and in case the selected port becomes inactive switches to the other port. This board has several configuration jumpers. Its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The configuration details of this board are presented in Chapter 9 Maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-11 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.8. Back view of the Ethernet communications board of TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Processing Board (CPU) This board does all the central processing of the TPU S420. It has three 32 bit-precessing modules and associated RAM and FLASH memories for operation data, settings, firmware, etc. It also has a serial port dedicated to local interface in the front panel and three ports dedicated to download firmware and make the diagnosis of the processing modules. There is also a real time clock for maintenance of date and time. Each micro processor also has battery backed-up RAM memory as well as a dedicated Watchdog. It also houses two piggy-back type boards for the serial ports in the back panel (COM1 and COM2). The processing is distributed by the three processing modules according to the functions to be performed. The modules are identified as MASTER, SLAVE1 and SLAVE2. All protection functions as well as the processing of digital inputs and outputs, communication with LAN and local interface are managed by this board. It has an IRIG-B time synchronization module, which receives optically isolated synchronization signals which are later directed to the SLAVE processing module. So the TPU S420 can be synchronized from the IRIG-B time synchronization signal. This board has several configuration jumpers. Its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The configuration details of this board are presented in Chapter 9 Maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-12 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.9. Back view of the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Piggy-back Board for optical fibre interface This board is mounted in the processing board (CPU) through a male header. The piggy-back’s own screws, distance pieces and washers should be used. This board is prepared to support the DNP 3.0 serial protocol, as well as normal communication with WinProt (only point to point mode). It allows transmission speeds up to 115 Kbaud. This board presents two operation modes: Point to point mode (TX PP1→RX PP2, TX PP2→RX PP1) Ring mode (TX UC→RX PP1, TX PP1→RX PP2, TX PP2→RX PP3,..., TX PPn→RX UC) Where PP means piggy-back, TX/RX represent the Transmitters or Receivers of PP board number 1, 2 ... n and UC stands for Central Unit (in Portuguese). All piggy-backs that form the ring in the ring operation mode must be placed so that the ring works correctly, except the UC which should be in the point to point operation mode. Galvanic isolation from the exterior signals is supplied for the processing board (CPU) as well as protection against electrostatic discharges. This board can be configured and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The maintenance aspects of this board are presented in Chapter 9 – Maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-13 Chapter 2 - Installation Piggy-back board for plastic optical fibre interface The board uses 1mm thick plastic optical fibre and allows communication distances up to 45m. 2 Figure 2.10. Back view of the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 with piggy-backs for plastic optical fibre interface (connector arrangement). Piggy-back board for glass optical fibre interface The board uses 62,5 m/125 m thick glass optical fibre and allows communication distances up to 1700m. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-14 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.11. Back view of the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 with piggy-backs for glass optical fibre interface (connector arrangement). Piggy-back board for RS485 interface This board is mounted in the processing board (CPU) through a male header. The piggy-back’s own screws, distance pieces and washers should be used. This board is prepared to support the DNP 3.0 serial protocol, as well as normal communication with WinProt. It accepts transmission speeds up to 115 Kbaud. The communication is made by twisted pair – cable of two twisted conductor wires. 4 pin “male” Phoenix Combicon connectors are used in the piggy-back. The piggy-back assures galvanic isolation from the signals as well as protection against electrostatic discharges. The 485 bus can be shared by a maximum of 32 terminals and the length of the cable should be less than 1200m. In situations of high transmission rate or very long 485 bus the option with adjustment resistance should be configured. This board can be configured and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The maintenance aspects of this board are presented in Chapter 9 - Maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-15 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.12. Back view of the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 with piggy-back for RS485 interface (connector arrangement). Piggy-back board for RS232 interface This board is mounted in the processing board (CPU) through a male header. The piggy-back’s own screws, distance pieces and washers should be used. This board is prepared to support the DNP 3.0 serial protocol, as well as normal communication with WinProt. It accepts transmission speeds up to 115 Kbaud and is optically isolated and has protection against electrostatic discharges. This board does not have any configuration and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-16 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.13. Back view of the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 with piggy-back for RS232 interface (connector arrangement). I/O Board + Power Supply This board contains 9 digital inputs, 6 digital outputs (one is used as watchdog and another has change-over contacts) and the power supply that supplies energy to the TPU S420. There are several options depending on the range of supply voltage and the operating voltage of the digital inputs. These options are detailed in section 2.2.3 - Configuration of the supply voltage and digital I/O , as well as in the Annex A. - Ordering Form. The power supply is of switching type and generates voltages of +5 V, +24 V and 15 V respectively for logic, relay digital outputs and the analogue part. It supplies galvanic isolation and filter from external disturbances. Every input and output is galvanically isolated among each other with allows any type of cabling. They have high immunity against external disturbances given by optical isolation and suppression of transient in the digital inputs, by using optical couplers for the command of output relays, and the use of a separate power supply. This board does not have any configuration and its access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. The maintenance aspects of this board are presented in Chapter 9 Maintenance. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-17 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.14. Back view of the I/O Board + Power Supply of the TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Expansion 1, Expansion 2 I/O Boards These two boards are digital inputs/outputs expansion boards and they are optional. There are four types of expansion boards: Type 1 (9 inputs + 6 outputs), Type II (16 inputs), Type III (15 outputs) and Type IV (32 inputs), according to the number of available inputs and outputs. Expansion boards Type I have two outputs with change-over contacts, and Type III boards have six outputs with change-over contacts. Any combination of boards can be made, so it is possible to obtain several combinations of inputs and outputs up to 41 inputs and 6 outputs (5+ watchdog), or 9 inputs and 36 outputs (35 + watchdog). These numbers already take into account the base board. The operating voltages of the digital inputs should be similar to the I/O Board + Power Supply to guarantee their coherent behaviour. They are detailed in section 2.2.3. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-18 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.15. Back view of Expansion Board I of the TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Every input and output is galvanically isolated among each other which allow any type of cabling. They also have high immunity against external disturbances given by optical isolation and suppression of transient in the digital inputs, by using optical couplers for the command of output relays, and the use of a separate power supply. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-19 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.16. Back view of the Expansion Board 2 of the TPU S420 (connector arrangement). Table 2.3. presents the types of existing boards, and Table 2.4. presents possible configurations in terms of expansion boards and number of available digital inputs and outputs. These boards do not have any configuration and their access is possible after removing the back lid of the TPU S420. However, it is necessary to configure the TPU S420 so that they work properly (see Chapter 4 - Configuration).). The maintenance of these boards is explained in Chapter 9 - Maintenance. Table 2.3. Types of expansion boards. Type of board Nº of digital inputs Nº of digital outputs I/O Board + Power Supply 9 5 + Watchdog Expansion Type I 9 6 Expansion Type II 16 -- Expansion Type III - 15 Inputs/outputs expansion boards must be correctly configured to work properly. The configuration process is described in Chapter 4 - Configuration. Wrong configuration, besides causing malfunction in the TPU S420, may cause permanent damage in the expansion boards and/or processing board. Any intervention in the interior of the TPU S420 should be carried out by authorised technical personnel. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-20 Chapter 2 - Installation Table 2.4. Some configurations for I/O boards. Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Nº of digital inputs Nº of digital outputs -- -- 9 5 + Watchdog Expansion Type I -- 18 11 + Watchdog Expansion Type I Expansion Type 27 17 + Watchdog Expansion Type I Expansion Type II 34 11 + Watchdog Expansion Type I Expansion Type III 18 26 + Watchdog Expansion Type II -- 25 5 + Watchdog Expansion Type II Expansion Type I 34 11 + Watchdog Expansion Type II Expansion Type II 41 5 + Watchdog Expansion Type II Expansion Type III 25 20 + Watchdog Expansion Type III - 9 20 + Watchdog Expansion Type III Expansion Type I 18 26 + Watchdog Expansion Type III Expansion Type II 25 20 + Watchdog Expansion Type III Expansion Type III 9 35 + Watchdog TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2 2-21 Chapter 2 - Installation Placement of the Boards (version LAN LonWorks) Back view: 2 Figure 2.17. Placement of the boards in the TPU S420 (version LonWorks). - (Position 2) Measurement Transformers Board (CT & VT). - (Position 12) Board of Analogue Acquisition (A/D). - (Position 15) Board of LonWorks Communications. - (Position 20) Processing Board (CPU). - (Position 25) Base Board of Power Supply and Inputs/Outputs (Power Supply + I/O). - (Position 33) Expansion Board 1 (Type I, Type II or Type III). - (Position 33) Expansion Board 2 (Type I, Type II or Type III). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-22 Chapter 2 - Installation Placement of the Boards (version LAN Ethernet) Back view: 2 Figure 2.18. Placement of the boards on the TPU S420 (version Ethernet). - (Position 2) Measurement Transformers Board (CT & VT). - (Position 12) Board of Analogue Acquisition (A/D). - (Position 15) Ethernet Board Communications. - (Position 20) Processing Board (CPU). - (Position 25) Base Board of Power Supply and Inputs/Outputs (Power Supply + I/O). - (Position 33) Expansion Board 1 (Type I, Type II or Type III). - (Position 33) Expansion Board 2 (Type I, Type II or Type III). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-23 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.2.3. CONFIGURATION OF THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE AND DIGITAL I/O It is necessary to make sure that the correct options of the operating voltages of the power supply and of the digital inputs are chosen. Incorrect choice can cause malfunction and even damage the TPU S420. See the Ordering Form in Annex A. . A copy of the ordering form is in the back lid of the TPU S420, in the tag with the EC marking symbol. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420, and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Ranges of Supply Voltages Table 2.5 shows two options for the operating ranges of the power supply. For nominal voltages of 24 V, 48 V and 60 V it is used the option 19 to 72 V d.c., for nominal voltages of 110 V, 125 V, 230 V and 240 V it is used the option 88 to 300 V d.c./ 80 to 265 V a.c. Table 2.5. Ranges of operating voltages for the power supply. Nominal voltages Operating ranges Consumption 24 V / 48 V / 60 V 19 – 72 V d.c. 12 – 35 W 110 V / 125 V / 230 V /240 V 88 – 300 V d.c. 12 – 35 W 80 – 265 V d.c. Operating Voltages of Digital Inputs There are four options for the range of operating voltage of digital inputs in order to adjust their operation sets to the supply voltage used. The operating voltage must be chosen according to the nominal voltage in order to assure a high enough operation set to avoid unexpected operation of the inputs. The ranges and the operation sets are specified in Table 2.6. Digital inputs will only work properly if a continuous voltage is applied. Make sure the polarity of digital inputs is correct; otherwise they will not work properly. Table 2.6. Operating voltages and operation sets of digital inputs. Nominal voltages Operating ranges Operation set Consumption 24 V 19 – 138 V d.c. (19 1,9) V < 0,05 W (1,5 mA @ 24 V d.c.) 48 V 30 – 120 V d.c. (30 3) V < 0,1 W (1,5 mA @ 48 V d.c.) 110/125 V 80 – 220 V d.c. (80 8) V < 0,2 W (1,5 mA @ 125 V d.c.) 220/250 V 150 – 300 V d.c. (150 15) V TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 < 0,4 W (1,5 mA @ 250 V d.c.) 2-24 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.3. ASSEMBLY This section describes the options available to assembly the TPU S420. The TPU S420 can be embedded in a panel or mounted on a 19’’ rack type cabinet. There is only one model for the two types of assembly. Instructions and relevant information for each type of assembly are provided below. Assembly should be permanent, internal and made on a dry place. The environmental conditions described in Chapter 10 - Technical Specificationsshould be taken in consideration. Be careful to leave some free space around the TPU S420, to facilitate the air flow and improve the dissipation of the generated heat. In case of assembly in cell ports or cabinets, check if there is no interference with other equipment or structure nearby during opening and closing. In order to assure safe and efficient operation of the TPU S420, handling, assembly and installation should be made strictly according to the instructions of this manual. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420, and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. 2.3.1. EMBEDDED ASSEMBLY For embedded assembly it is necessary to cut the panel according to Figure 2.19. The relevant dimensions are provided to make the assembly. The TPU S420 should be fixed by 4 M4x10 screws. Choose the location where the TPU S420 will be assembled considering the above recommendations. Cut the panel respecting the dimensions indicated in Figure 2.19. Insert the TPU S420 in the cut area of the panel and screw it to the panel using the four screws. M4x10 type screws should be used in the front; and M4 washers in the back. After the TPU S420 is mounted in the panel, earth connection must be immediately made for security reasons. This connection should be fully functional before any other connection is made. See details in point 0. Make the remaining connections in the back of the TPU S420 according to the wiring connections diagram and to section 0. This section has important information on the type of connectors, section of conductors, terminals to use, etc. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-25 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.19. Cut to make embedded assembly. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-26 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.3.2. ASSEMBLY IN 19’’ RACK For assembly in 19’’ rack it is necessary a 7U space to accommodate the TPU S420. Figure 2.20 shows the assembly made with a dedicated front plane, detailed in Figure 2.21 and Figure 2.22). Choose the location where the TPU S420 will be recommendations made in the beginning of this section. assembled considering the 2 Make the assembly of the 7U front plane as indicated in Figure 2.20. Using 4 or 8 M6x16 screws. Screw the TPU S420 using the four M4x10 screws. After the TPU S420 is mounted, earth connection must be immediately made for security reasons. This connection should be fully functional before any other connection is made. See details in point 0. Make the remaining connections in the back of the TPU S420 according to the wiring connections diagram and to section 2.4. This section has important information on the type of connectors, section of conductors, terminals to use, etc. 7U FRONT PANEL Figure 2.20. Assembly in 19’’ rack. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-27 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.21. 7U front plane for assembly in 19’’ rack. Figure 2.22. 7U front plane for assembly in 19’’ rack. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-28 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4. CONNECTIONS The voltages in the connections of the TPU S420 are high enough to present a high risk of electrical shock. As such, precaution should be taken to avoid situations that may endanger the physical health of the technical personnel. Technical personnel should be adequately trained to handle this type of equipment. The following should be considered: A solid earth protection connection should be the first to be made, before any other connections are made; Any connection may carry dangerous voltages; Even when the unit’s supply is off, it is possible to have dangerous voltages present. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Figure 2.23 shows the connectors present in the back of the TPU S420 for LonWorks LAN version and Figure 2.24. shows the connectors present in the back of the TPU S420 for Ethernet LAN version. Figure 2.23. Connectors in the back of the TPU S420 (version LonWorks). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-29 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.24. Connectors in the back of the TPU S420 (version Ethernet). The different connectors are described below. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-30 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.1. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION Connector for current and voltage analogue inputs (T1, T2) Phoenix HCC 4 – M type connector. It accepts conductors with section from 0,25 mm2 to 4 mm2. The connection is made by screw with the help of a screw driver size 0,6 x 3,5 mm. Torque: 0,5 – 0,6 Nm. This connector has a retention/removal screw. Connector for power supply and digital inputs/outputs (IO1...IO6) Phoenix Front-MSTB type connector, with 18 terminals. Accepts conductors with section from 0,2 mm2 to 2,5 mm2. The connection is made by screw with the help of a screw driver size 0,6 x 3,5 mm. Torque: 0,5 – 0,6 Nm. Connector for the optional power supply communications board (P1) Phoenix Front-MSTB type connector, with 6 terminals. Accepts conductors with section from 0,2 mm2 to 2,5 mm2. The connection is made by screw with the help of a screw driver size 0,6 x 3,5 mm. Torque: 0,5 – 0,6 Nm. Connector for RS232 interface serial port (COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4) Sub-miniature 9 pins “D” type connector, female. The signals are EIA-232 standard. See description of pins and signals in section 2.4.8 - Serial ports. Connector for RS485 interface serial port (COM1 and COM2) Phoenix Front-MSTB type connector, with 4 terminals. Accepts conductors with section from 0,2 mm2 to 2,5 mm2. The connection is made by screw with the help of a screw driver size 0,6 x 3,5 mm. Torque: 0,5 – 0,6 Nm. The signals are EIA-485 standard. See description of pins and signals in section 2.4.8 - Serial ports. ST Connectors for glass optical fibre serial port (COM1 and COM2) ST type connector for 62,5 m/125 m thick glass optical fibre, wavelength of 820 nm, type HFBR-1414 for the Transmitter and type HFBR-2412 for Receiver, both from Agilent, for distances up to 1700m. Connectors for plastic optical fibre serial port (COM1 and COM2) Connector for 1mm thick plastic optical fibre (POF), wavelength of 660 nm, type HFBR-1522 for Transmitter and type HFBR-1522 for Receiver, both from Agilent, for distances up to 45m. Connectors for LonWorks local network connection in optical fibre (FO1) Connection to the LonWorks local area network, using 50/125 m or 62,5/125 m optical fibre. The existing versions use SMA or ST connectors. See description of pins and signals in section 5 – Local Network Connections. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-31 2 Chapter 2 - Installation Terminal for earth protection connection Terminal to be fitted by M4 screw, for connection to Earth Protection. This connection is essential for the correct operation of the TPU S420. It should be solid for security reasons. ST Connectors for Ethernet local network connection in optical fibre (FO1 and FO2) Connection to the Ethernet local area network, using the HFBR-5103 ST optical module from Agilent for 62,5 m/125 m thick glass optical fibre, 2000m maximum length and wavelength of 1300 nm. SC Connectors for Ethernet local network connection in optical fibre (FO1 and FO2) Connection to the Ethernet local area network, using the HFBR-5103 SC optical module from Agilent for 62,5 m/125 m thick glass optical fibre, 2000m maximum length and wavelength of 1300 nm. Connector for Ethernet local network connection in twisted pair (TP1 and TP2) Connection to the Ethernet local area network in twisted pair, using RJ45plug of 8 pins for network connection using UTP or STP, Cat.5. See description of pins and signals in section 5 – Local Network Connections. Connector for IRIG-B synchronization signal connection (IRIG-B) Phoenix Front-MSTB type connector, with 2 terminals. Accepts conductors with section from 0,2 mm2 to 2,5 mm2. The connections is made by screw with the help of a screw driver size 0,6 x 3,5 mm. Torque: 0,5 – 0,6 Nm. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-32 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.2. DESCRIPTION OF CONNECTOR PINS The sequence of the pins is the same as in the figure and the connectors are presented in the position they are in the back panel of the TPU S420, when it is in normal vertical position. Connector for current and voltage analogue inputs (T1, T2) 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Pin Number Pin designation (connector T1) Pin designation (connector T2) 10 N/C GND 9 N/C GND 8 Io1 UD1 7 Io2 UD2 6 IA1 UA1 5 IA2 UA2 4 IB1 UB1 3 IB2 UB2 2 IC1 UC1 2 1 IC2 UC2 Connector for power supply and digital inputs/outputs (IO1...IO6) Pin Pin designation (connector IO1) Pin designation (connector IO2) Number 1 IN1A GND 2 IN1B GND 3 IN2A -VIN 4 IN2B +VIN 5 IN3A O1A 6 IN3B O1B 7 IN4A O2A 8 IN4B O2B 9 IN5A O3A 10 IN5B O3B 11 IN6A O4A 12 IN6B O4B 13 IN7A O5C 14 IN7B O5B 15 IN8A O5A 16 IN8B WDC 17 IN9A WDB 18 IN9B WDA TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-33 Chapter 2 - Installation Connector for the optional power supply communications board (P1) Pin Pin designation (connector P1) Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 3 8 4 5 9 +VIN 2 -VIN 3 GND 4 GND 5 GND 2 6 GND Connector for RS232 interface serial port (COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4) Pin Pin designation Pin designation Pin designation Numer (connector COM1 and (connector COM3) (connector COM4) COM2) 1 6 1 9 9 1 N/C N/C N/C 2 RXD RXD RXD 3 TXD TXD TXD 4 N/C DTR ( * ) N/C 5 GND GND GND 6 N/C N/C N/C 7 RTS RTS RTS 8 CTS CTS CTS 9 N/C N/C Connector for RS485 interface serial port (COM1 and COM2) Pin designation Pin 1 2 Reserved Number 3 4 1 +485 2 N/C 3 -485 4 GNDISO ST Connector for glass optical fibre serial port (COM1 and COM2) Pin designation RXD TXD RXD TXD TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-34 Chapter 2 - Installation Connector for plastic optical fibre serial port (COM1 and COM2) Pin designation RXD TXD RXD 2 TXD Connector for Ethernet local network connection in optical fibre (FO1 and FO2) Pin designation TXD TXD RXD RXD Connector for Ethernet local network connection in optical fibre (FO1 and FO2) Pin designation TXD RXD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 TXD RXD Connector for Ethernet local network connection in twisted pair (TP1 and TP2) Pin Pin designation Number 1 TD+ 2 TD- 3 RD+ 4 N/C 5 N/C 6 RD- 7 N/C 8 N/C Connector for IRIG-B synchronization signal connection (IRIG-B) Pin Pin designation Number 2 -IRIG_B 1 +IRIG_B ( * ) Used only for interface supply. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-35 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.3. WIRING CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM Figure 2.25 present the general wiring connections diagrams for TPU S420, It serves as reference to the next sub-chapters that detail the type of connections and connectors. 2 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-36 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.25. General wiring connections diagram of the TPU S420, base configuration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-37 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.26. General wiring connections diagram of the TPU S420, expansion modes (optional). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-38 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION According to security regulations a suitable device should be installed to turn on and off the power supply of TPU S420 that should cut both poles simultaneously. Protection device against over-currents in both poles of supply should also be installed. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Earth protection should be directly connected to the earth system using the shortest possible path. Earth protection symbol is: A conductor with a minimum section of 4 mm2, preferably of copper braided wire should be used. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420, and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. After connecting the earth protection with a conductor with 4 mm2 minimum section, which should be the first connection to be made, connect the other earth connections. See relevant wiring connections diagrams for details and Figure 2.27. . These connections should be made with 1.5 mm2 section conductor. The two supply poles, after passing the protection device against over-currents and the switch device, should be connected to the respective terminals of the IO2 connector, taking polarity into account. Both poles are fluctuating in regard to earth and have full galvanic isolation. Supply voltage should be within the acceptable range for the version in question – see the tag in the back lid of TPU S420. The use of incorrect supply voltage may cause TPU S420 to malfunction and/or damage. Figure 2.27. Power supply connections of TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-39 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.5. CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS The secondary circuits of current transformers must be short-circuited before connecting or disconnecting the respective terminals in the TPU S420! If there are test terminals that automatically short circuit the secondary circuits of the current transformers, they may be put to test position as long as their correct operation has been previously verified. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. It is mandatory to check the nominal values of the analogue current, whether they are AC or DC inputs before they are put to operation. The nominal values can be checked in the back tag of the TPU S420 and they can be 0.04 A, 0.2 A, 1 A or 5 A. Incorrect nominal values may cause the unit to malfunction and/or damage. The same is applicable to the nominal values of analogue voltage inputs. These values can be 100 V, 110 V, 115 V, or 120 V. The values of acceptable thermal capacity should also be verified for each of the input nominal values, both for permanent and short-time values. Subjecting analogue inputs to values higher than those specified will cause permanent damage to the inputs. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Current and Voltage Connections Current and voltage connections are made through T1 connector in the back of TPU S420. Take in consideration the general wiring connections diagram in Figure 2.25, and the specific wiring connections diagram in Figure 2.28 or Figure 2.29. Current inputs (AC or DC) are completely floating and independent, having a high galvanic isolation. Special care should be taken in handling the current connectors because they are not self shortcircuiting. There should be a way to short-circuit the current circuits before current connectors are disconnected. It is necessary to check the correct phase sequence and their polarities. Always check the specific wiring diagram. Polarity is marked by a small filled circle next to the current transformer connections. There are two possible ways of doing the currents connection according with the way the fourth current input is obtained. It can be obtained directly from a toroidal CT mounted on the line cable output (Figure 2.28) or, optionally, from the external sum of the three phase currents, called Holmgreen connection. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-40 2 Chapter 2 - Installation Voltages connections The voltage connection is made using a T2 connector on the back of the TPU S420. The general wiring connections diagram of Figure 2.25 must be taken into account as the particular connections diagram, presented on Figure 2.28. The voltage inputs are completely fluctuating and independent, and they have high galvanic isolation. It is necessary to check the correct phase sequence, as well as their polarities. Always check the connections diagram of Figure 2.28. Together with the voltage transformers, the polarity is marked by a small filled circle. The 9th and 10th terminals of the T2 connector should be connected to the earth common point in the back of TPU S420 (protective earth connection) for a correct unit functioning. It should be used a conductor of at least 2.5 mm2 of section. Figure 2.28. Current and Voltage connections diagram (toroid). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-41 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.29. Currents and connections diagram (Holmgreen connection). The change of current or voltage phases causes incorrect measurement of the respective inverse sequence. The change of phases can be detected by the existence of a non null measure of the inverse sequence of current (or voltage), similar to the phase currents (or phase voltages), in a normal situation of three-phase and symmetrical load. The change of current or voltage polarities causes incorrect measurement of the respective residual sequence (sum of the three currents or sum of the three voltages). Polarity change can be detected by the existence of a non null measurement of the sum of the three currents (or voltages), similar to the phase currents (or phase voltages) in a normal situation of three-phase and symmetrical load. Frequency measurement is obtained from the value of the voltages direct sequence. Phases or polarities voltage changes cause incorrect frequency measurement and can lead to the Over and Under-frequency protection locking. The phase or polarities change can be detected by the existence of a null frequency measurement. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-42 Chapter 2 - Installation Phases or polarities change, or the non correspondence of current and voltage phases causes incorrect measurement of active and reactive powers and power factor, as the power counters and it can lead to incorrect actuations of the Phase and Earth Directional protections. 2.4.6. DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS 2 It is necessary to assure the correct polarity of digital inputs, otherwise they will not work. Also check that the option of operating voltage and operation set is according to the used control voltage. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 has digital inputs that may vary in number from 9 to 41 depending on the configuration of digital input/output expansion boards. Inputs have high galvanic isolation and are completely independent among each other. It is also necessary to make sure that their operating voltage (and respective operation threshold) is according to the used control voltage. See Table 2.6. and section 2.2.3 - Configuration of the supply voltage and digital I/O . Digital outputs may vary in number from 5 to 35 (besides the dedicated watchdog output) depending on the configuration of input/output boards. See section 2.2.3 - Configuration of the supply voltage and digital I/O . Output contacts are dry and completely independent among each other. There are normally opened contacts and of change-over type, as can be seen in the wiring diagram. See also Figure 2.30 that shows inputs and outputs of a base board. Figure 2.30 Digital input and output connections of TPU S420 (base board). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-43 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.7. LOCAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS LonWorks Network Board TPU S420 can be equipped with a communication board to be connected to a LonWorks network that can co-exist with other units sharing the same protocol. The physical environment used is 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m multimode type glass optical fibre. The communication rate used is 1.25 Mbps, and connectors used are ST type (older equipment can still have SMA type connectors). Wavelength is 880 nm. Optical fibre connectors are supplied with protecting covers to avoid dust from entering and contaminating the optical components. The covers can be easily removed by pushing them out. As an option, twisted pair can be used. However this option has less immunity against electromagnetic disturbances. Auxiliary Power Supply for LonWorks Network Board When using a communication board with auxiliary power supply there is also a connector to connect this supply (see Figure 2.25, section 2.4 –Connections). This supply should be separated from the supply of the TPU S420, as it is destined to avoid the optical ring to open when that auxiliary power supply is disconnected. Recommendations for these connections are in section 2.4.4 - Power Supply Connection. Earth connection must be the first made using 2.5 mm2 section conductor. See relevant wiring diagrams and Figure 2.31. for details. Use only one of the terminals 3,4,5 or 6 of the P1connector. The two supply poles (terminals 1 and 2 of the P1connector), after passing by a protection device against over-currents and by a switch device (that should be independent from that of the main supply of the TPU S420), should be connected to the respective terminals of the P1connector, considering their polarity. Both poles are floating in regard to earth and have complete galvanic isolation. Supply voltage should be within the acceptable range for the version in question – see the tag in the back lid of the TPU S420. The use of incorrect supply voltage may cause TPU S420 to malfunction and/or damage. Figure 2.31. Power supply connections of the LonWorks network board. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-44 2 Chapter 2 - Installation Power supply terminals and conductors of the LonWorks network board (when there is one) carry dangerous voltages. Precaution should be taken to avoid situations that may endanger the physical health of the technical personnel. Technical personnel should be adequately trained to handle this type of equipment. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. LED and Command Buttons of the LonWorks Network Board In the back panel of the TPU S420 with LonWorks communication board there are four LED to signal the status of the connection to the network that are described in Table 2.8., and two command buttons described in Table 2.7. Both the LED and the command buttons are visible in the back panel of the TPU S420 with the communication board installed. Table 2.7. Command buttons of the LonWorks Network Board. Command Button Function SERV Send Service Pin message RST Neuron Chip Reset Table 2.8. LED of the LonWorks Network Board. LED Colour Function TPU PWR Red TPU S420 with supply LAN PWR Red LonWorks board with supply RST Yellow Indication of Neuron Chip Reset SERV Yellow Indication of Service Pin message sent Ethernet Network Board TPU S420 can be equipped with a Fast Ethernet communication board (100Mbps) to be connected to an Ethernet network, with redundancy management option and with the possibility to co-exist with other units sharing the same protocols. The board houses a 32-bit processing module, to which a serial port (COM4) is associated. This processing module implements the TCP/IP stack. Redundancy is achieved by the use of two copper or copper + fibre interfaces (2x100BaseTX or 2x100BaseTX+2X100BaseFX) ports. Copper port option uses RJ45 connectors, and UTP or STP Cat.5 cable. 62.5/125 m or 50/125 m multimode type glass optical fibre is supported as alternative and type ST (SC by request) connectors are used. Wavelength is 1300 nm, and fibres length should be up to 2000m. Optical fibre connectors are supplied with protecting covers to avoid dust from entering and contaminating the optical components. The covers can be easily removed. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-45 2 Chapter 2 - Installation 2 Figure 2.32. Connections of the Ethernet network board. LED of Ethernet Network Board In the back panel of the TPU S420 with Ethernet communication board there are several LED to signal the status of the connection to the Ethernet network, described in Table 2.9. The external LED is visible in the back panel of the TPU S420 when the communication board is placed in the enclosure. Internal LED is only visible when the board is removed from the case and serve only for diagnosis. Table 2.9. LED of the Ethernet Network Board. LED Colour Transceiver Indication Visibility TX1 Green TP1, FO1 Transmission of packages External RX1 Green Reception of packages LNK1 Green Network connection status (Link) COL1 Red Collision of packages FDX1 Yellow Full Duplex Mode Internal LDEV Green TP1 , FO1 Base address decoding for the active Internal TP2 , FO2 Base Address Register TP2, FO2 Transmission of packages TX2 Green RX2 Green Reception of packages LNK2 Green Network connection status (Link) COL2 Red Collision of packages FDX2 Yellow Full Duplex Mode External Internal Initialization of the Ethernet Network Board When powering the TPU S420 on, the Ethernet communication board will start a sequence of self-tests to check whether it is ready to start operation. Self-tests comprise extensive verification of the board’s operation hardware to validate their good condition before normal operation starts. If there is a failure in the self-tests the process is restarted. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-46 Chapter 2 - Installation 2.4.8. SERIAL PORTS TPU S420 has three serial ports – one front port (COM3) and two back ports (COM1 and COM2). Every serial port has galvanic isolation and protection against electrostatic discharges. TPU S420 is supplied with protective covers in the three serial ports to protect them from dust and other environmental agents. Maximum transmission speed allowed by the TPU S420 is defined by the processing board, and is 19200 baud for the front port and each of the back ones. In case of doubt or firmware change, see in menu Communications > Serial Communication > Settings which is the maximum baud rate supported by the TPU for each serial port. Front serial port (COM3) RS232 front serial port is dedicated to communication with WinProt – application running in Windows, for configuration, setting, data collection and firmware update of the TPU S420. Back serial ports Back serial ports can be used for communication with WinProt. They can also be used to support serial communication protocols. There are three types of communication interface for back serial ports: RS485, RS232 or optical fibre. Optical fibre interface (COM1 and COM2) There are two options in optical fibre, plastic optical fibre (for connections up to 45 m) or glass optical fibre (for connections up to 2000 m). This type of ports can be used in a point to point or ring configuration. Maximum baud rate is 19200 baud. For details on other possible port configuration see Chapter 9 - Maintenance. Protective covers for the connectors are supplied to protect them from dust and other environmental agents. Figure 2.33. Serial port for optical fibre interface. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-47 2 Chapter 2 - Installation RS485 Interface (COM1 and COM2) This type of interface is destined to allow the connection of units to a RS485 bus. Maximum baud rate is 19200 baud. For details on other possible port configuration see Chapter 9 Maintenance. This serial interface has galvanic isolation and immunity against electrostatic discharges. Table 2.10. Pin allocation to RS485 serial ports. TPU S420 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) +485 (1) +485 (1) N/C (2) N/C (2) -485 (3) -485 (3) GND_ISO (4) Optional (4) 2 Figure 2.34. Serial port for RS485 interface. RS232 Interface (COM1 and COM2) Table 2.11 shows pin allocation to the serial port connectors. The cable to be used should be of “transparent” type, pin by pin. For details on other possible port configuration see Chapter 9 Maintenance. Table 2.11. Pin allocation to RS232 serial ports. TPU S420 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) N/C (1) DCD (1) RXD (2) RXD (2) TXD (3) TXD (3) DTR (4) ( * ) DTR (4) GND (5) GND (5) N/C (6) DSR (6) RTS (7) RTS (7) TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-48 Chapter 2 - Installation CTS (8) CTS (8) N/C (9) RI (9) ( * ) Not used as a communication signal. 2 Figure 2.35. Serial port for RS232 interface. 2.4.9. SERIAL PORT OF THE ETHERNET COMMUNICATION BOARD The Ethernet communication board has one RS232 (COM4) serial port located in the back panel of the TPU S420. A protective cover is supplied to protect the serial port from dust and other environmental agents. This port can be used for communication with WinProt. For details on other possible port configuration see Chapter 9 - Maintenance. Table 2.12. shows pin allocation to the serial port connector. The cable to use should be “transparent” type, pin by pin. Table 2.12. Pin allocation to serial ports. TPU S420 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) TxD (2) RxD (2) RxD (3) TxD (3) RTS (7) RTS (7) CTS (8) CTS (8) GND (5) GND (5) Reserved (9) RI (9) This back serial port (COM4) does not have galvanic isolation. Precaution should be taken when using it. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the Ethernet communication board and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 2-49 3 Chapter 3. HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE The information included in this chapter will also allow acquiring the necessary expertise to change the settings of all protection and automation functions and the configurations of TPU S420. After reading this chapter, you will be able to put the TPU S420 in service, check the correct operation of its functions and analyze the produced information. Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.1. FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION........................................................................................3-3 3.2. LOCAL INTERFACE OPERATION ....................................................................................3-5 3.2.1. Start-up .......................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.2. Keys..............................................................................................................................3-7 3.2.3. Local Interface Modes..................................................................................................3-9 3.3. MENUS INTERFACE OPERATION ..................................................................................3-11 3.3.1. Changing the value of a parameter ......................................................................... 3-12 3.3.2. Passwords ................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.3.3. Menus Content ......................................................................................................... 3-16 3.3.4. Other Actions in Menus Interface ............................................................................ 3-28 3.4. OPERATION OF THE SUPERVISION AND COMMAND INTERFACE ............................................3-32 3.4.1. Alarms Page.............................................................................................................. 3-32 3.4.2. Mimic ........................................................................................................................ 3-32 3.5. USE OF WINPROT ..................................................................................................3-37 3.6. WEBPROT USE ......................................................................................................3-42 Total of pages of the chapter: 44 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-2 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.1. FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION The front panel of the TPU S420 has the following appearance: 3 Figure 3.1. Front panel appearance when the TPU S420 is not energized. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface The Human-Machine Local Interface of the TPU S420 is constituted by the following elements: Status LEDs The ON LED is blinking if the TPU S420 is energized. The LAN LED indicates the current status of the communications of the TPU S420 with the LAN. Graphical Display Depending on the Interface mode the display presents either the mimic and the alarms page or the TPU S420 menus. Alarms LEDs These LEDs are associated with the alarms page. They display the current state of each defined alarm . CLR Key Pressing this key allows the acknowledgment of the active alarms in the alarms page. Navigation Keys These keys allow navigation in menus and mimic pages, as well as settings change. Mode LEDs and Keys The mode keys allow changing rapidly the Operation Mode of the TPU S420 which is displayed in the respective LEDs. The operation mode associated with each key is configurable. Function Keys The function keys allow the selection of objects existing in the mimic and their control. Serial Front Port This port is used to communicate with the interface software: WinProt. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-4 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.2. LOCAL INTERFACE OPERATION 3.2.1. START-UP When powering the TPU S420 on, the display will be lighted and the unit will start a sequence of self-tests to check whether it is ready to start operation. Self-tests comprise extensive verification of the unit’s operation hardware to validate their good condition before normal operation starts. During these tests the watchdog output of the TPU S420 will remain in its inactive state signalling that the unit is not yet in normal operation. If there is failure in the self-tests the process is restarted. These self-tests include: Tests to the Microprocessors: internal logs, addressing, logical and arithmetical operations; Tests to the Microprocessors internal RAM; Tests to the Microprocessors external RAM; Boot and Normal code validity tests through checksum verification; Functions settings validity tests through checksum verification. If the TPU S420 has an Ethernet communications board, the self-tests previously described will be carried out, not only to the MASTER, SLAVE 1 and SLAVE 2 processors of the processing board (CPU), but also to the SLAVE 3 processor of the Ethernet communications board. The following self-tests will be added only related to the Ethernet communication board. Tests to MAC records Tests to MAC external RAM Tests to PHY’s records Tests of MAC internal loopback Tests of PHY’s internal loopback The self-tests last a few seconds. During that time the front panel appearance should be as shown in Figure 3.2. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-5 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3 Figure 3.2. Front panel appearance when the TPU S420 is started-up. The graphical display should show the test message and all LEDs in the front panel should be permanently on, except for the ON LED that should be blinking. After completing all self-tests, the TPU S420 will show the factory interface shown in Figure 3.3. and the watchdog output changes to the active state. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-6 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3 Figure 3.3. Front panel appearance when the TPU S420 is started-up 3.2.2. KEYS The keys on the TPU S420 front panel have the following functions: Supervision and Command Interface Changes the mimic’s visible page. Menus Interface Moves the selection bar up. Paging up the options lists. Increase the value of the selected parameter. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-7 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Supervision and Command Interface Changes the mimic’s visible page. Menus Interface Moves the selection bar down. Paging down the options lists. Decrease the value of the selected parameter. Supervision and Command Interface Goes to the Menus Interface. 3 Menus Interface Goes to the selected menu; Starts and ends the process of parameter changing; Confirms the parameter value change. Supervision and Command Interface Goes to the Menus Interface. Menus Interface Goes back to the previous menu. Interrupts the process of parameter changing. Cancels the parameter value change. Supervision and Command Interface Selects objects existing in the visible mimic. Pressing this key several times will sequentially select all the mimic’s objects possible to be controlled. Menus Interface Goes to the Supervision and Command Interface. Supervision and Command Interface Executes the order associated with the key 1 for the selected object. Menus Interface No function. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-8 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Supervision and Command Interface Executes the order associated with the key 0 for the selected object. Menus Interface No function. Supervision and Command Interface and Menus Interface Acknowledges active alarms in the alarms page. If the logical state of the variables in that page is inactive, the corresponding LEDs will be turned off. 3 Supervision and Command Interface and Menus Interface Changes the Operation Mode configured in the key F1. Supervision and Command Interface and Menus Interface Changes the Operation Mode configured in the key F2. The interaction with the keyboard has the following particular characteristics: If two keys are pressed simultaneously, none will be recognized; If a key is repeatedly and quickly pressed, it will not be recognized; If you keep pressing one key, the associated action will be repeated. If the key’s information treatment time is too long, for security reasons the acceptance of new keys will be inhibited until the previous action is completed. 3.2.3. LOCAL INTERFACE MODES The Local Interface can operate in two different modes: The Supervision and Command Interface and the Menus Interface. In the Supervision and Command Interface it is possible to: See the descriptives of the alarms page; See the mimic configured for the TPU S420; Select and operate on objects existing in the mimic; Change Operation Modes; Acknowledge active alarms in the Alarms Page In the Menus Interface it is possible to: See the information that the TPU S420 has locally available: Measurements, Chronological Event Logging, Load Diagrams; See the information related to the several monitored apparatus; TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-9 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Set all the Protection, Automation and Supervision functions in the TPU S420; Set all the TPU S420 configurations: Measurement Transformers, Inputs and Outputs, Alarms Page, etc. Change Operation Modes; Acknowledge active alarms in the Alarms Page. 3 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-10 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.3. MENUS INTERFACE OPERATION The TPU S420 has a user-friendly interface, using menus to set its functions. When you go into the Menus Interface, the display will show the following: Menu Principal Medidas Medida Registo de Eventos Localizador de Defeitos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida 3 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.4. Menus Interface – Main Menu Appearance. The Menus Interface is constituted by the following elements: Menu Principal Medidas Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Regime de Funcionamento Funções de Protecção Automatismos Configuração de SCADA Entradas e Saídas Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Menu Principal Medidas Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Regime de Funcionamento Funções de Protecção Automatismos Configuração de SCADA Entradas e Saídas Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Menu Principal Medidas Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Regime de Funcionamento Funções de Protecção Automatismos Configuração de SCADA Entradas e Saídas Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Menu Principal Medidas Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Regime de Funcionamento Funções de Protecção Automatismos Configuração de SCADA Entradas e Saídas Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Menu Identification The first display line shows the identification of the current menu and provides the user with a reference when navigating through the menus. Menu Content Lines 3 to 14 present the several objects that constitute the menu. These objects may be other menus, function settings, measurements,… Instructions This line presents the possible actions the user can perform in the current menu. Selection Bar Corresponds to the menu line with the colour inverted regarding the remaining display Selection bar identifies which object is accessed when pressing the key. The interaction with the Menus Interface only uses the 4 navigation keys and thus is very easy to use. and keys allow moving the selection bar to the item to be accessed. There are menus constituted by several pages. So when reaching the first or final line in the menu content, it is possible to respectively go to the previous page or to the next page. When pressing the key, access is given to the selected menu. The back to the previous menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 key allows going 3-11 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.3.1. CHANGING THE VALUE OF A PARAMETER To change a parameter, do as follows Access the Menus Interface Menu Principal using the keys Medidas Medida Registo de Eventos Localizador de Defeitos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida or . ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Access the menu with the parameter to be changed using the keys , and . Menu Principal Medida Registo de Eventos Localizador de Defeitos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Transformadores de Medida Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Place the selection bar on the parameter to be changed with the keys press the and key. and Parâmetros I1N/I2N TI I1N/I2N TI U1N/U2N TT Atribuição U1N/U2N TT Fases: 100.000 Neutro: 100.000 Fases: 100.000 TT 4: TENSÃO RESIDUAL 4: 100.000 ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-12 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface In case the selected parameter is part of a password protected function, it is necessary to enter it. Inserir Password Scada:§000000 Scada:§ 000000 Insira Password Antiga:§000000 _ The complete process of entering password is described in 3.3.2. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar Press to start the parameter change. The line with the selected parameter will blink and the value can then be changed using the keys and I1N/I2N TI I1N/I2N TI U1N/U2N TT Atribuição U1N/U2N TT 3 Fases: 100.000 Neutro: 100.000 Fases: 100.000 TT 4: TENSÃO RESIDUAL 4: 100.000 . At any time you can press or Parâmetros to end to cancel the change. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar Parâmetros I1N/I2N TI I1N/I2N TI U1N/U2N TT Atribuição U1N/U2N TT Fases: 100.000 Neutro: 100.000 Fases: 200.000 100.000 TT 4: TENSÃO RESIDUAL 4: 100.000 ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar After confirming the change Parâmetros press key until the message with the confirmation request is shown in the display. CONFIRMAR ALTERAÇÕES ? Press to cancel. to confirm or ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.5. Parameters change process. Whenever the parameter of a function is changed, the TPU S420 makes a confirmation request to the user in order to validate the changes. If this confirmation request is not accepted, that is, if the changes are not confirmed, the parameters resume their original values. During the change of parameters the functions that use those parameters continue to use the most recent group of valid data. When the new parameters are confirmed, the functions start to use them as soon as they are able to make that update. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-13 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.3.2. PASSWORDS In the security philosophy adopted for the TPU S420 settings any user can see all the information. However the change of values depends on entering the correct password. The TPU S420 has three security levels to which three default factory defined passwords are associated: Protections Password: 000000. Entering this password is necessary to change the settings of the TPU S420 protection functions. Scada Password: 000001. Entering this password is necessary to change the settings of the automation and supervision functions, as well as the TPU S420 configurations. System Password: 097531. After entering this password, a new item will appear in the Main Menu: System Menu. The contents and use of this menu are described in Chapter 7 Operation. Enter a Password To enter a password the procedure is as follows: Access the Enter Password menu and press . Menu Principal Informações Inserir Password ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Change each number by pressing the , keys confirming each one with the Menu Principal Informações Inserir Acertar Password:§000000 Data e Hora 0 key. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.6. Entering password process. Change a Password To change a password do as follows: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-14 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Enter the password to be changed as described above. Menu Principal Informações Inserir Acertar Password:§000000 Data e Hora 0 ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar After entering the password a new item will appear in the main men: Change Password. Select this item and press Menu Principal 3 Informações Inserir Password Alterar Password . ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Select the password to be changed with the selection bar and press . Alterar Password Password Protecções Password Scada Password Sistema Note: This menu presents only the previously entered passwords. ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Enter the old password first changing each number with the , Password Protecções Insira Password Inserir PasswordAntiga:§000000 Antiga:§000000 _0 keys validating one by one with the key. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-15 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Finally enter the new password in the same way as before. Password Protecções Insira Password Antiga: ****** 0 Insira Nova Password:§000000 After confirming the last number, the new password will be immediately active. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.7. Password changing process 3 3.3.3. MENUS CONTENT The TPU S420 is equipped with a user-friendly configuration interface using menus. In order to simplify the use of these menus, all the groups of parameters and information are divided by function. When accessing the Menus Interface, the Main Menu will be shown. The content of this menu is longer than one page; it is therefore necessary to move to the next page to access the full content. This menu allows accessing all other menus through the respective items. Menu Principal Medida Registo de Eventos Localizador de Defeitos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Menu Principal Linha Acertar Data e Hora Informações Inserir Password Alterar Password Menu Sistema ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.8. Main Menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-16 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Measurements The Measurements menu allows accessing the TPU S420 analogue measurements, not only those directly available in the analogue inputs, but also those internally calculated. It also allows resetting the maximum values of the phase currents. Medida Medida Aceder Medidas Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Registo de Potência Limpar Registo de Corrente Parâmetros Valores por Defeito Emitida Reac Emitida Recebida Reac Recebida Máxima Máxima 3 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.9. Measurements Menu. To see the measurements values in real time it is necessary to go to the Access Measurements sub-menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-17 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Medida Aceder Medidas Aceder Medidas Corrente IA Corrente IB Corrente IC Corrente Inversa Corrente IN Soma Corrente IN Tensão UA Tensão UB Tensão UC Tensão Inversa Tensão UN Tensão UAB = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 A A A A A A kV kV kV kV kV kV ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Tensão UBC Tensão UCA Frequência Pot Activa Pot Reactiva Factor Potência E Activa Emitida E Reac Emitida E Activa Recebida E Reac REcebida Tensão UN Tensão U4 = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 kV 0.000 kV 0.000 Hz 0.000 kW 0.000 kVAr 1.000 ind 0.0000000 MWh 0.0000000 MVArh 0.0000000 MWh 0.0000000 MVArh 0.000 kV 0.000 kV 3 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Frequência U4 Dif Tensão Dif Frequência Dif Fase Temperatura Fase A Temperatura Fase B Temperatura Fase C Temperatura Média Temperatura Máxima Medida Genérica 1 Medida Genérica 2 Medida Genérica 3 = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 Hz 0.000 kV 0.000 Hz 0.000º 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 0.000 0.000 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Pot Máxima Corrente Máxima 4 = 0.000 5 = 0.000 6 = 0.000 7 = 0.000 8 = 0.000 = 0.00000 MW 15-07 05:19 = 0.00000 kA 15-07 04:33 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 3.10. Access Measurements Menu. This menu has several pages due to the high quantity of measurements available in the TPU S420. To change page press and keys. To reset the maximum values of the phase currents recorded by the TPU S420, it is necessary to select the chosen item and give the reset command as described in 3.3.4. Event Logging The events logged during the TPU S420 operation are associated with state changes of the automation logic gates. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-18 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Registo de Eventos Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos Limpar Registo de Eventos Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.11. Event Logging Menu. 3 To see the local event logging it is necessary to access the See Event Logging menu. Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos -2003-03-18 16:08:26,772 Desligação Protecção -2003-03-18 16:08:32,000 Ligação Protecção -2003-03-18 16:08:32,003 Lógica Transform Medida -2003-03-18 16:08:32,004 Lógica Hora Local -2003-03-18 16:08:32,014 Entrada Genérica 16 -2003-03-18 16:08:32,039 Saída Genérica 13 - 0->1 - 0->1 - Alteração - Alteração - 0->1 - 0->1 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 3.12. See Event Logging Menu. Since the size of these logs is normally high, only the 256 most recent events are shown in the Local Interface. Each event has the following information: Event occurrence date with 1 millisecond resolution; Event description; Description of the change occurred. The events are ordered by ascending chronological order. To navigate through the various pages use and keys. Fault Locator The TPU S420 has a fault locator automation. The last 10 logged faults can be seen in this menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-19 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Localizador Defeitos Localizador Defeitos Parâmetros Valores por Defeito Informações Limpar Informações ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.13. Fault Locator Menu. 3 To see the logged faults it is necessary to access the Information->Fault x menu. Localizador Defeitos Informações Defeito 1 Defeito 1 Data Defeito: 2001-01-01 00:00:00,000 Validade: INVÁLIDO Loop Defeito: INDISPONIVEL Distância Defeito = 0.000% Distância Defeito = 0.000 km Distância Defeito = 0.000 milha Resist secundário = 0.000 ohm Resist primário = 0.000 ohm React secundário = 0.000 ohm React primário = 0.000 ohm Resist Defeito = 0.000 ohm Desvio padrão = 0.000 ohm ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.14. Fault 1 Menu. Load Diagram The TPU S420 logs the evolution of the most interesting analogue measurements. Diagrama de Carga Diagrama de Carga Diagrama P Diagrama Q Limpar Diagramas de Carga Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mudar página; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.15. Load Diagram Menu. To see a load diagram it is necessary to access the Load Diagram menu and choose one of the logged measurements. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-20 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Diagrama de Carga Diagrama P Diagrama P 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 10:30 10:45 11:00 11:15 11:30 11:45 12:00 12:15 12:30 12:45 13:00 13:15 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.001 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 3.16. Power Diagram Menu. 3 For each one of the measurements average values of 15 minutes are logged. In the Menu Interface it is possible to see the logs of the last 24 hours. Each recorded event value has the following information: Date when the value was calculated with 1 minute resolution; Measurement average value; Measurement unit. The recorded average values are ordered in ascending chronological order. To navigate through the various pages use the and keys. Apparatus Supervision The TPU S420 can supervise a great number of control and manoeuvre apparatus. To see the information about one apparatus it is necessary to access the Apparatus Supervision menu and choose one of the available apparatus. Supervisão de Aparelhos Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Seccionador Seccionador Seccionador Seccionador Seccionador Seccionador Terra Isolamento Bypass Barras Barras 1 Barras 2 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.17. Apparatus Supervision Menu. When accessing the menu associated with the supervision of a circuit breaker, the following menu will be shown: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-21 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Disjuntor Parâmetros Informações Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.18. Circuit Breaker Supervision Menu. 3 In this menu it is possible to access the configuration menus of the various sets - Set 1 to Set 4 of the supervision function, choose the active scenario by using the Set Configuration item and see the available information for this apparatus. For circuit breakers the available information is: Number of opening manoeuvres; Sum of the square current cut, by phase; State of maximum square current cut alarm. Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Informações Informações Manobras Disjuntor = 0 Disparos Disjuntor = 0 I Cort A Disjuntor = 0.000 I Cort B Disjuntor = 0.000 I Cort C Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² A Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² B Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² C Disjuntor = 0.000 Estado Alarme Manobras: OFF Estado Alarme I²: OFF Limpar Informações kA kA kA kA² kA² kA² ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.19. Information Menu (Circuit Breaker). In the Delete Information item the user can delete the various logs saved by the TPU by selecting the chosen item and executing the corresponding order. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-22 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Número de Manobras Número de Disparos I Cortada Fase A I Cortada Fase B I Cortada Fase C Soma I² Fase A Soma I² Fase B Soma I² Fase C ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar 3 Figure 3.20. Delete Information Menu (Circuit Breaker). When accessing the menu associated with the supervision of a disconnector, the following menu will be shown. Supervisão de Aparelhos Seccionador Isolamento Seccionador Isolamento Parâmetros Informações Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.21. Insulation Disconnector Supervision Menu. The content and available functions in this menu are similar to the circuit breaker supervision menu. For disconnectors the available information is: Number of opening manoeuvres. Supervisão de Aparelhos Seccionador Isolamento Informações Informações Manobras Secc Isol = 0 Estado Alarme Manobras: OFF Limpar Informações ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.22. Information Menu (Insulation Disconnector). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-23 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface When accessing the Delete Information item, the user can delete the recorded number of opening manoeuvres for this disconnector. Operation Modes The Operation Modes menu allows seeing and setting the Operation Modes of the TPU S420. Protection Functions This menu shows all the protection functions available in the TPU S420. Its content depends on the unit’s ordering form. 3 Funções de Protecção Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Fases Máximo de Corrente de Fases 2ª Máximo de Corrente de Terra Máximo de Corrente de Terra 2ª Terras Resistentes Direccional de Fases Direccional de Terra Sequência Inversa Máximo de Tensão de Fases Máximo de Tensão de Terra Mínimo de Tensão de Fases Frequência ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Funções de Protecção Sobrecargas ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.23. Protection Functions Menu. For each function there is a configuration menu: Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Fases Máximo de Corrente de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 2 Cenário 3 Cenário 4 Configuração Cenário Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.24. Phase Overcurrent Protection Menu. This menu allows accessing the setting menus of the various protection function sets - Set 1 to 4 and choosing the active scenario by using the Set Configuration item. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-24 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Automation This menu shows all the automation functions available in the TPU S420. Automatismos Automatismos Religação Verificação de Sincronismo Deslastre/Reposição de Tensão Deslastre/Reposição de Frequência Transferência de Protecções 3 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.25. Automation Menu. For each function there is a setting menu: Automatismos Transferência de Protecções Transferência de Protecções Cenário 1 Cenário 2 Cenário 3 Cenário 4 Configuração Cenário Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.26. Protection Trip Transfer Menu. This menu allows accessing the configuration menus of the various automation function sets Set 1 to 4 and choosing the active scenario by using the Set Configuration item. Inputs and Outputs The Inputs and Outputs menu allows accessing the configuration of all digital inputs and outputs boards of the TPU S420. It also allows configuring the complementary time between double inputs. It is also possible to see the inputs state. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-25 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Entradas e Saídas Entradas e Saídas Carta I/O Base Carta I/O Expansão 1 Carta I/O Expansão 2 Entradas Duplas Estado das Entradas ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.27. Inputs and Outputs Menu. 3 Communications In this menu are available the unit’s communications configurations, including the configuration of the communication protocol with the SCADA system and the configuration of the serial ports. Its content depends on the unit’s ordering form. Comunicações Comunicações Comunicação Série Ethernet IEC104 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.28. Communications Menu. Human-Machine Interface In this menu are available the configuration of the alarms page presented in the Supervision and Command Interface and also the visualization configurations of the TPU S420 graphical display. Interface Homem-Máquina Interface Homem-Máquina Alarmes Display Oscilografia ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.29. Human-Machine Interface Menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-26 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Measurement Transformers This menu allows configuring the ratios of the measurement transformers connected to the analogue inputs of the TPU S420. Line This menu allows changing the Line parameters. These parameters are necessary for the operation of the fault locator. Set Date and Time The Set Date and Time menu allows seeing and setting the TPU S420 current date and time and also accessing the winter time/summer time change configuration menu. Acertar Data e Hora Acertar Data e Hora Data : 2003-03-14 Hora : 19:45:06 Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.30. Set Date and Time Menu. Information The Information menu allows seeing the firmware definitions of the TPU S420. The information presented in this menu should be according to the TPU S420 ordering form and to the identification tag in the back panel. The serial number should also be the same as that presented in the box. Informações Informações Versão Firmware Número de Série: 97531 Equipamento: TPU S420-Ed1-S-5A-5A-120V50Hz-D-1-1-ETH4-PT ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.31. Information Menu. The available information is: Type of Equipment; TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-27 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Firmware serial number; Nominal values of the TPU S420 and number of available elements. For example: the item CT Phase: 1.00 (3) indicates that the unit has Current Transformers associated with the phases, with nominal current of 5 A, in number of 3. The firmware version of all the TPU S420 microcontrollers can be seen when accessing the item Firmware Version and selecting the chosen microcontroller. All the versions of BOOT and NORMAL codes should be the same in all microcontrollers, for each of the type. Enter Password By selecting this item and pressing described in 3.3.2. key the password entering process will be started as Change Password This item is only shown in the menu when a valid password is entered. The Change Password menu allows configuring passwords according to the process described in 3.3.2. System Menu This item is only shown in the menu when the System Password is entered. This menu provides some special actions which are fully described in Chapter 7 - Operation. 3.3.4. OTHER A CTIONS IN MENUS INTERFACE Apart from configurations and password entering, the Menus Interface allows performing other actions in the TPU. An example is deleting the records of maximum values of analogue measurements or deleting the Chronological Event Logging presented in the Menus Interface. As in configuration confirmation, whenever the user wants to execute an action available in the Menus Interface, the TPU S420 makes a confirmation request to the user so that the action is confirmed. If that confirmation request is not accepted, the TPU will execute no action and shows the previous menu again. To illustrate the performance of this type of actions, the procedure for deleting the most recent Chronological Event Logging is presented: Access the menu where the chosen action is by using the , and keys. Menu Principal Medida Registo de Eventos Localizador de Defeitos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-28 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Place the selection bar on the Registo de Eventos chosen item with Ver Registo de Eventos Limpar Registo de Eventos Parâmetros Valores por Defeito , and press the and key. ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar In case the selected action is protected by a password, it is necessary to enter it. 3 Inserir Password Scada:§000000 Scada:§ 000000 Insira Password Antiga:§000000 _ The complete process of entering a password is described in 3.3.2. ¤/¥ alterar; E aceitar; C cancelar Press action or Limpar Registo de Eventos to confirm the CARREGUE ENTER PARA LIMPAR ! to cancel. ¤/¥ mudar página; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.32. Command execution process. Another possible action in the Menus Interface is to change the date and time of the unit. The procedure to change the date is as follows. Access the menu Set Date Menu Principal and Time and press Linha Acertar Data e Hora Informações Inserir Password . ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-29 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Place the selection bar on the Acertar Data e Hora item Date with Data:§2003-03-14 2003 Hora: 20:27:09 Parâmetros Valores por Defeito and and press key. The part of the date corresponding to the year starts blinking and the value can be changed using and any time keys. At can be pressed to end or change. to cancel the When pressing the part of the date corresponding to the month starts blinking and the value can be changed using and any time to end or change. time end or change. 3 Acertar Data e Hora Data:§2003-03-14 03 Hora: 20:27:09 Parâmetros Valores por Defeito keys. At can be pressed to cancel the When pressing the part of the date corresponding to the day starts blinking and the value can be changed using and ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Acertar Data e Hora Data:§2003-03-14 14 Hora: 20:27:09 Parâmetros Valores por Defeito keys. At any can be pressed to to cancel the ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Acertar Data e Hora When you press protection date will change. the Data: 2003-03-14 Data:§2003-03-14 Hora: 20:27:09 Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 3.33. Date Change Process. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-30 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface The procedure is similar in case of time change and it is necessary to change the hour, minutes and seconds. 3 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-31 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.4. OPERATION OF THE SUPERVISION AND COMMAND INTERFACE The Supervision and Command Interface is constituted by two elements: The Alarms Page, formed by the alarm LEDs and associated identification descriptions, shown in the graphical display; The Mimic, shown in the graphical display allows: the graphical representation of the bay configuration to which the TPU S420 is associated, the state of the apparatus and also the definition of objects for simplified access to TPU S420 functions and configurations. The Supervision and Command Interface is the default TPU S420 interface. After some time without pressing any key the TPU S420 will automatically switch to this interface and at the same time turns off the lighting lamp of the graphical display. To access the Supervision and Command Interface from the Menus Interface press the key. The switch to the Supervision and Command Interface can be done from any menu. When the interface switch occurs, the TPU S420 records in which menu or mimic page it was; and if the user decides to go back to the same interface the TPU S420 will show the recorded menu or mimic page. 3.4.1. ALARMS PAGE The alarms page is constituted by 8 LEDs to which logical variables can be associated. These variables reflect events occurring during the TPU S420 operation. These events may be protection functions start or tripping, current automation state, interlockings state, etc. Annex E. - Alarm Options table presents all possible configurations for the LEDs in the alarms page. The descriptions corresponding to the logical signalling associated with each alarm are shown in the graphical display and allow a quick view of its meaning. The alarms page configuration and operation process is described in Chapter 7 - Operation. 3.4.2. MIMIC Up to two pages with mimics can be defined. The choice of which page is shown in the graphical display is made through the keys and the TPU S420 shows the Supervision and Command Interface. The mimic configuration can only be done by using the WinProt program namely the WinMimic module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-32 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface The use of the mimic described next is based on an example mimic. It can be easily configured by the user with the help of the library that comes with the installation program and by reading the WinProt User’s Manual. After sending the mimic to the TPU S420 the Supervision and Command Interface will have the following appearance: 3 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Figure 3.34. Appearance of the display with the sample mimic. In this example every object that constitutes the mimic can be identified: Static Object This object normally corresponds to the single phase diagram of the bay to which the TPU S420 is associated with. Interaction with this object is not possible. Apparatus Object The objects of the apparatus type can be used to monitor the state of apparatus or other TPU S420 internal logical signalling. According to the configuration their state can be dynamic, where representation varies according to the current state of the logical signalling associated with them. With the correct configuration they can also have associated actions carried out by pressing the and keys. Command Object The main function of these objects is to change the state of logical interlocks. With the correct configuration they can also have associated actions carried out by pressing the keys. and Parameter Object The use of the Parameter type objects may have two options. The visualizing mode allows displaying in the Supervision and Command Interface the value of any parameter of the protection and automation functions or configuration of the TPU S420. In the Change mode it is TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-33 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface possible to change the settings of any function into pre-defined values by pressing and . Measurement Object All analogue measurements available in the TPU S420 can be seen in the Supervision and Command Interface. 0.000 Similarly the apparatus manoeuvres counters can be displayed in the mimic for a quick view. Measurements and counters are automatically updated in the same way as for the Measurements Menu in the Menus Interface. The value is updated whenever the change is higher than the precision guaranteed by the TPU S420 for that measurement. Interaction with this object is not possible. Information Line In the lower line of the Supervision and Command Interface the following information is shown: 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Description of the selected objects according to the configuration made with WinMimic; Information about the actions executed with and keys. Selecting an object To act on an existing object in the mimic first it is necessary to select it. This can be done by pressing as described next. The first time Key is pressed, it will select the first apparatus or command existing in the current mimic page. The circuit breaker is the given example. When an apparatus is selected, the area occupied by the corresponding figure will be represented in inverted colour. In the information line the apparatus description will be shown. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-34 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface When key is pressed again the next object or command in the current mimic page will be selected. All the apparatus and commands of the current mimic page will be selected when the key is repeatedly pressed. The information line will display the descriptions corresponding to each one of them. 3 . . . Figure 3.35. Use of SEL key There are some particular characteristics in the process of selecting objects in the mimic: When the last object of the current page is selected, this selection will disappear if pressed again. is Selection will also disappear if: 1.1. or keys are pressed; 1.2. The mimic visible page is changed by pressing 1.3. or or keys; keys are pressed to go to the Menus Interface. The selection is always cyclical, that is, it will always start in the same object and end in another one defined in the current page. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-35 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Act on an object To act on an object and keys are used. The action depends on the type of object. In the case of an Apparatus object with each key is associated the sending of a logical pulse to an automation logic gate (0->1->0 transition) according to the configuration made with WinMimic. For the Command object there is no difference between keys and for any state. When the object is selected by pressing any of these keys, the signalling (0->1 or 1->0) associated with that state, is sent. When the user decides to send the order it might be blocked, according to the object configuration. In that case the order will not be sent. The message Blocked Command will be shown in the information line!! TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-36 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.5. USE OF WINPROT The use of the TPU S420 interface application WinProt is the most user-friendly process to execute all TPU S420 setting and configuration actions, as well as to see all logs produced by it. 3 WinProt can carry out all actions available in the local Human-Machine Interface as well as other operations, such as: Configure the automation logic; Edit the descriptions associated with all logical variables; Simulate the protection operation; Draw the mimic; Upload and see all Chronological Event Logging stored in the TPU; Upload and see the logged oscillographies ; Upload and see the load diagrams in graphical format; Perform commissioning tests; Update the firmware. To use WinProt with TPU S420 some previous procedures are necessary to collect information about the unit for the WinProt database so that all its functions can be used. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-37 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Follow the next instructions step by step to update all necessary information about the TPU S420 to the WinProt database. From that moment on the user can configure the various TPU functions and see the information produced by it. Start WinProt WinProt.exe After installing the WinProt program, access the Windows Start menu and press Programs -> WinProt 4 -> WinProt 4. The user identification and password will be asked for when the program is started. Appropriate user id and password must be entered to have access to the desired permissions. 3 Communications The most common serial communication with the TPU S420 is established by using a serial cable commonly called “transparent” or “direct” which is equipped with a male DB9 type plug at one end and a female DB9 type plug at the other; this plug is connected to the COM3 connector of the front panel. The back serial ports can also be used as long as they are not occupied with specific communication protocols, such as DNP3.0. Those ports can be RS232, RS485 or plastic or glass optical fibre type. Communication with WinProt is established in RS232 so in other cases it is necessary to use converters for connection to the PC. If the TPU S420 has an Ethernet communication board, it will also be able to communicate with WinProt through TCP/IP or through the Ethernet board serial port. In the WinProt program menu click Communication -> Configure Communication -> Substation -> TPU x420 and choose one of the following communication types: Serial Port: Used for serial protocol communication. For this communication interface the address, port, transmission rate, data bits, end bits and parity must be configured. DNP3.0: Used in DNP3.0 protocol communication. For this communication interface the TPU and the Central Unit (CU) addresses must be configured. The local IP can be directly inserted. Lonworks: Used to configure the communication with the Lonworks local network. For this communication interface the Location String and the CU addresses must be configured. The local IP can be directly inserted. TCP/IP Used to configure the communication with Ethernet local network. For this communication interface the CU address must be configured. Add the TPU S420 to the database In the WinProt main window click the Tools link for database management. The unit’s management module of the WinProt database will be started. Click Add Unit. In the window Add Unit click Upload from Protection. The program shall receive the information from the TPU S420 and fill in all the window fields except for the Protection Description one. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-38 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface In the Protection Description field insert the name to be used as the TPU identification in the database. For example: EXAMPLE TPU S420. Click Add so that the information can be stored in the database. Click OK to exit Database Management. Logical Configuration and SOE Descriptions Press the logical edition module link in the WinProt main window. The WinLogic module will be started. This module allows configuring the automation logic and the descriptives of the Chronological Event Logging. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the units list. Press 3 button in the taskbar to receive the list of all the TPU’s logical modules. Associated with the chosen unit the list of all TPU logic modules shall appear. Select again TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the units list and press . In the communication window choose Modules, Select All and Ok successively. From this moment on WinLogic will update the database with all automation logic and SOE descriptions existing in the TPU. Functions Parameters In the WinProt main window press the settings module link. The WinSettings module will be started. This module allows configuring the parameters of the protection and automation functions and the TPU S420 configurations. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the unit list. Press button in the taskbar to receive the list of all the TPU’s logical modules. Associated with the chosen unit the list with all the unit functions shall appear. Select again TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the unit list and press button. In the communication window choose Functions, Select All and OK successively. From this moment on WinSettings will update the database with all the functions including ranges, libraries and parameters. Mimic In the WinProt main window press the mimic configuration module link. The WinMimic module will be started. This module allows drawing the mimic presented in the Supervision and Command Interface. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the units list. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-39 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Press button in the taskbar to receive the TPU S420’s mimic data. This operation is necessary to update the database regarding the mimic’s dimensions, maximum number of apparatus, etc. Associated with the chosen unit the Mimic item shall appear. By pressing this item the user will access to the Mimic configuration window. Logs In the WinProt main window press the records collection and analysis module link. The WinReports module will be started. This module allows seeing all information acquired and produced by the TPU S420. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the units list. Press button in the taskbar to receive information about the types of records available in the TPU. Associated with the chosen unit the following items shall appear: Measurements, Load Diagrams, Record of Events, Oscillography and Hardware Information. By selecting each one of these items and pressing unit’s different types of records. button the user will be allowed to receive and see the Protection Test In WinProt main window press the unit test module link. The WinTest module will be started. This module allows performing commissioning tests in the TPU S420. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE unit from the units list. Configure value, phase and frequency of each test signal by using the popup menus. Press button to start the simulation. While the simulation is in progress, there are four situations that end it: with button, when the trigger is activated and the configured transition occurs, in case there is a communication error or when the type of signal to be simulated corresponds to a pulse and ends the configured time interval. Firmware Update On the WinProt main window click the link of the firmware updating module. The WinCode module responsible for the TPU S420 firmware updating process will be started. Select the S Record (S19) file related to the processor to which you want to download the firmware. Select the TPU S420 EXAMPLE protection to configure. Start the firmware downloading process for the processor flashs by pressing the Download button. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-40 3 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface If it is necessary to update the firmware of the remaining processors repeat the process for each protection processor. (MASTER, SLAVE1 and SLAVE2) At the end check if there was any saving problem executing the operation Restart Protection. To have a more complete description of the interface program WinProt and its modules see WinProt 4.00 User’s Manual. 3 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-41 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3.6. WEBPROT USE The EFACEC’s protection and control units can provide an embedded Web server, WebProt, which allows seeing the various records and functions of the unit as well as changing the current settings. No special application is required. The WebProt server can be accessed from a browser such as Internet Explorer. 3 With WebProt it is possible to: See general unit information, such as type, ordering form, general description, type of records, version and serial number; See the list of available measurements and change those possible to be changed; See the list of load diagrams available in the unit and access each of them; See the list of event records available in the unit and access each of them; See the list of oscillographies available in the unit and access each of them; TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-42 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface 3 See the list of defaults recorded by the unit and access each of them; See the unit’s functions list; For each function, see the current setting and when in possession of access password change that setting. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-43 Chapter 3 - Human Machine Interface Access directly to support email; Access directly to EFACEC’s web page; See the number of previous unit’s WebProt accesses; Print the presented information. To start WebProt some previous Internet Explorer configurations are necessary. Internet Explorer Configurations Access the menu Tools->Internet Options, select Tab General and in Check for newer versions of stored pages, select the option Every visit to the page. Access the menu Tools->Internet Options, select Tab Connections and click LAN Settings, click Advanced and in combo box Exceptions add the unit’s IP address. Start WebProt To access the homepage of WebProt configure the browser correctly (as described in the previous point) and type in the address bar: http:// followed by the unit’s IP. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 3-44 3 4 Chapter 4. CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the configuration of the TPU S420 several interfaces: analogue inputs, digital inputs and outputs and local human-machine. It is described the use of programmable logic and other base configurations necessary for the correct operation of the protection and control functions, such as date and time of the protection. The configuration of the local area network interface has a dedicated chapter. Chapter 4 - Configuration TABLE OF CONTENTS 4.1. DATE AND TIME ......................................................................................................4-3 4.1.1. Time Synchronization..................................................................................................4-3 4.1.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................4-4 4.1.3. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................4-7 4.2. MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS...................................................................................4-8 4.2.1. Configuration...............................................................................................................4-8 4.2.2. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................4-9 4.3. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS..................................................................................4-11 4.3.1. Inputs ........................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.3.2. Outputs ..................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.3.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-15 4.3.4. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-19 4.4. LOCAL INTERFACE..................................................................................................4-21 4.4.1. Display ...................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.4.2. Alarms Page.............................................................................................................. 4-21 4.4.3. Mimic ........................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.4.4. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-28 4.4.5. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-30 4.5. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ...........................................................................................4-31 4.5.1. Logical Variables....................................................................................................... 4-31 4.5.2. Logic Inference ......................................................................................................... 4-35 4.5.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-36 4.6. OPERATION MODES................................................................................................4-42 4.6.1. Operation Modes Types ........................................................................................... 4-42 4.6.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-42 4.6.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-44 4.7. OSCILLOGRAPHY ...................................................................................................4-50 4.7.1. Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 4-50 4.7.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 4-50 4.7.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 4-51 Total of pages of the chapter: 52 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-2 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.1. DATE AND TIME The protection date and time configuration is essential for the correct event time-tagging reported by the TPU S420. It is also necessary to time-tag the changes of the groups of parameters and other logs produced by the protection. The process used assures an accurate time-tag and allows time synchronization mechanisms that ensure equal dates in different units. 4.1.1. TIME SYNCHRONIZATION The protection’s internal time and date update depends on the synchronization type: Internal synchronization when the protection is not integrated in a local area network; SCADA Protocol synchronization when the synchronization signal is established by the SCADA system; SNTP synchronization when the synchronization is made through the SNTP protocol. IRIG-B synchronization when the synchronisation is made through an IRIG-B signal. Internal Synchronization (RTC) When the TPU S420 operates separately from any communication network event time-tagging is made automatically. Obviously in this case it is not possible to assure synchronization among different units. Current date and time can be configured in the TPU S420 directly from its local interface, as described in Chapter 3 – Human Machine Interface. The high accuracy of the internal clock allows obtaining event time-tags with 1ms resolution. A real time clock (RTC) ensures that, even when the protection is switched off, the time is still updated, so that periods of power off and start up of the unit do not have serious effect on time-tagging. The error in this situation is less than 1s. Event time-tags recorded by the TPU S420 are always made in the local time of the country or globe zone where it is installed. It is possible to set the deviation of the time zone relative to the reference given by the GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) time, as well as the day and hour of start and end of the summer period, according to the legal regulations. With this data configured the protection is automatically in charge of the time changes during its operation. SCADA Protocol Synchronization When the TPU S420 is integrated in a local area network, the time is established by it. The protection periodically receives a time synchronization signal foreseen in the communication protocol that assures the events synchronous time-tagging in all substation units. Changes made to date in the local interface are not effective. However date and time continue to be refreshed in the RTC so that after a protection’s temporary power off, even removing the connection to the communication network, time is still approximately correct, with maximum error of 1 s. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-3 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration The time broadcast in the LAN network can be the local time or can be referred to GMT time. The last option is preferable because the synchronization signal is received only with a time interval of a few seconds, which allows the change of the summer period to be made in the exact moment that it occurs. If the network broadcasts the time relative to GMT meridian, all data regarding the time zone and the yearly changes should be configured in the protection to convert GMT time to local time. If the time signal broadcast in the network is already the local time, including the two changes per year, then the automatic time change should not be configured in the protection, the network will be responsible for this function. SNTP Synchronization Alternatively to the messages received from SCADA, time synchronization of the TPU S420 can be implemented by SNTP protocol. Internal updating of date and time in the protection is similar to that mentioned in the previous point. IRIG-B Synchronization It is important sometimes that units that are not connected in network be synchronised among themselves. In this case the synchronisation can be made using a time server distributor of an IRIG-B signal. The operation mode of the date and time internal update in the protection is similar to the previous points. 4.1.2. CONFIGURATION The Synchronization parameter allows selecting the source of synchronism among the options INTERNAL (without exterior synchronization), SNTP or SCADA. To configure local time zone and changes from winter period to summer period and vice-versa, the data presented next should be configured. The time difference between local time and GMT time during the winter period can be positive if local time is advanced regarding GMT time (East zone of Greenwich meridian ), or negative if it is delayed (West zones). Configure the parameter Offset Winter Time> Signal to POSITIVE or NEGATIVE. The parameters Offset Winter Time> Hours, Offset Winter Time> Minutes and Offset Winter Time> Seconds respectively indicate the number of hours, minutes and seconds of difference. The time difference during the summer period has similar configuration. The parameter Offset Summer Time> Signal indicates whether local time is in advance (POSITIVE) or in delay (NEGATIVE) regarding GMT time. The parameters Offset Summer Time> Hours, Offset Summer Time> Minutes and Offset Summer Time> Seconds quantify the difference. Normally the summer period is one hour advanced regarding the winter period. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-4 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Acertar Data e Hora Parâmetros Parâmetros Sincronização: INTERNA Offset Inverno> Sinal: POSITIVO Offset Inverno> Horas: 0 Offset Inverno> Minutos: 0 Offset Inverno> Segundos: 0 Offset Verão> Sinal: POSITIVO Offset Verão> Horas: 1 Offset Verão> Minutos: 0 Offset Verão> Segundos: 0 Hora Verão> Estado: ON Hora Verão> Formato: DIA DA SEMANA Hora Verão> Dia Ano: 90 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Parâmetros Hora Verão> Dia Semana: DOMINGO Hora Verão> Semana: 5 Hora Verão> Mês: MARCO Hora Verão> Hora: 1 Hora Verão> Minuto: 0 Hora Verão> Segundo: 0 Fim Hora Verão> Estado: ON Fim Hora Verão> Formato: DIA DA SEMANA Fim Hora Verão> Dia Ano: 300 Fim Hora Verão> Dia Semana: DOMINGO Fim Hora Verão> Semana: 5 Fim Hora Verão> Mês: OUTUBRO 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Parâmetros Fim Hora Verão> Hora: 1 Fim Hora Verão> Minuto: 0 Fim Hora Verão> Segundo: 0 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.1. Parameters Menu (Set Date and Time). The group of data regarding the start of the summer period allows setting the instant/moment of change from the winter period to the summer period. A similar group of parameters allows configuring the complementary time change corresponding to the end of the summer period. For example, in the first case the parameter Summer Time> State indicates if this period is active. There are two configuration possibilities in Summer Time> Date Format parameter: DAY OF THE YEAR or DAY OF THE WEEK. The fist option activates Summer Time> Day of the Year, which indicates the day when time changes: between 1 and 366, 1 being January 1st and 366 being December 31st. To avoid changing this parameter in leap years, February 28th always corresponds to the 59th day and March 1st to the 61st day, independently of existing or not February 29th. The 60th day is automatically converted to the 61st day in non leap years. In the second option the date of time change is specified by a weekday configured by the parameter Summer Time> Day of the Week (from SUNDAY to SATURDAY), Summer Time> Week (from 1 to 5) and Summer Time> Month (from JANUARY to DECEMBER). Week 1 means the first occurrence of the day chosen in the indicated month; week 2 means the second occurrence and so forth. Week 5 means the last occurrence of that same day in the month (in fact it can be the fifth but also the fourth if in that year and month there is only four weekdays equal to the chosen one). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-5 Chapter 4 - Configuration Independently from the chosen option, the data indicating the moment of the day when time moves forward or backwards must be configured in Summer Time> Hours, Summer Time> Minutes and Summer Time> Seconds. Default setting corresponds to data in continental Portugal. The winter time coincides with GMT time (deviation of 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds) and in the summer period there is one hour in advance (positive difference of 1 hour, 0 minutes and 0 seconds). The start of the summer period occurs at 1 am in the last Sunday of March every year: 1 hour, 0 minutes and 0 seconds of Sunday of the fifth (or fourth) week of March. The summer period also ends at 1 am in the last Sunday of October every year: 1 hour, 0 minutes and 0 seconds of Sunday of the fifth (or fourth) week of October. Therefore, the active configuration is the day of the week option. For any other country in the world, the same parameters must be configured according to the legal time regulations. Table 4.1. Time parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..1 1 Synchronization INTERNAL / SNTP / SCADA / IRIG-B INTERNAL Std Time Offset> Sign POSITIVE / NEGATIVE POSITIVE Std Time Offset> Hours 0..14 h 0 Std Time Offset> Minutes 0..59 min 0 Std Time Offset> Seconds 0..59 s 0 Saving Offset> Sign POSITIVE / NEGATIVE Saving Offset> Hours 0..14 h 1 Saving Offset> Minutes 0..59 min 0 Saving Offset> Seconds 0..59 s 0 Saving> Status OFF / ON ON Saving> Format DAY OF THE YEAR / DAY OF THE WEEK DAY OF THE WEEK Saving> Year Day 1..366 d 90 Saving> Week 1..5 w 5 Saving> Weekday SUNDAY / MONDAY / TUESDAY / WEDNESDAY / THURSDAY / FRIDAY / SATURDAY day SUNDAY Saving> Month JANUARY / FEBRUARY/ MARCH / APRIL / MAY / JUNE / JULY / AUGUST / SEPTEMBER / OCTOBER / NOVEMBER / DECEMBER month MARCH Saving> Hour 0..23 h 1 Saving> Minute 0..59 min 0 Saving> Second 0..59 s 0 End Saving> Status OFF / ON TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default value 4 POSITIVE ON 4-6 Chapter 4 - Configuration Parameter Range Unit Default value End Saving> Format YEAR DAY / WEEK DAY End Saving> Year Day 1..366 Day 300 End Saving> Week 1..5 week 5 End Saving> Weekday SUNDAY / MONDAY / TUESDAY / WEDNESDAY / FRIDAY / FRIDAY / SATURDAY Day SUNDAY End Saving> Month JANUARY / FEBRUARY/ MARCH / APRIL / MAY / JUNE / JULY / AUGUST / SEPTEMBER / OCTOBER / NOVEMBER / DECEMBER month OCTOBER End Saving> Hour 0..23 h 1 End Saving> Minute 0..59 min 0 End Saving> Second 0..59 s 0 WEEK DAY 4 4.1.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC Some logical variables related to the configuration of the protection’s date and time allow the user to have in the Event Log information of events associated with manual or automatic time changes. Together with those indicated in Table 4.2, the variables associated with the change of parameters, logic or descriptions are also available (see Chapter 6.1). Table 4.2. Description of the time module logical variables. Id Name Description 3584 Daylight Saving Time Start Indication of the moment when the winter period changes to the summer period 3585 Daylight Saving Time End Indication of the moment when the summer period changes to the winter period 3586 Time MMI Indication of current time change in the protection local interface 3587 Unit Restart Indication of protection’s power on time 3588 Unit Reset Indication of protection’s power off time TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-7 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.2. MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS The configuration of the measurement transformer is only related to the connections of the analogue inputs board. The TPU S420 allows configuring, in case of the AC inputs, the ratio of the current transformer (CT) or the voltage transformer (VT) connected to each one of the current or voltage inputs, respectively by group of inputs. n TI n TT I nom, prim TI I nom,sec TI U nom, prim TT U nom,sec TT (4.1) (4.2) The configuration of the measurement transformers is necessary for the correct presentation of the measurements in primary values in the local and remote interface of the TPU S420. The values observed in the protection inputs (CT or VT secondary) are multiplied by the configured transformer ratio in order to obtain the corresponding values in the primary. The protection functions are not affected by this configuration because the respective operational settings are configured in per unit values of nominal current (or voltage) of the associated analogue input. In order to increase the protection functions sensitivity it can be chosen a different nominal value for the current inputs from the respective CT secondary nominal value. This can be particularly useful for the fourth current input when observing low value fault currents. For example, choosing a nominal value of 0.2A for a CT with the secondary 1A allows increasing 5 times the input sensitivity. It must be taken into account the protection functions regulations should be multiplied, in this case, by 5 relating the required values. The regulation of an operational threshold to 0.1 pu (10% of 0.2A) corresponds effectively to a real value of 0.2 pu (2%) concerning the substation CT. On the other hand, it must be also taken into account that, increasing the input sensitivity, the acceptable maximum current value is also inferior (on the example referred, 5 times). 4.2.1. CONFIGURATION There are 5 parameters corresponding to the 4 groups of AC analogue inputs that may be configured in the TPU S420: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-8 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Transformadores de Medida Parâmetros Parâmetros I1N/I2N TI I1N/I2N TI U1N/U2N TT Atribuição U1N/U2N TT Fases: 100.000 Neutro: 100.000 Fases: 100.000 TT 4: TENSÃO RESIDUAL 4: 100.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.2. Measurement Converters Menu. The I1N/I2N Phase CT parameter is the ratio of the three phase CT mounted in the line; the U1N/U2N Phase VT parameter is the ratio of the three phase VT. The I1N/I2N Ground CT is the ratio of the associated CT transformation to the fourth current input: in case of being a toroidal CT which measures the residual current, it’s that transformer ratio, in case of Holmgreen connection, the parameter value must be the same of the I1N/I2N Phase CT ratio. The U1N/U2N VT 4 is the transformation ratio of the VT connected to the fourth voltage input. This input meaning can be configured on the Assignment VT 4, among the options RESIDUAL VT (measure of the three phase voltages sum) or a BAR VT (for example, a measure of a bus-bar phase voltage). Table 4.3. Measurement converters parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..1 1 I1N/I2N Phase CT 1..10000 100 I1N/I2N Ground CT 1..10000 100 U1N/U2N Phase VT 1..10000 100 Assignment VT 4 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE / BAR VOLTAGE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE U1N/U2N VT 4 1..10000 100 4.2.2. AUTOMATION LOGIC The logical module associated with the measurement transformers is composed by several variables that indicate the state of the voltage transformers. These inputs allow up to two VT groups to be monitored by binary inputs that do not necessarily need to correspond to the VT whose voltage is measured in the analogue inputs of the TPU S420. There are also available the variables associated with the change of parameters, logic or descriptions (see Chapter 6.1). Table 4.4. Description of the logical variables of the measurement transformers module. Id Name Description 4352 VT 1 Disconnected Input associated with VT 1 disconnected 4353 VT 1 Connected Input associated with VT 1 connected TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-9 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Id Name Description 4354 VT 1 WithDrawn Input associated with VT 1 extracted 4355 VT 1 Inserted Input associated with VT 1 inserted 4356 VT 2 Disconnected Input associated with VT 2 disconnected 4357 VT 2 Connected Input associated to VT 2 connected 4358 VT 2 WithDrawn Input associated with VT 2 extracted 4359 VT 2 Inserted Input associated with VT 2 inserted 4360 VT 1 State VT 1 state resulting from the two Connected/Disconnected VT 1 inputs 4361 VT 1 Position VT 1 position resulting from the two Extracted/Inserted VT 1 inputs 4362 VT 2 State VT 2 state resulting from the two Connected/Disconnected VT 2 inputs 4363 VT 2 Position VT 2 position resulting from the two Extracted/Inserted VT 2 inputs 4 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-10 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.3. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Together with the analogue inputs, the digital (or binary) inputs and outputs are the other important interface with the energy system. The digital inputs allow obtaining the states of the circuit breakers associated with the bay, as well as the state of other alarms or auxiliary contacts. The binary outputs allow executing commands on those apparatus or reporting to the exterior other interesting indications. It is essential that the configuration of the digital inputs and outputs corresponds exactly to the connections made so that the protection may operate correctly. The TPU S420 has 9 digital inputs and 6 binary outputs as base but this number can be expanded with dedicated expansion boards in a maximum of 2. There are three types of expansion boards available – one board of 16 inputs, one board of 9 inputs and 6 outputs and another one of 15 outputs - which can be used in any configuration, as described in Chapter 2 Installation. 4.3.1. INPUTS Physical and Logical Inputs The available options of inputs and outputs boards allow a maximum of 73 inputs in the same protection unit, all isolated among each other. These are the physical inputs as they correspond to effectively existing contacts. + IN x - Every binary input is of programmable logic allocation, so the meaning of each contact can be chosen from a group of available options. These options are the logical inputs that correspond to logical variables that can be used by the protection and control functions, can affect the interlockings logic or simply monitor states of the energy system. There are no restrictions in allocating logical inputs to each of the physical contacts. However, you should take in consideration that when allocating the same logical variable to more than one physical input, you may create inconsistent internal states if they are not in accordance. This situation should be avoided. The list of logical inputs covers the most frequent applications, especially the states associated with several circuit breakers and disconnectors. This list can be found in Annex C. - Inputs Options Table. Apart from this list there are generic logical variables available (as many as the maximum number of inputs possible), without default allocated meaning. These generic inputs can be configured by the user to represent logical states not covered in the previous options. These variables can only serve to supervise these states but may also have implications in the remaining automation logic. Therefore, you should use the logic configuration tool provided by the WinProt (see Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-11 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Inputs Validation The TPU S420 has several validation mechanisms of input transition. Digital filtering is used on every binary input to eliminate the contacts self-chattering or the noise from the power equipment. Transitions are only considered if the input remains in the new state for at least a minimum time (corresponding to a number of configurable confirmations performed at a rate of one per millisecond). The filtering mechanism does not affect the correct time-tagging of the start of each state transition. Input t 1ms T Status T 4 Figure 4.3. Digital inputs filtering (example: confirmations nr. equal to 5). There is also a maximum acceptable number of transitions per second for each input, as shown in Figure 4.4. When that number is exceeded all posterior transitions are not considered and an alarm indication is generated. This alarm is cancelled if the input state changes stop and the input remains stable for one second. ... Input 1s 1s ... Status ... Invalidity Figure 4.4. Digital inputs validation (example: maximum nr. of state changes per second equal to 5). The complementary logical inputs (for example, open circuit breaker and closed circuit breaker) have one additional validation: the two single inputs cannot be in the same state for longer than a maximum configurable period, after which an invalid state indication is activated. The state of the double variable remains in the value it had prior to the invalidity. This situation ends if the two single inputs become again in complementary states. There is a single complementary period for all pairs of logical inputs. If only one of the two inputs is configured, this validation does not take effect and the state variable is completely defined by the single variable. For example, if only the closed circuit breaker input is configured, the circuit breaker state will be open if the input is in the level 0 and closed if in the level 1. If only the open circuit breaker input is configured, the situation will be the opposite. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-12 Chapter 4 - Configuration Status 0 Status 1 Two-Status Invalidity Complem T. Figure 4.5. Complementary inputs validation. 4.3.2. OUTPUTS Physical and Logical Outputs A OUT x B The available options of inputs and outputs boards allow a maximum of 36 outputs in the same protection unit, all isolated among each other. These are the physical outputs as they effectively correspond to existing contacts. The sixth output of the base board has a fixed meaning and is activated by the internal watchdog in case of protection failure. This is a double contact (change-over) and is placed in the normal operation state only after verification of the initial self-tests. Apart from protection failure, the internal watchdog is activated in situations of serious errors such as: Errors in the access to the non volatile memory which prevent the update of the parameters and other logs; Failure of communication with the microprocessor of the analogue/digital conversion board which prevents receiving the samples; Failure of communication among the internal microprocessors that may cause loss of functionalities; System resources fully used. The remaining binary outputs are of programmable logic allocation. So the meaning of each contact can be chosen from a group of available options. These options are the logical outputs that correspond to logical variables updated by the protection and control functions, or by the automation logic. There are no restrictions in allocating logical outputs to each of those physical contacts. Actually, the same variable can be allocated to different physical outputs and all are activated simultaneously. Two of the TPU S420 base board outputs (one of which the watchdog) and two on each of type 1 expansion boards outputs are double (change-over). In type 3 expansion boards (15 outputs), the number of these double contacts is six. These outputs allow providing a solution for logic interlockings that use normally closed contacts, thus not requiring auxiliary relays. Two type 1 expansion boards provide 5 normally closed contacts besides the watchdog contact. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-13 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration The list of logical inputs covers the most frequent applications, especially the commands of the apparatus associated with the bay and the trippings of the protection functions. This list can be found in Annex D. - Output Options Table . Apart from this list there are generic logical variables available (as many as the maximum number of outputs possible), without default allocated meaning. These generic outputs can be configured by the user to generate indications to the exterior not covered in the previous options, for example logical combinations of generic outputs. Therefore, you should use the logic configuration tool provided by the WinProt (see Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic). Outputs Type Outputs can be configured as one of two types: indication or pulse. As indication, the output contact follows exactly the state of the logical variable it is allocated to: the output is activated when the variable changes to the logical state 1, and resets when the variable changes to the logical state 0. This type can be used for example as indications of protection functions start. The outputs defined as pulse are also activated when the respective variable changes to 1; but in this case, they remain active for a configurable fixed period, independently from the state of the variable that originated them. This type should be specifically used for the open and close commands of the circuit breakers and disconnectors. INDICATION Variable Output PULSE Variable Output Command T Command T Figure 4.6. Outputs operation modes. The outputs allocated to open and close commands of circuit breakers and disconnectors should be configured as pulses with duration longer than the opening time of the auxiliary contact located in the apparatus itself. This procedure is taken in order to prevent that it is the protection contact to open that highly inductive circuit which could cause high overvoltages and therefore result in equipment damage. Independently from the specific configuration, the operations of output contacts are permanently monitored: after commands are sent, the effective operation of output contacts is checked by the presence of voltage in the respective coils. Besides, all operations are blocked if there is voltage in the coils in the absence of ongoing commands to avoid the risk of untimely commands on the energy equipment. The TPU S420 indicates all operation detected errors. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-14 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.3.3. CONFIGURATION The configuration of digital inputs and outputs is made for each board individually and is identical for all boards. The State parameter indicates whether the respective board is ABSENT or PRESENT. The Type parameter allows choosing the specific board configuration from the four available options (for expansion boards). Its value should correspond exactly to the physical configuration existing in the protection, before the configured inputs and outputs are used. For the base board these two configurations are fixed and correspond to the only possible option. Entradas e Saídas Carta I/O Base Parâmetros Parâmetros Estado: PRESENTE Tipo: 9I + 5O Entradas Saídas 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.7. Parameters Menu (Base I/O Board). The correct procedure when adding an expansion board to one protection or when replacing an existing board by a different type should consider the following steps: Configure the desired expansion board as ABSENT. Power off the protection. Introduce the new board or replace the existing board by the new one. Power on the protection. Enter the correct parameters according to the new hardware configuration. Each physical input has three configurable parameters. The E[n]> Config parameter is the correspondence to the internal logical variable and can be chosen from a list of pre-defined options, that includes the generic inputs. By choosing the option NO ALLOCATION the respective input is not used. The E[n]> T Confirmation parameter is the required number of confirmations necessary to consider valid the transition of a given input. The E[n]> Max Trans/Second parameter is the maximum number of transitions per second acceptable for a given input, if that number is exceeded originates an indication of invalidity. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-15 Chapter 4 - Configuration Entradas e Saídas Carta I/O Base Parâmetros Entradas Configuração Lógica Configuração Lógica E1> E2> E3> E4> E5> E6> E7> E8> E9> Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Tempo de Confirmação Tempo de Confirmação E1> E2> E3> E4> E5> E6> E7> E8> E9> T T T T T T T T T Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: Confirmação: 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Máximo Transições/Segundo Máximo Transições/Segundo E1> E2> E3> E4> E5> E6> E7> E8> E9> Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: Trans/Segundo: 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.8. Inputs related menus. Each physical output (except the watchdog) also has three configurable parameters. The S[n]> Config parameter is the correspondence to the internal logical variable as for the inputs, and can be chosen from a list of pre-defined options, that includes the generic outputs. The option NO ALLOCATION corresponds to the non-use of that output. The S[n]> Operation parameter should be configured to INDICATION if you wish the output to replicate the state of the variable defined in the previous parameter or PULSE if you wish the contact to remain activated for a fixed period. That period should be configured in the S[n]> T Pulse parameter. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-16 Chapter 4 - Configuration Entradas e Saídas Carta I/O Base Parâmetros Saídas Configuração Lógica Configuração Lógica S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Operação Operação S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Tempo de Impulso Tempo de Impulso S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> T T T T T Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.9. Outputs related menus. The Validation Time parameter indicates the maximum time that single and complementary inputs can remain in the same state. It is valid for all pairs of complementary logical inputs, but only for those pairs where both inputs are configured. Entradas e Saídas Entradas Duplas Parâmetros Parâmetros Tempo Validação: 10.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.10. Double Inputs Parameters Menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-17 Chapter 4 - Configuration Table 4.5. Digital inputs and outputs parameters (base board). Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..1 1 Status PRESENT PRESENT Type 9I + 5O 9I + 5O I1> Config I1> Confirm Time 1..128 I1> Max Trans/Second 1..255 ms 20 5 ... I9> Config I9> Confirm Time 1..128 ms 20 I9> Max Trans/Second 1..255 5 O1> Operation PULSE / INDICATION INDICATION O1> Pulse Time 0,02..5 O1> Config s 0,12 ... O5> Config O5> Operation PULSE / INDICATION O5> Pulse Time 0,02..5 INDICATION s 0,12 Table 4.6. Digital inputs and outputs parameters (expansion boards 1 and 2). Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..1 1 Status ABSENT / /PRESENT ABSENT Type 9I + 6O / 16I / 15O 16I I1> Config I1> Confirm Time 1..128 I1> Max Trans/Second 1..255 ms 20 5 ... I32> Config I32> Confirm Time 1..128 ms 20 I32> Max Trans/Second 1..255 5 O1> Operation PULSE / INDICATION INDICATION O1> T Pulse 0,02..5 O1> Config s 0,12 ... O15> Config O15> Operation PULSE / INDICATION O15> Pulse Time 0,02..5 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 INDICATION s 0,12 4-18 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Table 4.7. Complementary inputs parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..1 Validation Time 1..30 Unit Defautl Value 1 s 10 4.3.4. AUTOMATION LOGIC Each digital input and output board has an associated logic module, composed by several variables. That list is prepared for boards with a maximum of 16 inputs and 8 outputs, although some of those variables may have no meaning, depending on the existing hardware configuration. To learn more about the possible logical configurations, see Chapter 4.5 Programmable Logic. Table 4.8. Logical variable description of the base board module. Id Name Description 4864 Generic Input 1 ... ... Logical variables without default allocated meaning, configurable as inputs in any I/O board 4895 Generic Input 32 4896 MainBoard Input 1 State ... ... 4904 MainBoard Input 9 State 4905 MainBoard IN 1 Validity ... ... 4913 MainBoard IN 9 Validity 4914 Generic Output 1 ... ... 4929 Generic Output 16 4930 MainBoard Output 1 ... ... 4934 MainBoard Output 5 4935 MainBoard Output 1 Error ... ... 4939 MainBoard Output 5 Error 4940 IO Main Board HW Error Corresponding physical input state (with or without applied voltage) Physical input state validity, depending on the number of transitions detected per second Logical variables without default allocated meaning, configurable as outputs in any I/O board Physical output contact state (open or closed) Operation error information when executing a command on the corresponding output Board state (operational or out of order) Table 4.9. Logical variable description of the expansion board1 module. Id Name Description 5120 ExpBoard 1 Input 1 State ... ... Corresponding physical input state (with or without applied voltage) 5135 ExpBoard 1 Input 16 State TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-19 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Id Name Description 5136 ExpBoard 1 IN 1 Validity ... ... Physical input state validity, depending on the number of transitions detected per second 5151 ExpBoard 1 IN 16 Validity 5152 ExpBoard 1 Output 1 ... ... 5166 ExpBoard 1 Output 15 5167 ExpBoard 1 Output 1 Error ... ... 5181 ExpBoard 1 Output 15 Error 5182 IO ExpBoard 1 HW Error Physical output contact state (open or closed) Operation error information when executing a command on the corresponding output Board state (operational or out of order) Table 4.10. Logical variable description of the expansion board 2 module. 4 Id Name Description 5376 ExpBoard 2 Input 1 State ... ... Corresponding physical input state (with or without applied voltage) 5391 ExpBoard 2 Input 16 State 5392 ExpBoard 2 IN 1 Validity ... ... 5407 ExpBoard 2 IN 16 Validity 5408 ExpBoard 2 Output 1 ... ... 5422 ExpBoard 2 Output 15 5423 ExpBoard 2 Output 1 Error ... ... 5437 ExpBoard 2 Output 15 Error 5438 IO ExpBoard 2 HW Error Physical input state validity, depending on the number of transitions detected per second Physical output contact state (open or closed) Operation error information when executing a command on the corresponding output Board state (operational or out of order) The variables corresponding to generic logical inputs and outputs are located in the base board module because this board is present in every possible hardware configuration. However, these variables can be allocated to contacts of any of the inputs and outputs board. Besides the variables indicated in the previous tables, each board has available variables associated with the change of parameters, logic or descriptions (see Chapter 6.1). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-20 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.4. LOCAL INTERFACE The information available in the local human-machine interface of the TPU S420 can be configured in the most convenient way for the user. This configuration comprises the alarms page associated with the front panel LEDs and the mimic represented in the display. 4.4.1. DISPLAY The graphical display of the TPU S420 allows two types of adjustments to facilitate the visualization: visualization mode and contrast adjustment. The contrast adjustment allows having more or less display brightness. It is advised to keep luminosity in the minimum limit without compromising a comfortable visualization in order to avoid accelerated wearing out of the LCD. There are two possible visualization modes: white characters in black background or black characters in white background. The option is chosen by the user. Menu Principal Menu Principal Medida Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora Medida Registo de Eventos Diagrama de Carga Supervisão de Aparelhos Modos de Operação Funções de Protecção Automatismos Entradas e Saídas Comunicações Interface Homem-Máquina Transformadores de Medida Acertar Data e Hora ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.11. LCD visualization modes. 4.4.2. ALARMS PAGE The alarms page corresponds to the 8 LEDs on the left side of the protection display. Each LED can be associated with logical variables that report events occurring during the operation of the TPU S420. These events can be protection functions starts or trips, current state of automation functions and interlockings, etc. The Annex E. - Alarm Options table presents all possible configuration options for the alarms page LEDs. This list of options includes variables without default allocated logic meaning. These generic alarms can be configured by the user to represent indications not covered in the previous options, for example, their logical combinations. Therefore, you should use the logic configuration tool provided by the TPU S420 (see Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic). The descriptions corresponding to logical indications associated with each alarm are presented in the graphical display when it is with the Command and Supervision Interface, allowing a quick view of its meaning. Each descriptive is limited to 20 characters. It can be edited by using the TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-21 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration WinSettings module of the WinProt. The descriptive edition cannot be made in the local interface. It is also possible to configure the behaviour of the several alarms regarding the state transition of each associated logical variable. There are two possible configurations: Latched: when configured as latched the LED state reflects directly the logical variable state, that is, it will be on when the variable has the logical value 1 and off in the opposite situation. This configuration should be used to represent for example the state of blocked automation functions. Alarm: in this configuration the alarms page LEDs will be on as soon as the associated logical variable is in the logical state 1, and will stay on even if their logical state changes to 0. To acknowledge – “delete” – the LEDs that are on in the alarms page it is necessary to press the key. Then all alarms which associated logical variable has logical value 0 will be deleted. This configuration is the most appropriate to represent the tripping of the protection functions because the indication remains active after the fault until it is acknowledged by the user. INDICATION Variable Alarm ALARM Variable Alarm Figure 4.12. Alarms operation modes. 4.4.3. MIMIC In the front display of the TPU S420 it is possible to graphically represent information associated with the power equipment, whether acquired in the analogue and digital inputs or by the local area network. This interface also provides an easy operation of that equipment as well as the execution of other commands on the protection. The mimic represented in the protection display can be fully configured by the user, in order to adjust it to the substation specific configuration and to the information one wishes to visualize. This configuration can only be executed by using the WinMimic module of the WinProt. The mimic is composed by two different parts: one static part and one dynamic part. The last part comprises four types of objects: apparatus, commands, parameters and measures. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-22 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Static Mimic The mimic static graphical information does not depend on variable states or protection measures. It is used to represent components associated with for example, busbars, lines, transformers, cable connections between the equipment and the switch devices as well as nonmonitored circuit breakers and disconnectors. The static part may also include text such as bay or measurements identification. The static part configuration corresponds to the definition of one bitmap with the drawing of those components. This bitmap can have one or two pages, each with the size reserved for the mimic in the protection display (120 128 pixel). Apparatus Type Objects Apparatus type objects firstly serve to represent the state of circuit breakers and disconnectors, which depends on the state of the internal logical variables. The apparatus can be commanded or not. These objects can also be used to represent variables not associated with apparatus and to execute other type of commands. 4 Figure 4.13. Apparatus type objects configuration. The parameters associated with this type of object are the following (example is given for an object representing a circuit breaker): X, Y: vertical and horizontal dimensions of the apparatus drawing. Bitmap State 0: drawing corresponding to logical value 0 of the State variable. Bitmap State 1: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the State variable. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-23 Chapter 4 - Configuration Bitmap Undefined State00: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the Undefined State00 variable, independently from the logical value of the State variable. Bitmap Undefined State11: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the Undefined State11 variable, independently from the logical value of the State variable. Bitmap Background State 0: drawing corresponding to logical value 0 of the Background State variable. Bitmap Background State 1: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the Background State variable. Bitmap Background Undefined State: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the Background Undefined State variable, independently from the logical value of the Background State variable. Module: logical module to which belong all variables that define the states and the operations of the apparatus. State: logical variable representing the apparatus state (for example open or closed circuit breaker) that defines which of the state associated bitmaps is visualized in each moment. Undefined State00: logical variable that is activated when the apparatus state is considered invalid (both inputs with logical value 0). In this situation the associated drawing corresponds to Bitmap Undefined State00. Undefined State11: logical variable that is activated when the apparatus state is considered invalid (both inputs with logical value 1). In this situation the associated drawing corresponds to Bitmap Undefined State11. Background State: logical variable that defines the background drawing in the area reserved to the object. This state can be associated with additional information on the apparatus, for example the apparatus position (if inserted or extracted). Undefined Background State: logical variable equivalent to Undefined State, but associated with the background drawing. Command Key 0: logical variable that is activated when the object is selected and the key is pressed. It is frequently used as local command for apparatus opening. The command is of pulse type, that is, the variable is placed in the Level logical value and then in the complementary level, Level opposite. Command Key 1: logical variable that is activated when the object is selected and the key is pressed (for example the local command for apparatus closing ). The command is of pulse type as the previous one. Locked Command Key 0: logical variable that with value 1 indicates that the command associated with the key is blocked (for instance blocking the local opening of the circuit breaker). When in locked situation, the order is not sent and in the instructions line is displayed the message Locked Command !!. Locked Command Key 1: logical variable that with value 1 indicates that the command associated with the key is blocked (blocking the local closing of the circuit breaker). When in locked situation, the order is not sent and in the instructions line is displayed the message Locked Command !!. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-24 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Level: logical value indicated by the user in the configuration. Validity: all previous variables can be defined or not as an option by enabling the respective validity field (for example blockings may not be defined for the executed commands). Descriptive: apparatus identification text displayed in the instructions line when the apparatus is selected. The object’s position is automatically defined by its location related to the static part of the bitmap. Control Type Objects Control type objects allow imposing the state of internal logical variables directly from the protection mimic. The parameters associated with this type of object are the following: 4 Figure 4.14. Command type objects configuration. X, Y: vertical and horizontal dimensions of the object’s drawing. Bitmap State 0: drawing corresponding to logical value 0 of the State variable. Bitmap State 1: drawing corresponding to logical value 1 of the State variable. State: logical variable (and respective module) representing the object’s state and defining which of the state associated bitmaps is visualized on each moment. The change of this variable value should be directly or indirectly associated with the variables defined by the Command parameter. Command Type: definition of command type: pulse or indication. Command: logical variable (and respective module) which state is changed when the object is selected and one of the or keys is pressed, if the State variable is in the TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-25 Chapter 4 - Configuration command corresponding logical level. The command variable is placed in the logical value configured by the user. Active Command: logical variable (and respective module) that prevents visualization and consequent command execution if not in the indicated logical level. Validity: all previous variables can be defined or not as an option by enabling the respective validity field (for example there can be no variable defined to activate the command). Descriptive: object identification text displayed in the instructions line when the apparatus is selected. The object’s position is automatically defined by its location related to the static part of the bitmap. Parameter Type Objects Parameter type objects serve to visualize or change the protection parameters value. Its selection is possible in change mode. In visualization mode they cannot be selected but they dynamically reflect the most updated value of the configured parameter. The associated parameters with this type of object are indicated below. Figure 4.15. Parameter type object configuration. X, Y: vertical and horizontal dimensions of the object’s drawing (only valid in Change Operation Mode). Bitmap: drawing corresponding to the object in Change Operation Mode. In case of Visualize Operation Mode the protection display represents the value of the configured parameter. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-26 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Operation Mode: selection of object’s application: change or visualize the value of a parameter. Function: module to which belongs the parameter to change or visualize. Parameter: parameter to change or visualize. The parameter identified by the three previous data, after being selected, can be changed by pressing one of the keys as the Operation Mode is Change. or , as long Type: type of parameter to change or visualize. The parameter can be one of three types: byte, short or float. As an option, it is also possible to select if one wants to change the value of the parameter related to a specific scenario, to the active scenario or to all scenarios simultaneously. Value: value desired for the parameter when the change command is executed (valid only if the Operation Mode is Change). Identification: object identification text displayed in the instructions line when the apparatus is selected (valid only if the Operation Mode is Change). As for the previous objects, the object’s position is automatically defined by its location related to the static part of the bitmap. Measure Type Objects Measure type objects allow visualizing the value of the measures in the mimic. They cannot be 0.000 selected but they dynamically reflect the most updated value of the configured measure. The associated parameters with this type of object are indicated below: Figure 4.16. Measurement type objects configuration. Measure: measure to be presented in the mimic, chosen among the available options provided by the TPU S420; that list includes analogue measurements and counters, both internal and received through the local area network. The unit in which the measurement is visualized is indicated. Scale Factor: multiplication factor of the measure value to be visualized in the display. This factor is unitary by default and the unit is adjusted to the values normally observed for each measure; to represent very low or very high values it is advisable to change this scale factor to a more convenient value, preferably a 10 multiplier. The object’s position is automatically defined by its location related to the static part bitmap. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-27 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.4.4. CONFIGURATION Regarding the display characteristics, its brightness will be as much intense as higher the Contrast parameter value. The Inverse Video parameter defines whether the display shows black characters in white background (OFF value) or the opposite (ON value). In the Screensaver parameter it is possible to define the period without pressing any key after which the unit activates the screensaver. These parameters can be adjusted in the menu of the TPU S420 indicated in Figure 4.17. Interface Homem-Máquina Display Parâmetros Parâmetros Contraste: 20 Video Inverso: OFF Screensaver: 60 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.17. Display Configuration Menu. The alarms page has three types of parameters: for each alarm you should choose the logical configuration, the respective operation mode and the associated descriptive. Regarding logical configuration the Al[n]> Config parameter should be chosen from a list of supplied options which, besides the most frequently used cases, provides generic alarms with logical meaning allocated by the user. The option NO ALLOCATION corresponds to the non-use of that alarm in the local interface. The operation mode of each Alarm (Al[n]> Operation parameter) can be chosen from two available options: ALARM or LACHED. The Al[n]> Descriptive parameter is a sentence with a maximum of 20 characters and can only be edited by using the WinSettings. To associate logical states with the alarms page LEDs it is necessary to access the menu of the TPU S420: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-28 Chapter 4 - Configuration Interface Homem-Máquina Alarmes Parâmetros Configuração Lógica Configuração Lógica Al1> Al2> Al3> Al4> Al5> Al6> Al7> Al8> Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Nada Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído Atribuído ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Modo de Operação Modo de Operação Al1> Al2> Al3> Al4> Al5> Al6> Al7> Al8> Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: ALARME ALARME ALARME ALARME ALARME ALARME ALARME ALARME 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.18. Alarms Page Configuration Menu The protection mimic can only be edited by using the WinMimic module of the PC interface program WinProt. For that purpose see the user’s manual of this application. Table 4.11. Display Parameters. Parameter Range Unit Current Set 1..1 1 Contrast 10..31 20 Screensaver 1..60 Inverse Video OFF / ON min Default Value 60 OFF Table 4.12. Alarms page parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..1 1 Al1> Operation ALARM / INDICATION ALARM Al1> Descriptive ' '..'ÿ' Al1> Config ... Al8> Config Al8> Operation ALARM / INDICATION Al8> Descriptive ' '..'ÿ' TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 ALARM 4-29 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.4.5. AUTOMATION LOGIC The alarms module provides a group of variables possible to be configured in the local interface and which logical meaning can be allocated by using the programmable logic tool (see Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic). Table 4.13. Logical variables description of the alarms module. Id Name Description 6912 Generic Alarm 1 ... ... Logical variables without default allocated meaning, configurable as alarms 6919 Generic Alarm 8 Besides the variables indicated in the previous table, there are also available the variables associated with the change of parameters, logic or descriptions (see Chapter 6.1). The modules associated with the mimic and with the display properties only provide the logical variables related to the change of those three groups of data. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-30 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.5. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC In the previous chapters several references were already made to the automation logic provided by the TPU S420. This logic is completely programmable and besides the traditional logical functions (OR and AND), it allows implementing timers, delays and other logical combinations. The flexibility of this parameter can be used to configure additional interlockings to the protection and control functions or any other more complex logical conditions. 4.5.1. LOGICAL VARIABLES The elementary structure in which the automation logic of the TPU S420 is based on is the logical variable, also called gate. To each gate corresponds the internal state of a given variable related to a protection function, a monitoring or control function, states related to the operation of the unit itself, etc. All the states represented by the different logical variables are binary states, that is, they can only be in one of two logical levels: level 0 or level 1. Organization The automation logic that defines the different implemented interlockings and remaining logical functions is based on a network of interconnected logical variables. Regarding their location in that network, logical variables can be inputs, outputs or intermediate variables. The state of the input logical variables is defined by processes external to the logic itself that impose their value to the logical level 0 or 1. The origin of those processes can be related with: Digital inputs: the logical variables allocated to digital inputs are activated or deactivated by change of state of the respective contact. Protection and control functions: the different protection and control functions generate state changes in several gates as a result of their operation. User Commands: the state imposition (blockings for example) and command execution (data change, apparatus control) made by the user also has an effect on logical states. Local area network variables: another possible origin for the change of the logical state is the reception of indications from other units in network. The output logical variables are those resulting from the inference of the automation logic process and are reflected in some interface with the exterior. Its state can be reflected in: Digital outputs: determining the operation of output contacts according to the state of those logical variables. Local area network indications: sending the state of those variables to other protection units in the communications network. Protection and control functions indications: defining specific operating conditions of the implemented functions. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-31 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Between the input and output logical variables there can exist different levels of auxiliary or intermediate logical variables whose state is defined by the variables of the preceding levels state and ultimately by the state of the input variables that influence the state of the variables connected to them and, consequently the state of the output variables. (Figure 4.19). Inputs Intermediate variables Outputs TIMER 4 Figure 4.19. Automation logic organization. This network of logical variables is then divided in more elementary subgroups, each of them associated with a specific module of the TPU S420. These modules can be: Protection functions: high priority functions that operate with the purpose of minimizing the effect of faults in the energy system. Control and monitoring functions: lower priority functions which main purpose is to restore the normal operation conditions of the energy system or to optimize its operation as well as to supervise the several equipments. Other configurations: necessary to the protection unit operation and generally associated with components or interfaces of the protection unit. Each one of these modules is constituted by a group of gates whose number varies from module to module which represents the logic associated with that function or component. The existing modules are fixed for each TPU S420 model and each of them can have up to 256 variables. Each logical variable is identified by the module it belongs to and by its index (module internal order number). The identification of each variable to the exterior is obtained by the expression: id mod ulenumber 256 index (4.3) The state of the represented variables can have an effect on other variables of the same or different module. As for the global logic, it is possible to create in each module a grouping of the different gates in input variables (those established by the function itself or those which state is function of other modules variables), output variables (those used by the function or by other modules) or module internal variables. This organization is represented in Figure 4.20. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-32 Chapter 4 - Configuration Module 1 Module 3 ... ... Module 4 Module 2 ... ... Figure 4.20. Modular organization of the automation logic. 4 Types The logical variables of the TPU S420 are one of five possible types: OR OR: the variable state is the logical disjunction of its inputs. AND: the variable state is the logical conjunction of its inputs. AND DELAY DELAY: is a logical variable activated after a time interval if the input remains active. TIMER: The variable state corresponds to a pulse of configurable duration, activated by the TIMER transition of the logical OR of the gate inputs to the logical level 1. The duration of the pulse is fixed independently from the posterior state of the inputs. PULSE while the logical OR of the inputs remains 1, for a previously defined maximum period. PULSE: this variable works similarly to the previous one but the output state remains 1 only DELAY Input Output Command T Command T Figure 4.21. DELAY logical variable types. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-33 Chapter 4 - Configuration TIMER Input Output Command T Command T PULSE Input Output Command T Figure 4.22. TIMER and PULSE logical variable types. 4 Constitution Each variable corresponds to a logical port with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, as represented in Figure 4.23. The inputs and outputs allow defining connections between a given variable and other gates, in order to create the logical conditions for the operation of the protection. Type Timer Input 1 Status Output 1 Connection Input 2 Status Output 2 Connection Input 3 Status Output 3 Connection Input 4 Status Output 4 Connection Input 5 Status Output 5 Connection Input 6 Status Output 6 Connection Input 7 Status Output 7 Connection Input 8 Status Output 8 Connection Interfaces Figure 4.23. Logical variable constitution. The structure of each logical variable comprises a group of fields where all gate related information is stored. This information can be divided in two different types: a static part and a dynamic one. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-34 Chapter 4 - Configuration The static part does not change during the TPU S420 normal operation. It can only be changed during the configuration of the logic. It is composed by: Variable type: should correspond to one of the five mentioned types: OR, AND, DELAY, TIMER or PULSE. Outputs configuration: identifies the connections of each output of the variable to other variables. Each connection is completely defined by the destination variable module and internal index, as well as by the number of the respective input of that gate; as an option, the output can be negated, that is, the output can be activated when the variable has the logical level 0. Initial state of each of the eight inputs of the Logical Variable: this field should be compatible with the type of logical variable (if for example the logical variable is AND, the free inputs should be active) and with the connections to that logical variable. Time delay: time associated with the variable if it is of DELAY, TIMER or PULSE type (the time delay of the gate is configured in WinSettings). Presentation of the event in the Event Logging: indicates whether the change of state of the variable should be logged in the Event Chronological Log. The dynamic part of the information related to each gate corresponds to the fields that change during the protection operation: Inputs logical state: represents the current logical level of each of the eight gate inputs. Variable logical state: is the current state of the gate reflected in the respective outputs and resulting from the state of each of its inputs and the type of variable. Validity: this field has information about the validity of the variable logical state: possible causes for the invalidity of this state are for example: for logical variables associated with the state of circuit breakers and disconnectors, the fact that the associated single inputs (for example open and closed circuit breaker) are not complementary. Cause: this field relates to the cause of the last state change of the variable; this information is especially relevant for the variable related to the state of the circuit breaker because besides the fact of being open or closed, it is important to know which is the source of the last opening or closing command. 4.5.2. LOGIC INFERENCE One important thing to consider in the definition of the specific automation logic for a given application is the way the logic is inferred, that is, how the state of all variables is defined in each instant. The mechanism used is of event-driven type, which means that the logic is resolved from back to front, according to the defined connections, whenever there is a change of state of any of the input variables and not cyclically as in other traditional programmable logic controllers. Therefore whenever a variable changes its logical state, that change is reflected in the variables to which it is connected, that is, the inputs of the logical variables to which its eight inputs are connected. The state of each of those gates is then defined by the gate type and by the state of its eight inputs, being inferred after the occurrence of the state change. If the state changes and this gate is connected to other gates, for each of these gates the input state associated with this TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-35 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration connection is updated and the process is resumed for the new logical variable. This recurrent process is repeated until the end of state transitions or connections. This mechanism is exemplified with the following simplified logical scheme that indicates the initial logical level of each of the variables and its inputs: 1 Gate 1 (OR) Gate 2 (OR) Gate 3 (AND) 0 0 0 0 Gate 4 (OR) 1 Figure 4.24. Example of logic inference scheme. Admitting there is a change of state of the variable connected to the first input of the gate 1 and that it changes to the logical level 1, as the variable is OR type and its state only depends on that input, the logical sate of the variable changes to logical level 1. This gate is connected to two variables on which this change will be reflected. Firstly, the state of the first input of the logical variable 2 changes to level 1. This variable subsequently changes of state as it is an OR and all its inputs were 0 before the transition. This change of state is then reflected in the variable 3. However, this variable does not change its state as it is of AND type and requires all inputs at 1 to be activated. On the other hand the variable 2 is not connected to any other gate. The inference process then continues with the inference of the state changes regarding the second connection of the gate 1, which connects to the first input of the gate 4. The new state of the inputs of this gate generates a state identical to the previous one. As there are no more changes of state and no more connections, the mechanism stops here. The main advantage of this automation logic inference process is its excellent efficiency that allows to quickly update the state of all defined automation logic with few logical operations. 4.5.3. CONFIGURATION The automation logic cannot be configured in the TPU S420’s local interface. For that purpose use the logic edition tool of the WinProt, in the WinLogic module (Figure 4.25). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-36 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4 Figure 4.25. Automation logic configuration with WinLogic This application allows configuring all the fields that constitute the several available logical variables. By default, the TPU S420 provides a fully operational factory automation logic that allows the operation of the several protection, control and supervision functions. The description of that logic for each function can be found in Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions. The connections between the variables are always defined in the variable where that connection has its origin and for each of the 8 outputs of the variable is defined the gate it is connected to. The gate is completely defined by the module it belongs to and by the internal index inside that module, plus the input where the connection will be made. Each output can be negated independently of the remaining outputs. Having the factory logic as starting point, connections can be added in not used outputs, existing connections can be eliminated or configured variables can be changed. However, special attention should be given to the construction of the new connections so that the group stays coherent and executes the desired functions. Caution should be taken when editing the logical connections: The state changes with origin external to the automation logic (that is, the state changes of the input variables) directly impose the state of the first input of that gate. Therefore no other variable can be connected to that reserved input because there is the risk of the defined state not matching the externally established state and consequently generate inconsistent states. There cannot be two different logical variables, or two outputs of the same variable connected to the same input of a given gate. As in the previous point this situation may cause inconsistent states in the logic, because for that input will always be valid the last TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-37 Chapter 4 - Configuration occurred transition. Closed loops in the logic that may cause infinite cycles of state changes in the same variables should be avoided. The simplest example, with only one gate, is presented in Figure 4.26 where is indicated the initial state of the inputs. In this situation the recurrent process of automation logic inference will be indefinitely executed, changing the variable state from 1 to 0 and vice-versa until the protection stops the process to avoid the system resources to be fully used. This is an undesirable situation and should be avoided. 1 0 1 Figure 4.26. Loop example. The initial state of the 8 inputs of each gate should also be correctly configured according to the defined logic. For that purpose the logical state of each input should be in accordance with the state of the gate that connects to each input. Most of the variables are initialized with the 0 state (generally all input variables of the logic) which implicates that many of the inputs will also be initialized with the 0 state. The same is applicable to type OR variables, the not used inputs should be initialized with the 0 state in order not to interfere with the logic. However there are some exceptions: The not used inputs of type AND variables should be initialized with the logical state 1 so that it is possible to change the variable state according to the remaining inputs. 0 0 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 Figure 4.27. Initialization of gates inputs with AND type variables. The negated outputs of variables with initial state 0 are in the logical state 1. For that reason the inputs of the variables to which they are connected should be also initialized with the level 1. This situation is presented in Figure 4.28, where you can see that the initial state of the two inputs of gate 1 is different depending on whether the corresponding connection is negated or not. For the gate 2, the initial state of the single input is 0 because it corresponds to a negated connection of a variable which initial state is 1. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-38 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 0 Gate 1 (OR) Gate 2 (OR) 0 4 0 1 0 Figure 4.28. Initialization of gates inputs with negated outputs. Besides the gate type, the connections of each of the eight outputs and the inputs initial state, it should be defined whether the logical transitions of 0->1 and/or 1->0 of the variable should be logged in the Event Chronological Log. The configuration of each logical variable also includes the associated descriptive. The change of the descriptions has no influence in the protection’s internal operation; it only modifies the text presented to the user. The user configurable descriptions are: Gate descriptive: logical variable’s name used for example in the Event Chronological Log, in the configuration of Inputs, Outputs and Alarms or in the mimic’s configuration. 0 -> 1 State transition descriptive: descriptive that complements the previous one and that is displayed in the Event Chronological Logging whenever occurs a transition of the logical state of the gate from 0 to 1. 1 -> 0 State transition descriptive: descriptive that complements the previous one and that is displayed in the Event Chronological Logging whenever occurs a transition of the logical state of the gate from 1 to 0. Figure 4.29. Descriptions configuration of the logical variables with WinLogic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-39 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Any change in the automation logic implemented with WinLogic and sent to the protection is valid only after the unit is restarted. The changes made to the variables descriptions are automatically reflected in the Event Chronological Log. Some additional groups of auxiliary logical variables are available to make logic edition easier. For time delay variables of TIMER or PULSE type there is the additional configuration of the associated time that is set in tens of milliseconds (minimum possible configuration is 0,01 s). The TIMER or PULSE type variables in a total of 16 are grouped in a specific module. Some of them have default allocated functions but the rest can be used to create additional logic A feature provided by the TPU S420 is the possibility of auxiliary variables associated with inputs, outputs and logical alarm indications without allocated meaning, thus completely generic for use in any desired application. They allow configuring inputs, outputs and alarms with logical variables not foreseen in the default lists. To configure a generic input do the following: Using WinLogic, select one generic input not yet used and configure the outputs connections of that gate to other variables or change its interfaces according to the outcome required for the new variable. Change the descriptions associated with the generic input for more adequate names. Configure a physical input from one of the boards to the chosen generic input (the name edited by the user will appear in the WinSettings inputs list if the changes have been saved in WinLogic and in the protection if they were already sent to it). Restart the protection to validate the change made in the logic. To configure a generic output do the following: Using WinLogic, implement the variable combinations necessary to create the desired logic and make the connection to a generic output not yet used. Change the descriptions associated with the generic variable for more adequate names. Configure a physical output from one of the boards to the chosen generic output. Restart the protection to validate the change made in the logic. To configure a generic alarm do the following: Using WinLogic, implement the variable combinations necessary to create the desired logic and make the connection to a generic alarm not yet used. Change the descriptions associated with the generic variable for more adequate names. Configure an alarm of the local interface alarm to the chosen generic alarm. Restart the protection to validate the change made in the logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-40 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration For other specific logical interlockings of the application that require additional variables not directly associated with inputs, outputs or alarms; there are two auxiliary modules, constituted by 64 variables without allocated meaning or default defined connections, which can be configured as OR or AND type. Table 4.14. Logical variables description of the auxiliary logic module 1. Id Name Description 256 Auxiliary Logic 1 Gate 1 ... ... OR or AND type variables available for auxiliary logic 319 Auxiliary Logic 1 Gate 64 Table 4.15. Logical variables description of the auxiliary logic module 2. Id Name Description 512 Auxiliary Logic 2 Gate 1 ... ... OR or AND type variables available for auxiliary logic 575 Auxiliary Logic 2 Gate 64 Table 4.16. Logical variables description of the time delay module. Id Name Description 3328 Timer 1 ... ... TIMER or PULSE type variables used in the default defined logic or available for auxiliary logic 3351 Timer 24 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-41 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.6. OPERATION MODES A particular application of logic is the bay Operation Modes. These modes are extremely important to define the operation mode of the protection and control functions and the blocking of open and close commands of the circuit breakers and disconnectors. 4.6.1. OPERATION MODES T YPES There are three base operation modes supported by the TPU S420: Local/Remote Mode (L/R): this operation mode defines the protection’s behaviour regarding the commands received from the Supervision and Command System. When in Local mode, all remote operations are inhibited. Manual/Automatic Mode (M/A): this operation mode regards all automation executed in the TPU S420. When in Manual mode all automation functions are blocked. This mode is essential to perform maintenance operations in the system when it is in service. Normal/Emergency (N/E) Mode: the Emergency mode refers to the operation of the system in special conditions. In Emergency mode all user defined logical interlockings of open and close of circuit breakers are inhibited, allowing free operation of the circuit breaker. The Normal mode corresponds to the normal situation of operation of the equipment. Besides these Operation Modes it is also provided the Exploitation Mode which has three options (Normal, Special A or Special B). By default, the Special Exploitation A and B modes, on the contrary of the Normal Mode, are characterized by the instantaneous operation of the Phase Overcurrent Protection and by the lock of the Resistive Earth Protection and the closing commands generated by control functions. In A mode the phase-to-earth Overcurrent Protection have instantaneous operation, while in B mode they are locked. Associated to each mode there are two logical inputs available for protection trip in case of external phase-to-earth faults: the temporized trip indication of the external earth detection causes the Special Mode A trip; the instantaneous indication of the trip causes the trip in the Special mode B. The Test Bay Mode is another operation mode of the TPU S420. This mode does not have a feature attributed being also able to be defined by the user by configuration of the associated logic. There are also two generic operation modes, which meaning can be entirely attributed by the user configuring the logic. 4.6.2. CONFIGURATION The change of operation mode is equivalent to the change of any other protection’s parameter and the most current state of each one of the mode types is saved in the non-volatile memory, TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-42 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration not being lost even when the protection is powered off. This change can be made in the local interface, using WinProt or from the Supervision and Command System. The local interface provides two functional keys and , which allow immediately changing some operation modes. From the existing modes the user can configure the meaning of these keys. The other modes can be changed in the menus. As an option, the change of any of the operation modes can be made using binary inputs connected to selectors external to the protection. Modos de Operação Parâmetros Parâmetros Modo Manual/Automático: MANUAL Modo Local/Remoto: LOCAL Modo Normal/Emergência: NORMAL Modo de Exploração: NORMAL Modo Genérico 1: OFF Modo Genérico 2: OFF Modo Ensaio: OFF Tecla de Modo 1: L/R Tecla de Modo 2: M/A 4 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.30. Operation Modes Menu. The state of the operation mode used by the TPU S420 is the logical OR of the two previous options (parameter or input), that is why only one of them should be used at a time to prevent inconsistent states. Table 4.17. Operation modes parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..1 1 Manual/Automatic Mode MANUAL / AUTOMATIC MANUAL Local/Remote Mode LOCAL / REMOTE LOCAL Normal/Emergency Mode NORMAL / EMERGENCY NORMAL Exploitation Mode NORMAL / SPECIAL A / SPECIAL B NORMAL Generic Mode 1 OFF / ON OFF Generic Mode 2 OFF / ON OFF Test Mode OFF / ON OFF Mode Key 1 L/R / M/A / N/E / GEN 1 / GEN 2 / TEST L/R Mode Key 2 L/R / M/A / N/E / GEN 1 / GEN 2 / TEST M/A TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default Value 4-43 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.6.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The logical variables associated with the operation modes module are grouped in several groups according to the different ways of changing the modes. Basically they are two: through binary inputs or by changing a parameter. Regarding the L/R, M/A and N/E operation modes, the associated inputs are 6 in groups of two complementary variables (Local Mode and Remote Mode, for example). The result of the combination of these pairs is accessible in specific variables that are the operation modes determined by the inputs. On the other hand, there is one variable related to each of the operating modes with the state resulting from the configuration of the associated parameter. The indication of each of the operation modes available for the remaining automation functions and displayed in the local interface is the logical OR of the two previous variables (that depending on the inputs and that refreshed by configuration). The principle of the logic associated with the Exploitation Mode and the Bay Test mode is identical. The Exploitation Mode has three associated inputs (Normal Mode, Special Mode A and Special Mode B). There are also three variables associated with each of these options, refreshed by parameters change. The three final indications are the logical OR of the variables changed by the respective inputs and configuration. The logic implemented in the Exploitation Mode prevents two different indications from being simultaneously active, which might happen if, for example, due to inputs the option of Special Mode A is selected for inputs and the option Normal Mode is selected due to configuration. The solution used defines that the Exploitation Mode A has higher priority than the Normal Mode and that the Exploitation Mode B has higher priority than both of them. There are also three variables associated with the Bay Test Mode: the input, the one associated with the parameter and the indication with the logical OR of the two previous variables. Table 4.18. Logical variables description of the operation modes module. Id Name Description 10240 Local Operation Mode Local mode (input) 10241 Remote Operation Mode Remote mode (input) 10242 Manual Operation Mode Manual mode (input) 10243 Automatic Operation Mode Automatic mode (input) 10244 Normal Operation Mode Normal mode (input) 10245 Emergency Operation Mode Emergency mode (input) 10246 Normal Exploration Mode Normal Operation Mode Indication 10247 Special A Exploration Mode Special Exploitation Operation Mode A Indication 10248 Special B Exploration Mode Special Exploitation Operation Mode B Indication 10249 Generic Op Mode 1 Inactive Generic mode 1 inactive (input) 10250 Generic Op Mode 1 Active Generic mode 1 active (input) 10251 Generic Op Mode 2 Inactive Generic mode 2 inactive (input) TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-44 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Id Name Description 10252 Generic Op Mode 2 Active Generic mode 2 active (input) 10253 Test Operation Mode Bay test mode (input) 10254 L/R Operation Mode Local or Remote Operation Mode Indication 10255 M/A Operation Mode Manual or Automatic Operation Mode Indication 10256 N/E Operation Mode Normal or Emergency Operation Mode Indication 10257 Generic Operation Mode 1 Generic Operation Mode 1 Indication 10258 Generic Operation Mode 2 Generic Operation Mode 2 Indication 10259 HMI L/R Operation Mode Local or Remote Operation Mode (provided) 10260 HMI M/A Operation Mode Manual or Automatic Operation Mode (provided) 10261 HMI N/E Operation Mode Normal or Emergency Operation Mode (provided) 10262 HMI Normal Explor Mode Normal Exploitation Operation Mode (provided) 10263 HMI Special A Explor Mode Special Exploitation Mode A (provided) 10264 HMI Special B Explor Mode Special Exploitation Mode B (provided) 10265 HMI Generic Op Mode 1 Generic Mode 1 (provided) 10266 HMI Generic Op Mode 2 Generic Mode 2 (provided) 10267 HMI Test Operation Mode Bay test mode (provided) 10268 I/O L/R Operation Mode Variable resulting from Local Mode and Remote Mode complementary inputs 10269 I/O M/A Operation Mode Variable resulting from Manual Mode and Automatic Mode complementary inputs 10270 I/O N/E Operation Mode Variable resulting from Normal Mode and Emergency Mode complementary inputs 10271 I/O Normal Explor Mode Normal Exploitation Mode (input) 10272 I/O Special A Explor Mode Special Exploitation Mode A (input) 10273 I/O Special B Explor Mode Special Exploitation Mode A (input) 10274 I/O Generic Op Mode 1 Variable resulting from the complementary inputs of the Generic Operation Mode 1 10275 I/O Generic Op Mode 2 Variable resulting from the complementary inputs of the Generic Operation Mode 2 10276 I/O Test Operation Mode Variable resulting from the inputs of the Bay test mode 10277 HMI Blq Change L/R Op Mode Block of the Local/Remote Mode change in the local interface 10278 HMI Blq Change M/A Op Mode Block of the Manual/Automatic Mode change in the local interface 10279 HMI Blq Change N/E Op Mode Block of the Normal/Emergency Mode change in the local interface 10280 HMI Blq Change M1 Op Mode Block of the Generic Mode 1 change in the local interface 10281 HMI Blq Change M2 Op Mode Block of the Generic Mode 2 change in the local interface 10282 HMI Blq Change Tst Op Mode Block of the Bay Test Mode change in the local interface 10283 Op Mode Gnd Dir Inst Trip Input associated with the instantaneous trip of external detection of phase to earth faults TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4 4-45 Chapter 4 - Configuration Id Name Description 10284 Op Mode Gnd Dir Delay Trip Input associated with the time delayed trip of external detection of phase to earth faults 10285 Op Mode Protection Trip Trip order resulting from the exploitation mode and the active protection functions Additionally to the variables referred in Table 4.18, the variables associated with the change of parameters, logic and descriptions are also available as explained in Chapter 6.1. There is also a group of auxiliary variables used in the module internal logic. The connections to exterior variables to the module differ slightly depending on the TPU S420 version. 4 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-46 Chapter 4 - Configuration 10259> Modo Operação L/R IHM OR 10240> Modo Operação Local OR OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 10268> Modo Operação L/R E/S OR 10288> Modo Operação Gate 1 10254> Modo Operação L/R 41798>Regime L/R Disjuntor I1 O1 48928>Regime L/R Seccionad Terra I2 O2 49184>Regime L/R Secc Isolamento O3 O4 AND 49952>Regime L/R Secc Bypass O5 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O6 50720>Regime L/R Seccionad Barra O7 50976>Regime L/R Secc Barra 1 O8 51232>Regime L/R Secc Barra 2 10241> Modo Operação Remoto OR O1 O2 10261> Modo Operação N/E IHM OR 10244> Modo Operação Normal 10290> Modo Operação Gate 3 10256> Modo Operação N/E OR I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 41800>Regime N/E Disjuntor 10270> Modo Operação N/E E/S OR 4 OR O1 I1 O1 48929>Regime N/E Seccionad Terra I2 O2 49185>Regime N/E Secc Isolamento O3 O4 49953>Regime N/E Secc Bypass O5 AND O1 I1 O1 O6 50721>Regime N/E Seccionad Barra O2 I2 O2 O7 50977>Regime N/E Secc Barra 1 O8 51233>Regime N/E Secc Barra 2 I3 10245> Modo Operação Emergência OR O1 O2 10267> Modo Operação Ensaio IHM 10253> Modo Operação Ensaio OR OR O1 I1 O2 I2 O1 I3 10276> Modo Operação Ensaio E/S OR O1 O2 Figure 4.31. Logic diagram of the operation modes module (part 1). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-47 Chapter 4 - Configuration 10260> Modo Operação M/A IHM OR 10242> Modo Operação Manual OR OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 41799>Regime M/A Disjuntor I3 O3 38676>Bloqueio Religação O4 39435>Bloqueio Deslastre Tensão O5 40203>Bloqueio Deslastre Freq 10269> Modo Operação M/A E/S OR 10289> Modo Operação Gate 2 10255> Modo Operação M/A AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I1 O1 I2 O6 I3 10243> Modo Operação Automático OR O1 O2 10265> Modo Oper Genérico 1 IHM 10257> Modo Operação Genérico 1 OR 10266> Modo Oper Genérico 2 IHM OR O1 I1 O2 I2 O1 OR O1 I1 O2 I2 I3 10249> Modo Oper Gener 1 Inactivo 10274> Modo Oper Genérico 1 E/S OR 10258> Modo Operação Genérico 2 OR I3 10251> Modo Oper Gener 2 Inactivo AND O1 10275> Modo Oper Genérico 2 E/S OR AND O1 I1 O1 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 O2 I2 O2 I3 4 I3 10250> Modo Oper Gener 1 Activo 10252> Modo Oper Gener 2 Activo OR OR O1 O1 O2 O2 10277> Modo Op Blq Alter L/R IHM OR 10280> Modo Oper Blq Alter M1 IHM OR OR I1 10286> Dados Modo Operação O1 I1 10278> Modo Op Blq Alter M/A IHM OR I1 10281> Modo Oper Blq Alter M2 IHM OR O1 I1 10279> Modo Op Blq Alter N/E IHM OR O1 O1 O1 10287> Lógica Modo Operação OR O1 10282> Modo Oper Blq Alter PE IHM OR I1 O1 I1 O1 Figure 4.32. Logic diagram of the operation modes module (part 2). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-48 Chapter 4 - Configuration 10262> Modo Explor Normal IHM OR O1 O2 10291> Modo Operação Gate 4 10246> Modo Exploração Normal OR 10271> Modo Explor Normal E/S OR O1 10293> Modo Operação Gate 6 AND AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 O4 I3 O2 I1 O1 17161>Bloqueio Prot Terras 15640>Protecção Resis MI Fases I2 O2 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom I3 10263> Modo Explor Especial A IHM 10294> Modo Operação Gate 7 OR O1 O2 10272> Modo Explor Especial A E/S OR 10292> Modo Operação Gate 5 AND 10247> Modo Exploração Especial A OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 I3 O3 16392>Protecção MI Terra AND O1 OR O1 O2 10285> Modo Oper Disparo Protec OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41805>Gate 1 Disjuntor I3 10284> Modo Oper Disparo Temp DTR 10248> Modo Exploração Especial B 10295> Modo Operação Gate 8 I4 I5 AND I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 OR OR O2 10273> Modo Explor Especial B E/S O1 I2 I3 O2 10264> Modo Explor Especial B IHM I1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 10296> Modo Operação Gate 9 AND I1 O1 I2 O2 4 OR O4 16402>Bloqueio Prot MI Terra O5 17672>Bloqueio Prot 2ª MI Terra O1 O2 10283> Modo Oper Disparo Inst DTR I3 OR O6 O1 O2 Figure 4.33. Logic diagram of the operation modes module (part 3). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-49 Chapter 4 - Configuration 4.7. OSCILLOGRAPHY The oscillography function allows logging the waveform of the signals in the analogue inputs of the TPU S420 when certain events occur. This monitoring function is extremely important to characterize the incidents occurring in the energy system and in a posterior analysis, to verify the correct operation of the protection. 4.7.1. CHARACTERISTICS Together with the Chronological Event Log, the Oscillography function is one of the tools provided by the TPU S420 to analyse faults or other disturbances in the energy system. While in the Chronological Event Log it is possible to access the sequence of logical events detected or produced by the protection, the Oscillography allows analysing the corresponding analogue information. The characteristics of the oscillographies registered by the TPU S420 are fixed. The signals in the 4 current analogue inputs and in the 4 voltage analogue inputs are recorded with sampling frequency of 20 samples per cycle of the fundamental harmonic of the AC magnitudes. Up to 40 digital channels can be registered whose correspondence with the TPU S420’s internal logical variables is configured by the user. Nevertheless, the conditions that define the registration of new records are completely configurable by the user, with the programmable logic tool (see Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic), as described further ahead. The oscillography length is adjustable and completely defined by the configured logical conditions. The recording starts when any of the function’s start conditions is activated and ends when all of them reset. It is also possible to store a configurable time of the signals waveforms prior to the start of the recording (pre-fault time) and another configurable time after the reset (post-fault time) of the recording. But the length of the record never exceeds a maximum duration that is also configurable by the user. The oscillographies are saved in the non-volatile memory to allow storing them in the protection while they are not uploaded to a PC. In total it is possible to save a number of oscillographies equivalent to approximately one and a half minute. The oscillographies can be displayed in a PC at any time by using the WinReports module of the WinProt. The oscillographies can be uploaded through the protection’s front serial port or remotely through the local area network. 4.7.2. CONFIGURATION The Pre-fault T parameter specifies the duration of the signals prior to the oscillography start, that is still registered with the oscillography. The Post-fault T parameter is equivalent but applied to the duration of the signals posterior to the fault. The maximum register duration is configured in Maximum T. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-50 4 Chapter 4 - Configuration Interface Homem-Máquina Oscilografia Parâmetros Parâmetros T Pré-Defeito: 100 T Pós-Defeito: 60 T Máximo: 1000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 4.34. Parameters Menu (Oscillography). Table 4.19. Oscillography parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..1 - 1 Pre-fault T 0..200 (50 Hz), s 100 s 60 s 1000 4 0..240 (60 Hz) Post-fault T 0..1000 (50 Hz), 0..1200 (60 Hz) Maximum T 0..1000 (50 Hz), 0..1200 (60 Hz) 4.7.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The logic associated with the oscillography is related with the logical conditions that define the recording of a new register. These conditions are divided in two groups: the indications that trigger the recording of an oscillography while they remain active (the protection functions, for example, where it is desired an oscillography from the start to the reset of the function); the ones that originate the recording of an oscillography for a specific period (never longer than 1 second) defined by an auxiliary logic TIMER (the case of the circuit breaker close commands, where it is desired to have a recording of the time interval immediately after the order’s execution). These different conditions are grouped in a logical variable used by the function to define the instant of the recording start and end. Besides the mentioned conditions (protection functions start and circuit breaker close command) it is also available, by default, a logical input that allows starting oscillography recording by user’s order or due to a protection’s external event. The oscillographies associated with this input have a maximum duration defined by TIMER. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-51 Chapter 4 - Configuration Table 4.20. Logical variables description of the oscillography module. Id Name Description 8704 Oscillography Recording Input that triggers the oscillography recording 8705 Oscillography Timed Start Logical conditions of oscillography recording start (for a fixed time) 8706 Oscillography Start Gate 1 First group of logical conditions of oscillography recording start (without associated timer) 8707 Oscillography Start Gate 2 Second group of logical conditions of oscillography recording start (without associated timer) 8708 Oscillography Variable that gathers all three previous logical conditions 8709 Oscillog Digital Channel 1 ... ... Digital oscillography channels with user allocated meaning 8748 Oscillog Digital Channel40 4 8705> Arranque Temp Oscilografia 8704> Gravação Oscilografia OR OR O1 O2 41761>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor I1 O1 I2 O2 3328>Timer 1 I3 8708> Oscilografia 8706> Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia OR 3328>Timer 1 OR I1 15640>Protecção MI Fases I1 O1 I2 16392>Protecção MI Terra I2 O2 I3 17155>Sin Arranque Terras Resist I3 19468>Protec Máximo U Fases I4 20228>Protec Máximo Tensão Terra I5 21006>Protec Mínimo U Fases I6 21780>Protecção Frequência I7 23304>Protecção Seq Inversa I8 O1 I4 8707> Gate 2 Arranq Oscilografia OR I1 O1 O2 Figure 4.35. Logical diagram of the oscillography module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 4-52 5 Chapter 5. COMMUNICATIONS This chapter describes the various communication interfaces available in the TPU S420, such as RS232, RS485, optical fibre connections, Ethernet, Lonworks, etc. On these physical interfaces various communication protocols for connection to SCADA systems are supported, such as IEC 61850, IEC60870-5-104, DNP3.0, Lonworks, etc. Also available are protocols for horizontal communication among the various TPU S420 units, such as GOOSE, the Lonworks Distributed Database and the Ethernet Distributed Database. For each protocol are presented the main operation features and described the configuration methods of each one of the configurable parameters, as well as the corresponding default values and ranges. This chapter also describes the time synchronization through SNTP protocol. Chapter 5 - Communications TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.1. SERIAL COMMUNICATION...........................................................................................5-3 Architecture............................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1. Modem connection......................................................................................................5-3 5.1.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................5-4 5.2. TCP/IP COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................5-5 5.2.1. Architecture .................................................................................................................5-5 5.2.2. Configuration...............................................................................................................5-5 5.2.3. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................5-7 5.3. SCADA PROTOCOLS ...............................................................................................5-8 5.4. DISTRIBUTED DATABASE ..........................................................................................5-10 5.5. LONWORKS PROTOCOL ...........................................................................................5-11 5.5.1. General Architecture................................................................................................. 5-11 5.5.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-13 5.5.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-15 5.5.4. Communication with WinProt .................................................................................. 5-18 5.5.5. Lonworks Distributed Database............................................................................... 5-19 5.5.6. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-24 5.6. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL .............................................................................................5-26 5.6.1. General Architecture................................................................................................. 5-26 5.6.2. Operation Principle................................................................................................... 5-26 5.6.3. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-27 5.6.4. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-30 5.6.5. Communication with WinProt .................................................................................. 5-33 5.7. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL ..............................................................................5-34 5.7.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-34 5.7.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-35 5.7.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-38 5.7.4. Automation Logic..................................................................................................... 5-42 5.8. ETHERNET DISTRIBUTED DATABASE ............................................................................5-43 5.8.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-43 5.8.2. Operation Principles ................................................................................................. 5-43 5.8.3. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-44 5.8.4. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-48 5.9. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ..........................................................................................5-50 5.9.1. Architecture .............................................................................................................. 5-50 5.9.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 5-50 5.9.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 5-55 5.10. SNTP PROTOCOL................................................................................................5-56 5.10.1. Architecture ............................................................................................................ 5-56 5.10.2. Operation Principles ............................................................................................... 5-56 5.10.3. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 5-56 5.10.4. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 5-57 Total of pages of the chapter: 57 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-2 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.1. SERIAL COMMUNICATION ARCHITECTURE All EFACEC’s protection and control units provide one front serial port and at least two rear ports. When the unit is equipped with the Ethernet board, three rear ports are available. These serial ports are intended for communication with WinProt, except in the versions that support DNP3.0 that have COM1 reserved for the protocol and it can’t be used for other purposes. The rear serial ports identified as COM 1 and COM 2 support RS232 and RS485 connectors, RS232 converters for glass or plastic optical fibre. The configuration of these ports is independent of the type of connector used and the change of the type of connector does not imply updating the unit’s firmware. By using the various types of converters, several architectures for serial communication with TPU S420 may be designed, namely: Ring network using optical converters. RS485 bus network using RS485 converters. Point to point connection with RS232 converters. 5 5.1.1. MODEM CONNECTION The EFACEC’s protection and control units support a connection with WinProt via Modem. For that purpose it is necessary to have a Modem on the PC side where WinProt is executed and another Modem on the unit side. Both Modems should be configured so that they are compatible, having in mind that the characters echo, the flow control and RTS must be disabled. The configured exit sequence should be ‘+++’. The Modem on the unit side must be previously configured while the one on the PC side is configured by WInProt through the Communication window where the desired Start String must be indicated. It is also necessary to indicate which serial port will be used, the baudrate, the connection start and end commands and the stand-by time after which the connection should be terminated. The connection between WinProt and a unit is established for the first time when WinProt tries to communicate with that same unit using the Modem as active communication protocol. Once the connection is established it is shared by the various modules and an icon appears in the Windows toolbar showing that it is active. On the other hand, a connection with a unit can be terminated by WinProt in two situations. Either when nothing is received from the unit during the time period configured in the configuration window of the Modem parameters; or by using the popup menu activated with the right-mouse button over the Windows taskbar icon that corresponds to the connection with that unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-3 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.1.2. CONFIGURATION The configuration of the serial ports provided by the TPU S420 can be made in WinSettings or in the unit by using the Communications > Serial Communications > Parameters menu. Figure 5.1. Configuration menu of the Serial Communication parameters. 5 Table 5.1. Serial Communication parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Serial Address 0 .. 32767 - 0 Front COM> Baudrate 4800 .. 19200 baud 4800 Back COM 1> Baudrate 4800 .. 19200 baud 4800 Back COM 2> Baudrate 4800 .. 19200 baud 4800 Back COM 3> Baudrate 4800 baud 4800 One of the serial communication parameters corresponds to the Serial Address. This parameter allows identifying the unit when it is in a RS 485 or in an optical fibre network. The configured value must unique in the network. The Serial Address can have values from 0 to 32767. It is also necessary to indicate the Baudrate for each one of the ports. All of them allow baudrates from 4800 to 19200 except for the Ethernet board serial port. This port only allows a baudrate of 4800 baud. The Baudrate configured for all the ports is 4800 baud. When the unit executes the BOOT code the Baudrate is 38400 baud for all the ports except for the front door which is 19200 baud. In order to allow WinProt to communicate with a unit through a serial port it is necessary to configure, in the WinProt, the serial protocol option as the active protocol for that unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-4 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.2. TCP/IP COMMUNICATION 5.2.1. ARCHITECTURE The TPU S420 can be supplied with an Ethernet communication board to communicate through TCP/ IP. This board serves as basis for several protocols provided by the TPU S420 such as the direct connection to WinProt through TCP (up to 4 simultaneous connections), the connection to SCADA systems through the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol or even for horizontal communication among units through UDP. The provided Ethernet board has a communication speed of 100 Mbps allowing a high communication performance. In terms of options two configurations for the Ethernet board are possible both with two communication ports: Redundant 100BaseTX Option This option provides two redundant ports with copper interface. On each moment only one port is active even if there are valid connections in both ports. Port 1 has preference over port 2, that is, if there is a valid connection in both ports, only port 1 will be used. The activation of a port is done in the following situations: When there is no valid connection in any of the ports and it starts existing in one of them the corresponding port is activated; When there is no valid connection in any of the ports and it starts existing in both ports, port 1 is activated; Redundant 100Base FX Option This option provides two redundant ports, each one with copper and optical fibre redundant interface. On each moment only one of the two ports is active even if there are valid connections in all ports. As in the previous option, port 1 has preference over port 2. At unit’s start-up the fibre interface has preference over the copper interface. To activate a port follow the indications given in the previous option. When no link is detected in any port, the configured interface will alternate between copper and fibre. 5.2.2. CONFIGURATION The configuration of the Ethernet board parameters can be made in WinSettings or in the unit by using the Communications > Ethernet > Parameters menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-5 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Comunicações Ethernet Parâmetros Parâmetros Endereço IP: 192. 1. 1. 1 Máscara de Subrede: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 192. 1. 1. 1 IP Servidor SNTP: 192. 1. 1. 1 IP Servidor SNTP 2: 192. 1. 1. 1 Tempo Pedidos Servidor: 300 Variação Máxima: 500 Número Mínimo Pacotes SNTP: 5 Timeout Servidor: 300 Modo Funcionamento: MULTICAST Tempo de Repetição da BDD: 0.100 Tempo de Refrescamento da BDD: 1.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Parâmetros Tempo Falha de Unidade da BDD: 10.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.2. Configuration menu of the Ethernet communication parameters. 5 Table 5.2. Ethernet Parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value IP Address 1.1.1.1 .. 254.254.254.254 - 192.1.1.1 Subnetwork Mask 0.0.0.0 .. 255.255.255.255 - 255.255.255.0 Gateway 1.1.1.1 .. 254.254.254.254 - 192.1.1.1 One of the parameters to be configured corresponds to the Ip Address. This parameter allows identifying a unit when in a TCP/IP network. The configured value should therefore be unique. Each IP Address field can have values from 1 to 254. It is not possible to configure Loopback addresses (127.xxx.xxx.xxx). The default IP Address is 192.1.1.1. The indication of the Subnetwork Mask is also necessary. The configured default Subnetwork Mask is 255.255.255.0. Each Subnetwork Mask field can have values from 0 to 255. As in the previous parameter, loopback addresses cannot be configured for this parameter. The last parameter necessary for the communication of WinProt with the unit via TCP/IP is Default Gateway. This parameter is necessary when there is the need to access units not belonging to the same subnetwork. Each Default Gateway field can have values from 1 to 254 as in the IP Address and loopback addresses are not allowed. The default value of the Default Gateway parameter is 192.1.1.1. The Ethernet board MAC address can be seen in the unit through the Communications > Ethernet > see MAC Address menu. This is a unique address and is stored in the Ethernet board microcontroller BOOT code. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-6 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.2.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC Associated with the TCP/IP communication there is a group of logical variables in the Ethernet module. These variables transmit information about the communication status. Table 5.3. Description of the logical variables in the Ethernet module. Id Name Description 8192 Communication State Indicates the communication status. 8193 Ethernet Board Restart When the Ethernet board starts, a pulse command is sent to this gate. 8194 Port 1 - 100BaseTX The state of this gate is active when port 1 is active and the configured interface corresponds to the copper interface. 8195 Port 1 - 100BaseFX The state of this gate is active when port 1 is active and the configured interface corresponds to the optical fibre interface. 8196 Port 2 - 100BaseTX The state of this gate is active when port 2 is active and the configured interface corresponds to the copper interface. 8197 Port 2 - 100BaseFX The state of this gate is active when port 2 is active and the configured interface corresponds to the optical fibre interface. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-7 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.3. SCADA PROTOCOLS Apart from the unit’s protection and control functions, the TPU S420 allows the connection to a local area network and the consequent interconnection to substation supervision and control systems or to remote control centres. Depending on the unit’s version, it can provide one of four different protocols for interaction with SCADA systems: IEC60870-5-104 – Available in the ETH version units. Lonworks – Available in the LON version units. DNP 3.0 – Available in the DNP version units. IEC61850 – Available in the 850 version units. The base architecture of the local protection and control system is based on one or two central units connected to a network which includes the various protection and control units. The connection to a local area network also allows the connection to a data concentrator unit that works as a bridge to the supervision and control system of the network. This hierarchy level is beyond the scope of this description and it can be based on several network infrastructures (radio, optical fibre, telephone line, etc.) and on different communication protocols. Figure 5.3. Typical architecture of the protection and control system. The functions associated with the connection to the SCADA system through a LAN allow the TPU S420 to execute a set of operations that are common in terminal units integrated in supervision and control systems, namely: Sending logical information to the supervision and control system (single digital indications and double digital indications); TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-8 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Sending analogue information to the supervision and control system (measures, counters, etc.); Sending configuration information to the supervision and control system (settings, tables, etc.); Reception of controls from the supervision and control system (pulse commands, permanent commands, analogue commands, etc.); Reception of information about time synchronization from a synchronization unit integrated in the supervision and control system. The time synchronization mechanism can be based on information sent directly by a synchronization unit (with an integrated GPS system) or indirectly by the local concentrating unit. It has a precision of 1 ms. So that the units are synchronized by protocol, the Synchronization parameter in the Set Date and Time > Parameters menu must be configured with the SCADA value. In all units that have interaction protocols with SCADA systems, the LAN LED in the front panel indicates the communication status. The device profile for the IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP 3.0 protocols and the documents related with the IEC 61850 protocol can be consulted. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-9 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.4. DISTRIBUTED DATABASE Besides the features already presented, the TPU S420 uses the network infrastructure to execute another type of functions mainly designed for the execution of distributed automation functions which means they are based on the direct interaction with other units. This function consists in the horizontal communication among different units through a distributed database associated with each unit. Synchronisation Telecontrol 5 Distributed Database Figure 5.4. Distributed database architecture. The distributed database is a function available in all units of the 420 range. Its main goal is to quickly transmit information among units in the same LAN. This mechanism allows exchanging information among any protection and control units of the 420 range, as long as they are connected in the same local area network. The main field of application of this function is to carry out distributed automation among the various units belonging to the same system. These automation functions can perform the replacement of solutions based on cables, such as the transference of protection tripping as well as the acceleration of protections, or control functions that use external information, as in the case of automatic voltage regulation, reactive power control or others. The units of the 420 range provide two distinct platforms for the distributed database. One of them is based on the Lonworks protocol while the other is based on UDP. Both will be detailed in this chapter. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-10 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.5. LONWORKS PROTOCOL 5.5.1. GENERAL ARCHITECTURE The base architecture of the local protection and control system is based on one or two central units connected to a local area network with an optical fibre or twisted pair ring topology and that integrates the various protection units of the same network. The system can have up to 60 units connected in the same ring. The ring network topology allows a correct operation in case one of the connections is broken. However the general operation of the system with the ring open may present a problem if one more connection is broken thus creating islands composed by some units isolated from the rest of the system. The local area network is based on a ring network that has a glass optical fibre communication media with SMA or ST type connectors. The communication rate is 1.25 Mb/s. The network protocol is based on the LONTALK protocol upon which the highest level layers are implemented which is defined in a PUR 2.1 protocol variant. This protocol is thus also implemented in the EFACEC’s Central Unit and owned by EFACEC. Entities Types The following entities are defined in the TPU S420: Digital variables – These variables correspond to logical indications of the unit. Analogue measures – They correspond to all the measures processed in the unit including the calculated ones. They are sent in floating point format. Counters – They are associated with integer type measures existing in the unit. They are sent in integer format. Tables – They correspond to structures of data, records, etc., which have a variable dimension and that are sent to or received by the unit. Controls – Normally they are controls generated by the control centre aiming at performing an operation in the unit. Parameters – They correspond to the parameters of all functions available in the unit. Entities Attributes All defined entities can be received from or sent to the TPU S420. Their transmission normally has a set of attributes that better describe the entity. These attributes depend on the type of entity and are created and processed automatically by the unit. The following attributes are defined: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-11 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Validity – It indicates if the variable is valid or not, that is, if the sent value must be processed as a correct value or not. Value – It indicates the entity value and as such it depends on the type of associated entity. If it is a digital indication, it will contain the logical state; if it is a measure or a counter, it will contain the respective value; if it is a control, it will contain its associated state or value. Cause – It indicates the cause that led to the transmission of the entity. In the case of logical variables, this attribute represents the reason of the logical state transition. It is normally used to characterize the circuit breaker state changes where it is very useful to know in a single message the cause associated with the manoeuvre. The defined causes are: Table 5.4. List of causes Id Description 0 No associated cause 1 State change 2 Validity change 3 By request 7 By time delay 128 External local command (button) 129 UAC Local command 130 Remote command 131 Automation command 132 Protections command 5 In the case of analogue measures the transmission cause is configured in WinSettings through the parameters of the Lonworks function. The defined causes for sending measures are: Cyclical, after a configurable time delay; By Jitter, that is, only when the value change exceeds a defined range; Cyclical plus jitter, combining the previous two. The logical controls on the unit can be of two different types: Pulse Controls – Controls that are sent only with the logical state 1. The protection is responsible for generating a transition with logical state 1 and then other transition with logical state 0. This procedure allows that only one command from the Central Unit is needed for commanding apparatus. Permanent Controls – Controls that are sent with a specific logical state. The unit is only responsible for generating a transition with that logical state. This type of control is useful for executing interlockings from remote supervision and control centres. The parameters, as the logical controls, can be of two different types: Digital Parameters – They are function parameters which can only have two states: ON or OFF. Analogue Parameters – They are parameters associated with the data of the functions. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-12 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.5.2. OPERATION P RINCIPLES The correct operation when connecting the unit to the local area network implies the following conditions: Have one or more protection units with a Lonworks communication board; Have a central unit running on a local PC; Have all the connections infrastructure among the units and the central unit, namely the ring connection through the optical fibre; Configure all units connected to the network correctly; Configure the central unit database correctly. When all these conditions are fulfilled, the start-up and network configuration is done during the central unit start-up process. Only after it is started and the correct configuration of each unit it is possible to normally operate the system. Although the mechanisms of central unit database configuration are not in the scope of this document, it is essential that the configuration fulfils the following: A node corresponding to the unit’s address must be defined. 5 All digital entities defined in the database are being sent by the unit. All measures defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. All counters defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. The system operation essentially consists of sending and receiving data from both ends of the system: the protection and control terminal units and the local/remote supervision and control centre. This operation implies a group of configurations which are part of the SCADA system and not of the unit. An example is the substation’s mimic which is normally in the central unit or in a remote post. In what concerns the reception of information, the operator can give controls to the unit, which include all commands on the manoeuvrable apparatus, interlocking commands or commands associated with remote configuration actions. Sending information generated by the unit will include essentially analogue information, usually the bay measures, logical events associated with state transitions and information about its own status. All the information is received and processed in the central unit which will store, display and correctly format it, for retransmission according to the higher hierarchy protocols. Mechanisms against Communications Failure Communications failure may have different causes, which vary from a failure in the network hardware infrastructure to a failure in the units themselves. Therefore some mechanisms were defined to decrease the consequences of these failures, namely: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-13 Chapter 5 - Communications Unit resynchronization – Whenever a communication failure with the unit is detected, the central unit resynchronizes it as soon as the unit starts-up. This operation consists of initializing the network board and refreshing all database information associated with the failed unit, in order to have a permanent coherent image of all unit information. General Control Request – The general control request consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the current state of all respective information defined in the central unit database. Unit Temporary Storing – To avoid temporary failure situations which do not change the unit synchronization state, the unit has the capability of temporarily store the generated analogue and digital events that can be transmitted later. Connection Oriented Protocol – There is another important mechanism which has to do with the protocol used to transmit messages. To assure that all messages are delivered correctly this protocol was conceived to be connection oriented, that is, with message delivery acknowledgment. A set of information associated with the communication status can be consulted through the Communications > Lonworks > Information menu or through the WinReports module in the Hardware Information record. This information contains the number of repeated messages, the number of errors, among other data. Debug Mechanisms To access the unit’s operation, as terminal unit of the SCADA system, the TPU S420 has a group of menus where the unit’s communication status can be seen in real time. The central unit itself also provides a communications trace function with which all sent and received information from the various network units can be seen. This information includes a detailed amount of information about the status of the internal communication with the network board and between this and the central unit, namely: Status of communication with the network. Internal status of the network board. Number of synchronization messages. Number of repeated messages. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-14 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Comunicações LonWorks Informações Informações Estado Comunicações: ON Mensagens Erradas: 0 Mensagens Repetidas: 22 Limpar Contadores Mensagens Reset do Neuron Chip Enviar Service Pin ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.5. LonWorks Communication Information Menu with debug information. 5.5.3. CONFIGURATION The Lonworks protocol parameters can be configured and consulted in WinSettings in the Lonworks function. The Location String can also be consulted and configured in the unit’s menu. The configuration of the available SCADA functions in the unit implies firstly the definition of the unit’s address. This information is done by configuring the Location String parameter. This parameter should have the same value as the corresponding defined value in the central unit and it should be unique in the network. You should also be aware that the first two digits of the Location String should contain a number from 00 to 60, for example 029999, since these two digits define the address for the other units on the same network and are thus indispensable for the horizontal communication among units. Comunicações LonWorks Parâmetros Parâmetros Location String: 029999 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.6. Location String Configuration Menu. If the network board is not correctly configured, its configuration process should be executed through the LoadNodes application supplied with the central unit. This application allows configuring the network board firmware, including the address. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-15 5 Chapter 5 - Communications The unit’s network address configuration, when it is done for the first time, needs making a network board identification operation, namely the identification of the network board microcontroller – Neuron ID. This identification belongs to each board and is unique in the global context and is acquired in two distinct ways: By using the SERV button available at the rear of the unit. By using the unit local interface through the Communications > Lonworks > Information > Send Service Pin menu. It is also possible to restart Communications by pressing the RST key available at the rear of the unit or through the restart Communications menu. You should select the Communications > Lonworks > Information > Neuron Chip Reset menu. Comunicações LonWorks Informações Informações Estado Comunicações: ON Mensagens Erradas: 0 Mensagens Repetidas: 22 Limpar Contadores Mensagens Reset do Neuron Chip Enviar Service Pin 5 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.7. Send Service Pin and Reset Neuron Chip commands access menu. Measures and Counters The configuration of the measures and counters to report to SCADA is made in WinSettings. This is the only way to configure the sending of measures and counters, since there is no other way of doing it through the unit local menus. The TPU S420 allows sending a maximum of 16 measures and 8 counters. The sending of SCADA measures can be defined according to the following criteria and separately for each one of the measures defined in the TPU S420 through the Measure n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the measure index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the Measure > Time parameter. If it is a jitter sending, it is possible to define the associated jitter by configuring the Measure n > Jitter parameters. The configured jitter corresponds to a percentage of the measure nominal value whose variation should be reported in case it is higher than that value. For example for a measure whose nominal value is 1A, by setting the jitter with the value 20 %, the measure will only be reported if the difference between the last value sent to SCADA and the current value is higher than 0,20 A. If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure both Measure n > Time and Measure n > Jitter parameters. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-16 Chapter 5 - Communications As in measures, sending counters to SCADA can also be defined according to various criteria and separately for each one of the counters defined in the unit through the Measure (Int) n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the counter index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the parameter Measure (Int) n > Time. If it is a jitter sending, in the counters case, as its variation is limited to discrete values it is not possible to configure the jitter parameter – its value is always 1. If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure the Measure (Int) n > Time parameter. Digital Indications The configuration of the single logical indications sent to the LAN should be made in the WinSettings configuration module which is part of the WinProt application. To activate the sending of single logical indications to the LAN, you just have to select the desired module and gate. This is the only way of configuring the sending of single indication since it cannot be done through the unit’s local menus. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 128 single digital indications. The configuration of double indications sent to the LAN should also be made in WinSettings. To activate the sending of a double indication to the LAN, select the desired module and gate. The state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the selected gate along with the state of the following gate. For example, if the Open Circuit Breaker gate of the Circuit Breaker module is configured as double indication, the state reported to the LAN will correspond to the combination of the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate with the state of the following gate, in this case the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. The least significant bit of the state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate while the bit immediately to its left will correspond to the state of the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. Regarding validity, a double indication becomes invalid if at least one of the single digitals associated with it becomes invalid. Causal associations for double indications are not supported. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 16 double digital indications. Controls The configuration of the controls received in the TPU S420 is made in the WinSettings module such as the sending of indications to SCADA. For that purpose indicate the desired module and gate in the Command n parameter and the desired type, PULSE or INDICATION in the Command n > Type parameter. It is possible to configure a maximum of 32 controls. The configuration of commands of PULSE type allows that single commands received from the supervision and control system can be processed in the unit as pulse commands, that is, with the logical state varying automatically from 1 and then to 0. The circuit breaker opening orders are a typical example. The configuration of remote indications has as main application the possibility of defining remote interlockings executed through controls coming from the local or remote supervision and control system. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-17 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameters The main purpose of the Remote Configuration is to allow the remote configuration of the various parameters of the unit. The configuration of the parameters received in the TPU S420 is, as the previous entities, made in the WinSettings module. For that purpose indicate in the Parameter n parameter the desired function and parameter. It is possible to configure a maximum of 64 parameters. These parameters can be interpreted in the central unit as analogue or digital parameters depending on the configuration made. Changing data is done parameter by parameter; their check and validation is responsibility of the unit. The supervision and control centres only have to indicate the parameter identification and respective value. This means that when you want to change any function with several parameters that corresponds to a set of changes of values and respective sending of messages. In functional terms there are several possible hypotheses: the central unit may want to know the parameter current state before it changes it, it may simply change or consult it only. Table 5.5. LonWorks protocol parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Location String 000000 .. 999999 - 011000 Measure n Measures defined in the TPU S420 - No Allocation Measure n > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure n > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Measure n > Jitter 0.5 ... 100 % 0.5 Measure n (Int) Counters defined in the TPU S420 - No Allocation Measure n (Int) > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure n (Int) > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Indication n Gates defined in the unit - Double Indication n Gates defined in the unit - Command n Gates defined in the unit - Parameter n Parameters defined in the unit - 5.5.4. COMMUNICATION WITH WINP ROT The protection and control units in LON version support communication with WinProt through a connection to EFACEC’s Lonworks Scanner. For WinProt to comunicate For WinProt to communicate with a unit through Lonworks, the unit should be correctly configured in the local network as well as the PC where WinProt is installed. In WinProt it must be indicated the Location String of the unit one desires to communicate and the central unit address. The Lonworks protocol must also be configured as active protocol for that unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-18 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.5.5. LONWORKS DISTRIBUTED D ATABASE The distributed database, as indicated by its name, is the method each unit has to communicate its information, necessary in other units, to the network and at the same time to access other units’ information, that is, other distributed databases. This horizontal communication mechanism has already been implemented in the last generation units (TPU x410) with the same philosophy. Due to that fact there is a complete compatibility in information exchange through the distributed database among the units of the 410 and 420 ranges. The distributed database is based on a group of network variables defined in the Lontalk protocol. These network variables have a 32 bytes length, but only 23 of them have useful information. The remaining bytes are used by the system. The information placed in this data structure is divided into three main types: Digital Indications: up to 64 digital indications can be transmitted, using for that purpose the first 8 bytes from the distributed database structure. The indication is represented to the bit and each one represents the logical state of each one of the digital indications. Analogue Measures: Up to 3 float type measures can be transmitted; each one occupies 4 bytes. 5 Counters: Up to 3 counters can be transmitted; each one occupies 1 byte. The database structure is fixed and the user can configure all transmitted information, whether they are digital entities, analogue entities or counters as can be seen next: LSB MSB Digitials (8 bytes) Measure 1 (4 bytes) Measure 2 (4 bytes) Measure 3 (4 bytes) Counter 1 (1 byte) Counter 2 (1 byte) Counter 3 (1 byte) Figure 5.8. Data structure of the Distributed Database. Operation Principles The distributed database is based on three basic principles: Each distributed database is broadcast to the network. The sending unit does not need to know which units will consume information because all receive it. It is the receiving units’ responsibility to decide which information to process. It is on the receiving units that the configuration of the databases they are interested in should be made. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-19 Chapter 5 - Communications Finally the distributed database refresh mechanism consists in the retransmission, by each sending node, whenever the associated information changes or periodically, after this refreshment, after a period defined in the database of the central unit. From these basic principles the following conclusions can be drawn: Each unit can simultaneously be a sending node and a reception node. Each reception node can receive all distributed databases except its own. The configuration of the information to be received is always made on the side of the receiver units having in mind what the sending units are transmitting at each moment. The configuration of the information to be sent is made in the sending units. Even if a unit starts operating long after the others, it will be refreshed with their updated information without the need to occur a change of data on those units. Interaction with the Central Unit The distributed database function does not need the central unit to be running. However, it is absolutely necessary that it runs at least once, to execute the network variables bindings that are used to support the distributed databases. Once the network is initialized, the central unit can be powered off. After the central unit powers off, all the units that are added to the network will not have the distributed database operating correctly. This is also true for the power off and power on of the units that were in the network. In both cases the central unit must be restarted. Mechanisms against Communications Failure The matter of the recovering mechanisms against Communications failures should be analysed taking into account that each unit can send or receive distributed databases. Failure in the Sending Unit The failure of a sending unit is detected in the reception unit by the network board. The detection process consists in checking the periodically sending of the distributed database by the sending nodes. If the sending node takes three times longer than the time of retransmission of the distributed database, each reception node will assume the sending unit as failed and assume the default data as the information it was receiving from the failed unit. If it was receiving digital indications, they will be set to the logical state 0. If it was receiving measures or counters, they will be set to 0. In case it is a temporary failure, as soon as the communications are restored the protection will be refreshed with the correct information. In the Lonworks module are available 60 indications [Failure in the Ddb Unit 1 .. Failure in the Ddb Unit 60] which are activated whenever a sending unit in which the reception unit is interested in is considered failed. Failure in the Reception Unit The failure of the reception unit does not interfere with the sending units. However this failure may be due to a problem in the communications channel only affecting that unit. In these cases the procedure is the same as the one used for the case of failure in the sending unit, that is, all TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-20 5 Chapter 5 - Communications values are set to the default values. Note that the reception unit may not distinguish a failure in a sending unit from its powering off from the network. In case of power off and posterior power on of the unit, the central unit must be operating correctly, so that the unit can send and receive the distributed database correctly. If this does not happen, the connected unit will not operate correctly in terms of sending and receiving distributed database. Mechanisms of Real Time Analysis The TPU S420 provides in real time a group of information about the state of all information received through the distributed database. This information consists in the state of logical variables and in the values of measures and counters received from the distributed database. It is possible to consult, using the logic edition module Winlogic, the logical state of each of the 128 logical variables received through the distributed database. For that purpose consult the gates state [From Ddb: Generic Var 1 . . From Ddb: Generic Var 128] of the Lonworks module. These gates can be connected to any other gates. To consult the value of each measure and counter received through the distributed database use the collect and register analysis module, WinReports, and consult the measures and counters value referring to the distributed database. 5 Configuration The configuration of the distributed database consists in the definition of the digital and analogue information received and transmitted in the distributed database. This information should consider the needs of the remaining acquisition or protection units in the network and is done in the function configuration module – WinSettings – and the distributed database parameters can be found in the Lonworks function. Digital Indications to Send The configuration of the 64 digital indications that will be sent to the network is made exclusively through the WinSettings by indicating for each one the desired module and gate for the parameters For Ddb> Indication 1 . . For Ddb > Indication 64. Digital Indications to Receive The configuration of the logical indications to receive takes the existence of the 128 logical variables in the Lonworks module into account; these variables can be updated from any protection unit. For each one of them it must be defined the source protection unit and its position in the database. The source unit corresponds to the first two digits in that unit’s Location String and it affects the parameter From Ddb >Indication n - Unit, n from 1 to 128. The position in the database corresponds to the order of the bit in the database and it is configured through the parameter From Ddb > Indication n - Index, n from 1 to 128. Analogue Measures to Send The configuration of the sent measures consists in the definition of the 3 measures possible to send through the distributed database. The choice is made from a list of all the defined and calculated measures in the unit. It is therefore possible to transmit any measure at user’s choice TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-21 Chapter 5 - Communications in one of 3 possible positions. This configuration is carried out through the For Ddb > Measure n parameter where n varies from 1 to 3 and has the identification of the measure to be sent. Sending measures is dependent on the unit precision, that is, whenever the unit detects a change in a measure, that measure will also be refreshed through the distributed database, where the jitter is the internal precision of the unit’s measure system. This feature is important for the implementation of functions that depend on external analogue information, as is the case of functions such as the reactive power control of capacitors. Analogue Measures to Receive The configuration of analogue measures is made in the same way as the digital indications. In the list of possible measures in the protection is defined a group of 20 measures that can be received in the distributed database, some of them already with meaning, such as reactive powers. These measures are important because they can be used for internal functions of the unit, thus their definition. For example, the reactive powers can be used in the TPU C420 in the Reactive Power Control automation. For each one of them it is possible to define the sending unit and the respective measure (from the 3 measures sent by the sending units) by defining the From Ddb > Measure n - Unit and From Ddb > Measure n - Index parameters, n varies from 1 to 20. 5 Counters to Send Counters are configured, such as measures, from a list of counters available in the unit through the To Ddb > Counter n parameter where n varies from 1 to 3 and has the identification of the counter to be sent. The counters transmitted in the distributed database are bytes (values from 0 to 255) and have a jitter of 1 unit. Thus, whenever they change value, they are automatically transmitted to the network. Counters to Receive The counters follow the same philosophy as the measures. There is a pre-defined group of counters – 10 counters – that can be separately configured to be updated from a unit at choice and the respective counter (from the 3 possible ones) by defining the From Ddb > Counter n Unit and From Ddb > Counter n - Index parameters, n varies from 1 to10. Table 5.6. Parameters associated with the distributed database. Parameter Range Unit Default Value From Ddb> Indication n – Unit 0..60 - 0 From Ddb > Indication n – Index 1..64 - 1 From Ddb > Measure n – Unit 0..60 - 0 From Ddb > Measure n – Index 1..3 - 1 From Ddb > Counter n – Unit 0..60 - 0 From Ddb > Counter n – Index 1..3 - 1 To Ddb > Indication n Indications defined in the unit - To Ddb > Measure n Measures defined in the unit - NO ALLOCATION To Ddb > Counter n Counters defined in - NO TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-22 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Default Value the unit ALLOCATION Configuration Example The goal of the following application example is to provide a better perception of the distributed database operation and configuration mode. The system is formed by 3 sending and receiving units with the Location Strings 010000, 020000 and 600000. The following operation is desired: Unit 01 should know from unit 60 the Logic Selectivity Blocking state. Unit 02 should know from unit 01 the circuit breaker state and the observed reactive power. Unit 60 should know from unit 01 the observed position of the tap changer. RTU T U P S3 0 0 T U P S3 0 0 UU = IrIr== r= r 22 220 220 00 AA K2 2 K VV U U = IrIr== r= r 22 220 220 00 AA 2 K 2 K VV 60 kV LAN 5 T U P S3 0UU 0 T U P S3 0UU 0 == IrIr== r2r2 220 220 02 0AA K 2 K VV == IrIr== r2r2 220 220 02 0AA KK 2 VV Changeover tap Logical Trip Lock TPU 02 Circuit breaker Status Active Power 15 kV T U P S3 0 0 U U IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 K K VV T U P S3 0 0 U U IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 K K VV T U P S3 0 0 U U IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 K K VV TPU 60 T U P S3 0 0 U U IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 K K VV TPU 01 Figure 5.9. Example of the distributed database configuration. Unit 010000 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Lonworks function, the To Ddb> Indication 64 parameter with Circuit Breaker in the Value field and Circuit Breaker State in the Value 2 field. Configure the Indication 1 received from the Ddb to be updated from unit 60 with index 1. For that purpose configure the From Ddb> Indication 1 – Unit parameter with the value 60 and the From Ddb > Indication 1 - Index parameter with the value 1. Configure To Ddb > Measure 20 with Reactive Power. Configure To Ddb > Counter 1 with Tap Changer Position. Unit 020000 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Lonworks function, the Indication 1 received from the Ddb to be updated from unit 01 with the index 64. For that purpose configure the From Ddb> TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-23 Chapter 5 - Communications Indication 1 - Unit parameter with value 01 and the From Ddb > Indication 1 - Index parameter with the value 64. Configure the measure Reactive Power of the Ddb to be updated from unit 01 position 64. For that purpose configure the From Ddb> Measure 2 - Unit parameter with the value 01 and the From Ddb> Measure 2 - index with the value 20. Unit 600000 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Lonworks function, the To Ddb> Indication 1 parameter with Overcurrent Protection in the Value field and Logic Selectivity Blocking in the Value 2 field. Configure the Ddb Tap Changer counter to be updated from unit 01 position 1. For that purpose configure the From Ddb> Counter 1 - Unit parameter with the value 01 and the From Ddb > Counter 1 - Index parameter with the value 1. 5.5.6. AUTOMATION LOGIC Associated with the Lonworks protocol there is a module constituted by a group of logical variables used for sending and receiving logical indications. These indications are divided into two large groups. The first one is formed by 5 logical variables that show information regarding the Lonworks protocol. The second group of logical variables refers to the variables which are associated with the distributed database. It is constituted by 60 logical variables for the purpose of failed protection units indication and by 128 variables that are updated through the reception of databases from other units. Table 5.7. Description of the logical variables of the Lonworks module. Id Name Description 7936 LAN Communication Board This indication shows the Lonworks board status – Out of Order or Operational. 7937 LAN Communication Status This gate, as the LAN led, shows communication status with the central unit. 7938 LAN Invalid Command When an invalid command is received from the network, a pulse command is transmitted to this gate. 7939 LAN Remote Commands Blocked When this indication is active, the commands received from the LAN are ignored. 7940 LAN Information Loss Whenever loss of information in the network message sending or reception is registered, a pulse command is sent to this gate. 7941 From Ddb: Generic Var 1 ... ... 128 Indications that are updated from databases received from other units. 8068 From Ddb: Generic Var 128 8069 Ddb Unit 1 Failure ... ... 8128 Ddb Unit 60 Failure the the Indications that are activated whenever a sending unit which is being received is assumed as failed. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-24 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Additionally to the indications referred in Table 5.7 are also available the variables corresponding to parameters change and function logic. 5 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-25 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.6. DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL In the DNP version, the TPU S420 allows the connection to a local area network based on a DNP 3.0 network and thus the interconnection to the substation supervision and control system or to remote control centres. 5.6.1. GENERAL ARCHITECTURE The base architecture of the local protection and control system is based on one or two central units connected to a local area network with a serial interface in an optical fibre ring topology or in a RS485 topology. 5.6.2. OPERATION P RINCIPLE The DNP3.0 network protocol is based on a serial protocol. In units with this firmware version the serial port identified as COM 1 is exclusively allocated to the protocol. The local area network can be implemented on a plastic or glass optical fibre ring topology or it can be based on a RS485 interface, depending on the connector used for COM 1. In both cases the communication rate is configurable and can have a value from 4800 baud to 19200 baud. Entities Types According to the DNP3.0 protocol the following entities are defined in the TPU S420: Digital Variables – These variables correspond to logical indications of the unit; Analogue Measures – They correspond to all measures processed in the unit including the calculated ones. They are sent in floating point format; Counters – They are associated with integer type measures existing in the unit. They are sent in integer format. Controls – Normally they are controls generated by the control centre aiming at performing an operation in the unit. Parameters – They correspond to the parameters of all functions available in the unit. Files – All information exchanged between the unit’s configuration program, WinProt, and the unit has as basis the file transfer mechanisms foreseen by the protocol. Entities Attributes All defined entities can be received from or sent to the TPU S420. Their transmission normally has a set of attributes that better describe the entity. These attributes depend on the type of entity and are created and processed automatically by the unit. The following attributes are defined: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-26 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Validity – It indicates if the variable is valid or not, that is, if the sent value must be processed as a correct value or not. Value – It indicates the entity value and as such it depends on the type of associated entity. If it is a digital indication, it will contain the logical state; if it is a measure or a counter, it will contain the respective value; if it is a control, it will contain its associated state or value. In the case of analogue measures the transmission cause is configured in WinSettings through the parameters of the DNP function. The defined causes for sending measures are: Cyclical, after a configurable time delay; By Jitter, that is, only when the value change exceeds a defined range; Cyclical plus jitter, combining the previous two. The logical controls on the unit can be of two different types: Pulse Controls – Controls that are sent only with the logical state 1. The protection is responsible for generating a transition with logical state 1 and then other transition with logical state 0. This procedure allows that only one command from the Central Unit is needed for commanding apparatus. Permanent Controls – Controls that are sent with a specific logical state. The unit is only responsible for generating a transition with that logical state. This type of control is useful for executing interlockings from remote supervision and control centres. The parameters, as the logical controls, can be of two different types: Digital Parameters – They are function parameters which can only have two states: ON or OFF. Analogue Parameters – They are parameters associated with the data of the functions. 5.6.3. OPERATION P RINCIPLES The correct operation when connecting the unit to the local area network implies the following conditions: Have one or more protection units with the DNP firmware version; Have a central unit running on a local PC; Have all the connections infrastructure among the units and the central unit running in the PC; Configure all units connected to the network correctly; Configure the central unit database correctly. When all these conditions are fulfilled, the start-up and network configuration is done during the central unit start-up process. Only after it is started and the correct configuration of each unit, it is possible to normally operate the system. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-27 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Although the mechanisms of the central unit database configuration are not in the scope of this document, it is essential that the configuration fulfils the following: A node corresponding to the unit’s address must be defined. The unit must be correctly configured in the central unit both in application and logical levels. All digital entities defined in the database are being sent by the unit. All measures defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. All counters defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. The system operation essentially consists of sending and receiving data from both ends of the system: the protection and control terminal units and the local/remote supervision and control centre. This operation implies a group of configurations which are part of the SCADA system and not of the unit. An example is the substation’s mimic which is normally in the central unit or in a remote post. In what concerns the reception of information, the operator can give controls to the unit, which include all commands on the manoeuvrable apparatus, interlocking commands or commands associated with remote configuration actions. Sending information generated by the unit will include essentially analogue information, usually the bay measures, logical events associated with state transitions and information about its own status. All the information is received and processed in the central unit which will store, display and correctly format it, for retransmission according to the higher hierarchy protocols. Mechanisms against Communications Failure Communications failure may have different causes that vary from a failure in the network hardware infrastructure to a failure in the units themselves. Therefore some mechanisms were defined to decrease the consequences of these failures, namely: Unit resynchronization – Whenever a communication failure with the unit is detected, the central unit resynchronizes it as soon as the unit starts-up. This operation consists of initializing the DNP 3.0 protocol and refreshing all database information associated with the failed unit, in order to have a permanent coherent image of all unit information. General Control Request – The general control request consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the current state of all respective information defined in the central unit database. Class 1 Entities Request – The information request of class 1 entities consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the events associated with the class 1 entities. Class 2 Entities Request – The information request of class 2 entities consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the events associated with the class 2 entities. Class 3 Entities Request – The information request of class 3 entities consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the events associated with the class 3 entities. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-28 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Unit Temporary Storing – To avoid temporary failure situations which do not change the unit synchronization state, the unit has the capability of temporarily store the generated analogue and digital events that can be transmitted later. Connection Oriented Protocol – There is another important mechanism which has to do with the protocol used to transmit messages. To assure that all messages are delivered correctly this protocol was conceived to be connection oriented, that is, with message delivery acknowledgment. A set of information associated with the communication status can be consulted through the Communications > DNP 3.0 > Information menu or through the WinReports module in the Hardware Information record. This information contains the number of repeated messages, the number of errors, among other data. Debug Mechanisms To access the unit’s operation, as a terminal unit of the SCADA system, TPU S420 has a group of menus where the unit’s communication status can be seen in real time, namely: Network Communication Status. Number of Messages with error. Number of Repeated Messages. Reset Message Counters 5 Comunicações DNP 3.0 Informações Informações Estado Comunicações: ON Mensagens Erradas: 0 Mensagens Repetidas: 8 Limpar Contadores Mensagens ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.10. DNP 3.0 Communication Information Menu with debug information. The central unit itself also provides a communications trace function with which all sent and received information from the various network units can be seen. This information includes a detailed amount of information about the status of the internal communication with the network board and between this and the central unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-29 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.6.4. CONFIGURATION The configuration of the available SCADA functions in the unit implies firstly the definition of the unit’s address. This is done by configuring the DNP Address parameter. This parameter should have the same value as the corresponding defined value in the central unit and should be unique in the network. It can be configured with values from 0 to 32767 and its default value is 2. It is also necessary to indicate the DNP Master Address which corresponds to the central unit address in the network. This address, as the previous one, can have values from 0 to 32767 and its default value is 1. These parameters can be configured and consulted in the unit’s menu or using the WinSettings. Comunicações DNP 3.0 Parâmetros Parâmetros Endereço DNP: 2 Endereço Master DNP: 1 5 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.11. Configuration Menu of the DNP 3.0 protocol parameters. There is another group of parameters that can only be configured in the DNP 3.0 function of WinSettings. One of these parameters corresponds to Link Confirmation. This parameter can be configured as NEVER or SOMETIMES, the first one is the default value. The Timeout Link parameter can have values from 0 to 32767 milliseconds. Its default value is 3000 milliseconds. Link Resend is the next parameter to configure for DNP 3.0 protocol. It can be configured with values from 0 to 255 and its default value is 2. The next parameter is Application Confirmation. It can be configured as ON or OFF, OFF being its default value. The Communication Timeout parameter corresponds to the interval after which the unit should assume communication failure with the central unit, if nothing has been received. This time interval can be configured from 0 to 32767 seconds and its default value is 60 seconds. The next parameter corresponds to Report by Exception. Its value can be configured as ON or OFF. It indicates whether the events should be immediately reported to SCADA or not, that is, if its value is ON the events are immediately reported to SCADA, otherwise the events are only reported when the central unit enquires the unit with a request of events of the class they belong to. Its default value is OFF. In a ring network, this parameter should be configured with its default value. The Indications Class parameter indicates the class to which the indications belong. It can be configured as NONE, CLASS 1, CLASS 2 or CLASS 3, the first is its default value. The Measures Class parameter is equivalent to the previous parameter but indicating in which class the measures and counters should be reported. Measures and Counters The configuration of the measures and counters to report to SCADA is made in WinSettings. This is the only way to configure the sending of measures and counters, since there is no other way of doing it through the unit local menus. The TPU S420 allows sending a maximum of 16 measures and 8 counters. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-30 Chapter 5 - Communications The sending of SCADA measures can be defined according to the following criteria and separately for each one of the measures defined in the TPU S420 through the Measure n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the measure index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the Measure > Time parameter. If it is a jitter sending, it is possible to define the associated jitter by configuring the Measure n > Jitter parameters. The configured jitter corresponds to a percentage of the measure nominal value whose variation should be reported in case it is higher than that value. For example for a measure whose nominal value is 1A, by setting the jitter with the value 20 %, the measure will only be reported if the difference between the last value sent to SCADA and the current value is higher than 0,20 A. If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure both Measure n > Time and Measure n > Jitter parameters. As in measures, sending counters to SCADA can also be defined according to various criteria and separately for each one of the counters defined in the unit through the Measure (Int) n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the counter index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the parameter Measure (Int) n > Time. If it is a jitter sending, in the counters case, as its variation is limited to discrete values it is not possible to configure the jitter parameter – its value is always 1. If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure the Measure (Int) n > Time parameter. Digital Indications The configuration of the single logical indications sent to the LAN should be made in the WinSettings configuration module which is part of the WinProt application. To activate the sending of single logical indications to the LAN, you just have to select the desired module and gate. This is the only way of configuring the sending of single indication since it cannot be done through the unit’s local menus. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 128 single digital indications. The configuration of double indications sent to the LAN should also be made in WinSettings. To activate the sending of a double indication to the LAN, select the desired module and gate. The state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the selected gate along with the state of the following gate. For example, if the Open Circuit Breaker gate of the Circuit Breaker module is configured as double indication, the state reported to the LAN will correspond to the combination of the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate with the state of the following gate, in this case the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. The least significant bit of the state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate while the bit immediately to its left will correspond to the state of the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. Regarding validity, a double indication becomes invalid if at least one of the single digitals associated with it becomes invalid. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 16 double digital indications. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-31 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Controls EFACEC’s protection and control units support all type of single digital controls defined in the DNP 3.0 protocol. The configuration of the controls received in the TPU S420 is made in the WinSettings module such as the sending of indications to SCADA. For that purpose indicate the desired module and gate in the Command n parameter. It is possible to configure a maximum of 32 controls. The configuration of commands of PULSE type allows that single commands received from the supervision and control system can be processed in the unit as pulse commands, that is, with the logical state varying automatically from 1 and then to 0. The circuit breaker opening orders are a typical example. The configuration of remote indications has as main application the possibility of defining remote interlockings executed through controls coming from the local or remote supervision and control system. Parameters The main purpose of the Remote Configuration is to allow the remote configuration of the various parameters of the unit. The configuration of the parameters received in the TPU S420 is, as the previous entities, made in the WinSettings module. For that purpose indicate in the Parameter n parameter the desired function and parameter and in Parameter n > Type field the type of desired parameter: DIGITAL or ANALOGUE. It is possible to configure a maximum of 64 parameters. These parameters can be interpreted in the central unit as analogue or digital parameters depending on the configuration made. The DIGITAL type parameters should only be used for parameters with only two possible values: ON and OFF. The ANALOGUE type parameters can be used for all type of parameters (byte, short or float). Changing data is done parameter by parameter; their check and validation is responsibility of the unit. The supervision and control centres only have to indicate the parameter identification and respective value. This means that when you want to change any function with several parameters that corresponds to a set of changes of values and respective sending of messages. In functional terms there are several possible hypotheses: the central unit may want to know the parameter current state before it changes it, it may simply change or consult it only. Table 5.8. DNP 3.0 protocol parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value DNP Address 0 .. 32767 - 0 DNP Master Address 0 .. 32767 - 1 Link Confirmation NEVER / SOMETIMES - NEVER Timeout Link 0 .. 32767 ms 3000 Link Resend 0 .. 255 - 2 Application Confirmation ON / OFF - OFF Application Timeout 0 .. 32767 ms 5000 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-32 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Default value Communication Timeout 0 .. 32767 s 60 Report by Exception ON / OFF - OFF Master Synchronization 0 .. 300 s 10 Indications Class NONE / CLASS 1 / CLASS 2 / CLASS 3 - NONE Measures Class NONE / CLASS 1 / CLASS 2 / CLASS 3 - NONE Measure n Measures defined in the UAC 420 - No Allocation Measure n > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure n > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Measure n > Jitter 0.5 ... 100 % 0.5 Measure (Int) n Counters defined in the UAC 420 - No Allocation Measure (Int) n > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure (Int) n > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Indication n Gates defined in the unit - Double Indication n Gates defined in the unit - Command n Gates defined in the unit - Parameter n Parameters defined in the unit - Parameter n > Type ANALOGUE / DIGITAL - 5.6.5. COMMUNICATION WITH 5 ANALOGUE WINP ROT The protection and control units in DNP 3.0 version support communication with WinProt through a connection to EFACEC’s DNP Scanner. So that the WinProt communicates with a unit through DNP it is necessary that the unit is correctly configured in the local network as well as the PC where WinProt is installed. As the communication of the unit with WinProt has the file transfer as basis, it is necessary that all associated configuration is correctly made in the central unit. On the WinProt side it is necessary to indicate the Unit Address with which one desires to communicate and the central unit address. The DNP 3.0 protocol must also be configured as active protocol for that unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-33 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.7. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL 5.7.1. ARCHITECTURE In the ETH version, the TPU S420 allows the connection to a local area network based on an Ethernet network and thus the interconnection to the substation supervision and control system or to remote control centres. The local area network is based on TCP/IP network with copper or optical fibre interface with ST or SC type connectors. The communication rate is 100Mb/s. The EFACEC’s protection and control units have full compatibility with systems where the network protocol corresponds to the IEC60870-5-104 protocol. Entities Types According to the IEC60870-5-104 protocol the following entities are defined: Digital Variables – These variables correspond to logical indications in the unit. Analogue Measures – They correspond to all measures processed in the unit including the calculated ones. They are sent in a floating point format. Counters – They are associated with integer type measures existing in the unit. They are sent in integer format. Controls – They correspond to controls generated by the control centre aiming at performing an operation in the unit. Parameters – They correspond to the parameters of all functions available in the unit. Entities Attributes All defined entities can be received from or sent to the TPU S420. Their transmission normally has a set of attributes that better describe the entity. These attributes depend on the type of entity and are created and processed automatically by the unit. The following attributes are defined: Validity – It indicates if the variable is valid or not, that is, if the sent value must be processed as a correct value or not. Value – It indicates the entity value and as such it depends on the type of associated entity. If it is a digital indication, it will contain the logical state; if it is a measure or a counter, it will contain the respective value; if it is a control (command or parameter), it will contain the control associated state or value. Cause – It indicates the cause that led to the transmission of the entity. In the case of logical variables, this attribute represents the reason of the logical state transition. It is normally used to characterize the circuit breaker state changes where it is very useful to know in a single message the cause associated to the manoeuvre. The defined causes are: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-34 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Table 5.9. List of causes. Id Description 0 No associated cause 1 State change 2 Validity change 3 Overflow 4 Underflow 5 By time delay 16 Undetermined cause 17 Automation command 18 Manual command 19 Protections command In the case of analogue measures the transmission cause is configured in WinSettings through the parameters of the IEC104 function. The defined causes for sending measures are: Cyclical, after a configurable time delay; 5 By Jitter, that is, only when the value change exceeds a defined range; Cyclical plus jitter, combining the previous two. The logical controls on the unit can be of two different types: Pulse Controls – Controls that are sent only with the logical state 1. The unit is responsible for generating a transition with logical state 1 and then other transition with logical state 0. This procedure allows that only one command from the Central Unit is needed for commanding apparatus. Permanent Controls – Controls that are sent with a specific logical state. The unit is only responsible for generating a transition with that logical state. This type of control is useful for executing interlockings from remote supervision and control centres. The parameters, as the logical controls, can be of two different types: Digital Parameters – They are function parameters which can only have two states: ON or OFF. Analogue Parameters – They are parameters associated with the data of the functions. 5.7.2. OPERATION P RINCIPLES The correct operation when connecting the unit to the local area network implies the following conditions: Have one or more protection units with a Ethernet communication board; Have a central unit running on a local PC; TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-35 Chapter 5 - Communications Have all the connections infrastructure among the units and the central unit, namely the connection of all units to the network; Configure all units connected to the network correctly; Configure the central unit correctly. When all these conditions are fulfilled, the start-up and network configuration is done during the central unit start-up process. Only after it is started and the correct configuration of each unit, it is possible to normally operate the system. Although the mechanisms of central unit configuration are not in the scope of this document, it is essential that the configuration fulfils the following: A unit with the IP Address of the TPU S420 is defined in the central unit. It is also necessary that the unit and the central unit are configured in the same network. The configuration of the time delays made in the unit should be the same as the configuration made for that unit but in the central unit. The unit must be correctly configured in the central unit both in application and logical levels. The common address for the EFACEC’s protection and control units has a length of 2 bytes. It is defined as being the last two bytes of the unit’s IP address, for example, for a unit with IP address IP 172.16.2.56, the common address will be 2*256+56=568. The connection port to the central unit defined for EFACEC units is 2404. The source address is present in the messages exchanged between the units and the central unit. The objects address for EFACEC units has a length of 3 bytes. All digital entities defined in the database are being sent by the unit. All measures defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. All counters defined in the database must be correctly configured, so that they can be sent by the unit. All parameters defined in the database must have an associated entity configured in the central unit for consultation of its value. The digital parameters have an associated indication with the address 3*256+offset of the parameter, where offset varies from 1 to 64. The analogue parameters have an associated measure where the address is obtained in the same way as in the digital parameters. The system operation essentially consists of sending and receiving data from both ends of the system: the protection and control terminal units and the local/remote supervision and control centre. This operation implies a group of configurations which are part of the SCADA system TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-36 5 Chapter 5 - Communications and not of the unit. An example is the substation’s mimic which is normally in the central unit or in a remote post. In what concerns the reception of information, the operator can give controls to the unit, which include all commands on the manoeuvrable apparatus, interlocking commands or commands associated with remote configuration actions. Sending information generated by the unit will include essentially analogue information, usually the bay measures, logical events associated with state transitions and information about its own status. All the information is received and processed in the central unit which will store, display and correctly format it, for retransmission according to the higher hierarchy protocols. Mechanisms against Communications Failure Communications failure may have different causes that vary from a failure in the network hardware infrastructure to a failure in the units themselves. Therefore some mechanisms were defined to decrease the consequences of these failures, namely: Unit resynchronization – Whenever a communication failure with the unit is detected, the central unit resynchronizes it as soon as the unit starts-up. This operation consists of initializing the protocol and refreshing all database information associated with the failed unit, in order to have a permanent coherent image of all unit information. Resynchronization can also be periodically done according to the time delay defined in the central unit. General Control Request – The general control request consists of enquiring a unit to obtain the current state of all respective information defined in the central unit. The general control request is made during unit synchronization or resynchronization whenever for some reason there is loss of transmitted information or according to the time delay configured in the central unit. Unit Temporary Storing – To avoid temporary failure situations which do not change the unit synchronization state, the unit has the capability of temporarily store the generated analogue and digital events that can be transmitted later. Connection Oriented Protocol – There is another important mechanism which has to do with the protocol used to transmit messages. As the IEC60870-5-104 is supported in a TCP/IP network, the platform itself is in charge of managing the message retransmission mechanism when communication failures are detected. A set of information associated with the communication status can be consulted through the Communications > IEC104 > Information menu or through the WinReports module in the Hardware Information record. This information contains the number of repeated messages, the number of errors, among other data. Debug Mechanisms To access the unit’s operation, as terminal unit of the SCADA system, the TPU S420 has a group of menus where the unit’s communication status can be seen in real time, namely: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-37 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Comunicações IEC104 Informações Informações Estado Comunicações: ON Mensagens Erradas: 0 Limpar Contadores Mensagens ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.12. IEC104 Communication Information Menu with debug information. The central unit itself also provides a communications trace function with which all sent and received information from the various network units can be seen. This information includes a detailed amount of information about the status of the internal communication with the network board and between this and the central unit. 5.7.3. CONFIGURATION The IEC60870-5-104 protocol parameters can be configured and consulted in the IEC104 function of WinSettings. The configuration of the available SCADA functions in the unit implies in the first place the network configuration. The parameters associated with the network configuration, namely IP Address, Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway, can be consulted and configured in the unit’s menu, in Communications > Ethernet > Parameters, or in WinSettings in the Ethernet function. The IP Address should have the same value as the corresponding defined value in the central unit and it should be unique in the network. Comunicações IEC104 Parâmetros Parâmetros Tempo Estabelecimento Ligação: 30.000 Tempo Envio APDUs: 15.000 Tempo Confirm Msg ACK: 10.000 Tempo Confirm Msg Teste: 20.000 Diferença Sequência Msg: 12 APDUs após último ACK: 8 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 5.13. Configuration Menu of the IEC60870-5-104 protocol parameters. Timers The configuration of the timers associated with the IEC60870-5-104 protocol can be done in WinSettings or in the unit in Communications > IEC104 > Parameters. The configuration of TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-38 5 Chapter 5 - Communications the timers made in the unit must be coherent with the configuration made for the same timers in the central unit. One of the timers corresponds to the Connection Establishment Time and can be configured with values from 1 to 255 seconds. By default this timer is configured for 30 seconds. Another timer APDUs Send Time, corresponds to the APDUs end time or test. It can be configured with values from 1 to 255 seconds and its default value is 15 seconds. The Msg ACK Confirm Time corresponds to a confirmation timer of acknowledged messages when data messages are not received; it can be configured with values from 1 to 255 seconds. By default the configured value is 10 seconds. This timer should be configured with a value higher than the previous time delay. The last timer Test Msg Confirm Time corresponds to the time to send test frames after a period when nothing is sent. This time can have values from 1 to 255 seconds and its default value is 20 seconds. System Parameters One of the parameters associated with the IEC60870-5-104 protocol corresponds to the maximum difference of I format APDUs, in the number of the received sequence, so that the state variable is sent. This parameter, Msg Sequence Difference, can be configured with values from 1 to 32767 APDUs and its default value is 12 APDUs. The other system parameter corresponds to the number of I format APDUs received between sending acknowledge messages. This parameter, APDUs after last ACK, can have values from 1 to 32767 APDUs and its default value is 8 APDUs. The value configured for this parameter should not be higher than two thirds of the value configured for the previous parameter. The configuration of system parameters can be made, as in the case of time delays, in the WinSettings or in the unit in Communications > IEC104 > Parameters. The configuration made in the unit must be coherent with the configuration made for the same parameters in the central unit. Measures and Counters The configuration of the measures and counters to report to SCADA is made in WinSettings. This is the only way to configure the sending of measures and counters, since there is no other way of doing it through the unit local menus. The TPU S420 allows sending a maximum of 16 measures and 8 counters. The sending of SCADA measures can be defined according to the following criteria and separately for each one of the measures defined in the TPU S420 through the Measure n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the measure index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the Measure n > Time parameter. If it is a jitter sending, it is possible to define the associated jitter by configuring the Measure n > Jitter parameters. The configured jitter corresponds to a percentage of the measure nominal value whose variation should be reported in case it is higher than that value. For example for a measure whose nominal value is 1A, by setting the jitter with the value 20 %, the measure will only be reported if the difference between the last value sent to SCADA and the current value is higher than 0,20 A. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-39 5 Chapter 5 - Communications If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure both Measure n > Time and Measure n > Jitter parameters. As in measures, sending counters to SCADA can also be defined according to various criteria and separately for each one of the counters defined in the unit through the Measure (Int) n > Send parameter, where n corresponds to the counter index: If it is a cyclical sending, the user should define the associated cycle time by configuring the parameter Measure (Int) n > Time. If it is a jitter sending, in the counters case, as its variation is limited to discrete values it is not possible to configure the jitter parameter – its value is always 1. If the sending is by cycle and jitter, the user should configure the Measure (Int) n > Time parameter. Digital Indications The configuration of the single logical indications sent to the LAN should be made in the WinSettings configuration module which is part of the WinProt application. To activate the sending of single logical indications to the LAN, you just have to select the desired module and gate. This is the only way of configuring the sending of single indications since it cannot be done through the protection’s local menus. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 128 single digital indications. The configuration of double indications sent to the LAN should also be made in WinSettings. To activate the sending of a double indication to the LAN, select the desired module and gate. The state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the selected gate along with the state of the following gate. For example, if the Open Circuit Breaker gate of the Circuit Breaker module is configured as double indication, the state reported to the LAN will correspond to the combination of the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate with the state of the following gate, in this case the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. The least significant bit of the state reported to SCADA will correspond to the state of the Open Circuit Breaker gate while the bit immediately to its left will correspond to the state of the Closed Circuit Breaker gate. Regarding validity, a double indication becomes invalid if at least one of the single digitals associated with it becomes invalid. Causal associations for double indications are not supported. The unit allows the configuration of a maximum of 16 double digital indications. Controls EFACEC units support all type of single digital controls defined in the IEC60870-5-104 protocol. The configuration of the controls received in the TPU S420 is made in the WinSettings module such as the sending of indications to SCADA. For that purpose indicate the desired module and gate in the Command n parameter. It is possible to configure a maximum of 32 controls. The control type (PULSE or INDICATION) is defined on the central unit side. The configuration of commands of PULSE type allows that single commands received from the supervision and control system can be processed in the unit as pulse commands, that is, with the logical state varying automatically from 1 and then to 0. The circuit breaker opening orders are a typical example. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-40 5 Chapter 5 - Communications The configuration of remote indications has as main application the possibility of defining remote interlockings executed through controls coming from the local or remote supervision and control system. Parameters The main purpose of the Remote Configuration is to allow the remote configuration of the various parameters of the unit. Remote Configuration is a generic function which basic principle is the change of data of the various functions of the unit parameter by parameter, their check and validation is responsibility of the unit. The supervision and control centres only have to indicate the parameter identification and respective value. The configuration of the parameters received in the TPU S420 is, as the previous entities, made in the WinSettings module. For that purpose indicate in the Parameter n parameter the desired function and parameter and in the filed Parameter n > Type. The type of parameter desired: DIGITAL or ANALOGUE. It is possible to configure a maximum of 64 parameters. The DIGITAL type parameters should only be used for parameters with only two possible values: ON and OFF. This type of parameter is consulted in the central unit as a digital entity with the address 3*256+parameter offset where offset varies from 1 to 64. The ANALOGUE type parameters can be used for all type of parameters (byte, short or float) and are visualized in the central unit as measures also with the address 3*256+ parameter offset. The update of the parameters value in the central unit is made in the general control requests. Table 5.10. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Connection Establishment Time 1 .. 255 s 30 APDUs Send Time 1 .. 255 s 15 Msg ACK Confirm Time 1 .. 255 s 10 Test Msg Confirm Time 1 .. 255 s 20 Msg Sequence Difference 1 .. 32767 APDU 12 APDUs after last ACK 1 .. 32767 APDU 8 Measure n Measures defined in the unit - NO ALLOCATION Measure n > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure n > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Measure n > Jitter 0.5 ... 100 % 0.5 Measure (Int) n Counters defined in the UAC 420 - NO ALLOCATION Measure (Int) n > Send OFF / TIME / JITTER / TIME+JITTER - OFF Measure (Int) n > Time 1 .. 60 s 5 Indication n Gates defined in the unit - Double Indication n Gates defined in the unit - TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-41 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Command n Gates defined in the unit - Parameter n Parameters defined in the unit - Default value 5.7.4. AUTOMATION LOGIC Associated with the IEC60870-5-104 protocol there is a module constituted by a group of logical variables that convey protocol related information. Table 5.11. Logical variables description of the IEC104 module. Id Name Description 10496 IEC104 Communication Status This gate shows, as the LAN led, the status of communication with the central unit. 10497 IEC104 Invalid Command Whenever a network invalid command is received, a pulse command is sent to this gate. 10498 IEC104 Remote Commands Blocking When this indication is active, the commands received from the LAN are ignored. 10499 IEC104 Information Loss Whenever loss of information is registered in sending or receiving network messages, a pulse command is sent to this gate. 10500 IEC104 Protocol Restart Whenever the protocol is restarted, a pulse command is sent to this gate. Additionally to the indications referred in Table 5.7 are also available the variables corresponding to parameters change and function logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-42 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.8. ETHERNET DISTRIBUTED DATABASE 5.8.1. ARCHITECTURE The units of the 420 range when equipped with Ethernet board can support the exchange of information in the network having as base the UDP protocol and according to a distributed database philosophy. This mechanism of horizontal communication was also implemented in units with LON version but having as base the Lontalk protocol. Therefore, there is no compatibility between these two platforms. The distributed database is based on the objects defined in the IEC60870-5-104 protocol and allows a maximum network of 100 units. The information transmitted and received is divided into three main types: Digital Indications: up to 64 digital indications can be transmitted and up to 128 digital indications can be received. Analogue Measures: Up to 8 float type measures can be transmitted and up to 20 float type measures can be received. Counters: Up to 4 short type counters can be transmitted and up to 10 short type counters can be received. The database structure transmitted to the network depends on the number of entitles configured for transmission. 5.8.2. OPERATION P RINCIPLES The distributed database is based on four basic principles: The Ethernet distributed database is broadcast in the network through UDP packages. Each distributed database is placed in the network as broadcast to port 49152. The sending unit does not need to know which units will consume information because all receive it. It is responsibility of the receiving units to decide which information to process. It is on the receiving units that the configuration of the databases they are interested in should be made. Finally the distributed database refresh mechanism consists in the retransmission, by each sending node, whenever the associated information changes or periodically according to the time interval defined in the DDB Refresh Time parameter. From these basic principles the following conclusions can be drawn: Each unit can simultaneously be a sending node and a reception node. Each reception node can receive all distributed databases except its own. The configuration of the information to be received is always made on the side of the receiver units having in mind what the sending units are transmitting at each moment. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-43 5 Chapter 5 - Communications The configuration of the information to be sent is made in the sending units. Even if a unit starts operating long after, it will be refreshed with their updated information without the need to occur a change of data on those units. Interaction with the Central Unit The Ethernet distributed database, unlike the Lonworks distributed database has no type of interaction with the central unit, so the units can operate without it. Mechanisms against Communications Failure The matter of the recovering mechanisms against communications failures should be analysed taking into account that each unit can send or receive distributed databases. The failure of a sending unit is detected in the reception unit by the network board. The detection process consists in checking the periodically sending of the distributed database by the sending nodes. If the sending node takes more than the timer defined in Time Failure in the DDB Unit without transmitting, each reception node will assume the sending unit as failed. The sending unit is responsible for placing the default data as the information it was receiving from the failed unit. If it was receiving digital indications, they will be set to the logical state 0. If it was receiving measures or counters, they will be to set 0. In case it is a temporary failure, as soon as the communications are restored the protection will be refreshed with the correct information. The failure of the reception unit does not interfere with the sending units. However this failure may be due to a problem in the communications channel only affecting that unit. In these cases the procedure is the same as the one used for the case of failure in the sending unit, that is, all values are set to the default values. Note that the reception unit may not distinguish a failure in a sending unit from its powering off from the network. Mechanisms of Real Time Analysis The TPU S420 provides in real time a group of information about the state of all information received through the distributed database. This information consists in the state of logical variables and in the values of measures and counters received from the distributed database. It is possible to consult, using the logic edition module Winlogic, the logical state of each of the 128 logical variables received through the distributed database. For that purpose consult the gates state [From Ddb: Generic Var 1 . . From Ddb: Generic Var 128] of the Ethernet module. These gates can be connected to any other gates. To consult the value of each measure and counter received through the distributed database use the collect and register analysis module, WinReports, and consult the measures and counters value that refers to the distributed database. 5.8.3. CONFIGURATION The configuration of the distributed database consists in the configuration of the time delays associated with transmission and reception of information and in the definition of the digital and analogue information received and transmitted in the distributed database. This information should consider the needs of the remaining acquisition or protection units in the network. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-44 5 Chapter 5 - Communications The configuration is done in the function configuration module – WinSettings – and the distributed database parameters can be found in the Ethernet function. Consider that the unit’s IP Address corresponds to the unit identification in the distributed database. Timers One of the timers associated with the Ethernet distributed database corresponds to the DDB Repeat Time. This parameter can be configured with values from 0.01 to 1 second and corresponds to the repetition time used by the transmitting units for retransmission after a database change in order to avoid that the receiving units loose the new database. It is also necessary to configure the DDB Refresh Time with a value from 0.1 to 60 seconds. The transmitting units periodically send their database to the network according to the value configured in this parameter. The last timer is associated with the unit failures. If during a time interval higher than the configured value in Time Failure in the DDB Unit, nothing is received from a unit, the receiving unit should assume that unit as failed. This parameter can have values from 0.1 to 60 seconds. 5 Figure 5.14. Time Schematic of sending the Ddb to the network. Digital Indications to Send The configuration of the 64 digital indications that will be sent to the network is made exclusively through the WinSettings by indicating for each one the desired module and gate for the parameters For Ddb> Indication 1 . . For Ddb > Indication 64. The logical state of each of these 64 gates will be the same as the sate of the entities of the structure of the distributed database. This philosophy allows that a logical variable is the result of a logical expression previously implemented with connections among gates. Digital Indication to Receive The configuration of the logical indications to receive takes the existence of the 128 logical variables in the Ethernet module into account; these variables can be updated from any protection unit. For each one of them it must be defined the source protection unit and its position in the database. The source unit corresponds to the IP Address of that unit and it TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-45 Chapter 5 - Communications affects the parameter From Ddb >Indication n - Unit, n from 0 to 255. The position in the database corresponds to the object’s address in the database and it is configured through the parameter From Ddb > Indication n - Index, n from 0 to 255. Analogue Measures to Send The configuration of the sent measures consists in the definition of the 8 measures possible to send through the distributed database. The choice is made from a list of all the defined and calculated measures in the unit. It is therefore possible to transmit any measure at user’s choice in one of 8 possible positions. This configuration is carried out through the For Ddb > Measure n parameter where n varies from 1 to 8 and has the identification of the measure to be sent. Sending measures is dependent on the unit precision, that is, whenever the unit detects a change in a measure, that measure will also be refreshed through the distributed database where the jitter is the internal precision of the unit’s measure system. This feature is important for the implementation of functions that depend on external analogue information, as is the case of functions such as the reactive power control of capacitor banks. Analogue Measure to Receive The configuration of analogue measure is done in the same way as the digital indication. In the list of possible measure in the protection is defined a group of 20 measures that can be received in the distributed database, some of them already with meaning, such as reactive powers. These measures are important because they can be used for internal functions of the unit, thus their definition. For example, the reactive powers can be used in the TPU C420 in the Reactive Power Control automation. For each one of them it is possible to define the sending unit and the respective measure (from the 8 measures sent by the sending units) by defining the From Ddb > Measure n - Unit and From Ddb > Measure n - Index parameters, n varies from 1 to 20. Counters to Send Counters are configured, such as measures, from a list of counters available in the unit through the To Ddb > Counter n parameter where n varies from 1 to 4 and has the identification of the counter to be sent. The counters transmitted in the distributed database are bytes (values from 0 to 255) and have a jitter of 1 unit. Thus, whenever they change value, they are automatically transmitted to the network. Counters to Receive The counters follow the same philosophy as the measures. There is a pre-defined group of counters – 10 counters – that can be separately configured to be updated from a unit at choice and the respective counter (from the 4 possible ones) by defining the From Ddb > Counter n Unit and From Ddb > Counter n - Index parameters, n varies from 1 to 10. Table 5.12. Ethernet distributed database parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value DDB Repeat Time 0.01. .1 second 0.1 DDB Refresh Time 0.1..60 second 0.1 Time Failure in the DDB Unit 0.1..60 second 1 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-46 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Default value From Ddb > Indication n – Unit 0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255 - 0.0.0.0 From Ddb > Indication n – Index 1..255 - 1 From Ddb > Measure n – Unit 0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255 - 0.0.0.0 From Ddb > Measure n – Index 1..8 - 1 From Ddb > Counter n – Unit 0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255 - 0.0.0.0 From Ddb > Counter n – Index 1..4 - 1 To Ddb > Indication n Indications defined in the unit - To Ddb > Measure n Measures defined in the unit - NO ALLOCATION To Ddb > Counter n Counters defined in the unit - NO ALLOCATION Configuration Example The goal of the following application example is to provide a better perception of the distributed database operation and configuration mode. The system is formed by 3 sending and receiving units with the IP addresses 172.16.2.56, 172.16.2.57 and 172.16.2.58. 5 The following operation is desired: Unit 172.16.2.56 should know from unit 172.16.2.58 the Logic Selectivity Blocking state. Unit 172.16.2.57 should know from unit 172.16.2.56 the circuit breaker state and the observed reactive power. Unit 172.16.2.58 should know from unit 172.16.2.56 the observed position of the tap changer. RTU T U P S3 0 0 T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 220 02 0AA KK 2 VV UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 220 02 0AA KK 2 VV 60 kV LAN T U P S3 0 0 T U P S3 0 0 UU == IrIr== r2r2 220 220 00 AA K2 2 K VV UU == IrIr== r2r2 220 220 00 AA K2 2 K VV Changeover tap Logical Trip Lock TPU 02 Circuit breaker Status Active Power 15 kV T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 KK VV T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 KK VV T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 KK VV TPU 60 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 02 2 KK VV TPU 01 5-47 Chapter 5 - Communications Figure 5.15. Example of the distributed database configuration. Unit 172.16.2.56 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Ethernet function, the To Ddb> Indication 64 parameter with Circuit Breaker in the Value field and Circuit Breaker State in the Value 2 field. Configure the Indication 1 received from the Ddb to be updated from unit 172.16.2.58 with index 1. For that configure the From Ddb> Indication 1 - Unit parameter with value 172.16.2.58 and the From Ddb > Indication 1 - Index parameter with the value 1. Configure To Ddb > Measure 8 with Reactive Power. Configure To Ddb > Counter 1 with Tap Changer Position. Unit 172.16.2.57 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Ethernet function, the Indication 1 received from the Ddb to be updated from unit 172.16.2.56 with the index 64. For that configure the From Ddb> Indication 1 - Unit parameter with value 172.16.2.56 and the From Ddb > Indication 1 Index parameter with the value 64. Configure the measure Reactive Power of the Ddb to be updated from unit 172.16.2.56 position 8. For that configure the From Ddb> Measure 2 - Unit parameter with value 172.16.2.56 and the From Ddb> Measure 2 - Index with the value 8. Unit 172.16.2.58 Configuration In WinSettings configure, in the Ethernet function, the To Ddb> Indication 1 parameter with Overcurrent Protection in the Value field and Logic Selectivity Blocking in the Value 2 field. Configure the Ddb Tap Changer counter to be updated from unit 172.16.2.56 position 1. For that configure the From Ddb> Counter 1 - Unit parameter with value 172.16.2.56 and the From Ddb > Counter 1 - Index parameter with the value 1. 5.8.4. AUTOMATION LOGIC Associated with the Ethernet distributed database there is in the Ethernet module a group of logical variables used for sending and receiving logical indications. These indications are divided into two large groups. The first one refers to the variables which are associated with the distributed database. It is formed by 128 variables that are updated through the reception of databases from other units. The second group is constituted by 2 logical variables that allow the blocking of the reception and/or sending of the distributed database. Table 5.13. Description of the logical variables of the Lonworks module. Id Name Description 8198 From Ddb: Generic Var 1 ... ... 128 Indications that are updated from databases received from other units. 8325 From Ddb: Generic Var 128 8326 Ddb Reception Blocking the When this indication is active the unit ignores the TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-48 5 Chapter 5 - Communications Id Name Description messages received from the ddb. 8327 Ddb Transmission Blocking When this indication is active the unit does not transmit its ddb to the network. 5 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-49 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.9. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 5.9.1. ARCHITECTURE In the 850 version, the TPU S420 allows the connection to a local area network based on an Ethernet network and thus the interconnection to the substation supervision and control system or to remote control centres. The local area network is based on TCP/IP network with copper of optical fibre interface with ST or SC type connectors. The communication rate is 100Mb/s. The EFACEC’s protection and control units are fully integrated in systems which follow the IEC 61850 architecture. The conformity document (PICS – Protection Implementation Conformance Statement) describes the services implemented by the unit. Data Model According to part 6 of the standard the definition of the TPU S420 data model is described in SCL language in the corresponding ICD file that is supplied with the unit. 5.9.2. CONFIGURATION The IEC 61850 protocol parameters can be configured and consulted in the WinSettings IEC 61850 function. The configuration of the available SCADA functions in the unit implies in the first place the network configuration, namely IP Address, Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway, can be consulted and configured in the unit’s menu in Communications > Ethernet > Parameters, or in the WinSettings in the Ethernet function. IED Name Parameter This parameter is generic to all IEC 61850 application and is important both to communication with IEC 61850 clients and communication among units through GOOSE messages. The IED Name allows identifying the server in the system and together with the Logical Device ( LD ) name completes the domain name (IEC 61850 – 8 – 1). This identifier should be unique in the system and can only use characters from the following character set: ( "A" | "a" | "B" | "b" | "C" | "c" | "D" | " d" | " E" | "e" | "F" | "f" | "G" | "g" | "H" | "h" | "I" | "i" | "J" | "j" | "K" | "k” | "L" | "l" | "M" | "m" | "N" | "n" | "O" | "o" | "P" | "p" | "Q" | "q" | "R" | "r" | "S" | "s" | "T" | "t" | "U" | "u" | "V" | "v" | "W" | "w" | "X" | "x" | "Y" | "y" | "Z" | "z" | "_" | "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9" ). Command Related Parameters The Command Type and Timeout Selection parameters define generic default values for all the commands of the server. These values can then be changed for each particular command through the write services of the protocol itself. Command Type defines the states machine to TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-50 5 Chapter 5 - Communications follow to give a command and Timeout Selection is the maximum time a SBO type command remains selected. GGIO node configuration The GGIO SPCx and GGIO DPCx parameters allow configuring system logical variables by making them correspond to objects of the generic GGIO node existing in the unit. Report Control Blocks The unit has 4 Buffered Report Control Blocks (BRCB) and 2 Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (URCB). To configure them in WinSettings it is only necessary to configure the variables list of the associated dataset. It is possible to configure any variables with Functional Constraints (FC) equal to ST (variables states), MX (measures) or SP (parameters). 5 Figure 5.16. Configuration window of a Dataset. The dataset configuration window allows exporting/importing the configured variables to a text file to facilitate the interaction with other tools for configuration of the rest of the system. GOOSE Messages Publishing The parameters necessary for the publishing of GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) messages are the retransmission curve (equal for all GOOSE published by the unit) and the data relative to each published GOOSE application. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-51 Chapter 5 - Communications The retransmission curve has 1 parameter to indicate the number of points of the curve and 16 parameters with the configuration of times for each point. An adequate retransmission curve should have higher time delays every time and the last valid point is used as refresh time. For each GoCB (GOOSE Control Blocking) there are several parameters to be configured. The Dataset Name is the name of the group of data associated with the GoCB. The Priority message allows separating critical messages from the remaining network traffic. As higher is the parameter value the more priority the message has. The VID (Virtual ID) allows defining a virtual network dedicated for GOOSE messages. The use of virtual LANs depends on the fact that the remaining network devices support them and they should be configured according to these parameters. In case the remaining network devices do not support the use of virtual LAN, the Priority and VID parameters are ignored. The APPID (Application ID) is an identifier that allows differentiating the application. It should be unique for each system GoCB and the subscriber units should be configured accordingly. Finally, it is necessary to configure the dataset content. This parameter is of the same type as the reports parameters and is configured in a similar window. When this parameter is reconfigured, the WinSettings verifies which units configured in the same database subscribe this GOOSE application and updates them automatically. The name of the GoCB published by the unit is not fixed and varies from Publish1 to Publish8. 5 GOOSE Messages Subscription The parameters associated with the subscription of GOOSE messages allow to identify the message one desires to subscribe and configure the process data that will reflect the received values. In GoCB Name should be configured the reference, that is, the full path of the control name. In case the publisher unit is a X420 unit from EFACEC, the GoCB names vary from Publish1 to Publish8 and the path is [NameIED]LD/LLN0$GO$Publish1...8. In the Dataset Name should also be configured a reference (ex: [NameIED]LD/LLN0$[DatasetName]). The VID and APPID parameters have the same meaning as in the Output GOOSE and should correspond to the values of the corresponding message. Finally, it is necessary to match the information being published and the process data that will receive that information in the Dataset Configuration parameter. This configuration is made in a dedicated window of WinSettings. First it is necessary to identify the message one desires to subscribe indicating which is the publishing unit and the required GoCB or indicating that is a unit external to the database. Figure 5.17. Choosing window of the published GoCB. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-52 Chapter 5 - Communications When pressing OK, the GoCB Name, Dataset Name, VID and APPID parameters are automatically filled with the publishing corresponding data. Then will appear the configuration window of data match. 5 Figure 5.18. Configuration window of an input Dataset. The GOOSE input configuration window allows matching the indexes of the variables configured in the published dataset to process data of the subscriber unit. The list with the configuration can be exported/imported in suitable format. Table 5.14. IEC61850 Protocol parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value IED Name Up to 8 characters (FROM ( "A" | "a" | "B" | "b" | "C" | "c" | "D" | " d" | " E" | "e" | "F" | "f" | "G" | "g" | "H" | "h" | "I" | "i" | "J" | "j" | "K" | "k” | "L" | "l" | "M" | "m" | "N" | "n" | "O" | "o" | "P" | "p" | "Q" | "q" | "R" | "r" | "S" | "s" | "T" | "t" | "U" | "u" | "V" | "v" | "W" | "w" | "X" | "x" | "Y" | "y" | "Z" | "z" | "_" | "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9" )) - IED01 Command Type ONLY STATE / DIRECT NORMAL SECURITY / SBO NORMAL SECURITY / DIRECT INCREASED SECURITY / SBO INCREASED SECURITY - DIRECT NORMAL SECURITY Timeout Selection 20 .. 1000 ms 100 Test Message Conf Time 1 .. 255 s 20 GGIO SPC n Gates defined in the unit - TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-53 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Default value APDUs after last ACK 1 .. 32767 APDU 8 BRCBxx Max. 32 variables from the “Named Variables” list - URCBxx Max. 32 variables from the “Named Variables” list - Retr Curve> Points Number 1 .. 16 - 5 Retr Curve > T1 0 .. 86400000 ms 50 Retr Curve > T2 0 .. 86400000 ms 100 Retr Curve > T3 0 .. 86400000 ms 200 Retr Curve > T4 0 .. 86400000 ms 400 Retr Curve > T5 0 .. 86400000 ms 1000 Retr Curve > T6..16 0 .. 86400000 ms 0 GoOutn> DataSet Name Up to 65 characters (FROM ( "A" | "a" | "B" | "b" | "C" | "c" | "D" | " d" | " E" | "e" | "F" | "f" | "G" | "g" | "H" | "h" | "I" | "i" | "J" | "j" | "K" | "k” | "L" | "l" | "M" | "m" | "N" | "n" | "O" | "o" | "P" | "p" | "Q" | "q" | "R" | "r" | "S" | "s" | "T" | "t" | "U" | "u" | "V" | "v" | "W" | "w" | "X" | "x" | "Y" | "y" | "Z" | "z" | "_" | "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9" )) - GoOutn> Priority 4 .. 7 - 4 GoOutn> VID 0 .. 4095 - 0 GoOutn> APPID 0 .. 16383 - 0 GoOutn> DataSet Config Max. 20 variables from the “Named Variables” list - GoInn> GoCB Name Up to 65 characters (FROM ( "A" | "a" | "B" | "b" | "C" | "c" | "D" | " d" | " E" | "e" | "F" | "f" | "G" | "g" | "H" | "h" | "I" | "i" | "J" | "j" | "K" | "k” | "L" | "l" | "M" | "m" | "N" | "n" | "O" | "o" | "P" | "p" | "Q" | "q" | "R" | "r" | "S" | "s" | "T" | "t" | "U" | "u" | "V" | "v" | "W" | "w" | "X" | "x" | "Y" | "y" | "Z" | "z" | “$” | "_" | "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9" )) - GoInn> DataSet Name Up to 65 characters (FROM ( "A" | "a" | "B" | "b" | "C" | "c" | "D" | " d" | " E" | "e" | "F" | "f" | "G" | "g" | "H" | "h" | "I" | "i" | "J" | "j" | "K" | "k” | "L" | "l" | "M" | "m" | "N" | "n" | "O" | "o" | "P" | "p" | "Q" | "q" | "R" | "r" | "S" | "s" | "T" | "t" | "U" | "u" | "V" | "v" | "W" | "w" | "X" | "x" | "Y" | "y" | "Z" | "z" | “$” | "_" | "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9" )) - GoInn> VID 0 .. 4095 - TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5 0 5-54 Chapter 5 - Communications Parameter Range Unit Default value GoInn> APPID 0 .. 16383 - 0 GoInn> DataSet Configuration Published GoCBs existing in the system. - 5.9.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC Associated with the IEC61850 protocol there is a module constituted by a group of logical variables that convey protocol related information. Table 5.15. Logical variables description of the IEC61850 module. Id Name Description 10752 Connected Clients This gate indicates whether there are IEC61850 clients connected. 10753 Request Errors Whenever an invalid request is received from the network, a pulse command is sent to this gate. 10754 SCADA Blocking When this indication is active, the indications are not sent to LAN. 10755 IEC61850 Remote Com Blocking When this indication is active, the commands received from the LAN are ignored. 10756 Goose Emission Blocking When this indication is active the GOOSE messages are not sent to the network. 10757 Goose Reception Blocking When this indication is active the received GOOSE messages are ignored. 10758 Goose Reception Failed If there is failure in GOOSE message reception this gate is signalized. 10759 .. 10798 Goose 1 Transmitting Failed These gates indicate that are not being received any messages from the corresponding transmitting unit. .. Goose 40 Transmitting Failed 10799 IEC 61850 Data Indicates change in the IEC 61850 module data 10800 IEC 61850 Logic Indicates change in the IEC 61850 module logic TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-55 5 Chapter 5 - Communications 5.10. SNTP PROTOCOL 5.10.1. ARCHITECTURE EFACEC’s protection and control units allow time synchronization by SNTP when integrated in a network with a SNTP/NTP server. 5.10.2. OPERATION P RINCIPLES Time synchronization by SNTP is based on the following principles: The unit operates only as client; The unit may operate in UNICAST mode (makes a request to the server and waits its answer) or MULTICAST mode (receives broadcasts from the server); All configuration of the unit necessary to the SNTP protocol is made in the Ethernet function of WinSettings, or directly in the unit’s local interface in the Communications menu; As client, the unit foresees the existence of a second backup server in case the main one fails. 5.10.3. CONFIGURATION The configuration of the synchronization by SNTP, as mentioned before, can be made in the functions settings module, WinSettings, or in the unit’s local interface. All parameters regarding SNTP are found in the Ethernet function, except for the Synchronization parameter that is in the Date and Time function and allows choosing the unit’s source of synchronism. So that the synchronization is made by SNTP it is necessary that this parameter is configured with the SNTP value. SNTP/NTP Server Identification One of the parameters necessary for synchronization by SNTP is the IP SNTP Server parameter. This parameter corresponds to the IP address of the SNTP/NTP server to use. It is also possible to configure a backup server by using the IP SNTP Server 2 parameter. When the unit is not able to establish a connection with the server configured in IP SNTP Server, it will try to connect to the backup server. If there is no backup server, the IP SNTP Server 2 parameter should be configured with the IP address of the main server configured in IP SNTP Server. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-56 5 Chapter 5 - Communications SNTP Protocol One of the parameters associated with the SNTP protocol corresponds to the Server Requests Time parameter. This parameter can be configured with values from 1 to 1440 minutes and it corresponds to the time interval between requests made to the SNTP/NTP server. It is also necessary to configure the Maximum Variation parameter with a value from 1 to 1000 milliseconds. This parameter indicates the maximum variation between the unit’s clock and the server’s clock. The Minimum Number Packages parameter indicates the minimum number of answers received from the server so that the unit updates its clock. It can have values from 1 to 25. There is another parameter associated with failures of the SNTP/NTP server. If during a time interval higher than the configured time in Server Timeout is not received an answer from the server, the unit assumes the server as failed and attempts communication with the backup server. On the other hand, if it is not able to establish connection with this server, it will try again the main server and the cycle is repeated until the unit finds a valid server. The Server Timeout parameter can be configured with values from 1 to 3600 seconds. The last parameter associated with the SNTP is the Operation Mode parameter. This parameter allows the selection of the unit’s operation mode, as SNTP client, between UNICAST and MULTICAST. Configuration Example Table 5.16. Configuration example of the SNTP protocol. Parameter UNICAST MULTICAST Server Requests Time 1m 5m Maximum Variation 0,1 ms 0,5 ms Minimum Number SNTP Packages 1 5 Server Timeout 15 s 300 s 5.10.4. AUTOMATION LOGIC In the Ethernet module there are two logical variables associated with the SNTP time synchronization that reflect the status of the main SNTP server and of the backup SNTP server. Table 5.17. Logical variables description of the Ethernet module associated with the SNTP protocol. Id Name Description 8328 SNTP Server Status Indicates the communication status with the SNTP server. 8329 SNTP 2 Server Status Indicates the communication status with the SNTP server 2. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 5-57 5 6 Chapter 6. PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the protection and control functions available in the TPU S420. For each of them are described the main operation characteristics, the operation method and the scope of application. It explains the different operating characteristics and the meaning of each configurable parameter as well as the respective default values and regulation ranges. It also analyses the logical schemes associated by default with each function. Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.1. COMMON CHARACTERISITCS ......................................................................................6-5 6.1.1. Functions Modular Organization ................................................................................6-6 6.1.2. Configuration Sets.......................................................................................................6-7 6.1.3. Configuration...............................................................................................................6-8 6.1.4. Automation Logic ........................................................................................................6-8 6.2. PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ...................................................................6-11 6.2.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-18 6.2.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-20 6.3. EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ...................................................................6-24 6.3.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-24 6.3.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-26 6.3.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-28 6.4. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION..................................................6-31 6.4.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-31 6.4.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-33 6.4.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-34 6.5. DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .................................................6-36 6.5.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-36 6.5.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-38 6.5.3. Automation Logic..................................................................................................... 6-40 6.6. SECOND PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .................................................................6-42 6.6.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-42 6.6.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-42 6.6.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-44 6.7. SECOND EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION........................................................6-46 6.7.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-46 6.7.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-46 6.7.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-48 6.8. RESISTIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION..........................................................................6-50 6.8.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-50 6.8.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-52 6.8.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-52 6.9. PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ............................................................................6-54 6.9.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................... 6-54 6.9.2. Configuration............................................................................................................ 6-55 6.9.3. Automation Logic ..................................................................................................... 6-55 6.10. ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION..............................................................6-58 6.10.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-58 6.10.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-59 6.10.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-60 6.11. PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ........................................................................6-62 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-2 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.11.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-62 6.11.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-63 6.11.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-64 6.12. UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION..................................................6-67 6.12.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-67 6.12.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-68 6.12.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-70 6.13. PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION..............................................................6-73 6.13.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-73 6.13.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-74 6.13.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-76 6.14. OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................................................................6-79 6.14.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-79 6.14.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-81 6.14.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-82 6.15. AUTOMATIC RECLOSING ........................................................................................6-84 6.15.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-84 6.15.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-88 6.15.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-90 6.16. SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK .......................................................................6-92 6.16.1. Operation Method .................................................................................................. 6-92 6.16.2. Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-94 6.16.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................... 6-98 6.17. VOLTAGE RESTORATION......................................................................................6-103 6.17.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-103 6.17.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-105 6.17.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-106 6.18. FREQUENCY RESTORATION ...................................................................................6-108 6.18.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-108 6.18.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-110 6.18.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-111 6.19. CENTRALISED VOLTAGE RESTORATION ....................................................................6-113 6.19.1. Operation Method................................................................................................ 6-113 6.19.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-115 6.19.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-115 6.20. CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION .................................................................6-118 6.20.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-118 6.20.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-120 6.20.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-120 6.21. BLOCKING BY LOGICAL SELECTIVITY ........................................................................6-123 6.21.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-123 6.21.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-124 6.21.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-124 6.22. FAULT LOCATOR ...............................................................................................6-125 6.22.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-125 6.22.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-126 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-3 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.22.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-128 6.23. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE....................................................................................6-129 6.23.1. Operation method................................................................................................ 6-129 6.23.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-130 6.23.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-130 6.24. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION ...................................................................................6-133 6.24.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-133 6.24.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-134 6.24.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-134 6.25. PROTECTIONS TRIP TRANSFER ...............................................................................6-135 6.25.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-135 6.25.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-136 6.25.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-136 6.26. CIRCUIT-BREAKER SUPERVISION .............................................................................6-138 6.26.1. Operation Method................................................................................................ 6-138 6.26.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-139 6.26.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-140 6.27. DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION................................................................................6-148 6.27.1. Operation Method ................................................................................................ 6-148 6.27.2. Configuration ....................................................................................................... 6-149 6.27.3. Automation Logic................................................................................................. 6-150 Total of pages of the chapter: 164 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-4 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.1. COMMON CHARACTERISITCS The TPU S420 integrates several protection and control functions of Medium Voltage feeders, some are base and others are supplied as optional. The optional functions when existing are indicated next to the respective ANSI number: Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51); Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51N); Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent (67); Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent (67N); Second Phase Overcurrent Protection (51) – optional; Second Earth Overcurrent Protection (51N) – optional; Resisitive Earth Fault (51N); Overvoltage Protection (59) – optional; Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (59N) – optional; Undervoltage Protection (27) – optional; Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection (81) – optional; 6 Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection (46) – optional; Overload Protection (49); Automatic Reclosing (79); Synchronism check and Voltage Presence (25) – optional; Load Shedding and Restoration after Voltage Trip – optional; Load Shedding and Restoration after Frequency Trip – optional; Load Shedding and Restoration after Voltage Trip (centralised version) - optional; Load Shedding and Restoration after Frequency Trip (centralised version) – optional; Logical Trip Lock (68); Fault Locator; Circuit Breaker Failure (62BF); Trip Circuit Supervision (62); Protection Trip Transfer (43); Circuit Breaker Supervision; Disconnector Supervision. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-5 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions All these functions have particular characteristics detailed in the next sections. This section analyses the characteristics common to the several functions regarding their configuration and automation logic. 6.1.1. FUNCTIONS MODULAR ORGANIZATION All units from the x420 range have an identical structure, modular and object-driven. This architecture assures a uniform interface with the exterior for all the products of that range, which allows in particular the existence of only one PC interface application – WinProt – for all of them. Each one of the control and protection functions corresponds to a different module, and its existence in a given unit depends on its type and the considered version. The remaining modules are associated with the remaining configurations, for example, hardware components (see Chapter 4 - Configuration). A specific unit corresponds to a group of several modules that can be protection functions, automation and control functions or other configurations. The group of modules varies according to the type of unit; yet identical modules in different units present a similar structure. The information associated with the identification of the protection can be fully received by the WinProt, including the list of existing modules, the regulation ranges, the options lists and the dictionary with the terms used on these options, as well as the group of logical variables. Each module is composed by: Parameters: settings of the operational characteristics and other data necessary for the operation of each function. Associated with the parameters are the respective default values and the regulation ranges that include the maximum and minimum acceptable limits and the options lists, in case they exist. Automation Logic: characteristics of the several logical variables such as the type, initial state of the inputs or interfaces, as well as definition of the connections of each one of the outputs to other variables. Logical Variables: name of the logical variables and their transitions, as they are displayed in the Chronological Event Log and in the options lists. Module Parameters Default value Ranges Automation logic Descriptions Algorithm Data conversion routine Figure 6.1. Function modular structure. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-6 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The parameters can be changed both in the protection’s local interface and by using the WinProt application (WinSettings module). The CLP 500RTU remote configuration tool can also be used if one desires to change them from the Control Centre. The logic and variables descriptives can only be changed by using WinProt (WinLogic module). The default values and the regulation ranges associated with the parameters can not be changed, they are only used for consultation. 6.1.2. CONFIGURATION SETS Each one of the protection and automation functions has 4 different groups (sets) of parameters. In the case of TPU S420, the logical trip lock is an exception, because this function does not have specific parameters. The remaining modules associated with configurations only have one group of parameters. The 4 groups of parameters allow considering different settings for a given function. From the 4 sets only 1 is active in every moment, that is, the function does not use more than 1 group of settings simultaneously. The active set can be changed in two different ways: by user’s command through the local or remote human-machine interface; by specific logical conditions defined using WinLogic. The first option assures that independently of whether the configuration was local or remote, only one of the sets is active in each moment. However, the logical conditions defined by the user do not assure there are not two groups of different parameters simultaneously activated. For that to happen, it is sufficient that the logical conditions of more than 1 set are active. The TPU S420 implements different priorities for the different sets so that only one is active in each moment: Set 1 is the default set, Set 2 has more priority than Set 1, Set 3 has more priority than both of the previous ones and so forth. The active set may not correspond to that defined by the configuration if there is a set activated by logical conditions with more priority. By default, the active set is independently regulated for each function so that the logical conditions associated with the set change can be different for each function. If desired, the edition of the automation logic can assure the simultaneous change of the active set in more than one function. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-7 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions After set change by configuration or after updating the function’s parameters, they are immediately saved in non-volatile memory. However, to avoid operation incoherencies, if the function is already in operation in that moment (for example if a protection function has started) its operating data is still that prior to the change. In that situation, the new settings will only be considered by the function when it is back to resting condition. 6.1.3. CONFIGURATION For each protection or control function (and only those), the Current Set parameter is available which allows changing the active set by the user in the local or remote interface. Example is given in Figure 6.2, for the Phase Overcurrent function. From each one of the groups of specific parameters of each function, there are 4 groups exactly identical, corresponding to the 4 available sets, as indicated in the next sections. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Fases Configuração Cenário Configuração Cenário Cenário Actual: 1 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.2. Set Configuration Menu (Phase Overcurrent). 6.1.4. AUTOMATION LOGIC All modules corresponding to fault detection or control functions present a similar logic of active setting group change, independently of the function. This logic allows implementing the priority mechanism of the different setting groups mentioned above. Per module there are also logical variables associated with the change of the function’s data groups, and a logical variable that indicates if the change is active or not. The next table identifies these variables where <Function> should be replaced in each case for the name of the respective protection or automation function. Table 6.1. Description of the logical variables common to the different modules. Name Description <Function> Settings Indication of the change of the function’s parameters <Function> Logic Indication of the change of the function’s automation logic <Function> Status Indication produced by the function showing whether it is on (Status parameter with value ON) or off line TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-8 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Name Description <Function> Set 1 Logic Variables that gather the logical conditions that allow activating a given setting group. They do not directly define the active set because it depends on the relative priorities of the groups of parameters ... <Function> Set 4 Logic <Function> Set 1 Indication whether the respective setting group is active considering the associated priorities; in each moment only one of the 4 variables of this type has logical value 1 ... <Function> Set 4 Only inputs 2 to 8 of each one of the <Function> Set 1 Logic to <Function> Set 4 Logic variables should be used to define logical conditions of that set, as the first input is reserved for the activation of set by the user (parameters change). <Function>_Set4_Active <Function>_Set4 <Function>_Set3 <Function>_Set3_Active <Function>_Set2 <Function>_Set2_Active 6 <Function>_Set1 <Function>_Set_Active <Function>_Change_Data <Function>_Change_Logic <Function>_In_Service Figure 6.3. Logic diagram common to the different modules. From the previous scheme a logic of simultaneous change of the active set can be implemented in more than one function. To do so consider conditions of set change in only one of the functions and connect the respective indications of set activation to the activation variables of the sets equivalent in the second function, from that to the third and so forth. Set 1 should be regulated as current set in the configuration of all functions except eventually in the first function that defines the set of the remaining functions. An example of this process is given in Figure 6.4 for the simplest case, that of two functions and two sets (bearing in mind that Set 1 is the one activated by default). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-9 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions <Function1>_Set2 <Function1>_Set2_Active <Function2>_Set2 <Function2>_Set2_Active <Function1>_Set1 <Function1>_Set1_Active <Function2>_Set1 <Function2>_Set1_Active Figure 6.4. Logic of simultaneous change of active setting groups in more than one function. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-10 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.2. PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION The Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection normally is the main function against short-circuits used in Medium Voltage lines or cables. Despite the extreme simplicity of its operating principle, this function assures an effective protection against phase-to-phase faults in radial distribution networks. Yet, it is normally used as backup protection of other protection devices where more sophisticated protection criterion is necessary. 6.2.1. OPERATION METHOD The operating principle of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection is extremely simple and is based on the difference of the magnitude value of the phase currents in load situation and in three-phase or two-phase short-circuit situation. In the last, the currents have very high values as the fault resistances are normally low, which allows the safe trip of the associated protection function, above a configured threshold. In distribution networks where topology is radial for the most common exploitation situations, this criterion is enough and simultaneously assures effective protection of the respective line and backup of the protections of the downstream segments. The dependence of the short-circuit currents from the upstream network short circuit power does not hinder its application. By the setting of the current thresholds or by the time setting, it is possible to achieve the coordination with others protections. In the first case, the function is configured to be sensitive only to short-circuit currents in the protection zone (cut-off protection), which clearly hinder its use as back up function. In the second case, the function is regulated so that it operates with higher times than the protection ones to which it is coordinated (time-lag protection), being just required that the function is not sensitive to the load current. Overall, 9 virtual relays are available in three groups corresponding to three operation levels, whose algorithm is executed in parallel (full-scheme). High Set Overcurrent with High-Speed Tripping As a rule, the High Set Overcurrent with High-Speed Tripping is destined to implement a very fast protection where the selective coordination is obtained by regulating the value of the operation threshold (cut-off protection). The selectivity is achieved by regulating this stage to a threshold higher than the maximum fault current external to the section of the line to be protected in order to assure that it is not put out of service for short-circuits outside the protection zone. However, sensitivity to internal faults is lost, being reserved only for faults above a specified magnitude. Although it is usual to require an instantaneous operation of the protection function, it is also possible to configure a selective timer. This feature is important to coordinate with other protections immediately at downstream, either by different operation thresholds or by logic interlocking (see 6.21 - Blocking by Logical Selectivity). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-11 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Low Set Overcurrent with Definite/Inverse Time The Low Set Overcurrent function offers higher sensitivity to internal faults than the previous stage and for selective coordination uses step timings (time-lag protection). TPU S420 provides both the definite and the inverse time options. The last option complies with International Standards, which is a guarantee of compatibility with devices of different types and manufacturers. The standards are IEC 60255-3 and IEEE 37.112. For the IEC complying option, the time-current functions follow the general expression (6.1), with the constants defined in Table 6.2: t op s a TM (6.1) b I cc I 1 Table 6.2. Constants of the inverse time curves according to standard IEC 60255-3. Curve a b A NI 0,14 0,02 16,86 MI 13,5 1 29,7 EI 80,0 2 80,0 LI 120 1 264 For the IEEE complying option, the time-current functions follow the general expression (6.2), with the constants defined in Table 6.3: t op s c I cc I d 1 (6.2) e TM Table 6.3. Constants of the inverse time curves according to standard IEEE 37.112. Curve c d e A NI 0,103 0,02 0,228 9,7 MI 39,22 2 0,982 43,2 EI 56,40 2 0,243 58,2 LI 56,143 1 21,8592 133,1 Any of the standards has four curve options: Normal Inverse (NI), Very Inverse (VI), Extremely Inverse (EI) and Long Time Inverse (LI). Their characteristics are represented in Figure 6.5. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-12 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions IEC 60255-3: Normally Inverse IEC 60255-3: Very Inverse 6 IEC 60255-3: Extremely Inverse IEC 60255-3: Long Time Inverse TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-13 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions IEEE 37.112: Normally Inverse IEEE 37.112: Very Inverse 6 IEEE 37.112: Extremely Inverse TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 IEEE 37.112: Long Inverse 6-14 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Figure 6.5. Tripping characteristics of the Overcurrent Protection with Inverse Time. Both for the definite time and the inverse time options the operational threshold should be regulated to a value higher than the maximum load current, considering the possible current peak observed during the connection due to the cold load and an additional safety margin. A 4% reset factor in the definite time option assures the necessary operation stability. In the particular case of the inverse time curves the protection start happens at a value 1,2 times higher than the configured value in order to avoid inaccuracies resulting from the operation time for short-circuit current values close to the operational value. These curves already include a safety margin of 20%. About the operation time, the setting of the Low Set Overcurrent function should consider the coordination with downstream protections. This may imply longer operation times, particularly if it is considered the definite time option. The inverse time curves, on the contrary, allow a decrease of the operation time at the same time as the fault current increases, adjusting more naturally to the thermal characteristics of the equipment. In this case, the coordination can be achieved by adjusting the scale factor (TM - Time Multiplier). When choosing the Extremely Inverse curve option, the variation of the tripping time with the fault current is more extreme while with the Normal Inverse curve that variation is minimum. On the other hand, the dependence of the operation time regarding the upstream short-circuit power is also higher for the Extremely Inverse curves. TPU S420 assures the precision of the inverse time curves for all the setting range and for fault currents between 1.5 to 20 times the operational value according to the standards it complies with. The IEC 60255-3 standard only specifies the precision of fault currents between 2 and 20 times the operational threshold. In the IEEE C37.112 standard the defined range varies between 1.5 and 20 times that threshold. TPU S420 allows the dynamic reset option in the inverse type time-lag operation. With this selected option, the protection function reset after the fault elimination is not instantaneous, but it follows a time expression depending on the observed current value. t rearme s A TM I I 2 (6.3) 1 The constant A, meaning the reset total time when the current is zero and the scale factor TM is unitary, is defined in the Table 6.2 and in the Table 6.3 to the different types of curves. These are presented in Figure 6.6 to both standards and to different available options: Normally Inverse (NI), Very Intense (VI), Extremely Inverse (EI) and Inverse of Long Time (LI). The dynamic reset just stirs up the complete reset Overcurrent Protection function after a defined period. This way, in case of a second fault occurred during the reset, the timer does not start from zero, improving a faster operation. This mode also allows a dynamic coordination between the protection and fuses or reclosers connected in the network. The implementation of the dynamic reset follows the definition of the IEEE 37.112 standard, making possible a defined mode to evaluative effects. The TPU S420 originally extends the dynamic reset principle defined by the IEEE 37.112 standard, to the time-current functions established by the IEC 60255-3 standard. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-15 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions IEC 60255-3: Normally Inverse IEC 60255-3: Very Inverse 6 IEC 60255-3: Extremely Inverse IEC 60255-3: Long Time Inverse TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-16 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions IEEE 37.112: Normally Inverse IEEE 37.112: Very Inverse 6 IEEE 37.112: Extremely Inverse TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 IEEE 37.112: Long Inverse 6-17 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Figure 6.6. Dynamic reset characteristics of the Inverse Time Protection. Definite Time Universal Overcurrent In parallel and independently of the previous functions, the TPU S420 performs a third overcurrent function with constant timer. The characteristics of this function are similar to those of the low set with definite time protection. The wide setting range of this protection function (called definite time universal protection) allows several applications: as an operation time limiter of the low set definite time protection, for situations of low short-circuit power where the operation times of this function can have important increments; as a high set protection second stage, coordinated in time and current with high set elements of network downstream protections. The use of this function together with the two previous ones, according to the two described application examples, allows obtaining for the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection a global operational characteristic as that indicated Figure 6.7. 6 Example of the universal protection application as limitation of the operation times. Example of universal protection as second of high threshold. Figure 6.7. Operational characteristic of the Overcurrent Protection. 6.2.2. CONFIGURATION The Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection parameters are grouped in three independent groups: one for each of the stages. The high set protection must be activated by changing the value of the High Set > Status parameter from OFF to ON. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-18 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The High Set > Iop parameter is the current value above which this stage operates. It should be regulated to a value higher than the highest external short-circuit current of the section of the line to protect in order to operate only for faults in the respective protection zone. The time between the fault occurrence and the operation of the high set protection is defined by the High Set > Top parameter. Its value can be made null if one wishes an operation as fast as possible. In case of blocking by logical selectivity, this timer should be adjusted to a value higher than the time guaranteed for the reception of the trigger indication of the downstream protections. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Amp> Estado: OFF Amp> Iop: 2.000 Amp> Top: 0.000 Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Operação: TEMPO DEFINIDO Def> Iop: 0.500 Def> Top: 0.040 Inv> Norma: C.E.I. Inv> Curva: NI Inv> Rearme: ESTÁTICO Inv> Iop: 0.500 Inv> TM: 0.050 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Univ> Estado: OFF Univ> Iop: 0.500 Univ> Top: 0.040 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.8. Set 1 Menu (Phase Overcurrent). To activate the low set stage, the Low Set > Status parameter should be configured with ON value. The Low Set > Operation parameter allows choosing the operation mode from the two possible options: DEFINITE TIME or INVERSE TIME. When choosing the DEFINITE TIME option, configure the two parameters: Def> Iop and Def> Top. The first is the current value above which the protection will operate and that should be regulated considering the maximum load current; the second is the respective operational time, which enables the coordination with downstream protections. When choosing the INVERSE TIME option, configure the parameters: Inv> Standard allows choosing the standard with which the inverse time curve complies (IEC or IEEE) and Inv> Curve allows choosing the type of curve (NI, VI, EI or LI). The function reset can be STATIC (default option) or DYNAMIC (situation in which the attack time follows the expression (6.3)), by selecting the parameter value Inv> Reset. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120% of that current. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the fault current. Instead one should configure the Inv> TM parameter. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-19 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions times of the time-lag stage and, this way, finding the optimal point for coordination with the other downstream inverse time protections. Regarding the universal stage, the parameters are similar to those of the low set definite time stage. The Univ> Status parameter indicates whether the function is active, Univ> Iop is the value above which the function operates and Univ> Top defines the trip time. Its setting should be coordinated with that of the two other stages according to one of the two examples presented or according to other criterion defined by the user. Table 6.4. Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 High Set> Status OFF / ON OFF High Set> Iop 0,2..40 pu 2 High Set> Top 0..60 s 0 Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set > Operation DEFINITE TIME / INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME Def> Iop 0,2..20 pu 0,5 Def> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 Inv> Iop 0,2..20 pu 0,5 Inv> TM 0,05..1,5 s 0,05 Inv> Standard I.E.C. / I.E.E.E. I.E.C. Inv> Curve NI / VI / EI / LI NI Inv> Reset STATIC / DYNAMIC STATIC Univ> State OFF / ON OFF Univ> Iop 0,2..40 pu 0,5 Univ> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 6 6.2.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module includes all start and trip indication of this function, discriminated by stage (high set, low set and universal) and by phase. These variables are then grouped by stage and constrained by the existence of blockings established by the user or by other logical variables. The blocking by logical selectivity is a particular case to which corresponds a variable that can be configured in a physical input or to which can be connected a variable received from the local area network. By default, this blocking is connected to the similar blocking of the earth protection. By default, the blocking by logical selectivity only affects the high set stage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-20 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Table 6.5. Description of the logical variables of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 15616 Def Time OC Prot Phase A … ... Start indication of the low set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) . 15618 Def Time OC Prot Phase C 15619 Def Time OC Prot Ph A Trip ... ... 15621 Def Time OC Prot Ph C Trip 15622 Inv Time OC Prot Phase A ... ... 15624 Inv Time OC Prot Phase C 15625 Inv Time OC Prot Ph A Trip ... ... 15627 Inv Time OC Prot Ph C Trip 15628 Universal OC Prot Phase A ... ... 15630 Universal OC Prot Phase C 15631 Univers OC Prot Ph A Trip ... ... 15633.. Univers OC Prot Ph C Trip 15634 High Set OC Prot Phase A ... ... 15636 High Set OC Prot Phase C 15637 High Set OC Prot Ph A Trip ... ... 15639 High Set OC Prot Ph C Trip 15640 Phase Overcurrent Protect Start of the function. 15641 Phase OC Low Set Start of the low set stage. 15642 Phase OC High Set Start of the high set stage. 15643 Phase OC Universal Start of the universal stage. 15644 Phase OC Protection Trip Trip of the function. 15645 Phase OC Low Set Trip Trip of the low set stage. 15646 Phase OC High Set Trip Trip of the high set stage. 15647 Phase OC Universal Trip Trip of the universal stage. 15648 Phase OC MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 15649 Phase OC LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 15650 Phase OC Protection Lock Indication of general function blocking. 15651 Phase OC High Set Lock Blocking by logical selectivity received in a input or by the local area network. Trip indication of the low set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) . Start indication of the low set inverse time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) . Trip indication of the low set inverse time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) . Start indication of the universal set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) . Trip indication of the universal set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions). Start indication of the high set stage discriminated by phase (indication produced by the functions). Trip indication of the high set stage discriminated by phase (indication produced by the functions). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-21 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Additionally to the indications mentioned on Table 6.5, the variables corresponding to the parameter changes, logic or function description are also available, as well as the gates associated to the set logic and to the function activation. There is also a set of auxiliary variables used in the internal logic of the module. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-22 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 15616> Protec MI Temp Def Fase A OR O1 O2 33280>Loop A Localiz Defeitos O3 15617> Protec MI Temp Def Fase B OR O1 O2 33281>Loop B Localiz Defeitos 15618> Protec MI Temp Def Fase C O3 15622> Protec MI Temp Inv Fase A OR OR O1 O1 O2 O2 33280>Loop A Localiz Defeitos 33282>Loop C Localiz Defeitos O3 15623> Protec MI Temp Inv Fase B O3 15641> Protec MI Cronom Fases 15663> Gate 1 Max Intens Fases AND OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 OR 17927>Prot MI Fases Crono Direc O1 O2 17923>Disp MI Fases Crono Direc I5 OR I6 O1 15643> Protec MI Universal Fases I7 O2 OR O2 I4 I4 15624> Protec MI Temp Inv Fase C 15628> Protec MI Universal Fase A O1 I2 I3 33281>Loop B Localiz Defeitos O3 I1 33282>Loop C Localiz Defeitos AND O3 O1 O2 15664> Gate 2 Max Intens Fases 33280>Loop A Localiz Defeitos 15629> Protec MI Universal Fase B O3 O1 O2 33281>Loop B Localiz Defeitos 15630> Protec MI Universal Fase C O3 15634> Protec MI Amperim Fase A I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I2 O2 15640> Protecção MI Fases OR 17925>Disp MI Fases Univ Direc OR OR I1 I3 I4 17928>Prot MI Fases Univ Direc 17420>Protec 2ª MI Cronom Fases I4 I1 O1 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I2 O2 10293>Modo Operação Gate 6 I3 O3 38656>Corrente Religação I4 O4 I5 OR OR O1 O1 O2 O2 33282>Loop C Localiz Defeitos 33280>Loop A Localiz Defeitos O3 15635> Protec MI Amperim Fase B O3 O1 O2 15642> Protec MI Amperim Fases 15665> Gate 3 Max Intens Fases OR AND OR 33281>Loop B Localiz Defeitos 15636> Protec MI Amperim Fase C O3 OR O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 17926>Prot MI Fases Amper Direc 17921>Disp MI Fases Amper Direc I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 I4 O1 15619> Disparo MI Temp Def Fase A I1 O2 33282>Loop C Localiz Defeitos O3 OR O1 O2 15620> Disparo MI Temp Def Fase B OR 15666> Gate 4 Max Intens Fases O1 O2 15621> Disparo MI Temp Def Fase C OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 O2 I3 O2 15626> Disparo MI Temp Inv Fase B I3 I4 I5 I6 OR O1 O2 I7 15627> Disparo MI Temp Inv Fase C OR 15631> Disparo MI Univers Fase A O1 OR 15667> Gate 5 Max Intens Fases O1 15632> Disparo MI Univers Fase B OR 15647> Disparo MI Universal Fases OR O2 O2 17923>Disp MI Fases Crono Direc I4 O1 6 AND I1 O1 OR 15625> Disparo MI Temp Inv Fase A 15645> Disparo MI Cronom Fases OR AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 17925>Disp MI Fases Univ Direc I4 I3 I4 15633> Disparo MI Univers Fase C 15644> Disparo Prot MI Fases OR 15637> Disparo MI Amperim Fase A OR O1 15668> Gate 6 Max Intens Fases O2 OR O1 O2 15638> Disparo MI Amperim Fase B 15646> Disparo MI Amperim Fases OR AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 OR O1 O2 I3 I4 17921>Disp MI Fases Amper Direc 15639> Disparo MI Amperim Fase C 17421>Disparo 2ª MI Cronom Fases I1 O1 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec I2 O2 38657>Disparo Corrente Religação I3 O3 41984>Sin Arranque Falha Disjunt I4 O4 33284>Arranque Loc Defeitos I5 O5 I4 I5 OR O1 15648> Bloqueio MI Fases MMI O2 15650> Bloqueio Protec MI Fases OR OR O1 O2 15649> Bloqueio MI Fases LAN OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 O4 O2 O5 O6 O7 15651> Bloq Select Lógica MI Fase OR I1 O1 O2 16403>Bloq Select Lógica MI Terr O3 Figure 6.9. Logical diagram of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-23 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.3. EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Similarly to the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection, this function performs the main protection function of Medium Voltage lines, but for short-circuit earth faults. Besides the simplicity of its operation principle, its high sensitivity assures an important role, not only in the distribution network protection but also in other equipments of the Power System. 6.3.1. OPERATION METHOD The Earth Overcurrent Protection function presents a high sensitivity for the detection of faults, once it is based on the earth current value, which is almost zero in a normal load situation, besides the unbalance motivated by the lines’ asymmetries. On the other hand, it is not necessary to consider the load current in each one of the phases, as it is the case in the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection function. Nevertheless, it is important to consider, in the function setting, the capacitive current that is in the line when there is an earth fault in another network point. In fact, when a phase-earth shortcircuit occurs in a line, the fault current emerges in the loop established by the earth link of the substation transformer but also by the distributed abilities in the remaining lines. The capacitive earth current value in each healthy line is as bigger as the extension of that line and it constitutes a sensitivity minimum threshold for the phase-earth fault detection. In the faulty line, the fault current strongly depends on the impedance existing in the earth connection to the ground. If the earth is strongly connected to the ground, the fault current will reach extremely high values. If there is a limiter impedance (resistance or reactance), the fault current is limited to lower values, but that still enable the distinction among faulty and healthy lines. For high resistance faults, it is necessary to complement the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection with directionality (see Chapter 6.5 - Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection) or use a more sensitive protection (see Chapter 6.8 - Resistive Earth Fault Protection ). For slight fault currents earth regimes (isolated or compensated earth) it is normally difficult to distinguish, simply by the amplitude, the fault currents and the capacitive currents in other lines. In those cases, a common choice corresponds to adding a directional feature to the Earth Overcurrent Protection. The value effectively used by the function is the residual current, which is three times the zerosequence current and it is easily obtained by the sum of the three phase currents: I res IA IB IC (6.4) TPU S420 is prepared to observe the residual current on the line on its fourth current input, obtained either from the connection between the neutral of the phase current inputs, or from a line toroidal transformer. However, TPU S420 also calculates internally the line residual current, directly from the virtual sum of the three phase currents. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-24 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions TPU S420 allows the origin selection of the observed residual current for each one of the three elements of protection against earth faults. This allows combining the observation of high phase-to-earth fault currents recovering the large range of the phases CT operation with a higher sensitivity to very resistive faults resulting from the roroidal CT. The sensitivity can be still increased by chosing for the fourth current a nominal value a more reduced value than the nominal value from the secondary CT. Overall, 3 virtual relays are available, corresponding to three levels of operation, which algorithm is executed in parallel (full-scheme). High Set Overcurrent with High-Speed Tripping As a rule, the High Set Overcurrent with High-Speed Tripping is destined to implement a very fast protection where the selective coordination is obtained by regulating the value of the operation threshold (cut-off protection). Although it is usual to require an instantaneous operation of the protection function, it is also possible to configure a selective timer. This feature is important to coordinate with other protections, either by different operation thresholds or by logic interlocking (see 6.21 - Blocking by Logical Selectivity). Low Set Overcurrent with Definite/Inverse Time The Low Set Overcurrent function offers higher sensitivity to internal faults than the previous stage and for selective coordination uses step timings (time-lag protection). TPU S420 provides both the definite and the inverse time options. The last option complies with International Standards, which is a guarantee of compatibility with devices of different types and manufacturers. The standards are IEC 60255-3 and IEEE 37.112. The generic expressions followed for each one of the standards are indicated on chapter 6.2, for different types of curves: Normaly Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse and Inverse of Long Time. Their characteristics are presented on Figure 6.5. The operational threshold can be set to a relatively low value, according with the precision assured by the protection and by the CT (Current Transformers). A 4% reset factor in the definite time assures the required operation stability. The inverse time curves regard a 20% additional margin, once the function pickup value is 1.2 times higher than the configured one. The setting of the operation time of the Earth Overcurrent Protection function should consider the coordination with the protections of other lines, if that one is sensitive to external faults. This may bear too long operation times, in particular if the definite time option is considered. Otherwise, the inverse time curves allow an operation time reduction as the fault current increases. In this case, the coordination is achieved by scale factor adjustment. TPU S420 guarantees the inverse time curves precision to all the setting range and for fault currents between 1.2 and 20 times the operational value. In the time-lag functioning of inverse type, TPU S420 also enables the dynamic reset option. With that selected option, after the fault elimination, the protection function reset is not instantaneous, guarantying a faster operation in case of successive faults. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a dynamic coordination between the protection and fuses or reclosers placed in the network. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-25 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions To carry out the dynamic reset it is followed the IEEE 37.112 standard definition, according to the expression (6.3), extending the principle to the time-current functions established by the IEC 60255-3 standard. Definite Time Universal Overcurrent In parallel and independently of the previous functions, TPU S420 performs a third overcurrent protection function with constant timer. The characteristics of this function are similar to those of the low set with definite time protection. The wide setting range of this protection function (called definite time universal protection) allows several applications: as a limiter of the operation time of the low set definite time protection, for situations of low short-circuit power where the operation times of this function can have important increments; as a high set protection second stage, coordinated in time and current with high set elements of network downstream protections. The use of this function together with the two previous ones, according to the two described examples, allows obtaining for the Earth Overcurrent Protection a global operational characteristic as that indicated on Figure 6.7 for the protection against faults between phases. 6.3.2. CONFIGURATION The Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection parameters are grouped in three independent groups: one for each of the stages. The high set protection must be activated by changing the value of the High Set> Status parameter from OFF to ON. The origin of the earth current measure to be used must be chosen, by regulating the High Set> I0 Source parameter: this can be defined as EXTERNAL TRANSF if the current to be used is a measure on the fourth input or INTERNAL SUM if choosing the sum of the three phase currents obtained by software. The High Set > Iop parameter is the current value above which this stage operates. It should be set to a high value that clearly identifies the presence of a fault in the line. The time between the fault occurrence and the operation of the high set protection is defined by the High Set > Top parameter. Its value can be made null if one wishes an operation as fast as possible. In case of blocking by logical selectivity, this timer should be adjusted to a value higher than the time guaranteed for the reception of the pickup indication regarding the downstream protections. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-26 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Terra Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Amp> Estado: OFF Amp> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Amp> Iop: 0.500 Amp> Top: 0.000 Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Operação: TEMPO DEFINIDO Def/Inv> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Def> Iop: 0.200 Def> Top: 0.040 Inv> Norma: C.E.I. Inv> Curva: NI Inv> Rearme: ESTÁTICO ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Inv> Iop: 0.200 Inv> TM: 0.050 Univ> Estado: OFF Univ> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Univ> Iop: 0.200 Univ> Top: 0.040 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.10. Set 1 Menu (Earth Overcurrent). To activate the low set stage, the Low Set > Status parameter should be configured with ON value. The Low Set > Operation parameter allows choosing the operation mode from the two possible options: DEFINITE TIME or INVERSE TIME. It also must be chosen the earth current origin to be used, by regulation of the Low Set > I0 Source parameter, as for the high threshold. When choosing the DEFINITE TIME option, two parameters should be configured: Def> Iop and Def> Top. The first is the current value above which the protection will operate; the second is the operational time that allows the coordination with downstream protections. With the INVERSE TIME option several parameters must be regulated: Inv> Standard allows to chose the standard to which the inverse time curve follows (IEC or IEEE) and Inv> Curve the curve of type (NI, VI, and EI). The function reset can be STATIC (default option) or DYNAMIC (the reset time follows the expression (6.3)), by selecting the Inv> Reset parameter value selection. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120% of that current. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the default current. Instead configure the Inv> TM data. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational times of the timelag stage and, this way, finding the optimal point for the coordination with the inverse time protections of the other lines. Regarding the universal stage, the parameters are similar to those of the low set definite time stage. The Univ> State parameter indicates whether the function is active, Univ> Iop is the value above which the function operates and Univ> Top defines the trip time. Its setting should be coordinated with that of the two other stages according to one of the two examples presented or according to other criterion defined by the user. There is the additional Univ> IO Source parameter, that allows to chose if this stage works with the fourth current input value (EXTERNAL TRANSF option) or with the residual current obtained from the virtual sum of the phase currents (INTERNAL SUM option). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-27 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions All operational currents are regulated in values per unit of the nominal value of their currents inputs: if the chosen option is the sum of the three phase currents, the reference nominal value is the one of phase inputs; if the chosen option is the fourth current input, the nominal value is of this input. Table 6.6. Earth Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 High Set> Status OFF / ON OFF High Set> I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ VIRTUAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF High Set > Iop 0,1..40 pu 0,5 High Set > Top 0..60 s 0 Low Set > Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set > I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ VIRTUAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF Low Set > Operation DEFINITE TIME / INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME Def> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Def> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 Inv> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Inv> TM 0,05..1,5 0,05 Inv> Standard I.E.C. / I.E.E.E. I.E.C. Inv> Curve NI / VI / EI / LI NI Inv> Reset STATIC / DYNAMIC STATIC Univ> Status OFF / ON OFF Univ> IO Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ VIRTUAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF Univ> Iop 0,1..40 pu 0,2 Univ> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 6 6.3.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection module includes all start and trip indications produced by the function, discriminated by stage (high set, low set and universal). The indications to use in other functions or in binary outputs are obtained from these indications and they are constrained by blockings defined by the user. The blocking by logical selectivity is a particular case to which corresponds a variable that can be configured in a physical input or to which can be connected a variable received from the local area network. By default, the corresponding blocking by logical selectivity against phase faults is connected to this gate, so the variable to configure as input is the phase protection input. By default, the blocking by logical selectivity only affects the high set stage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-28 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Table 6.7. Description of the logical variables of the Earth Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 16384 Def Time Gnd Overcurrent Start indication of the low set definite time (produced by the function). 16385 Def Time Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the low set definite time (produced by the function). 16386 Inv Time Gnd Overcurrent Start indication of the low set inverse time (produced by the function). 16387 Inv Time Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the low set inverse time (produced by the function). 16388 Universal Gnd Overcurrent Start indication of the universal set definite time (produced by the function). 16389.. Universal Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the universal set definite time (produced by the function). 16390 High Set Gnd Overcurrent Start indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 16391 High Set Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 16392 Ground Overcurrent Protect Start of the function. 16393 Low Set Ground OC Start of the low set stage. 16394 Universal Ground OC Start of the universal set stage. 16395 High Set Ground OC Start of the high set stage. 16396 Ground Overcurrent Trip Trip of the function. 16397 Low Set Ground OC Trip Trip of the low set stage. 16398 Universal Ground OC Trip Trip of the universal set stage. 16399 High Set Ground OC Trip Trip of the high set stage. 16400 Ground OC MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 16401 Ground OC LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 16402 Ground OC Protection Lock Indication of general function blocking. 16403 Ground OC High Set Lock Blocking by logical selectivity received in a input or by the local area network. 6 Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.7, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with setting groups logic and function activation. There are also some auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-29 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 16384> Protec MI Temp Def Terra 16415> Gate 1 Max Intens Terra OR 16393> Protec MI Terra Cronom OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 18695>Prot MI Terra Crono Direc 18691>Disp MI Terra Crono Direc 16386> Protec MI Temp Inv Terra I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 OR O1 O2 16388> Protec MI Universal Terra 16392> Protecção MI Terra 16394> Protec MI Terra Universal OR O1 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I1 O1 I2 O2 10294>Modo Operação Gate 7 I2 O2 I3 O3 38656>Corrente Religação I4 O4 33283>Loop N Localiz Defeitos I5 O5 OR AND O1 O2 18696>Prot MI Terra Univ Direc O3 18693>Disp MI Terra Univ Direc I3 17668>Protec 2ª MI Terra Cronom I4 16390> Protec MI Amperim Terra I1 16395> Protec MI Terra Amperim OR AND O1 O2 O3 18694>Prot MI Terra Amper Direc 18689>Disp MI Terra Amper Direc I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 16385> Disparo MI Temp Def Terra 16416> Gate 2 Max Intens Terra OR 16397> Disparo MI Terra Cronom OR AND O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 16387> Disparo MI Temp Inv Terra I3 18691>Disp MI Terra Crono Direc I3 I4 OR O1 16396> Disparo Protec MI Terra O2 16389> Disparo MI Universal Terra 16398> Disparo MI Terra Universal OR O1 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 38657>Disparo Corrente Religação O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 41984>Sin Arranque Falha Disjunt I4 O4 33284>Arranque Loc Defeitos I5 O5 OR AND 18693>Disp MI Terra Univ Direc I3 17669>Disparo 2ª MI Terra Cronom I4 16391> Disparo MI Amperim Terra 16399> Disparo MI Terra Amperim OR 16400> Bloqueio MI Terra MMI I1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 OR O1 I3 O2 18689>Disp MI Terra Amper Direc 16401> Bloqueio MI Terra LAN OR I5 16402> Bloqueio Prot MI Terra OR O1 O2 10248>Modo Exploração Especial B I4 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 O4 O5 O6 O7 16403> Bloq Select Lógica MI Terr OR 15651>Bloq Select Lógica MI Fase I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.11. Logical diagram of the Earth Overcurrent Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-30 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.4. DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION The criterion associated to Phase Overcurrent Protection applied independently may not be enough to discriminate correctly fault situations that are internal or external to the protection zone. The TPU S420 provides for that purpose the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection, which complements the previous function adding to the currents magnitude information the corresponding phase information. 6.4.1. OPERATION METHOD In distribution radial networks where each line power has an exact meaning, the Overcurrent function is enough to ensure the selectivity among several network protections. In fact, in this situation, the protection will only notice downstream short-circuits (in the load sense), either on the line or in a derivation, so the protection must be coordinated by thresholds or times with the remaining protections. This simple criterion is no longer applicable in networks where there are two possible directions for the short-circuit current due to the existence of one point where the fault can be feeded. This happens, for example, in networks with independent producers. As exemplified on Figure 6.12, the line 1 protection is sensitive to faults on the protected line, as well as in line 2, due to the generator located on its end. Line 2 Line 2 ~ ~ Line 1 Line 1 ~ ~ Figure 6.12. Faults between phases in a network with self-producers. However, it can be verified that the current direction is different depending if the fault is intern or extern to the protection zone associated to the unit of line 1. That principle allows the directionality’s successful application as an additional criterion to get the required selectivity. The Phase Directional Protection may also be necessay in other situations, for example: When, in the same unit, it is intended to protect simoultaneously the downstream line and operate in reserve to the protections in the upstream bus-bar; When several possible network configurations that lead to different directions for the shortcircuit current in a line, without the selectivity may be reached for all situations only with Overcurrent setting. On TPU S420, the Directional Protection closely interacts with the Overcurrent Protection, and its function is the trip lock in case of fault in a non-required direction. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-31 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The short-circuit current direction is determined by the phase difference calculation between each one of the currents and one suitable polarising voltage. For a specific phase current, TPU S420 uses, as a polarizing voltage, the phase-to-phase one between the other two phases. Using this option it is selected the voltage that has less chances to be annulled when occurring a short-circuit in a certain phase, maximizing therefore the protection sensitivity. The previous choice corresponds to the Directional Protection traditional scheme implementation with a 90º assembly and it corresponds to the operational characteristic presented on Figure 6.13. Figure 6.13. Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection. The application of this criterion is equivalent to a power calculation. Its value is calculated for each one of the referred current-voltage pairs, and then the sum that corresponds to the three phase power is obtained. This is the last value compared with the operational characteristic and it determines the Directional Protection operation for any one of the phases. The maximum power angle is eligible from 30º to 60º. For the used scheme this range comprises all values that this angle may have so the protection correctly describes all possible three or two-phase faults. A 5º angle dead band assures the operation stability of the Directional Protection. The blocking by the directional function can be independently allocated to each one of the stages of Overcurrent against faults among phases (high set, low set and universal). The direction of its operation can also be configured independently for each one of the previous stages. When occuring a very close three-phase fault, voltages are almost void, disabling their using to determine the direction. In that case, TPU S420 uses for the calculations the previous voltages values, which are kept in memory during about 2.5 seconds. After that timer runs out, and keeping the null voltage conditions, the decision of directional function stops to correspond to the determined by the operational characteristic and it begins to depend exclusively of the user defined setting. Two options are possible: inhibition of the directional criterion, allowing the Overcurrent Protection trip if that’s the case, or that function blocking while the fault remains. The conditions for voltage annulment checking are fixed, corresponding to 1% of the nominal voltage. The Directional Protection mode in case of voltage annulment is independently set for each one of the Overcurren stages. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-32 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.4.2. CONFIGURATION The Directional Protection is independently set for each one of the Phase Overcurrent stages. The High Set> Status parameter allows activating the determination of direction of the high set stage while the High Set> Direction parameter defines which is the direction of the function operation. This direction can be regulated to allow FORWARD (in the direction of the line) operations or reverse (in the direction of the busbar) operations. So that this correspondence is correct it is necessary that the voltage and current connections are made as indicated in Section 2.4.5 - Current and voltage connections. The operation of the function in case of absence of the polarization measurement (phase-tophase voltage) by a time longer than the memory time of its value is regulated in the High Set> Umin Op parameter. This parameter can be defined as NON DIRECTIONAL if the Overcurrent Protection is allowed to operate in this situation independently of the directional criterion or as BLOCKED if it permanently blocks the protection operation. Similarly for the low set stage there are the Low Set> Status, Low Set> Direction and Low Set> Umin Op parameters, and for the universal stage the Univ> Status, Univ> Direction and Univ> Umin Op parameters. The Caract Angle is the maximum binary angle of the directional characteristic and is common to all stages of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection. Funções de Protecção Direccional de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 1 6 Ângulo Caract: 45.000 Amp> Estado: OFF Amp> Direcção: FRENTE Amp> Op Umin: NÃO DIRECCIONAL Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Direcção: FRENTE Def/Inv> Op Umin: NÃO DIRECCIONAL Univ> Estado: OFF Univ> Direcção: FRENTE Univ> Op Umin: NÃO DIRECCIONAL ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.14. Setting group 1 Menu (Directional Phase). Table 6.8. Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 Caract Angle 30..60 High Set> Status OFF / ON OFF High Set> Direction FORWARD/ REVERSE FORWARD High Set> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCK NON DIRECTIONAL Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set> Direction FORWARD/ REVERSE FORWARD Low Set> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCK NON DIRECTIONAL TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default value 1 º 45 6-33 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default value Univ> Status OFF / ON OFF Univ> Direction FORWARD/ REVERSE FORWARD Univ> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCK NON DIRECTIONAL 6.4.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC By default, the start variables of each one of the stages are connected to the starts of the corresponding stages of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection. It is during the period of time when these variables are activated that the Directional Protection executes its algorithm to determine the direction of the currents. The trip permission indications are the result of the operation of the Directional Protection. After being constrained by possible function-specific blockings, the resulting variables directly enable the operation (start and trip) of the Overcurrent function. Table 6.9. Description of the logical variables of the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 17920 High Set Ph Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 17921 High Set Phase Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of the high set stage (subjected to blocking). 17922 Low Set Ph Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the low set stage (produced by the function). 17923 Low Set Phase Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of the low set stage (subjected to blocking). 17924 Univers Ph Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the universal set stage (produced by the function). 17925 Univers Phase Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of universal set stage (subjected to blocking). 17926 High Set Phase Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the high set directional stage. 17927 Low Set Phase Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the low set directional stage. 17928 Univers Phase Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the universal directional stage. 17929 Phase Direct MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 17930 Phase Direct LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 17931 Phase Direct Protec Lock Indication of general function blocking. the Additionally are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. Logic on the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent module on version S is slightly different from others versions of the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-34 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 17920> Perm Disp Amper Fases Dir OR 17921> Disp MI Fases Amper Direc AND O1 I1 O1 15642>Protec MI Amperim Fases O2 I2 O2 15646>Disparo MI Amperim Fases I3 O3 17922> Perm Disp Crono Fases Dir OR 17926> Prot MI Fases Amper Direc OR 15666>Gate 3 Max Intens Fases I1 O1 15641>Protec MI Cronom Fases O2 I2 O2 15645>Disparo MI Cronom Fases I3 O3 O1 I2 17923> Disp MI Fases Crono Direc AND O1 I1 17927> Prot MI Fases Crono Direc OR 15664>Gate 1 Max Intens Fases I1 O1 I2 17924> Perm Disp Univ Fases Dir OR 17929> Bloqueio Dir Fases MMI OR 17925> Disp MI Fases Univ Direc AND O1 I1 O1 15643>Protec MI Universal Fases O2 I2 O2 15647>Disparo MI Universal Fases I3 O3 17928> Prot MI Fases Univ Direc OR 15665>Gate 2 Max Intens Fases O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I1 O1 I2 17931> Bloqueio Prot Dir Fases OR O4 17930> Bloqueio Dir Fases LAN OR O1 O2 Figure 6.15. Logical diagram of the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module (version I and C). 17920> Perm Disp Amper Fases Dir OR 17921> Disp MI Fases Amper Direc AND O1 I1 O1 15642>Protec MI Amperim Fases O2 I2 O2 15646>Disparo MI Amperim Fases I3 O3 17922> Perm Disp Crono Fases Dir OR 17926> Prot MI Fases Amper Direc OR 15666>Gate 3 Max Intens Fases I1 O1 15641>Protec MI Cronom Fases O2 I2 O2 15645>Disparo MI Cronom Fases I3 O3 6 O1 I2 17923> Disp MI Fases Crono Direc AND O1 I1 17927> Prot MI Fases Crono Direc OR 15664>Gate 1 Max Intens Fases I1 O1 I2 17924> Perm Disp Univ Fases Dir OR 17929> Bloqueio Dir Fases MMI OR 17928> Prot MI Fases Univ Direc OR O1 I1 O1 15643>Protec MI Universal Fases O2 I2 O2 15647>Disparo MI Universal Fases I3 O3 17420>Protec 2ª MI Cronom Fases 15665>Gate 2 Max Intens Fases I1 O4 17421>Disparo 2ª MI Cronom Fases 17437>Gate 1 2ª Max Intens Fases I2 17931> Bloqueio Prot Dir Fases OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 17930> Bloqueio Dir Fases LAN OR 17925> Disp MI Fases Univ Direc AND O5 O1 I3 O4 O1 O2 Figure 6.16. Logical diagram of the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module (version S). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-35 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.5. DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Independently of the Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection, the TPU S420 performs the Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection, in complement to the Overcurrent Protection against earth faults. This function allows the correct discrimination of faults in the direction of the protected line from the external faults in the other direction, using the phase information of the zero sequence short-circuit current. 6.5.1. OPERATION METHOD It is normally necessary to complement Overcurrent Protection against faults to earth with some protection additional criterion, even in distribution radial networks, on the contrary to what happens to phase-to-phase faults. This happens because there is a current that closes itself by the capacitances of each one of the lines when occurring a short-circuit to earth in some point of the network. 6 Figure 6.17. Phase-to-earth faults in a distribution network. Except for certain groundings where the residual current on the faulty line is sufficiently high when compared with the current of capacitive origin, the discrimination made only by the magnitude value of the residual current is not generally enough, in particular when the fault resistance is too high. In those situations it can be successfully used the corresponding phase information, concerning to a common reference. On TPU S420 that reference is the residual voltage, that is, the three phase-to-earth voltages sum. In a healthy line, the residual current is in quadrature and in advance towards the residual voltage (capacitive current), independently from the earth regime. In the faulty line, the phase ratio is dependent on the way neutral is connected to earth: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-36 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions For isolated neutral systems, the residual current on the faulty line is also in quadrature but delayed towards the residual voltage, and the residual reative power sign can be used to describe the fault location; On the other hand, for compensated neutral systems, the fault can be detected by the presence of an active component on the residual power, of a bigger value when it is placed a resistence in parallel with the Petersen coil; The previous criterion can also be applied to neutral systems with limitation impedance, since it has a minimum of resistive component. These criteria application constitutes the Directional Earth Fault Protection, which works independently from the Overcurrent Protection, being its function the trip locking when it is not on the required direction. The residual power measurement is equivalent to the measurement of the fault current phase ratio with the residual voltage. TPU S420 implements an operational characteristic as shown on Figure 6.18, which is valid for all referred neutral systems. 6 Figure 6.18.Operational characteristic of the Earht DIrectional Protection. The maximum power angle (concerning the difference of phase between the residual current and the symmetric residual voltage) is selectable between -90º and 90º. For a compensated neutral system it is advisible a 0º angle, while for an isolated neutral system it should be regulated a 90º value. For systems with a limitation impedance it is advisible a 0º angle or higher in accordance with the resistive component of the impedance. A dead band of a 7º angle assures the Directional Protection operation stability. The blocking by the directional function can be independently allocated to each one of the Overcurrent stages against faults among phases (high set, low set and universal set). For each of the previous stages the respective operation direction can also be independently configured. The source of the zero sequence current can be chosen, as in the Overcurrent Protection, from two options: the current measured in the fourth current input, obtained by a toroidal transformer or by a Holmgreen assembly; or the sum of the three phase currents internally calculated by software. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-37 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions In addition, the zero sequence voltage used for polarization of the characteristic can be obtained from two possible sources: by internal sum of the values of the three phase voltages or directly from the fourth voltage input, in case it is connected to a second core of the VTs, mounted in broken-delta. The zero sequence voltage has, for faults with a relatively low resistance, a value high enough for polarization of the characteristic; but as the fault resistance increases, its value decreases especially when there is limitation impedance in the neutral. When a specific fault resistance is achieved, it is no longer possible to determine the direction of the current. While the null voltage conditions remain, the decision of the directional function no longer corresponds to that determined by the operational characteristic and starts depending only on the regulation defined by the user. Two options are possible: inhibition of the directional criterion allowing the trip of the Overcurrent Protection if that is the case or the blocking of this function while the fault persists. The threshold for verification of the zero sequence voltages annulment conditions is configurable by the user. The Protection mode in case of voltages annulment is independently regulated for each of the Overcurrent stages. 6.5.2. CONFIGURATION The Directional Protection is regulated independently for each of the Earth Overcurrent stages. The High Set> Status parameter allows activating the determination of direction of the high set stage while the High Set> Direction parameter defines which is the direction of the function operation. This direction can be regulated to allow FORWARD (in the direction of the line) operations or reverse (in the direction of the busbar) operations. So that this correspondence is correct it is necessary that the voltage and current connections are made as indicated in Section 2.4.5 - Current and voltage connections. The zero sequence current used in the algorithm is defined in the High Set> I0 Source parameter, and it can correspond to the fourth current input (EXTERNAL TRANSF option) or to the sum of the three phase currents internally made by the protection (INTERNAL SUM option). In general, it will be similar to that used by the corresponding stage of the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection. The operation of the function in case of absence of the polarization measurement (zero sequence voltage) is regulated in the High Set> Umin Op parameter. This parameter can be defined as NON DIRECTIONAL if the Overcurrent Protection is allowed to operate in this situation independently of the directional criterion or as BLOCKED if it permanently blocks the protection operation. Similarly for the low set stage there are the Low Set> Status, Low Set> Direction, Low Set> I0 Source and Low Set> Umin Opparameters, and for the universal stage the Univ> Status, Univ> Direction, Univ> I0 Source and Univ> Umin Op parameters. The Caract Angle is the maximum binary angle of the directional characteristic and is common to all stages of the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection. The Polarising Limit parameter is also common to all stages and is the minimum threshold of polarization voltage below which the Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection stops following the defined characteristic and is only function of the regulation of the High Set> Umin Op, Low Set> Umin Op and Univ> Umin Op parameters. The polarization voltage threshold is regulated in values per unit of the nominal zero sequence voltage (triple of the phase-earth nominal voltage). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-38 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The zero sequence voltage used for polarization can correspond to the fourth voltage input (EXTERNAL TRANSF option) or to the sum of the three phase voltages internally made by the protection (INTERNAL SUM option). This configuration should be made in the U0 Source parameter. In case the fourth voltage input has allocated a meaning different from the zero sequence voltage, the Directional Earth Fault Protection will use the sum of the three phase voltages, independently of the value of that parameter. Funções de Protecção Direccional de Terra Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Origem U0: SOMA INTERNA Ângulo Caract: 0.000 Lim Polarização: 0.010 Amp> Estado: OFF Amp> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Amp> Direcção: FRENTE Amp> Op Umin: BLOQUEIO Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Def/Inv> Direcção: FRENTE Def/Inv> Op Umin: BLOQUEIO Univ> Estado: OFF ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Univ> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Univ> Direcção: FRENTE Univ> Op Umin: BLOQUEIO 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.19. Setting group 1 Menu (Directional Earth). Table 6.10. Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 U0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ INTERNAL SUM INTERNAL SUM Caract Angle 0..90 º 0 Polarising Limit 0,005..0,8 pu 0,01 High Set> Status OFF / ON OFF High Set> I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ INTERNAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF High Set> Direction FORWARD / REVERSE FORWARD High Set> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCKING BLOCKING Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set> I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ INTERNAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF Low Set> Direction FORWARD / REVERSE FORWARD Low Set> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCKING BLOCKING TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default value 6-39 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default value Univ> Status OFF / ON OFF Univ> I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF/ INTERNAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF Univ> Direction FORWARD / REVERSE FORWARD Univ> Umin Op NON DIRECTIONAL / BLOCKING BLOCKING 6.5.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC By default, the start variables of each one of the stages are connected to the starts of the corresponding stages of the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection. It is during the period of time when these variables are activated that the Directional Protection executes its algorithm to determine the direction of the currents. The trip permission indications are the result of the operation of the Directional Protection. After being constrained by possible function-specific blockings, the resulting variables directly enable the operation (start and trip) of the Overcurrent function. Table 6.11. Description of the logical variables of the Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 18688 High Set Gnd Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 18689 High Set Gnd Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of the high set stage (subjected to blocking). 18690 Low Set Gnd Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the low set stage (produced by the function). 18691 Low Set Ground Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of the low set stage (subjected to blocking). 18692 Univers Gnd Dir Trip Perm Directional trip permission indication of the universal set stage (produced by the function). 18693 Univers Ground Dir OC Trip Directional trip permission indication of universal set stage (subjected to blocking). 18694 High Set Gnd Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the high set directional stage. 18695 Low Set Gnd Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the low set directional stage. 18696 Univers Gnd Dir OC Prot Start conditions of the universal directional stage. 18697 Ground Direct MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 18698 Ground Direct LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 18699 Ground Direct Protec Lock Indication of general function blocking. the Additionally are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with sets logic and function activation. The logic of the Earth Directional Protection module on version S is slightly different from other versions of TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-40 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 18688> Per m Disp A mper Terra Dir OR 18689> Disp MI Terra Amper Direc AND O1 I1 O1 16395>Pr otec MI Terra Amperim O2 I2 O2 16399>Disparo MI Terra Amperim I3 O3 18690> Per m Disp Crono Terra Dir OR 16390>Pr otec MI A mperim Terra I1 O1 I2 18691> Disp MI Terra Crono Direc AND O1 I1 O1 16393>Pr otec MI Terra Cronom O2 I2 O2 16397>Disparo MI Terra Cronom I3 O3 18692> Per m Disp Univ Terra Dir OR 18694> Prot MI Terra Amper Direc OR 18695> Prot MI Terra Crono Direc OR 16416>Gate 1 Max Intens Terra I1 O1 I2 18693> Disp MI Terra Univ Direc AND O1 I1 O1 16394>Pr otec MI Terra Universal O2 I2 O2 16398>Disparo MI Terra Universal I3 O3 18696> Prot MI Terra Univ Direc OR 16388>Pr otec MI Universal Terra I1 O1 I2 18697> Bloqueio Dir Terra MMI OR O1 O2 18698> Bloqueio Dir Terra LAN OR 18699> Bloqueio Pr ot Dir Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O4 O1 O2 Figure 6.20. Logical diagram of the Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection module (versions I and C). 18688> Perm Disp Amper Terra Dir OR O1 I1 O1 16395>Protec MI Terra Amperim O2 I2 O2 16399>Disparo MI Terra Amperim I3 O3 18690> Perm Disp Crono Terra Dir OR 18698> Bloqueio Dir Terra LAN OR 16390>Protec MI Amperim Terra 18691> Disp MI Terra Crono Direc AND I1 O1 16393>Protec MI Terra Cronom O2 I2 O2 16397>Disparo MI Terra Cronom I3 O3 I1 6 O1 18695> Prot MI Terra Crono Direc OR 16416>Gate 1 Max Intens Terra I1 O1 I2 18693> Disp MI Terra Univ Direc AND O1 I1 O1 16394>Protec MI Terra Universal O2 I2 O2 16398>Disparo MI Terra Universal I3 O3 17668>Protec 2ª MI Terra Cronom O4 17669>Disparo 2ª MI Terra Cronom 18696> Prot MI Terra Univ Direc OR 16388>Protec MI Universal Terra I1 17685>Gate 1 2ª Max Intens Terra I2 O5 18697> Bloqueio Dir Terra MMI OR O2 18694> Prot MI Terra Amper Direc OR I2 O1 18692> Perm Disp Univ Terra Dir OR O1 18689> Disp MI Terra Amper Direc AND O1 I3 18699> Bloqueio Prot Dir Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O4 O1 O2 Figure 6.21. Logical diagram of the Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection module (version S). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-41 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.6. SECOND PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION TPU S420 has a fourth Phase Overcurrent stage, as an option, adding to the three existing stages by default (high set, low set and universal). This option can be useful if is intended that the simoultaneous protection of the line and bus-bar by the same unit, by suitably configuring the associated directionality. 6.6.1. OPERATION METHOD TPU S420 allows to independently defining, for each stage, the application or not of directionality, as well as the corresponding operation direction. Nevertheless, it only offers a stage with inverse time option, which is sufficient for most applications. Nevertheless, for applications where the TPU S420 simoultaneously assures the protection in both directions (for example, the protection of the line on one hand and from the bus-bar that is connected by another), and it can be necessay the existence of one more stage, in particular if it is used the inverse time option. For that purpose, it is available an additional protection of Phase Overcurrent, with a stage that can be configured to work with definite or inverse time. The directionality of this stage is not independent, and its configuration is identical to the universal stage. A possible joint application available of the four Phase Overcurrent stages is the following: Configuration of the operation direction of the original high and low threshold stage (definite or inverse time) to FORWARD; Configuration of the operation direction of the universal stage to REVERSE, configuring it as a high threshold stage; Configuration of the fourth stage as low threshold protection (definite or inverse time), being its associated direction similar to the one of the previous stage, that is, REVERSE. Like this, there will be two stages (one of high and another of low threshold) to protect in each one of the directions. 6.6.2. CONFIGURATION These function parameters, corresponding to a fourth Overcurrent stage, are similar to the low threshold stage of the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection. To activate this stage, the Low Set> Status must be configured with the ON value. The Low Set> Operation parameter allows choosing the operation mode of the two possible options: DEFINITE TIME or INVERSE TIME. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-42 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions When the DEFINITE TIME option is chosen, there are two parameters to define: Def> Iop and Def> Top. The first one is the current value above which the protection will operate and that should be regulated considering the higher load current; the second is the operational time that allows the coordination with downstream protections. When choosing the INVERSE TIME option, several parameters should be regulated: Inv> Standard allows choosing the standard with which the inverse time curve complies (IEC or IEEE) and Inv> Curve allows choosing the type of curve (NI, VI, EI or LI). The function reset can be STATIC (default option) or DYNAMIC (situation on which the attack time follows the expression (6.3)), by selecting the value of Inv> Reset parameter. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120% of that current. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the default current. Instead configure the Inv> TM data. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational times of the timelag stage, and like this, to find the optimal point for the coordination with others downstream protections of inverse time. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Fases 2ª Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Operação: TEMPO DEFINIDO Def> Iop: 0.500 Def> Top: 0.040 Inv> Norma: C.E.I. Inv> Curva: NI Inv> Rearme: ESTÁTICO Inv> Iop: 0.500 Inv> Top: 0.050 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.22. Setting Group 1 Menu (2nd Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection). Table 6.12. Parameters of the second Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set> Operation DEFINITE TIME / INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME Def> Iop 0,2..20 pu 0,5 Def> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 Inv> Iop 0,2..20 pu 0,5 Inv> Top 0,05..1,5 s 0,05 Inv> Standard I.E.C. / I.E.E.E. I.E.C. Inv> Curve NI / VI / EI / LI NI Inv> Reset STATIC / DYNAMIC STATIC TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default Value 6-43 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.6.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module includes all pickup and trip indications of the fourth stage discriminated by phase. These variables are constrained by the existence of blockings established by the user or by other logical variables. Table 6.13. Logical variables description of the second Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 17408 Def Time 2nd OC Phase A … ... Start indications of the second low set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions). 17410 Def Time 2nd OC Phase C 17411 Def Time 2nd OC Ph A Trip ... ... 17413 Def Time 2nd OC Ph C Trip 17414 Inv Time 2nd OC Phase A ... ... 17416 Inv Time 2nd OC Phase C 17417 Inv Time 2nd OC Ph A Trip ... ... 17419 Inv Time 2nd OC Ph C Trip 17420 2nd Phase OC Low Set Start of the second low set stage. 17421 2nd Phase OC Low Set Trip Trip of the second low set stage. 17422 2nd Phase OC MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 17423 2nd Phase OC LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 17424 2nd Phase OC Protec Lock Function blocking conditions. Trip indications of the second low set definite time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions). Start indications of the second low set inverse time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions). Trip indications of the second low set inverse time stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions). 6 The variables that correspond to the change of parameters, logic or function descriptions, as well the gates associated to scenario logic and the function activation are also available. Moreover, there are some auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-44 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 17408> Prot 2ª MI Temp Def Fase A OR O1 O2 17409> Prot 2ª MI Temp Def Fase B OR O1 O2 17410> Prot 2ª MI Temp Def Fase C OR 17414> Prot 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase A OR I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 O3 O1 O2 17437> Gate 1 2ª Max Intens Fases OR 17420> Protec 2ª MI Cronom Fases AND 17928>Prot MI Fases Univ Direc 17925>Disp MI Fases Univ Direc I4 I1 O1 I2 O2 15640>Protecção MI Fases I3 I4 I5 17415> Prot 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase B OR I6 I7 O1 O2 17416> Prot 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase C OR 17411> Disp 2ª MI Temp Def Fase A OR O1 O2 O1 O2 17412> Disp 2ª MI Temp Def Fase B OR O1 O2 17413> Disp 2ª MI Temp Def Fase C OR 17417> Disp 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase A OR I1 O1 I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 O2 I3 O1 O2 17421> Disparo 2ª MI Cronom Fases AND 17438> Gate 2 2ª Max Intens Fases OR 17925>Disp MI Fases Univ Direc I4 15644>Disparo Prot MI Fases I3 I4 I5 17418> Disp 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase B OR I6 I7 O1 O2 17419> Disp 2ª MI Temp Inv Fase C OR O1 O2 17422> Bloqueio 2ª MI Fases MMI OR O1 O2 17423> Bloqueio 2ª MI Fases LAN OR 17424> Bloqueio Prot 2ª MI Fases OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 6 O1 O2 Figure 6.23. Logiccal diagram of the second Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-45 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.7. SECOND EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION As the protection against faults between phases, TPU S420 optionally offers a fourth stage of Earth Overcurrent, in addition to the default existing three stages (high set, low set and universal). 6.7.1. OPERATION METHOD A fourth function against earth faults has a similar application than the corresponding phase faults function. In fact, this additional stage allows to obtain a second inverse time protection (definite time as an option), operating with the opposite direction of the first one, to do simultaneous protection of the line and the upstream bus-bar. The directionality of this stage is similar to the universal stage of definite time, and it is not possible to configure it independently. A possible application of the 4 available stages of Earth Overcurrent is the following: Configuration of the operating direction of the original high set stage and low set stage (definite or inverse time) for FORWARD; Configuration of the operating direction of the universal stage for REVERSE, configuring it as a high set stage; Configuration of the 4th stage as a low set stage protection (definite or inverse time), and the associated direction is identical to the previous stage, that is, for REVERSE. This way, there will be two stages (one of high set stage and another of low set stage) protecting in each one of the directions. 6.7.2. CONFIGURATION The parameters of this function, which correspond to a 4th Overcurrent stage, are identical to the low set stage of the Earth Faults Overcurrent Protection. To activate this stage, the Low Set> Status parameter should be configured with the ON value. The Low Set> Operation parameter allows choosing the operation mode from the two possible options: DEFINITE TIME or INVERSE TIME. It also should be chosen the source of the residual current measurement to use by regulating the Low Set> I0 Source. When choosing the DEFINITE TIME option, configure the two parameters: Def> Iop and Def> Top. The first is the current value above which the protection will operate; and the second is the operational time that enables the coordination with downstream protections. When choosing the INVERSE TIME option, configure the parameters: Inv> Standard allows choosing the standard with which the inverse time curve complies (IEC or IEEE) and Inv> Curve TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-46 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions allows choosing the type of curve (NI, VI, EI or LI). The function reset can be STATIC (default option) or DYNAMIC (situation on which the reset time follows the expression (6.3)), by selecting the Inv> Reset parameter value. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120% of that current. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the default current. Instead configure the Inv> TM data. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational times of the timelag stage, and like this to find the optimal point to coordinate with other donwstream inverse time protections. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Corrente de Terra 2ª Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Operação: TEMPO DEFINIDO Def/Inv> Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Def> Iop: 0.200 Def> Top: 0.040 Inv> Norma: C.E.I. Inv> Curva: NI Inv> Rearme: ESTÁTICO Inv> Iop: 0.200 Inv> TM: 0.050 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.24. Setting group 1 Menu (2nd Earth Overcurrent). All the operational currents are regulated in values per unit of the nominal value of the respective current inputs: if the option chosen is the sum of the three phase currents, the reference nominal value is that of the phase inputs; if the option chosen is the fourth current input the nominal value is the value of that input. Table 6.14. Second Earth Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set> I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF / INTERNAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF Low Set> Operation DEFINITE TIME / INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME Def> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Def> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 Inv> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Inv> TM 0,05..1,5 0,05 Inv> Standard I.E.C. / I.E.E.E. I.E.C. Inv> Curve NI / VI / EI / LI NI Inv> Reset STATIC / DYNAMIC STATIC TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default Value 6-47 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.7.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The second Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection module includes all start and trip indications of the fourth stage. These variables are constrained by blockings defined by the user or other logic variables. Table 6.15. Logic variables description of the second Earth Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 17664 DefTime 2nd Ground Overcur Start indication of the second low set definite time (produced by the function). 17665 DefTime 2nd Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the second low set definite time (produced by the function). 17666 InvTime 2nd Ground Overcur Start indication of the second low set inverse time (produced by the function). 17667 InvTime 2nd Ground OC Trip Trip indication of the second low set inverse time (produced by the function). 17668 Low Set 2nd Ground OC Lock Start of the second low set stage. 17669 Low Set 2nd Ground OC Trip Trip of the second low set stage. 17670 2nd Ground OC MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 17671 2nd Ground OC LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 17672 2nd Gnd OC Protection Lock Function blocking conditions. The variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation are also available. There are also some auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-48 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 17664> Prot 2ª MI Temp Def Terra OR 17685> Gate 1 2ª Max Intens Terra OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 17666> Prot 2ª MI Temp Inv Terra OR 17668> Protec 2ª MI Terra Cronom AND 18696>Prot MI Terra Univ Direc 18693>Disp MI Terra Univ Direc I1 O1 I2 O2 16392>Protecção MI Terra I3 I4 O1 O2 17665> Disp 2ª MI Temp Def Terra OR O1 O2 17667> Disp 2ª MI Temp Inv Terra OR 17686> Gate 2 2ª Max Intens Terra OR 17669> Disparo 2ª MI Terra Cronom AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 18693>Disp MI Terra Univ Direc 16396>Disparo Protec MI Terra I3 I4 O1 O2 17670> Bloqueio 2ª MI Terra MMI OR O1 O2 17671> Bloqueio 2ª MI Terra LAN OR O1 O2 10248>Modo Exploração Especial B 17672> Bloqueio Prot 2ª MI Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 Figure 6.25. Logic diagram of the second Earth Overcurrent Protection module. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-49 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.8. RESISTIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION The Resistive Earth Fault Protection is a very sensitive protection function against earth faults in aerial lines of Medium Voltage. A specific operational characterisitic allows the detection of very resistive earth short-circuits and, simultaneously, to assure the protections coordination on several substation feeders. 6.8.1. OPERATION METHOD The earth short-circuits can reach relatively high fault resistences, depending on the soil characteristics, starting fault currents of a very low value on those situations. These faults are hardly visible by the traditional Overcurrent Protection because they are very often under its maximum sensitivity threshold even if complemented with directionality. The Resistive Earth Fault Protection is an Overcurrent protection of dependent time, with an inverse time characteristic, specially made to detect earth-to-phase faults in a large range of short-circuits current values. The trip time follows the expression: (6.5) 6 where Ipu is the current in values per unit referred to nominal value of the fourth current input and TM is the adjustable scale factor that allow the definition the operation times. In order to use properly the Resistive Earth Protection the residual current must be observed on the fourth current input from a toroidal transformer with a convertion ratio equal to 20 (for example: 100/5). That input must have a nominal value of 0,2A. With these particular choices it is obtained a sensitivity of 0,5A on the line and operational times given by the following expression (Figure 6.26). (6.6) where Icc is the fault current on the line. To a raising factor equal to 0.2, this equation follows the EPATR curve, according with EDF standard. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-50 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Figure 6.26. Resistive Earth Protection Characteristic. It is important to say that unlike the inverse time curves of the IEC and IEEE standards, the trip time of the inverse time curve doesn’t tend to infinite for currents close to the operational threshold. As an option, the residual current can be observed on the fourth current input by Holmgreen connection of the phase currents. In this situation, the function is sensitive to erros resulting from the measure of the phase CT. In order to assure the function sensitivity in all operation range, the TPU S420 does an automatic calibration that compensate the residual current measure errors. The false residual current observed for different load current values is logged (in magnitude and phase) being after discounted on the fault current. Besides great sensitivity, the selective operation in case of fault is assured by the inverse time curve, for earth systems with limitation impedance. In fact, in these neutral systems, the residual current on the faulty line is largely superior to capacitive current in any of the healthy lines, which leads that the trip time on that line is inferior to the remaining ones and, therefore, that line is disconnected. For other neutral systems, the ratio among current magnitudes on several lines may not be as mentioned above, so the Resistive Earth Protection function may not be applicable. For the line reconnection after the fault clearance a current threshold can be defined as higher than the protection pickup, which is independent from this one. Thus, one can assure that a line reconnection is attempted only for faults above a specific value, preventing inconsequential closing manouvres over very resistive faults that normally show broken conductors. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-51 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.8.2. CONFIGURATION The Status parameter allows activating the Resistive Earth function. It should be also mentioned the earth current source measured on the fourth current input, by regulating the IO Source parameter: This can be defined as EXTERNAL TRANSF if the input is connected to a toroidal transformer or EXTERNAL SUM if, otherwise, the residual current is obtained from a Holmgreen connection. This parameter is important to define if the operation of auto-calibration is executed (EXTERNAL SUM option) or not. The Iop parameter defines the residual current above which the function picks up. It should be chosen the lowest value enabled by the measurement precision that is available (including the substation CT) and by the recognition of the unbalanced currents originated by the network asymmetries. The operation time is not configured because it is a function of the fault current. To replace it the TM parameter should be configured. This scale factor allows adjusting the protection operational times. Finally, the I Reclosing parameter corresponds to a Iop distint threshold, normally with a higher value than this one and that defines the current value above which it is generated for the reclosing pickup, after detecting the Resisitive Earth Protection fault. Funções de Protecção Terras Resistentes Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Origem I0: TRANSF EXTERNO Iop: 0.125 TM: 0.200 I Religação: 0.375 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.27. Set 1Menu (Resistive Earth). Table 6.16. Resistive Earth Protection Parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF I0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF / EXTERNAL SUM EXTERNAL TRANSF I Reclosing 0,125..5 pu 0,375 Iop 0,125..5 pu 0,125 TM 0,05..1,5 0,2 6.8.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The three fist variables indicated on Table 6.17 are the pickup indications, trip and pickup for reclosing produced by the function. The indications to be used in other functions or directly on TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-52 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions the command logic of the disconnector are obtained by combining them with the existence of active blockings. There still is a variable to force the re-starting of the function auto-calibration, when the connections corresponding to a Holmgreen connection are made. Table 6.17. Description of logic variables of the Resistive Earth Protection module. Id Name Description 17152 Resistive Ground Protec Pickup indication (produced by the function) 17153 Resistive Ground Prot Trip Trip indication (produced by the function) 17154 HighSet Resistive Gnd Prot Pickup indication for reclosing (produced by the function) 17155 Resistive Ground Signal Pickup of the function (subjected to blocking) 17156 Resistive Ground Trip Sign Function trip (subjected to blocking) 17157 HighSet Resist Gnd Trip Function trip for reclosing (subjected to blocking) 17158 Resist Gnd Calibration Cmd Order of the auto-calibration initialization 17159 Resistive Ground MMI Lock Function blocked by local interface 17160 Resistive Ground LAN Lock Function blocked by remote interface 17161 Resistive Ground Prot Lock Function blocking conditions Additionaly to indications referred on Table 6.17 there are also available the variables corresponding to the parameters, logic or function descriptions change, as well as the gates associated with the scenario logic and the function activation. 17152> Protec Terras Resistentes OR 17155> Sin Arranque Terras Resist AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I3 17154> Protec TResist Limiar Alto OR 17157> Disparo TResist Limiar Alt AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 38656>Corrente Religação I3 17153> Disparo Terras Resistentes OR 17156> Sin Disparo Terras Resist AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec I3 O3 41984>Sin Arranque Falha Disjunt O4 38657>Disparo Corrente Religação 17159> Bloqueio Terras Resist MMI OR O5 O1 O2 17160> Bloqueio Terras Resist LAN OR O1 O2 10246>Modo Exploração Normal 17161> Bloqueio Prot Terras Resis OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 17158> Cmd Calibra Terras Resist OR I4 O1 Figure 6.28. Logic diagram of the Resistive Earth Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-53 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.9. PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION The Phase Overvoltage Protection protects the electric power system against overvoltages that may endager the power device, stirring up insulators by-pass or ineffective attemps of the load voltage regulators to decrease the voltage value. 6.9.1. OPERATION METHOD Overvoltages on Power Systems can be transient or permanent. Associated to each one of these types of phenomenon there are different causes and protection mechanisms. The transient overvoltages are originated by electric discharges on the conductors or by switching actions. They correspond normally to wave forms with grouth times extremely reduced, usually overvoltage dischargers are used as protection. Phases Overvoltage Protection only protects against overvoltages of permanent type, that is, those that manifest themselves by the increment of the fundamental component of voltage in one or more phases, and they stay high until the associated causes are eliminated. These causes can be: Incorrect operation of voltage regulator or manual order of the tap change; Sudden load disconnection or voltage restoration in a deenergized situation after load shedding; Phase-to-earth faults, especially in earth systems not solidly connected to earth. For the last situation, the Earth Overcurrent Protection allows to eliminate efectively the overvoltage source. For the first two, the Overvoltage Protection is essential. Since the phase-to-earth voltages are more subjected to variations of their value, particularly for certain earth systems, the TPU S420 uses the phase-to-phase voltages, calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages. The operation is independent for each one of the voltages between phases, even if the asymmetric fault conditions are detected by the protection. TPU S420 has two Overvoltage Protection stages of definite time completely independent. These stages are very similar, and they should be regulated with operational thresholds and different times in order to give two levels of operation: a faster one, for extremely high overvoltage values and another with a slower operation, but sensitive to slight magnitude overvoltages. Any of the stages presents a 4% dead band around the operational threshold which assures the operation stability. In the particular case of the TPU S420 application to power independent producers, the Phases Overvoltage Protection is normally one of the protection functions to connect them to the transmission network. In that situation, this function assures the disconnection of auto producers for overvoltages that show significant disturbances of the system. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-54 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.9.2. CONFIGURATION The Phase Overvoltage Protection parameters are grouped in two independent sets, one for each one of the stages. The first stage must be activated changing the value of the Stg1> Status parameter from OFF to ON. The Stg1> Uop parameter is the phase-to-phase voltage value above which this stage operates. Its regulation is made in values per unit of the nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) of voltage inputs. The time between the fault appearance and the stage operation is defined by the Stg1> Top parameter. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Tensão de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Esc1> Esc1> Esc1> Esc2> Esc2> Esc2> Estado: OFF Uop: 1.200 Top: 1.000 Estado: OFF Uop: 1.100 Top: 2.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.29. Set 1 Menu (Phase Overvoltage). For the secont stage, the Stg2> Status , Stg 2> Uop and Stg 2> Top parameters have equivalent meanings to the corresponding parameters of fist stage. Table 6.18. Phases Overvoltage Protection parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..4 1 Stg1> Status OFF / ON OFF Stg 1> Uop 0,5..1,5 pu 1,2 Stg 1> Top 0,04..300 s 1 Stg 2> Status OFF / ON Stg 2> Uop 0,5..1,5 pu 1,1 Stg 2> Top 0,04..300 s 2 OFF 6.9.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Phase Overvoltage Protection module includes all start and trip indications of this function, discriminated by stage (1 or 2) and by the corresponding pair of phases. The indications to use in other functions or in binary outputs are obtained from these and they are constrained to blockings defined by the user. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-55 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Table 6.19. Logical variables description of the Phases Overvoltage Protection module. Id Name Description 19456 AB Phase Overvoltage Stg 1 … ... Pickup indications of the first stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the function) 19458 CA Phase Overvoltage Stg 1 19459 AB Ph Overvoltage St1 Trip ... ... 19461 CA Ph Overvoltage St1 Trip 19462 AB Phase Overvoltage Stg 2 ... ... 19464 CA Phase Overvoltage Stg 2 19465 AB Ph Overvoltage St2 Trip ... ... 19467 CA Ph Overvoltage St2 Trip 19468 Phase Overvoltage Protec Function start 19469 Phase Overvoltage Stg 1 First stage start 19470 Phase Overvoltage Stg 2 Second stage start 19471 Phase Overvoltage Trip Trip function 19472 Phase Overvoltage St1 Trip First stage trip 19473 Phase Overvoltage St2 Trip Second stage trip 19474 Phase Overvoltage MMI Lock Function blocking by the local interface 19475 Phase Overvoltage LAN Lock Function blocking by the remote interface 19476 Phase Overvoltage Lock Function blocking conditions Trip indications of the first stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) Start indications of the second stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) Trip indications of the second stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) 6 Additionally to the indications mentioned on Table 6.19, the variables corresponding to the parameter, logic or function description changes are also available, as well as the gates associated to the scenario logic and to the function activation. There is also a set of auxiliary variables used in the internal logic of the module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-56 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 19456> Protec MaxU Fases AB Esc1 OR 19489> Gate 1 Max Tensão Fases OR O1 O2 19457> Protec MaxU Fases BC Esc1 OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 I4 O1 O2 19469> Protec Máximo U Fases Esc1 AND 19458> Protec MaxU Fases CA Esc1 OR O1 O2 19462> Protec MaxU Fases AB Esc2 OR 19490> Gate 2 Max Tensão Fases OR O1 O2 19463> Protec MaxU Fases BC Esc2 OR 19468> Protec Máximo U Fases OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I3 I4 O1 O2 19470> Protec Máximo U Fases Esc2 AND 19464> Protec MaxU Fases CA Esc2 OR O1 O2 19459> Disparo MaxU Fases AB Esc1 OR 19491> Gate 3 Max Tensão Fases OR O1 O2 19460> Disparo MaxU Fases BC Esc1 OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 I4 O1 O2 19472> Disparo Max U Fases Esc 1 AND 19461> Disparo MaxU Fases CA Esc1 OR O1 O2 19465> Disparo MaxU Fases AB Esc2 OR 19492> Gate 4 Max Tensão Fases OR O1 O2 19466> Disparo MaxU Fases BC Esc2 OR O2 19471> Disparo Máximo U Fases OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 O1 19473> Disparo Max U Fases Esc 2 AND 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec I3 I4 19467> Disparo MaxU Fases CA Esc2 OR O1 6 O2 19474> Bloqueio Max U Fases MMI OR O1 O2 19475> Bloqueio Max U Fases LAN OR O1 19476> Bloqueio Prot Max U Fases OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O4 O5 O2 Figure 6.30. Logic diagram of the Phases Overvoltage Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-57 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.10. ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Complementing the Earth Overcurrent Protection it can be used the Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection as an additional element for earth faults detection on the network. 6.10.1. OPERATION METHOD The zero sequence voltage is a good indicator of the existence on some point of the network of a fault involving earth. In general, the magnitude effectively used is not the zero sequence voltage but the residual voltage, which is three times higher, and it can be easily obtained by summing the three phase voltages (6.7). U res U A UB UC (6.7) In the particular case of TPU S420, the residual voltage is obtained by software, internally adding the three phase voltages to the protection; in option, it can be used the value of the fourth voltage input, in case it is configured as residual voltage. In fact, in normal situation of balanced three-phase load or faults between phases, the residual voltage is almost null, and the low observed value is due to the network asymmetries. However, for earth faults, the residual voltage have most of the times very significative values. Its magnitude depends on several factors, particularly on the adopted neutral system and fault resistance. For networks with isolated or compensated networks, its value in a normal earth fault situation is extremely high, and its order of magnitude is three times the phase-to-earth nominal voltage, independently from the point on the network where the short-circuit occurred, not suffering great variations with the fault resistance. When neutral is connected to earth using a low value limitation impedance, the residual voltage also have a high value in case it is a lowimpedance fault case, but it decreases as the fault resistance increases or drives us out from the point when the fault occurred. For phase-phase-earth faults, the fault resistance dependence is also significative, but in those cases, the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection assures the required device protection. In many situations the Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection offers an effective way to detect earth faults, but it isn’t able to identify the fault location. Nevertheless, it can be used combining with the Earth Overcurrent Protection, for example: as a configured reserve protection with a long operation time; as earth faults detector, afecting the internal automation logic or indicating other protections. In network points where it is not possible the circulation of the current residual component, for example, next to delta transformer windings and with earth isolated neutral, the Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection is essential for phase-to-earth faults detection. TPU S420 has two completely independent stages of Overvoltage Protection of definite time. These stages are very similar, and they can be regulated with operational thresholds and different times in order to provide two sensitivity levels. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-58 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Any of the stages presents a 4% dead band around the operational threshold which assures the operation stability. 6.10.2. CONFIGURATION The Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection parameters are grouped in two independent sets, one for each one of the stages. In order to enable the first stage the Stg1> Status parmeter must be configured to ON. The Stg1> Uop parameter is the residual voltage value above which this stage operates. Be aware that its regulation is made in values per unit three times the simple nominal voltage (phase-to-earth) of the voltage inputs (which is almost the maximum value that the residual voltage can reach to a phase-to-earth fault). Time between the fault appearance and the stage operation is settled by the Stg1> Top parameter. It must be also chosen the measurement source of the residual voltage to wear, by regulating the Stg1> U0 Source: this can be defined as EXTERNAL TRANSF if the voltage to wear is the measurement of the fourth input or INTERNAL SUM if one chooses the sum of the phase three voltages obtained by software. Funções de Protecção Máximo de Tensão de Terra Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Esc1> Esc1> Esc1> Esc1> Esc2> Esc2> Esc2> Esc2> Estado: OFF Origem U0: SOMA INTERNA Uop: 0.200 Top: 1.000 Estado: OFF Origem U0: SOMA INTERNA Uop: 0.100 Top: 2.000 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.31. Set 1 Menu (Earth Overvoltage). For the second stage, the Stg2> Status, Stg2> U0 Source, Stg2> Uop and Stg2> Top parameters have equivalent meanings to corresponding parameters of the first stage. Table 6.20. Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 Stg1> Status OFF / ON OFF Stg 1> U0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF / INTERNAL SUM INTERNAL SUM Stg 1> Uop 0,005..0,8 pu 0,2 Stg 1> Top 0,04..300 s 1 Stg 2> Status OFF / ON OFF Stg 2 U0 Source EXTERNAL TRANSF / INTERNAL SUM INTERNAL SUM TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default Value 6-59 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default Value Stg2> Uop 0,005..0,8 pu 0,1 Stg2> Top 0,04..300 s 2 6.10.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection includes all start and trip indications produced by the function, discriminated by stage (1 or 2). The indications to use in other functions or in binary outputs are obtained from these indications and they are constrained by blockings defined by the user. Table 6.21. Logical variables description of the Zero Sequence Protection module. Id Name Description 20224 Ground Overvoltage Stg 1 Start indication of the first stage (produced by the function) 20225 Ground Overvoltage Stg 2 Start indication of the second stage (produced by the function) 20226 Gnd Overvoltage Stg 1 Trip Trip indication of the first stage (produced by the function) 20227 Gnd Overvoltage Stg 2 Trip Trip indication of the second stage (produced by the function) 20228 Ground Overvoltage Protec Start of the function 20229 Gnd Overvolt St1 Start Sig Start of the first stage 20230 Gnd Overvolt St2 Start Sig Start of the second stage 20231 Ground Overvoltage Trip Trip of the function 20232 Gnd Overvolt St1 Trip Sig Trip of the first stage 20233 Gnd Overvolt St2 Trip Sig Trip of the second stage 20234 Ground Overvolt MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface 20235 Ground Overvolt LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface 20236 Ground Overvoltage Lock Function blocking conditions 6 Additionally to indications referred in Table 6.21, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with scenario logic and function activation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-60 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 20224> Protec MaxU Terra Esc1 OR 20229> Sin Arranque Prot MaxUh 1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 20225> Protec MaxU Terra Esc2 OR 20230> Sin Arranque Prot MaxUh 2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 20228> Protec Máximo Tensão Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I3 I3 20226> Disparo MaxU Terra Esc1 OR 20232> Sin Disparo Prot MaxUh Es1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 20227> Disparo MaxU Terra Esc2 OR 20234> Bloqueio Max U Terra MMI OR O1 O2 20235> Bloqueio Max U Terra LAN OR O1 O2 20233> Sin Disparo Prot MaxUh Es2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 20231> Disparo Max Tensão Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec I3 I3 20236> Bloqueio Protec MaxU Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O4 O5 6 Figure 6.32. Logic diagram of the Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-61 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.11. PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION As the overvoltages, voltage sags are also disturbances of the Power System that must be detected in order to minimize their effect over consumers. For those situations, the TPU S420 provides the Phase Undervoltage Protection. 6.11.1. OPERATION METHOD The voltage sags (or undervoltage) normally occurs when the magnitude of the fundamental voltage component decreases in just one or more phases. Their causes can be associated to: Incorrect operation of the voltage regulator or manual control of the tap changer; Extreme overload; Faults occurrence, particularly between phases, together with the ones located upstream in the network. The Undervoltage Protection function is mainly used in interaction with load shedding programs, to selective disconnection of consumers if disturbances occur as a result of a voltage drop. It can be equally used in specific logic for detection and indication of faults or protections operation blocking. On the other hand, it is essential to estimate voltage lack conditions that may hinder the equipment service restoration. In the particular case of the TPU S420 application for power independent producers, the Phase Undervoltage Protection is normally one of the protection functions required for the producers’ connection to the transmission network. In these circumstances, this function assures the disconnection of the auto-producers when voltage sags occur, pointing out significant system disturbances. Because phase-earth voltages are more subject to changes of their value, particularly for specific earth regimes, TPU S420 uses phase-phase voltages, calculated from the phase-earth voltages. The calculation is independent for each one of the voltages between phases, so, even asymmetric faulty conditions are detected by the protection function. The TPU S420 has two completely independent stages of Undervoltage Protection of definite time. These stages are entirely similar and they have to be set with distinct operational thresholds and times in order to provide two operation levels: a faster one, for extremely low undervoltage values, and another one with a slower operation, but sensitive to voltage sags of slighter magnitude. Each one of the stages presents a 4% dead band relative to the operational threshold that grants the stability of the operation. The Undervoltage Protection function, simply used without any associated supervision mechanism, has a limitation due to its sensitivity to the voltages annulment, in one or more phases, not due to system disturbances but to circuit failure of the voltages measures. To avoid that possibility, TPU S420 implements two different blocking mechanisms for the function. Firstly, it is possible to consider a tri-phase operation which the trip is indicated only when all the phase-to-phase voltages check the configured conditions, instead of an independent TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-62 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions function operation to each pair of phases. This way, it is prevented, for example, the protection operation in situations where the measure circuit of the VT (voltage transformer) is protected by fuses in each one of the phases, once the voltage remains stable in the other two phases, even in the occurrence of an operation of one of those fuses. This measure takes in consideration that the simultaneous operation of the three protection elements is extremely doubtful. This solution is not enough for the situations where the VT circuit is protected by a tri-phase circuit breaker. To prevent the protection operation in those cases, the TPU S420 implements an additional blocking by current: in case of simultaneous annulment of the three phase voltages, the operation is blocked if there is current in some of the phases, since that is an indication of voltage in the network, and therefore, a VT failure. The only situation where a current may exist in the network without voltage, is the one associated to a non-resistive tri-phase fault immediately next to the measure transformers; nevertheless, the Overcurrent Protection quickly eliminates that situation. The tri-phase operation actuation option should also be configured in this situation. The conditions for voltage and current annulment checking are fixed, corresponding to 1% of the nominal voltage and 3% of the nominal current. 6.11.2. CONFIGURATION The Phase Undervoltage Protection function parameters are grouped in two independent sets, one for each of the stages. The first stage should be activated by changing the parameter value Stg1> Status from OFF to ON. The Stg1> Uop parameter is the phase-to-phase voltage value below which this stage operates. Its setting is performed in values per unit of the nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) of the voltage inputs. The time between the fault appearance and the stage operation is defined by the Stg1> Top parameter. Funções de Protecção Mínimo de Tensão de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Esc1> Estado: OFF Esc1> Uop: 0.500 Esc1> Top: 1.000 Esc2> Estado: OFF Esc2> Uop: 0.800 Esc2> Top: 2.000 Bloq Umin> 3 Fases: OFF Bloq Umin> Corrente: OFF ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.33. Setting group 1 Menu (Phase Undervoltage). For the second stage, the Stg2> Status, Stg2> Uop and Stg2> Top parameters have equivalent meanings concerning those of the first stage. The function operation becomes tri-phase by regulating the Umin Bloq> 3 Phase parameter to ON, that is, only when it is detected a voltage decrease in all phases it is produced the trip indication. The Umin Bloq> Current parameter activates the VT fault verification by current TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-63 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions presence in some of the phases. By activating this parameter it should be also activated the previous one. Any of these parameters have an effect on both stages simultaneously. Table 6.22. Phase Undervoltage Protection parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 Stg1> Status OFF / ON OFF Stg1> Uop 0.05..1 pu 0.5 Stg1> Top 0.04..300 s 1 Stg2> Status OFF / ON Stg2> Uop 0.05..1 pu 0.8 Stg2> Top 0.04..300 s 2 Umin Bloq> 3 Phase OFF / ON OFF Umin Bloq> Current OFF / ON OFF OFF 6.11.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Phase Undervoltage Protection module includes all start and trip indications produced by the function, separated by stage (1 or 2) and by pair of correspondent phases. Additionally to the three phase-to-phase voltages, it is also considered the tri-phase trip indication when the corresponding option is activated. The indication to use in others functions or in binary outputs are obtained from these, being conditioned by blocking logic defined by the user. A particular case of blocking implemented by default is the case of the resulting of the VT failures. This blocking is the result of the blocking by the presence of current, when the respective option is activated, or from other conditions of VT supervision connected to a specific logic. In addition to the logic conditions, this blocking is implemented in the function algorithm for safety reasons. Table 6.23. Description of the logical variables of the Phase Undervoltage Protection module. Id Name Description 20992 AB Phase Undervoltage Stg1 … ... Start indications of the first stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) 20994 CA Phase Undervoltage Stg1 20995 AB Ph Undervolt Stg 1 Trip … ... 20997 CA Ph Undervolt Stg 1 Trip 20998 ABC Ph Undervolt Stg1 Trip Tri-phase trip indication of the first stage (produced by the function) 20999 AB Phase Undervoltage Stg2 ... ... Start indications of the second stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) 21001 CA Phase Undervoltage Stg2 Trip indications of the first stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-64 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 21002 AB Ph Undervolt Stg 2 Trip ... ... Trip indication s of the second stage discriminated by phase (indications produced by the functions) 21004 CA Ph Undervolt Stg 2 Trip 21005 ABC Ph Undervolt Stg2 Trip Tri-phase trip indiction of the second stage (produced by the function) 21006 Phase Undervoltage Protec Function start 21007 Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 First stage start 21008 Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 Second stage start 21009 Phase Undervoltage Trip Trip function 21010 Ph Undervoltage Stg 1 Trip First stage trip 21011 Ph Undervoltage Stg 2 Trip Second stage trip 21012 Phase Undervolt MMI Lock Function blocking by the local interface 21013 Phase Undervolt LAN Lock Function blocking by the remote interface 21014 Phase Undervoltage Lock Function blocking conditions 21015 VT Circuit Failure Conditions of voltage lack by VT failure 21016 VT Supervision Lock Function blocking by VT failure Additionally to the indications mentioned on Table 6.23, the variables corresponding to the parameter, logic or function description changes are also available, as well as the gates associated to the setting group logic and to the function activation. There is also a set of auxiliary variables used in the internal logic of the module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-65 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 20992> Protec MinU Fases AB Esc1 OR O1 O2 21029> Gate 1 Min Tensão Fases OR 20993> Protec MinU Fases BC Esc1 OR O2 20999> Protec MinU Fases AB Esc2 OR O1 O2 20994> Protec MinU Fases CA Esc1 OR I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 21006> Protec Mínimo U Fases OR I3 21030> Gate 2 Min Tensão Fases OR O2 21000> Protec MinU Fases BC Esc2 OR O2 O1 I2 I4 O1 O1 I1 I3 O1 21007> Protec Mínimo U Fases Esc1 AND 21008> Protec Mínimo U Fases Esc2 AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I3 I3 I4 21001> Protec MinU Fases CA Esc2 OR O1 O2 20995> Disparo MinU Fases AB Esc1 OR O1 O2 21031> Gate 3 Min Tensão Fases OR 20996> Disparo MinU Fases BC Esc1 OR O1 O2 20997> Disparo MinU Fases CA Esc1 OR O1 O2 21010> Disparo Min U Fases Esc1 AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 I4 I4 I5 21009> Disparo Mínimo U Fases OR 20998> Disparo MinU FasesABC Esc1 OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 41730>Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec 39448>Gate 1 Deslastre Tensão O2 21002> Disparo MinU Fases AB Esc2 OR O1 O2 21032> Gate 4 Min Tensão Fases OR 21003> Disparo MinU Fases BC Esc2 OR O1 O2 21004> Disparo MinU Fases CA Esc2 OR 21011> Disparo Min U Fases Esc2 AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 I4 I4 I5 O2 21005> Disparo MinU FasesABC Esc2 OR O1 21012> Bloqueio Min U Fases MMI OR O2 O1 O2 21013> Bloqueio Min U Fases LAN OR 6 21015> Avaria Circuito TT OR O1 4360>Estado do TT 1 I1 4362>Posição do TT 1 I2 21014> Bloqueio Prot Min U Fases OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I3 O4 O1 O5 O2 21016> Bloqueio Vigilancia TT OR I1 O1 O2 O3 Figure 6.34. Logic diagram of the Phases Undervoltage Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-66 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.12. UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION All the previous protection functions are prepared to operate in system disturbance situations where, nonetheless, the operation frequency is kept stable. The Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection complements these funtions, reacting to deviations of that magnitude concerning the nominal value. 6.12.1. OPERATION METHOD The electric power networks operate in an almost constant frequency, kept in an extremely limited range of values. These conditions assure the synchronism between different generators and the maintenance of power transmission rhythms between the aproximately constants points in the network, to a certain profile of generation and consumption. The network short-circuits with consequent lines or generators disconnection can affect this balance. The faults occurred in the transport network are the responsible for bigger disturbances, and they can seriously affect the synchronism between several points of the network, detected by the variation of frequency concerning the nominal value. In most serious situations, measures start necessarily by consumers disconnection. One of the Frequency Protection main applications is interacting with load shedding programs by the decrease of the frequency value. Another application of this function is in networks with diffuse generation of energy in small producers, like the associated to renewable energy and cogeneration. When occurring faults, the possible insulation of the system sections, composing “islands” constituted by some generators and consumers, leads to frequent unbalanced actions between generation and consumption, which means frequency variations. The Frequency Protection function is advisable in those situations, that’s why it is normally demanded for the network interconnection protection of those independent producers. The used algorithm on the frequency calculation assures the measurement precision for protection efects in all regulation range. The frequency measurement is calculated from the voltage direct sequence. So that this measurement is correct it is necessary to do the connections of the three phase voltage in accordance with the scheme presented on the Chapter 2.4.5 – Current and voltage connections. The phases exchange has a frequency null value and a consequent non-operability of the function. In situations of a network section insulation, the voltage can remain in that section for more a few cycles after circuit-breaker opening due to, for example, the drive load of significative power. In that situation, the frequency is gradually moderated, being able to lead to non-desired operations of the Frequency Protection. Still, the simultaneous reduction of the voltage magnitude supplies a valid discrimination criterion. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-67 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions In order to avoid incorrect operations of the Frequency Protection, the frequency calculation is made only for voltages higher than the value configured by the user. It is possible to use only one voltage in order to measure the frequency value, but, this is not advisible because the measure in this circumstances is less accurate, so, the operation is more instable. Besides this, the regulation of the trip voltage threshold must be done for a three times inferior value to configured in a normal situation. Underfrequency TPU S420 has two completely independent stages of Underfrequency Protection of definite time. Each one of these stages operate at the end of a configured time as the frequency reduces from the respective operational threshold. The first stage can be regulated to operate as a protection of negative variation rate of frequency. In that case, this stage only operates when the frequency is inferior to the configured operational threshold and, at the same time, its decrease happens in a rate higher than a specific value. The two Underfrequency stages can be used, for example, as two levels of load shedding. For example, the first stage can be configured to operate for slight frequency variations (therefore, more quickly), but only for variation rates above a certain value that show very serious disturbances of the system balance. Overfrequency TPU S420 has also two independent stages of Overfrequency Protection of definite time. Each one of these stages operates at the end of a configured time as the frequency rises above the respective operational threshold. The first stage can be configured to work as a protection of positive variation rate of frequency. In that case, this stage only operates when the frequency is superior to the configured operational threshold and, at the same time, its increase happens in a rate higher than a specific value. The coordination between the two levels can be similarly done to the Underfrequency Protection, using the variation rate stage to foresee the trip for more serious disturbances, and the second stage to operate when the frequency surpasses an excessive value. 6.12.2. CONFIGURATION The Underfrequency and Overfrequency parameters are grouped in four independent sets, one for each one of the stages. The first Underfrequency stage is activated changing the value of the MinF 1> Status parameter from OFF to ON. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-68 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The MinF 1> Fop parameter is the frequency value under which this stage operates. It is regulated in values per unit of the nominal frequency. The time between a fault appearance and the protection operation is defined by the MinF 1> Top parameter. Concerning this stage it can be also set the MinF 1> Var Rate parameter: only for faster frequency variations than the ones that were defined by this rate. If one doesn’t require the function of negative variation of frequency it is enough to set this parameter with the zero value. Funções de Protecção Frequência Cenário 1 Cenário 1 MinF> Ubloq: 0.800 MinF 1> Estado: OFF MinF 1> Taxa Var: 1.000 MinF 1> Fop: 0.980 MinF 1> Top: 0.070 MinF 2> Estado: OFF MinF 2> Fop: 0.960 MinF 2> Top: 0.070 MaxF 1> Estado: OFF MaxF 1> Taxa Var: 1.000 MaxF 1> Fop: 1.020 MaxF 1> Top: 0.070 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 MaxF 2> Estado: OFF MaxF 2> Fop: 1.040 MaxF 2> Top: 0.070 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.35. Setting group 1 Menu (Frequency). The configuration of the second Underfrequency stage is similar to the first one, and they should be regulated MinF 2> Status, MinF 2> Fop and MinF 2> Top. There isn’t a parameter for the frequency variation because that option is not available in this stage. Both Overfrequency stages are like the Underfrequency stages in terms of configuration: the only difference is that the function operation happens for frequency values above the defined operational thresholds. The first Overfrequency stage corresponds to a relay of positive frequency variation rate but it can, as an alternative, operate as a simple protection of frequency if the MaxF 1> Var Rate parameter is annulled. There is an addittional parameter, which is common to all these stages – Blocking Voltage: is the direct voltage value, set in values per unit of the nominal voltage, under which the frequency is not calculated and the protection algorithm is blocked. A typical value of 70-80% is advisible. Table 6.24. Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 MinF 1> Status OFF / ON OFF TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Default Value 6-69 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default Value MinF 1> Fop 0,8..1 pu 0,98 MinF 1> Top 0,07..60 pu 0,07 MinF 1> Var Rate 0..10 pu 1 MinF 2> Status OFF / ON MinF 2> Fop 0,8..1 pu 0,96 MinF 2> Top 0,07..60 pu 0,07 MaxF 1> Status OFF / ON MaxF 1> Fop 1..1,2 pu 1,02 MaxF 1> Top 0,07..60 pu 0,07 MaxF 1> Var Rate 0..10 pu 1 MaxF 2> Status OFF / ON MaxF 2> Fop 1..1,2 pu 1,04 MaxF 2> Top 0,07..60 pu 0,07 Blocking Voltage 0,05..1 pu 0,8 OFF OFF OFF 6.12.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection module includes all start and trip indications of this function, discriminated by stage (2 of minimum and 2 of maximum). These variables are constrained to the existence of blockings imposed by the user or by other logic variables. One of these blockings is produced by the function and it is associated to the voltage value reduction. Table 6.25. Logic variables description of the Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection module. Id Name Description 21760 Underfrequency Prot Stage1 … ... Start indications of the underfrequency stages (indications produced by the functions) 21761 Underfrequency Prot Stage2 21762 Underfreq Prot Stage1 Trip … ... 21763 Underfreq Prot Stage2 Trip 21764 Underfrequency Protection Function start (minimum) 21765 Underfreq Prot Stage1 Sign Start of the first stage of minimum 21766 Underfreq Prot Stage2 Sign Start of the second stage of minimum 21767 Underfrequency Protec Trip Function trip (minimum) 21768 Underfreq Stage1 Trip Sign Trip of the first stage of minimum 21769 Underfreq Stage2 Trip Sign Trip of the second stage of minimum 21770 Overfrequency Prot Stage 1 … ... Start indications of the overfrequency stages (indications produced by the functions) 21771 Overfrequency Prot Stage 2 Trip indications of the underfrequency stages (indications produced by the functions) TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-70 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 21772 Overfreq Prot Stage 1 Trip … ... Trip indications of the overfrequency stages (indications produced by the functions) 21773 Overfreq Prot Stage 2 Trip 21774 Overfrequency Protection Function Start (maximum) 21775 Overfreq Prot Stage 1 Sign Start of the first stage of maximum 21776 Overfreq Prot Stage 2 Sign Start of the second stage of maximum 21777 Overfrequency Protec Trip Trip of the function (maximum) 21778 Overfreq Stage 1 Trip Sign Trip of the first stage of maximum 21779 Overfreq Stage 2 Trip Sign Trip of the second stage of maximum 21780 Frequency Protection Start of the function 21781 Frequency Protection Trip Trip of the function 21782 Freq Lock by UnderVoltage Undervoltage blocking indication (produced by the function) 21783 Underfrequency MMI Lock Function blocking of minimum by the local interface 21784 Underfrequency LAN Lock Function blocking of minimum by the remote interface 21785 Overfrequency MMI Lock Function blocking of maximum by the local interface 21786 Overfrequency LAN Lock Function blocking of maximum by the remote interface 21787 Underfrequency Protec Lock Function blocking by the local interface 21788 Overfrequency Protec Lock Function blocking by the remote interface 6 Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.25, there are also available the variables corresponding to the change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-71 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 21760> Protec Mínimo Freq Esc 1 OR 21765> Sin Arranque Min Freq Esc1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 21761> Protec Mínimo Freq Esc 2 OR 21766> Sin Arranque Min Freq Esc2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 21764> Protec Mínimo Frequência OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 21780> Protecção Frequência OR I1 O1 I2 O2 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I3 21770> Protec Máximo Freq Esc 1 OR 21775> Sin Arranque Max Freq Esc1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 21774> Protec Máximo Frequência OR I3 21771> Protec Máximo Freq Esc 2 OR 21776> Sin Arranque Max Freq Esc2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I3 21762> Disparo Mínimo Freq Esc 1 OR 21768> Sin Disparo Min Freq Esc1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 21763> Disparo Mínimo Freq Esc 2 OR 21769> Sin Disparo Min Freq Esc2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 21767> Disparo Mínimo Frequência OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 21781> Disparo Prot Frequência OR I3 21772> Disparo Máximo Freq Esc 1 OR 21778> Sin Disparo Max Freq Esc1 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 21773> Disparo Máximo Freq Esc 2 OR 21783> Bloqueio Mínimo Freq MMI OR O2 21784> Bloqueio Mínimo Freq LAN OR O1 O2 I2 O2 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O4 O5 O2 21785> Bloqueio Máximo Freq MMI OR O2 I1 I1 O1 O1 O1 21787> Bloqueio Prot Mínimo Freq OR O1 21779> Sin Disparo Max Freq Esc2 AND I1 O1 41806>Gate 1 Disjuntor I2 O2 40216>Gate 1 Deslastre Frequênc I3 O3 21777> Disparo Máximo Frequência OR I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 I3 21782> Bloq Freq por Min Tensão OR I1 O1 21788> Bloqueio Prot Máximo Freq OR 21786> Bloqueio Máximo Freq LAN OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 O4 O2 O5 Figure 6.36. Logic diagram of the Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-72 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.13. PHASE BALANCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION As an option, the TPU S420 provides the Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection. Together with the other Overcurrent protections, this function allows an effective and complete protection against all types of short-circuits, extending the application field of the unit to other fault situations, for example the detection of broken conductors. 6.13.1. OPERATION METHOD With the exception of symmetrical three-phase faults, which are quite rare and for which the Overcurrent Protection provides efficient protection; all other types of faults cause more or less asymmetry in the three-phase currents system that has as consequence the presence, in more or less significant percentages, of other components besides the direct component. Similarly to the residual component used for the detection of earth faults, the negative sequence component of the currents can also be used as criterion for asymmetrical fault detection, especially for two-phase faults for which the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection cannot be applied. The use of the Phase Balance Protection can increase the protection’s sensitivity for this type of short-circuits. However, the main application of this function is the detection of another type of faults: the detection of phase absence or broken conductors. In these situations, there may not be contact to ground or, if there is, the fault resistance, depending of the type of ground where the conductor falls, can be extremely high. These reasons explain why the earth fault Protection using the residual component of the currents can be ineffective. This protection is also very dependent on the neutral system. On the contrary, the negative sequence is generally high enough to allow the detection of this type of situations, enabling the application of an Overcurrent Protection operating with the value of this component. Three virtual relays are provided, corresponding to two operation levels, which algorithm is executed in parallel (full-scheme). High Set Phase Balance Overcurrent The High Set Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection is generally destined to a very fast protection for a fast clearance of asymmetrical faults above a specified magnitude (cut-off protection). The protection operates when the negative sequence of the currents exceeds a specified threshold. Although it is usual to desire an instantaneous protection operation, it is also possible to configure a selective timer. This characteristic can be important in order to coordinate the immediately downstream protections, as by different operation thresholds, or logic interlocking (see 6.21 - Blocking by Logical Selectivity). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-73 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Low Set Phase Balance Overcurrent The Low Set Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection must be used, rather to obtain more sensitivity to asymmetric faults than the previous stage, using a timers staggering (time-lag protection) for the selective coordination. The constant timer and inverse type options are available in the TPU S420. The definite time option, as a result of the need to coordinate with downstream protections, may demand too long operation times. The inverse time curves allow, otherwise, a decrease of the operation time as the fault current increases. In this last option, the standards and curve options which the function follows are similar to the ones of other Overcurrent functions and the reset can also be static or dynamic. The operational threshold can regulated to a relatively low value, in accordance with the presicion assured by the protection and by the CT’s. In the definite time option the reset factor is 4%; the inverse time option has an additional margin of 20%. Direct and Negative Sequence Ratio Overcurrent In parallel and independently of the previous function, the TPU S420 executes a second Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection with definite time. This stage is different from the previous one because it operates according to the percentage of negative component regarding the respective direct component of the currents. The value of the negative current above which the protection operates is therefore a function of the defined threshold as well as of the current that circulates in the CTs. For low operation thresholds and low magnitude currents, the negative sequence corresponding to the protection operation may have very low values, below the measurement precision of the TPU S420. For this reason, the sensitivity of this function is limited to 10% of the nominal value of the phase current inputs. As an example: for a ratio of negative and direct sequences configured for 20% and a direct component of 100% of the nominal value, it will be necessary a negative current of 20% of the nominal value. For half the direct component the operation will take place when the negative current is at least 10% . For lower values of the direct current, the function will operate with the same value of 10% of the nominal current, not considering the configured ratio. 6.13.2. CONFIGURATION The Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection parameters are grouped in three independent groups, one for each stage. The high set protection should be activated by changing the value of the High Set > Status parameter from OFF to ON. The High Set > Iop parameter is the value of the negative component of the current above which this stage is activated. The time between the fault occurrence and the operation of the high set protection is defined by the High Set > Top parameter. Its value can be made null if one wishes an operation as fast as possible. In case of blocking by logical selectivity, this time delay should be adjusted to a value higher than the time guaranteed for the reception of this indication. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-74 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Funções de Protecção Sequência Inversa Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Amp> Estado: OFF Amp> Iop: 0.500 Amp> Top: 0.000 Def/Inv> Estado: OFF Def/Inv> Operação: TEMPO DEFINIDO Def> Iop: 0.200 Def> Top: 0.040 Inv> Norma: C.E.I. Inv> Curva: NI Inv> Rearme: ESTÁTICO Inv> Iop: 0.200 Inv> TM: 0.050 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Razão Inv/Dir> Estado: OFF Razão Inv/Dir> Razão: 0.200 Razão Inv/Dir> Top: 0.040 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.37. Setting group 1 Menu (Phase Balance). In order to enable the low set stage, the Low Set> Status parameter must be configured with the value ON. The Low Set> Operation parameter allows to choose the working mode between two possible options: DEFINITE TIME or INVERSE TIME. When the DEFINITE TIME option is chosen, there are two parameters to adjust: Def> Iop and Def> Top. The first value is the current value (phase balance) above which the protection operates and it can be set to a very low value, in compliance with the possible precision; the second is the operational time that allows the coordination with downstream protections. With the INVERSE TIME option, several parameters must be set: the Inv> Standard allows choosing the standard with which the inverse time curve complies (IEC or IEEE) and Inv> Curve allows choosing the type of curve (NI, VI, EI or LI). The function reset can be STATIC (default option) or DYNAMIC (situation on which the attack time follows the expression (6.3)), by selecting the parameter value Inv> Reset. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120%. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the default current. Instead configure the Inv> TM data. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational times of time-lag stage. The Inv> Iop parameter defines the point of the inverse time curve where the trip time is infinite. However, be aware that the current value that triggers the protection operation is 120% of that current. The operation time is not configurable as it is function of the default current. Instead configure the Inv> TM data. This scale factor allows adjusting the operational times of the timelag stage, and thus, to find the optimal point to coordinate with the other downstream protections of inverse time. As for the current negative and direct sequences ratio the available parameters are: Neg/Pos Ratio> Status parameter that indicates if the function is active; the Neg/Pos Ratio> Ratio parameter that is the percentage value of the current negative sequence regarding the TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-75 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions corresponding direct sequence above which the function is triggered and the Neg/Pos Ratio> Top parameter that defines the tripping time. Table 6.26. Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..4 1 High Set> Status OFF / ON OFF High Set> Iop 0,1..40 pu 0,5 High Set> Top 0..60 s 0 Low Set> Status OFF / ON OFF Low Set> Operation DEFINITE TIME / INVERSE TIME DEFINITE TIME Def> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Def> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 Inv> Iop 0,1..20 pu 0,2 Inv> TM 0,05..1,5 s 0,05 Inv> Standard I.E.C. / I.E.E.E. I.E.C. Inv> Curve NI / VI / EI / LI NI Inv> Reset STATIC / DYNAMIC STATIC Neg/Pos Ratio> Status OFF / ON OFF Neg/Pos Ratio> Ratio 0,2..1 % 0,2 Neg/Pos Ratio> Top 0,04..300 s 0,04 6 6.13.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection module includes all start and trip indications of this function discriminated by stage (high set and ratio of negative and direct sequences). These variables are then constrained by the existence of blockings established by the user or by other logical variables. The blocking by logical selectivity is a particular case to which corresponds a variable that can be configured in a physical input or to which can be connected a variable received from the local area network. By default, this blocking by logical selectivity only affects the high set stage. Table 6.27. Description of the logical variables of the Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection module. Id Name Description 23296 Def Time Neg Seq Overcurr Start indication of the low set definite time (produced by the function). 23297 Def Time Neg Seq OC Trip Trip indication of the low set definite time (produced by the function). 23298 Inv Time Neg Seq Overcurr Start indication of the low set inverse time (produced by the function). 23299 Def Time Neg Seq OC Trip Trip indication of the low set inverse time (produced by the function). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-76 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 23300 High Set Neg Seq Overcurr Start indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 23301 High Set Neg Seq OC Trip Trip indication of the high set stage (produced by the function). 23302 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq Overcurr Start indication of the inverse/direct ratio stage (produced by the function). 23303 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Trip Trip indication of the inverse/direct ratio stage (produced by the function) 23304 Neg Seq Overcurrent Protec Start of the function. 23305 Low Set Neg Seq OC Protec Start of the low set stage 23306 High Set Neg Seq OC Protec Start of the high set stage. 23307 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Protec Start of the negative/direct ratio stage. 23308 Neg Seq Overcurrent Trip Trip of the function. 23309 Low Set Neg Seq OC Trip Low set stage trip. 23310 High Set Neg Seq OC Trip High set stage trip. 23311 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Trip Negative/direct ratio stage trip. 23312 Neg Sequence OC MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 23313 Neg Sequence OC LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 23314 Neg Seq OC Protection Lock Indication of general function blocking. 23315 Neg Seq OC High Set Lock Blocking by logical selectivity received in a input or by the local area network. 6 Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.27, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-77 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 23296> Protec Seq Inv Temp Def OR O1 O2 23298> Protec Seq Inv Temp Inv OR O1 O2 23328> Gate 1 Seq Inversa OR 23305> Protec Seq Inversa Cronom AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 23300> Protec Seq Inv Amperim OR 23306> Protec Seq Inversa Amperim AND I1 O1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 23302> Protec Razão Seq Inv/Dir OR O2 23299> Disparo Seq Inv Temp Inv OR 23307> Protec Seq Inversa/Directa AND I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 23329> Gate 2 Seq Inversa OR 23309> Disparo Seq Inversa Cronom AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 O1 O2 8706>Gate 1 Arranq Oscilografia I4 O1 23297> Disparo Seq Inv Temp Def OR O1 23304> Protecção Seq Inversa OR 23301> Disparo Seq Inv Amperim OR 23310> Disparo Seq Inversa Amper AND 23308> Disparo Protec Seq Inversa OR I1 O1 41806>Gate 1 Disjuntor O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 41984>Sin Arranque Falha Disjunt O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 I4 I4 23303> Disparo Razão Seq Inv/Dir OR 23312> Bloqueio Seq Inversa MMI OR O1 O2 23313> Bloqueio Seq Inversa LAN OR 23311> Disparo Seq Inversa/Direct AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 6 23314> Bloqueio Prot Seq Inversa OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 O4 O2 O5 O6 O7 23315> Bloq Select Lógica Seq Inv OR O1 O2 Figure 6.38. Logical diagram of the Phase Balance Overcurrent Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-78 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.14. OVERLOAD PROTECTION The purpose of the Overload Protection is the equipment protection against thermal stress of electric source, particularly, to the protection against quite low value overflows, that do not correspond to short-circuits and to which the Overcurrent functions are not sensitive, however overflows can provoke damages on the equipment when they take too long. 6.14.1. OPERATION METHOD Losses by the Joule effect due to not null resistance of the conductors stir their temperature increase toward the exterior. That’s an important temperature increase, considering the expression of active power associated to losses, it is almost equivalent to the square of the current that is on the equipment. Ploss (6.8) I 2R As a consequence, the increase of the conductors temperature causes the early ageing of the insulator material and, therefore, the decrease of the equipment lifetime. The Overload Protection implements a simplified model of the temperature evolution on the equipment, using the currents value. The already mentioned losses by the Joule effect and the cooling time constant are considered in this thermal model. As a result, this model allow to get an image of the conductors temperature difference comparing with environment and explain their exponential increase (or decrease) up to the stationary value defined by the current that is on the equipment. The current variations through time are easily included with this model and they allow the appropriate simulation of the system dynamic behaviour. The function implementation complies with the IEC 60255-8 standard. It is defined a trip current that corresponds to the temperature acceptable in a stationary system, above which it starts a fast degradation process of the equipment lifetime. For bigger currents, that temperature is reached in a limited time which decreases as the current increases, at the end of which a trip order must be produced. In compliance with the standard, considering a current earlier to null overload, that time is given by: t op min ln I2 I2 I tr2 where I is the measured current (considered as stationary), Itr is the definite trip set and characteristic time constant. (6.9) is the The previous expression changes, and the operation time reduces if the source of overload occurrence is a not null current situation. In particular, in case there is a stationary load current of Ip value that is preceding the overload, the expression for the trip time starts to be given by: t op min ln I2 I p2 I2 I tr2 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 (6.10) 6-79 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The trip time curves are presented on Figure 6.39 for different values of the time constant, with current preceding null overload, and for different values of the current that precedes the overload, keeping the time constant of 100 min. 6 Time constant varies. The current previous to overload varies. Figure 6.39. Trip characteristics of the Overload Protection. The TPU S420 additionally has an alarm level configured in percentage of the trip temperature, that enable to generate an indication before the function operation. The reset temperature value is also configurable by the user, according with the trip level. The temperature is calculated separately for each one of the phases using the respective current. As an alternative defined by the user, the Overload Protection decisions are made according with the medium or maximum value of the previous values. After the protection reset, the temperature value is not immediately known, thus the protection might have been disconnected during an arbitrary time without measuring current values. Once the temperature of the equipment is unknown, it is assumed an initial value, defined by the user according with the trip level. This way, in the first moments of the protection functioning, it is not assured that the calculated temperature corresponds to its real temperature; nevertheless, it can be considered that, at the end of 4 or 5 multiples of the constant of time that value will be almost reached. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-80 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.14.2. CONFIGURATION The Status parameter must be changed from OFF to ON in order to activate the function. The Source parameter shows the magnitude to be considered regarding the operation thresholds: the AVERAGE of the three estimated temperatures, or the associated MAXIMUM value. The remaining parameters of the Overload Protection are united in a single stage. The Stg1 > Time Constant parameter defines the time constant which is the device characteristic, regulated in minutes. This constant means that, in a stationary current situation, the difference between the instantaneous and the permanent system temperature is 5% of the initial value of that difference at the end of almost 3 multiples of time constant, and, the temperature already reached 99% of the final value at the end of 5 times the same constant. The base current for the function remaing parameters is defined with the Stg1> Base Current parameter. The current associated to the trip set, Stg1> Trip Threshold, is regulated in percentage of the base current. Its value shows the current that corresponds to the acceptable maximum temperature in permanent regime on the equipment. For superior currents that temperature is reached in limited time, which decreases as the current increases. The function trip occurs when that temperature is reached. The alarm and reset threshols, Stg1>Alarm Level and Stg1>Reset Level respectively, are configured in percentage of the temperature associated to trip set, that is, their indications are issued when those temperature levels are reached. If the Stg1>Reset Level parameter is configured with the value of 100%, the function reset occurs when the current decreases of the configured trip set. It is necessary to wait the temperature decreases to the parameter value before the function resets for any other regulation. It must be also configured the equipment initial temperature Stg1>Initial Temperature, as well in accordance with the trip temperature. Funções de Protecção Sobrecargas Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Origem: MAXIMO Esc1> Constante de Tempo: 10.000 Esc1> Corrente Base: 1.000 Esc1> Limiar Disparo: 105.000 Esc1> Nível Alarme: 80.000 Esc1> Nível Rearme: 60.000 Esc1> Temperatura Inicial: 50.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.40. Setting group 1 Menu (Overload). Table 6.28.Overload Protection Parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Status OFF / ON - OFF Source AVERAGE / MAXIMUM - MAXIMUM Stg1> Time Constant 1..500 min 10 Stg 1> Base Current 0,2..4,0 pu 1,0 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-81 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default Value Stg1> Trip Threshold 50,0..250,0 % 105,0 Stg 1> Alarm Level 50,0..100,0 % 80,0 Stg 1> Reset Level 10,0..100,0 % 60,0 Stg 1> Initial Temperature 10,0..100,0 % 50,0 6.14.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Overload Protection module includes the pickup, alarm and trip indications produced by the function. The indications to be used in other functions or directly on the circuit-breaker command logic are obtained through their combination with active blockings. The variable for the change of the function active stage is not applied on the TPU S420. Table 6.29. Logical variables description of the Overload Protection module. Id Name Description 25600 Thermal Overload Pickup indication (produced by the function) 25601 Thermal Overload Alarm Alarm indication (produced by the function) 25602 Thermal Overload Trip Trip indication (produced by the function) 25603 Therm Overload Signal Function pickup (subjected to blocking) 25604 Therm Overload Alarm Sign Function alarm (subjected to blocking) 25605 Therm Overload Trip Sign Function trip (subjected to blocking) 25606 Thermal Overload MMI Lock Function blocking by the local interface 25607 Thermal Overload LAN Lock Function blocking by the remote interface 25608 Thermal Overload Prot Lock Function blocking conditions 25609 Thermal Overload Stage change indication 6 Additionally to indications referred on Table 6.29, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with setting groups and function activation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-82 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 25603> Arranque Prot Sobrecargas 25600> Protec Sobrecargas OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 3329>Timer 2 I3 25601> Alarme Prot Sobrecargas 25604> Sin Alarme Prot Sobrecarga OR AND O1 I1 O2 I2 O1 I3 25602> Disparo Prot Sobrecargas 25605> Sin Disparo Prot Sobrecarg OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 41805>Gate 1 Disjuntor I3 25606> Bloqueio Sobrecargas MMI 25608> Bloqueio Prot Sobrecargas OR OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 25607> Bloqueio Sobrecargas LAN OR O4 25609> Mudança Escalão Sobrecarga 6 OR O1 O1 O2 Figure 6.41. Logic diagram of the Overload Protection module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-83 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.15. AUTOMATIC RECLOSING The Automatic Reclosing function main purpose is the service restoration of the line after the clearance of temporary or intermittent faults, common in aerial networks. The TPU S420 allows the execution of up to five reclosing cycles, completely configurable in terms of parameters and interlocking logic. 6.15.1. OPERATION METHOD The operating principle of the Automatic Reclosing function consists in the temporary disconnection of a line after fault detection and respective isolation for a specified time. Then follows the reclosing command based on the probability that the fault was cleared in the meantime. Since the opening of the circuit breaker to the closing command there is a dead time to allow fault clearance. After that time, the Reclosing function commands the circuit breaker to close. Once the command is executed, if the fault is cleared, there is a blocking time fault in order to confirm the absence of fault. If, on the contrary, after circuit breaker closure the fault remains, reclosing will go to the next cycle, if configured, otherwise it leaves the circuit breaker open and signalizes a definitive trip. The TPU S420 provides a group of five reclosing cycles completely independent in terms of configuration, that is, with different dead times and confirmation times associated with each cycle. Each one of these cycles can still be configured according with two pre-defined types, namely fast cycles and slow cycles. Fast Cycles This type of cycle is intended for transient fault situations with very low clearance time, typically associated to lightning strokes in aerial lines. When in a fast cycle phase, the Reclosing function working makes an instantaneous disconnection followed by the restoration command. The circuit-breaker command, given by the Automatic Reclosing, is generated after any pickup of the Overcurrent Protection functions, without expecting its trip, that is, without considering selectivity criteria with other protections. Additionally, fast cycles may imply a slight delay in the trip command, in order to avoid reconnections caused by very fast disturbances that do not provoke trip, but only the protection functions pickup. That delay is configurable. Slow Cycles Slow cycles are different from fast cycles because their operating mode. While in fast cycles the opening command of the circuit-breaker is given by the Reclosing function after the pickup of the Overcurrent Protection functions, in the slow cycles the protection functions give the opening command of the circuit-breaker, and the Automatic Reclosing is responsible by its restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-84 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Therefore, the slow reclosing is intended to clear faults with bigger extinction time, as the case of an earth short-circuit through a tree. Function Algorithm The actions performed by Automatic Reclosing can be summarized to a sequence of states where the transition between them is triggered by a group of events, whose configuration can be changed in the programmable logic associated with the function. This sequence of states is shown in Figure 6.42 and is explained next. In RESTING condition, the Reclosing function has two possible choices. When the function starts if the circuit breaker is open the function will go to the CLOSE_CIRC BREAK state, if the circuit breaker is closed it will go to the START state. In the CLOSE_CIRC BREAK state, the function waits indefinitely for the transition of the circuit breaker state to close. If that transition occurs, the function will go to BLOCKING state. The purpose of this BLOCKING state is to confirm that after a close command from an external source to the Reclosing function, a reclosing cycle will not be triggered. Therefore, even if after the close of the circuit breaker the Overcurrent Protection functions operate, the Automatic Reclosing will not perform the reclosing normal sequence, it will only wait for those protection functions to reset. Therefore, when the blocking time of the 1st cycle runs out without any of the protection functions starting, the Reclosing function will go to RESTING state, otherwise will go to PROT_RESET. The PROT_RESET state is achieved whenever there is a start of the protection functions and will only leave this state and go to RESTING state when all functions reset. The START state is intended to detect the operation of the Overcurrent Protection functions. If that happens and if the Reclosing function is in a slow cycle it will directly turn to RESET state. In case the configured cycle is a fast type, the function will hold the trip time of fast reclosing and after this time, if the protection functions does not reset, the Reclosing function will give an opening command to the circuit-breaker. In this case the function will turn to RESET_TRIP state. Two different events in the RESET_TRIP state may happen. Or the protection functions reset before the trip time runs out and the function will directely turn to RESTING state, or the functions do not reset and the function will give opening command of the circuit-breaker, turning to RESET state. When reaching the RESET state, the Automatic Reclosing will wait that all the protection functions reset. In case they reset without being given the opening command of the circuitbreaker, if it’s a slow cycle the function will turn to RESTING state, and in the fast cycle it will turn to OPEN_CIRC BREAK state, in order to check the opening command success. In the OPEN_CIRC BREAk state the function will turn to DEAD TIME state if the opening command was successful, if not, it turns to RESTING state, indicating the definitive trip. In the DEAD TIME state, if the circuit-breaker turns to a close state due to an external cause of the Reclosing function, it will interrupt the normal sequence and it will turn to the BLOCKING state. If otherwise, nothing occurs and if the configured dead time runs out for the running cycle, the Reclosing will give the circuit-breaker a close command and it will turn to CLOSE_CIRC BREAK state. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-85 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions If during the CLOSE_CIRC BREAK state, the circuit breaker does not change its state the action is considered as unsuccessful and the function turn to RESTING state. Otherwise, the function will turn to the next CONFIRMATION state. The purpose of the CONFIRMATION is to verify if the fault originating the open of the circuit breaker remains after the circuit breaker is closed. If the fault is not cleared and the blocking time of the running cycle has ended, the function will go to RESTING state. If, on the other hand, the fault reappears within the blocking time and if there are more defined cycles the function will go back to the RESET state to start a new cycle. If there are no more defined cycles the function will only wait for the reset of the protection functions producing a definitive trip indication and go to the RESET_PROT state. D DE-ENERGIZED CB Closed? START-UP CB_CLOSED Startup CB closed TRIP_RESET LOCK Timer end Current Protections Trip Current Protections Startup 6 CB_OPEN RESET_PROT Current Protecions Reset Open Circuit Breaker INSULATION Current Protections Reset Reclosing Command CB_CLOSED Timer End Closed Circuit Breaker CONFIRMATION Timer End Current Protections Startup Figure 6.42. Automatic Reclosing operation sequence. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-86 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Operation Examples In order to exemplify the operation of the Reclosing automatism, some time diagrams associated with the function’s typical operation are presented next. The first case corresponds to a successful fast reclosing cycle and is shown in Figure 6.43. After the start of the protection functions and the end of the respective operation time, the open command of the circuit breaker is given. A DeadT time after the effective circuit breaker opening the close command is given. After the circuit breaker is closed, the ConfirmT blocking time starts and when it ends the function goes to the resting condition because the fault did not reappear. Prot Startup Opening Cmd Closing Cmd TripT InsulT ConfirmT Figure 6.43. Successful fast Reclosing. The second example shown in Figure 6.44 corresponds to an unsuccessful fast reclosing. After the fast reclosing closes the circuit breaker and during the blocking time a new fault appears – the protections start – the Automatic Reclosing function assumes it is the same fault that was not cleared. It then waits the protection operational time and if the fault remains after that time it gives the definitive command of circuit breaker opening. Prot Startup Opening Cmd Closing Cmd TripT InsulT ConfirmT Top Figure 6.44. Unsuccessful fast Reclosing. The next example assumes that a fast and a slow cycle were configured. After the effective opening of the circuit-breaker (following the fast reclosing attempt), the dead time DeadT_I of the second cycle starts and when it ends a new close command is given to the circuit breaker. Again, the ConfirmT blocking time starts to confirm that the fault has been cleared. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-87 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Prot Startup Opening Cmd Closing Cmd TripT InsulT ConfirmT InsulTl Top Figure 6.45. Unsuccessful fast Reclosing followed by second successful reclosing. 6.15.2. CONFIGURATION To activate the Automatic Reclosing function configure the Status parameter to ON. Then choose the maximum number of cycles that can be sequentially executed by the function – configure the Num Shots parameter. The Top Rapid AR parameter indicates the time a fast cycle should wait before giving an opening command to the circuit-breaker. This parameter purpose is to avoid the reclosings caused by very fast pickup and reset of the protection functions, that is, it works as their pickup confirmation. The CB Op Time parameter should be configured considering the times associated with the circuit breaker manoeuvre, both open and close. Therefore, it should be a value higher than the longest manoeuvre time of the circuit breaker. If, after a command from the reclosing function, the circuit breaker does not change state during that time the reclosing function will assume the circuit breaker as malfunctioning. Associated to each one of the five possible cycles of the Automatic Reclosing, there is a set of similar parameters. The Shot n> Operation parameter defines the cycle type, and it is possible to chose fast or slow cycles. The Shot n> Dead Time should be configured with the desired dead time, considering the estimated time to clear the fault. The Shot 1> Reclaim Time parameter concerns the timer that results after the circuit-breaker closing command given by Automatic Reclosing function to confirm if there is or not a fault. If after that time a fault appears it will be considered as new fault. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-88 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Automatismos Religação Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Num de Ciclos: 2 Top Disjuntor: 0.300 Top Rápida: 0.020 Ciclo 1> Operação: RÁPIDA Ciclo 1> T Isolamento: 0.300 Ciclo 1> T Bloqueio: 5.000 Ciclo 2> Operação: LENTA Ciclo 2> T Isolamento: 15.000 Ciclo 2> T Bloqueio: 5.000 Ciclo 3> Operação: LENTA Ciclo 3> T Isolamento: 15.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Ciclo Ciclo Ciclo Ciclo Ciclo Ciclo Ciclo 3> 4> 4> 4> 5> 5> 5> T Bloqueio: 5.000 Operação: LENTA T Isolamento: 15.000 T Bloqueio: 5.000 Operação: LENTA T Isolamento: 15.000 T Bloqueio: 5.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.46. Setting group 1 Menu (Reclosing). Table 6.30. Automatic Reclosing Parameters. Parameter Range Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Num Shots 1..5 2 CB Op Time 0,05..60 s 0,3 Top Rapid AR 0..1 s 0,02 Shot 1> Operation FAST / SLOW Shot 1> Dead Time 0,1..60 s 0,3 Shot 1> Reclaim Time 1..60 s 5 Shot 2> Operation FAST / SLOW Shot 2> Dead Time 0,1..60 s 15 Shot 2> Reclaim Time 1..60 s 5 Shot 3> Operation FAST / SLOW Shot 3> Dead Time 0,1..60 s 15 Shot 3> Reclaim Time 1..60 s 5 Shot 4> Operation FAST / SLOW Shot 4> Dead Time 0,1..60 s 15 Shot 4> Reclaim Time 1..60 s 5 Shot 5> Operation FAST / SLOW Shot 5> Dead Time 0,1..60 s 15 Shot 5> Reclaim Time 1..60 s 5 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Unit Defautl value FAST SLOW SLOW SLOW SLOW 6-89 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.15.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The function start conditions are based on the starts of the several protection functions of Overcurrent Protection and on the circuit breaker state. In any case, the function start depends on the defined blocking conditions. By default only the Manual Mode blocks the Reclosing function. The function reset conditions are based on the reset tripping of all the protection functions. However, the function reset is not blocked as its algorithm is already in execution. Finally the connections to the Circuit Breaker module, both open command and close command, should be referred. Both commands are then interlocked by the blocking conditions defined in that module. Table 6.31. Description of the logical variables of the Automatic Reclosing module. Id Nome Descrição 38656 Reclosing Current Start conditions of the overcurrent protection functions. 38657 Reclosing Current Trip Trip conditions of the overcurrent protection functions. 38658 Recloser C Breaker State Image of circuit breaker state. 38659 Automatic Reclosing Function start condition. 38660 End Automatic Reclosing Function reset condition. 38661 Recloser CB Close Cmd Lock Blocking condition of reclosing command. 38662 Automatic Reclosing Running function indication. 38663 Fast Automatic Reclosing Running fast cycle indication. 38664 Slow Automatic Reclosing Running slow cycle indication. 38665 Confirmation Aut Reclosing Function confirmation time indication 38666 Reclosing Cycle 1 Indication of each of 5 running reclosing cycles. ... ... 38670 Reclosing Cycle 5 38671 Auto Recloser Open CB Cmd Circuit breaker open command by Reclosing 38672 Auto Recloser Close CB Cmd Circuit breaker close command by Reclosing 38673 Auto Recloser Final Trip Definitive trip indication 38674 Auto Recloser MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface 38675 Auto Recloser LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 38676 Auto Recloser Lock Signal Indication of general function blocking. 38677 Auto Recloser Ready Indication of reclosing ready (active, in resting condition and not blocked). 6 Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.31, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-90 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 38658> Estado Disjuntor Religação OR 41775>Estado Disjuntor 38659> Ínicio Religação Automatic AND 38689> Gate 1 Religação OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O3 I3 O1 I3 38656> Corrente Religação OR I1 O1 16392>Protecção MI Terra I2 O2 17157>Disparo TResist Limiar Alt I3 O3 15640>Protecção MI Fases 38660> Fim Religação Automática OR I4 38657> Disparo Corrente Religação OR I1 15644>Disparo Prot MI Fases I1 O1 I3 16396>Disparo Protec MI Terra I2 O2 I4 17156>Sin Disparo Terras Resist I3 38674> Bloqueio Religação MMI OR O1 I2 I4 O1 O2 38676> Bloqueio Religação OR 38675> Bloqueio Religação LAN OR O1 O2 10256>Modo Operação M/A I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 38661> Fecho Disjuntor Religação OR I1 O1 38666> Religação Ciclo 1 OR 38671> Abert Disjuntor Religação OR O1 O1 41731>Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom O2 38662> Religação Automática OR O1 38663> Religação Rápida OR O1 38664> Religação Lenta OR O1 38665> Religação Confirmação OR O1 38667> Religação Ciclo 2 OR O1 38672> Fecho Disjuntor Religação OR O1 38668> Religação Ciclo 3 OR 6 41755>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom O2 O1 38669> Religação Ciclo 4 OR 38673> Disparo Definitivo Religac OR O1 O1 38670> Religação Ciclo 5 OR O1 Figure 6.47. Logical Diagram of Automatic Reclosing. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-91 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.16. SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK The close of a circuit breaker between two parts of the network in load can have serious stability consequences if there are significant differences in the voltages, frequencies and phases between the networks. The Synchronism and Voltage Check module constrains the circuit breaker close commands evaluating if all conditions are acceptable according to the different synchronism types. As the commands can be manual or automatic, the Synchronism Check module has two independent verification elements that operate simultaneously allowing different parameters according to the type of close command. 6.16.1. OPERATION METHOD The Synchronism and Voltage Check is a function that operates only when a close circuit breaker command is given although it continuously characterises the line and the busbar state through the evaluation of the voltage and frequency measurements. The module uses the measurement of one of the line voltages and the measurement of the voltage in the busbar and it is necessary to configure the fourth voltage input of the TPU S420 accordingly. There are no restrictions regarding the assembly of the voltage transformer in the busbar and voltage can be obtained from any single or composed voltage. The allocation of the measurement type in the line is made automatically, it is only necessary to indicate the phase or phases from which to make the busbar measurement. In terms of construction, the voltage transformers can have different transformation ratios as the function allows the compensation in magnitude. The phase compensation is also possible which is especially useful if there is a transformer in the line. The voltage and frequency measurements are continuously compared with configurable threshold values for the characterization of the line and the busbar: Line or live Busbar (energized); Line or dead Busbar (deenergized); Voltage above a maximum value in the Line or Busbar; Frequency below a minimum value in the Line or Busbar; Frequency above a maximum value in the Line or Busbar. Synchronism Check Types The Synchronism Check allows 5 types of verification conditions depending on the presence or absence of voltage in the busbar and in the line: LLLB – Live line and live busbar; LLDB – Live line and dead busbar; DLLB – Dead line and live busbar; TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-92 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions DLDB – Dead line and dead busbar; Release. Table 6.32 summarizes the necessary conditions for each type of synchronism. Table 6.32. Necessary conditions for each type of synchronism. LLLB Line DLLB DLDB U > Ulive U > Ulive U < Umax U < Umax U < Udead U < Udead f > fmin VT line ok VT line ok f > fmin f < fmax Busbar LLDB U > Ulive U Dif < Uop dif Phase Dif < Phase_op dif Without any verification type f < fmax U > Ulive Freq Dif < Freq_op dif U < Umax U < Udead U < Umax U < Udead f > fmin VT busbar ok f > fmin VT busbar ok f < fmax Release f < fmax The LLLB mode needs additional verifications of voltage, frequency and phase differences between the busbar and the line so that the transients are minimized after circuit breaker close. Once all conditions associated with a certain verification type (LLLB, LLDB, DLLB, DLDB) are fulfilled, a configurable time is waited for confirmation of the stability of these conditions, after which the presence of synchronism conditions is signalized to execute close manoeuvres. The release mode, when activated, overrides the remaining synchronism and voltage check types and allows the instantaneous execution of circuit breaker close commands. Manual/Automatic Operation Mode The Synchronism and Voltage Check function has two distinct elements: each with its group of parameters that constitute the Manual and Automatic operation modes. Therefore, it is possible to have different parameters and some types of synchronism check activated for an operation mode and others (or the same) for the other operation mode. In the TPU S420, the Manual mode constrains the close command given by remote, local and external commands; the Automatic mode constrains the close command given by automatic reclosing. A circuit breaker close command indicates a close request that activates the verification for a configurable time – Command Time. If the synchronism conditions are already fulfilled, the close permission is given and the successful command is signalized (Figure 6.48); if the conditions are not fulfilled, and after the end of the timer associated with the request, the close command is not executed and the unsuccessful command is signalized (Figure 6.49). If during the timer associated with the close command request, the synchronism conditions are fulfilled, a configurable confirmation time is initiated to ensure the stability of the conditions; after which if the request is still active, the close permission is given (Figure 6.50). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-93 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Closing request Synch under Validation Synchronism OK Closing Permiss Closing Cmd Figure 6.48. Operation example (synchronism conditions fulfilled). Closing Request Synch under Validation Command time Synchronism OK Closing Permiss Closing Cmd 6 Figure 6.49. Operation example (synchronism conditions not fulfilled). Closing Request Synch under Validation Synchronism OK Confirmation time Closing Permiss Closing Cmd Figure 6.50. Operation example (synchronism conditions present during the command time). The confirmation and command times can be different for the two Manual/Automatic operation modes. 6.16.2. CONFIGURATION The Synchronism and Voltage Check function is activated by changing the Status parameter from OFF to ON. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-94 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions When the Synchronism and Voltage Check function is OFF, all circuit breaker close commands (manual or automatic) are blocked. To allow close commands, the function should be activated and the desired synchronism verification types (or the release mode) should be selected. There are three parameters for the configuration and adjustment of the busbar voltage measurement. The Bus Voltage parameter defines whether the voltage measurement of the busbar is a single or composed voltage and which are the phases involved; for example if the voltage transformer makes the measurement of phases B and C composed voltage, then one should change the Bus Voltage parameter to BC. The magnitude compensation should be made if the transformers have different transformation ratios by changing the U Bus/Line Ratio parameter, for example if the transformation ratio of the busbar transformer is 100:1 and the line transformer is 120:1, then the U Bus/Line Ratio parameter should have the value 1,2. The phases compensation of the busbar transformer should be made by changing the U Bus Angle parameter. For the correct operation of the Synchronism and Voltage Check function, the fourth voltage input of the TPU S420 should have allocated the BUSBAR VOLTAGE meaning. The Udead parameter defines the voltage threshold below which the line or the busbar is assumed dead (without voltage). The line or the busbar is assumed live (with voltage) if the voltage measurement is higher than the value configured in the Ulive parameter. The value in the Umax parameter defines the voltage level above which is no longer possible to close the circuit breaker for synchronism types LLLB, LLDB or DLLB. The values defined in the Fmin and Fmax parameters respectively define the minimum and maximum frequency values acceptable for synchronisms involving elements with voltage (LLLB, LLDB or DLLB). There are two groups of equal parameters referring to the Manual Mode and the Automatic Mode. The synchronism verification types in the Manual Mode are activated by changing from OFF to ON the Manual> LLLB, Manual> LLDB, Manual> DLLB and Manual>DLDB parameters. For the Automatic Mode the parameters are Automatic> LLLB, Automatic> LLDB, Automatic> DLLB and Automatic>DLDB. If it is desired that the circuit breaker close command is not constrained by the operation of the Synchronism and Voltage Check in one of the modes, change the Manual> Release or Automatic> Release parameter according to the corresponding mode. The Release mode, although being a parameter, can be logically activated. Therefore, logical schemes can be built where the Release mode is temporarily activated for certain close commands, without the need to change the parameter. If the Release mode is active by parameter, none of the other synchronism verification types will be operational. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-95 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions In the LLLB type verification, the voltage, frequency and phase differences between the busbar and the line are evaluated. The threshold values are defined in the Manual> Volt Dif, Manual> Freq Dif and Manual> Phase Dif parameters for the Manual mode, and the Automatic> Volt Dif, Automatic> Freq Dif and Automatic> Phase Dif parameters for the Automatic mode. The synchronism verification types are independent between the Manual Mode and the Automatic Mode. Therefore, it is possible to configure the LLLB type in both modes with different parameters. The timer associated with the synchronism confirmation after fulfilment of the necessary conditions is defined for the Manual and Automatic mode in the Manual> Reclaim Time and Automatic> Reclaim Time parameters. The duration of the close command that determines the waiting time for the fulfilment of synchronism conditions is configurable in the Manual> Command Time and Automatic> Command Time parameters respectively for the Manual and Automatic modes. The operational time associated with the Circuit Breaker Supervision should be higher than the Synchronism Check command time. Therefore, it is assured that there will be no manoeuvre malfunction indication while the Synchronism Check, during the command time, waits for the synchronism conditions. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-96 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Automatismos Verificação de Sincronismo Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Tensão Barra: A Razão U Barra/Linha: 1.000 Ângulo U Barra: 0.000 Udead: 0.200 Ulive: 0.800 Umax: 1.100 Fmin: 47.000 Fmax: 53.000 Manual> LLLB: OFF Manual> LLDB: OFF Manual> DLLB: OFF ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Manual> DLDB: OFF Manual> Release: OFF Manual> Dif Tensão: 0.050 Manual> Dif Freq: 0.100 Manual> Dif Fase: 10.000 Manual> Tempo Confirm: 0.100 Manual> Tempo Comando: 1.000 Automático> LLLB: OFF Automático> LLDB: OFF Automático> DLLB: OFF Automático> DLDB: OFF Automático> Release: OFF ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Cenário 1 Automático> Automático> Automático> Automático> Automático> Dif Tensão: 0.050 Dif Freq: 0.100 Dif Fase: 10.000 Tempo Confirm: 0.100 Tempo Comando: 1.000 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.51. Setting group 1 Menu (Synchronism check). Table 6.33. Synchronism and Voltage Check function parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 - 1 Status OFF / ON - OFF U Bus/Line Ratio 0.1..10.00 - 1.00 U Bus Angle -180.0..180.0 º 0.00 Udead 0.05..0.80 pu 0.20 Ulive 0.20..1.20 pu 0.80 Umax 0.50..1.50 pu 1.10 Fmin 47.00..50.00 Hz 47.00 Fmax 50.00..53.00 Hz 53.00 Manual> LLLB OFF / ON - OFF Manual> LLDB OFF / ON - OFF Manual> DLLB OFF / ON - OFF Manual> DLDB OFF / ON - OFF TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-97 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Parameter Range Unit Default value Manual> Release OFF / ON - OFF Manual> Volt Dif 0.01..0.50 pu 0.05 Manual> Freq Dif 0.02..4.00 Hz 0.10 Manual> Phase Dif 2.00..60.00 º 10.00 Manual> Reclaim Time 0.00..60.00 s 0.10 Manual> Command Time 0.00..600.00 s 1.00 Automatic> LLLB OFF / ON - OFF Automatic> LLDB OFF / ON - OFF Automatic> DLLB OFF / ON - OFF Automatic> DLDB OFF / ON - OFF Automatic> Release OFF / ON - OFF Automatic> Volt Dif 0.01..0.50 pu 0.050 Automatic> Freq Dif 0.02..4.00 Hz 0.10 Automatic> Phase Dif 2.00..60.00 º 10.00 Automatic> Reclaim Time 0.00..60.00 s 0.10 Automatic> Command Time 0.00..600.00 s 1.00 6.16.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The Synchronism and Voltage Check function module generates indications discriminated by the voltage state (magnitude and frequency) of the line and the busbar and by the magnitude, phase and frequency difference between both voltages. The existence of synchronism conditions for the several synchronism types (LLLB, LLDB, DLLB and DLDB) is obtained by logic for both the Manual and the Automatic modes. The close command requests (both manual and from reclosing) are received by logic and after being combined with the information of synchronism conditions or command release, the close commands and the successful or unsuccessful manoeuvres are indicated by the function. Table 6.34. Logical variables description of the Synchronism and Voltage Check module. Id Name Description 55552 Line Voltage Dead ... ... Indications referring characteristic. 55554 Line Voltage Max 55555 Line Freq Min 55556 Line Freq Max 55557 Bus Voltage Dead ... ... 55559 Bus Voltage Max 55560 Bus Freq Min 55561 Bus Freq Max to the line voltage Indications referring characteristic. to the line frequency Indications referring characteristic. to the busbar voltage Indications referring to the busbar frequency characteristic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-98 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 55562 Voltage Diff OK Manual Cmd … … Indications referring to voltage, frequency and phase differences – Manual mode. 55564 Phase Diff OK Manual Cmd 55565 Voltage Diff OK Autom Cmd ... ... 55567 Phase Diff OK Autom Cmd 55568 Synchrocheck LLLB ... ... 55571 Voltage Check DLDB 55572 Sync Cond Manual Cmd 55573 Sync Cond Automatic Cmd 55574 Manual Sync in Progress 55575 Autom Sync in Progress 55576 Synchronism Manual Cmd 55577 Synchronism Automatic Cmd 55578 Man Cmd Async Release 55579 Aut Cmd Async Release 55580 Manual Close Override 55581 Automatic Close Override 55582 Manual Close Request 55583 Autom Close Request 55584 Manual Close Release Sinc 55585 Autom Close Release Sinc 55586 Manual Close Cmd Synchro 55587 Autom Close Cmd Synchro 55588 Man Close Cmd Sucessfull 55589 Man Close Cmd Unsucessfull 55590 Aut Close Cmd Sucessfull 55591 Aut Close Cmd Unsucessfull 55592 Unsucess Man Cmd Volt Diff ... ... 55594 Unsucess Man Cmd Phas Diff 55595 Unsucess Aut Cmd Volt Diff ... ... 55597 Unsucess Aut Cmd Phas Diff 55598 Line VT Status Sinchro 55599 Bus VT Status Synchro Indications referring to voltage, frequency and phase differences – Automatic mode. Signals the fulfilment of the conditions for each type of verification. Signals the synchronous conditions for the Manual and Automatic modes. Signals the synchronism verification by the function for the Manual and Automatic modes. Associated with the command time. Signals the synchronous conditions after the confirmation time for the Manual and Automatic modes. Not applicable in the TPU S420. Signals the close permission without any type of verification – Release mode – for Manual and Automatic modes. Request indication of circuit breaker close command for the Manual and Automatic modes. Permission indication ot circuit breaker close after validation of the verification types for the Manual and Automatic modes. Indication of close circuit breaker command for the Manual and Automatic modes. Indication of successful verification and close command for the Manual mode. Indication of successful verification and close command for the Automatic mode. Indications of unsuccessful verification reasons in LLLB mode – Manual mode, after command time. Indications of unsuccessful verification reasons in LLLB mode – Automatic mode, after command time. Indications of the voltage transformers states in the line and in the busbar TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-99 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 55600 Mode LLLB Manual Cmd ... ... Indications of the verification types states – Manual mode. 55603 Mode DLDB Manual Cmd 55604 Mode LLLB Automatic Cmd ... ... 55607 Mode DLDB Automatic Cmd 55608 Synchrocheck MMI Lock Blocking of the function by the local interface. 55609 Synchrocheck LAN Lock Blocking of the function by the remote interface. 55610 Synchrocheck Lock Indication of general function blocking. Indications of the verification types states – Automatic mode. Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.34, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with Setting groups logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-100 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 55562> Dif Tensão OK Cmd Manual 55565> Dif Tensão OK Cmd Autom OR OR O1 O1 O2 O2 O3 O3 55552> Tensão Linha Morta OR O1 55566> Dif Freq OK Cmd Autom 55563> Dif Freq OK Cmd Manual O2 OR OR O3 55553> Tensão Linha Viva OR O1 O1 O2 O2 O3 O3 O1 O2 O3 55567> Dif Fase OK Cmd Autom 55564> Dif Fase OK Cmd Manual 55554> Tensão Max Linha OR OR OR O1 O1 O2 O2 O3 O3 O1 O2 O3 55556> Freq Max Linha 55622> Gate 1 Verif Sincronismo OR O1 O2 O3 55568> Sincroniz LLLB I1 O1 I2 55555> Freq Min Linha AND AND O2 55600> Modo LLLB Cmd Manual I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 I3 O3 I4 O4 O1 I5 I5 O5 O2 I6 O2 I6 O6 O3 I7 O7 I8 O8 OR O1 OR 55623> Gate 2 Verif Sincronismo AND 55604> Modo LLLB Cmd Automatico I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I4 OR 55557> Tensão Barra Morta OR O1 I5 O2 I6 O1 6 O2 O3 55601> Modo LLDB Cmd Manual 55558> Tensão Barra Viva 55624> Gate 3 Verif Sincronismo OR OR O1 O2 55569> Sincroniz LLDB 55572> Cond Sinc Cmd Manual OR I1 AND O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O1 AND I3 O3 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 I5 55559> Tensão Max Barra I4 OR 55625> Gate 4 Verif Sincronismo 55605> Modo LLDB Cmd Automatico AND OR I5 O1 I6 O2 I7 I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 O3 55602> Modo DLLB Cmd Manual 55560> Freq Min Barra OR O1 O2 55561> Freq Max Barra OR O1 O2 I3 O3 O2 I5 O3 I6 O1 O2 I2 O2 55573> Cond Sinc Cmd Automático OR 55627> Gate 6 Verif Sincronismo 55606> Modo DLLB Cmd Automatico I7 I1 O1 I3 I2 O2 I4 O2 I3 55603> Modo DLDB Cmd Manual 55571> Sincroniz DLDB AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 I4 O3 I5 OR 4362>Estado do TT 2 I5 55628> Gate 7 Verif Sincronismo AND 55599> Estado TT Barra Verif Sinc O1 I2 O1 OR O3 I1 AND OR OR I2 O1 O2 AND I2 I4 I1 I1 I3 I1 O1 55598> Estado TT Linha Verif Sinc AND O1 55570> Sincroniz DLLB O3 4360>Estado do TT 1 55626> Gate 5 Verif Sincronismo OR 55607> Modo DLDB Cmd Automatico 55629> Gate 8 Verif Sincronismo AND I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 OR Figure 6.52. Part 1 of the logical diagram of the Synchronism and Voltage Check module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-101 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 55582> Pedido Fecho Manual Sinc 55589> Cmd Fecho Man Mal Sucedida 55586> Cmd Fecho Manual Vrf Sincr OR OR O1 41757>Gate Fecho Disjunt Local I1 O2 41758>Gate Fecho Disjunt Remoto I2 O3 41760>Gate Fecho Disjunt Externo I3 O1 OR 55574> Sinc Manual em Validação O1 OR 55592> Insucesso Cmd Man Dif Tens O4 O1 I4 AND I1 41761>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor O2 55576> Sincronismo Cmd Manual O1 55584> Permiss Fecho Manual Sinc OR I2 OR O1 I1 O2 I2 O1 I3 55588> Cmd Fecho Man Bem Sucedida OR O1 I4 I3 55578> Permiss Cmd Man Não Sinc 55593> Insucesso Cmd Man Dif Freq I4 OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 I3 55580> Perm Fecho Man Sem Verific I4 OR 55594> Insucesso Cmd Man Dif Fase O1 I2 AND I1 O2 O1 I2 I3 55591> Cmd Fecho Aut Mal Sucedida I4 OR 55583> Pedido Fecho Autom Sinc O1 55575> Sinc Autom em Validação OR O2 O3 41759>Gate Fecho Disjunt Autom 55595> Insucesso Cmd Aut Dif Tens O4 I1 55587> Cmd Fecho Autom Vrf Sincro OR O1 O1 OR O1 I2 AND I1 O1 I2 55585> Permiss Fecho Autom Sinc OR OR I3 O1 I1 I4 O2 I2 O1 I3 55596> Insucesso Cmd Aut Dif Freq 55579> Permiss Cmd Aut Não Sinc AND I1 41761>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor O2 55577> Sincronismo Cmd Automático 55590> Cmd Fecho Aut Bem Sucedida OR O1 I4 OR O1 6 O1 I2 O2 I3 55581> Perm Fecho Aut Sem Verific I4 OR 55597> Insucesso Cmd Aut Dif Fase O1 AND I1 I2 O2 O1 I2 I3 I4 55608> Bloqueio Verif Sincron MMI 55610> Bloqueio Verif Sincronismo OR OR O1 I1 O2 I2 O1 I3 55609> Bloqueio Verif Sincron LAN OR O1 O2 Figure 6.53. Part 2 of the logical diagram of the Synchronism and Voltage Check module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-102 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.17. VOLTAGE RESTORATION TPU S420 is able to perform the Load Shedding and Restoration Voltage automatism. The main purpose of this function is the disconnection after a voltage drop and the subsequent line or bay automatic reclosing, after its regularization, being normally a common function to all the substation automation system. The voltage instability results from two main types of causes: lack of voltage caused by faults on the source feeder of the shedded busbar, that may repeat or not, and lack of voltage due to the instability of the electric power global system. 6.17.1. OPERATION METHOD The Voltage Restoration is an automatism normally used in distribution systems and its general goal is the sequential load restoration, after a load shedding by Undervoltage. For this reason it’s a function that can be analysed from the substation automation point of view and not only from the bay or the line associated to the protection. This automatism is closely connected to the Undervoltage Protection, which is executed in the unit. The working principle consists in the surveillance of the Undervoltage Protection and circuit-breaker state in order to take actions of its connection and disconnection, according with the voltage value. This function is made independently in each one of the output substation protections. To make a sequential restoration of all loads it is necessary to properly scale the stable voltage confirmation time of each one of the protections inserted in the restoration cycle, as one can observe on Figure 6.54. T U P S3 0 0 UU I rI r== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV t = 10 s T U P S3 0 0 UU =r= I rI r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV t = 15 s T U P S3 0 0 UU =r= I rI r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV t =20 s T U P S3 0 0 UU I rI r== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV t = 25 s T U P S3 0 0 UU I rI r=== r r= 22 220 0A 220 0 KA K 2 2 VV t = 30 s Figure 6.54. Units configuration example inserted on the Voltage Restoration. The working mechanism of this automatism consists in a states sequence and actions associated to well defined transitions of state. All the transtions are conceived through logical conditions that may be changed on the programmable logic of the function. The algorithm can be visualized on Figure 6.56. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-103 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Function algorithm The first state, called as LOAD SHEDDING, is the state where the function is when it starts. The transition of that state is caused by the trip of the Undervoltage Protection functions. When that happens, the function turns to to RESET state and enables the running load shedding indication. The function confers the circuit-breaker state during that state and immediately before starting the load shedding, in order to know if the circuit-breaker is already open, or if it’s the function which will open it. This is a fundamental check for the restoration phase, once the function will only make the restoration if it was the responsible for the circuit-breaker opening. The function remains in the RESET state while the Undervoltage Protection functions does not reset. If this happens it will turn to CONFIRMATION state. The CONFIRMATION state purpose is to check the voltage stability. In this state the function holds while the configurable time the Voltage Protection functions do not operate. If this happens the function turns again to the RESET state, otherwise, and depending on the configured program it will change of state. If the program only includes load shedding or during the load shedding phase the circuit-breaker is already open, the function will turn to RESTING as the timer runs out, if not, it will turn for the RESTORATION state. In the RESTORATION state the function will change for the next state if the start conditions to start the restoration are gathered, so one expects indefinitely for these conditions. As soon as they are gathered the state will change to DELAY. However, during this state, a new load shedding can occur due to the lack of voltage, so the function returns for the RESET state. The DELAY state appears before the restoration command. It is intended to give a time between gathering the restoration conditions and the effective restoration command. Thus, once the timer runs out, the function will give a closing order of the circuit-breaker and changes to RESTING state. During that state it might happen again a lack of voltage that can cause the operation of the Undervoltage Protection functions, returning to the RESET state. The source of this state results on the need to serially organize different units inserted on the restoration program. So it is possible, for example, to use a remote command in order to activate the restoration of all units simoultaneously. After that, it is enough to correctly scale the delay times of each one of the units in order to get a sequencial restoration, as exemplified on Figure 6.54. Voltage trip Load shed running Restoration running Restoration cmd ConfirmT PassT Figure 6.55. Time Diagram of Voltage Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-104 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions LOAD SHEDDING Voltage ProtectionTrip RESET Voltage Protecion Reset LS+Rest ic ? No Yes CONFIRMATION Voltage ProtectionTrip Timer End RESTORATION Voltage ProtectionTrip Restoration Permission 6 PASSAGE Voltage ProtectionTrip Timer End Figure 6.56. Sequence of the Load Shedding and Voltage Restoration operation. 6.17.2. CONFIGURATION In order to activate the Voltage Restoration function, the Status parameter should be configured with the ON value. Than the Operation state should be configured for the function, that is, if it will be executed only load shedding or load shedding and restoration. The Reclaim Time parameter concerns the time the function takes to consider the normal voltage, after the Undervoltage Protection functions reset. This parameter is intended to decrease the probability of executing a high number of manoeuvres (restoration with new load shedding and subsequent restoration). Note that the operation time of the load shedding function after a voltage lack is defined on the Undervoltage Protection parameters, so this protection function should be enabled. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-105 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The Delay Time indicates the time the function waits after having the conditions to reset and the restoration effective command. This time should be configured taking into consideration all the units inserted on the substation restoration program. Automatismos Deslastre/Reposição de Tensão Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Operação: DESLAST + REPOS T Confirmação: 60.000 T Passagem: 5.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.57. Set 1 Menu (Load Shedding/ Voltage Restoration). Table 6.35. Voltage Restoration parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Operation LOAD SHEDDING / LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION Reclaim Time 1..300 s 60 Delay Time 0..300 s 5 6.17.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The function pickup results from the Undervoltage Protection operation, conditioned to the function blocking conditions. These conditions are, by default, the Manual Operation Mode. The reset is reached with the Undervoltage Protection reset. About the connections to the Circuit-breaker, the load shedding command is connected to the opening command by automatisms in order to open the circuit-breaker. It is also used to block the closing of the remaining automatisms. By its turn, the restoration command is connected to the automatisms closing command, which is locked by the interlockings defined on the Circuitbreaker module. A variable is also available to block only the restoration without afecting the load shedding, and together with the indications the algorithm state, that is, if the load shedding or the restoration are running. Table 6.36. Logical variables description of the Voltage Restoration module. Id Name Description 39424 Voltage Shedding Start conditions of the function 39425 End Voltage Shedding Reset condition of the function TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-106 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 39426 Voltage Shedd CB Status Image of circuit breaker state 39427 Voltage Shedding Status Indication of the running load shedding 39428 Voltage Restoration Status Indication of the running restoration 39429 Volt Restoration Command Restoration command given by the function 39430 Volt Restoration MMI Lock General conditions of the restoration local blocking 39431 Volt Restoration LAN Lock General conditions of restoration remote blocking 39432 Voltage Restoration Lock General conditions of restoration blocking 39433 Voltage Shedding Lock MMI General conditions of function local blocking 39434 Voltage Shedding Lock LAN General conditions of the function remote blocking 39435 Voltage Shedding Lock General conditions of the function blocking Additionally to the variables referred on the Table 6.31, are also available the indications corresponding to the parameters change, logic or descriptions, as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. 39448> Gate 1 Deslastre Tensão OR 21009>Disparo Mínimo U Fases 39433> Bloqueio Deslast Tens MMI OR 39424> Deslastre Tensão AND I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 O3 I3 6 O1 O1 O2 39435> Bloqueio Deslastre Tensão OR 39434> Bloqueio Deslast Tens LAN OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 39425> Fim Deslastre Tensão OR I1 O2 10256>Modo Operação M/A I3 39430> Bloqueio Reposic Tens MMI OR O1 O2 39432> Bloqueio Reposição Tensão OR I1 39431> Bloqueio Reposic Tens LAN OR O1 O2 O1 I2 I4 39426> Estado Disj Deslastre Tens OR 41775>Estado Disjuntor I1 O1 I2 O1 I2 39427> Estado Deslastre Tensão OR I3 39428> Estado Reposição Tensão OR O1 O1 41731>Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom O2 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom O3 39429> Ordem Reposição Tensão OR O1 41755>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom O2 Figure 6.58. Logic diagram of Voltage Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-107 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.18. FREQUENCY RESTORATION TPU S420 can perform the Frequency Shedding and Restoration automatism. This function has as main goal the disconnection after a frequency drop and the subsequent line or bay automatic restoration, after its regularization, being normally a common function to all the power network system. The frequency instability is basically due to differences between the generated and consumed power on the system. So, the frequency value changing gives a clue about serious problems to be quickly solved on the power network exploitation. That solution is the very fast loads shedding in order to achieve the system stability. 6.18.1. OPERATION METHOD The Frequency Restoration is a typical automatism in power systems and its general goal is the load sequential restoration, after a load shedding by underfrequency. That is why this is a function that should to be analysed from the automation system point of view of the entire network and of course of the substation. This automatism is closely connected to the Underfrequency Protection, which is executed on the unit. The working principle consists on the surveillance of the Underfrequency Protection and the circuit-breaker state in order to take disconnection and connection actions, according with the frequency value. This function is independently made in each one of the substation outputs protections. In order to do the load sequential restoration, as shown on the Voltage Restoration, it is necessary to stage the constant frequency confirmation time of each one of the protections inserted on the restoration cycle, as shown on Figure 6.59. T U P S3 T U P S3 T U P S3 UU = I rI r== r r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV UU I rI r== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV UU I rI r== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV 0 0 t = 10 s 0 0 t = 15 s 0 0 t =20 s T U P S3 0 0 UU =r= I rI r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV t = 25 s T U P S3 0 0 UU I rI r==r=r= 22 220 0A 220 0 KA K 2 2 VV t = 30 s Figure 6.59. Units configuration example inserted on the Frequency Restoration. This automatism functioning mechanism is a sequence of states and actions associated to well defined state transitions. All the transitions are conceived through logical conditions that may be TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-108 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions changed on the function programmable logic. The algorithm is described and shown below on Figure 6.61. Function algorithm The first state, called LOAD SHEDDING, is where the function is when it starts. The transition of this state is caused by the Underfrequency Protection functions trip. When this happens the RESET state is enabled and the load shedding indication is running. During this state, and immediately before starting the load shedding, the function enquires the circuit-breaker state, in order to know if it’s already open, or if it’s the function which will do it. This check is essential for the restoration phase, once the function will only do the restoration if it’s the responsible for the circuit-breaker opening. The function remains in the RESET state while the Underfrequency Protection functions does not reset. In case that happen it will change for the CONFIRMATION state. The CONFIRMATION state purpose is to check the frequency stability. In this state the function holds while the configurable time the Frequency Protection functions do not operate. If this happens the function turns again to the RESET state, otherwise, and depending on the configured program it will change of state. If the program only includes load shedding or during the load shedding phase the circuit-breaker is already open, the function will turn to RESTING as the timer runs out, if not, it will turn for the RESTORATION state. In the RESTORATION state the function will change for the next state if the start conditions to start the restoration are gathered, so one expects indefinitely for these conditions. As soon as they are gathered the state will change to DELAY. However, during this state, a new load shedding can occur due to the lack of voltage, so the function returns for the RESET state. The DELAY state appears before the restoration command. It is intended to give a time between gathering the restoration conditions and the effective restoration command. Thus, once the timer runs out, the function will give a closing order of the circuit-breaker and changes to RESTING state. During that state it might happen again a lack of voltage that can cause the operation of the Underfrequency Protection functions, returning to the RESET state. This state result on the need to organize serially different units inserted on the restoration program. So it is possible, for example, to use a remote command in order to activate the restoration of all units simoultaneously. After that, it is enough to correctly scale the delay times of each one of the units in order to get a sequential restoration, as exemplified on Figure 6.59. Frequency trip Load Shed running Restoration running Restoration Cmd ConfirmT PassT Figure 6.60. Frequency Restoration time diagram. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-109 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions LOAD SHEDDING Voltage Protection Trip RESET Voltage Protection Reset LS+Restor ic ? No Yes CONFIRMATION Voltage ProtectionTrip Timer End RESTORATION Voltage ProtectionTrip Restoration Permission 6 PASSAGE Voltage ProtectionTrip TimerEnd Figure 6.61. Operation sequence of the Frequency Shedding and Restoration. 6.18.2. CONFIGURATION In order to activate the Frequency Shedding and Restoration, the Status parameter should be configured with the value ON. Then, it should be configured the Operation state for the function, that is, if it will be executed only the shedding or shedding and restoration. The Reclaim Time parameter concerns the time the function takes to consider the normal frequency, after the Underfrequency Protection functions reset. This parameter is intended to reduce the probability of a manoeuvres number execution (restoration as a new shedding and later restoration). Note that the load shedding function operation time after a frequency lack is defined on the Underfrequency Protection parameters, so this protection function should be enabled. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-110 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The Delay Time indicates the time the function waits after having the conditions to reset and the restoration effective command. This time should be configured taking into consideration all the units inserted on the substation restoration program. Automatismos Deslastre/Reposição de Frequência Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Operação: DESLASTRE + REPOSIÇÃO T Confirmação: 60.000 T Passagem: 5.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.62. Set 1 Menu ( Frequency Shedding / Restoration). Table 6.37. Frequency Restoration parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Operation SHEDDING / SHEDDING + RESTORATION SHEDDING + RESTORATION Reclaim Time 1..3600 s 60 Delay Time 0..300 s 5 6 6.18.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The function start results from the Underfrequency Protection operation, conditioned to the function blocking conditions. These conditions are, by default, the Manual Operation Mode. The reset is reached with the Underfrequency Protection reset. About the connections to the Circuit-breaker, the load shedding command is connected to the opening command by automatisms in order to open the circuit-breaker. It is also used to block the closing of the remaining automatisms. By its turn, the restoration command is connected to the automatisms closing command, which is locked by the interlockings defined on the Circuitbreaker module. A variable is also available to block only the restoration without afecting the load shedding, and together with the indications the algorithm state, that is, if the load shedding or the restoration are running. Table 6.38. Logical variables description of the Frequency Restoration module. Id Name Description 40192 Frequency Shedding Function start condition TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-111 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 40193 End Frequency Shedding Function reset condition 40194 Frequency Shedd CB Status Image of the Circ-breaker state 40195 Frequency Shedding Status Running shedding indication 40196 Frequency Restoration Stat Running restoration indication 40197 Freq Restoration Command Restoration command given by the function 40198 Freq Restoration MMI Lock General conditions of restoration local blocking 40199 Freq Restoration LAN Lock General conditions of the restoration remote blocking 40200 Frequency Restoration Lock General conditions of restoration blocking 40201 Freq Shedding Lock MMI General conditions of the function local blocking 40202 Freq Shedding Lock LAN General conditions of the function remote blocking 40203 Frequency Shedding Lock General conditions of the function blocking Additionally to the variables referred in Table 6.38, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. 40201> Bloqueio Deslast Freq MMI OR 21781>Disparo Prot Frequência 40216> Gate 1 Deslastre Frequênc OR 40192> Deslastre Frequência AND I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 O3 I3 6 O1 O1 O2 40203> Bloqueio Deslastre Freq OR 40202> Bloqueio Deslast Freq LAN OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 40193> Fim Deslastre Frequência OR I1 O2 10256>Modo Operação M/A I3 40198> Bloqueio Reposic Freq MMI OR O1 O2 40200> Bloqueio Reposição Freq OR I1 40199> Bloqueio Reposic Freq LAN OR O1 O1 I2 I4 40194> Estado Disj Deslastre Freq OR 41775>Estado Disjuntor I1 O1 I2 O1 I2 I3 40195> Estado Deslastre Frequênc OR O2 O1 41731>Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom O2 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom O3 40196> Estado Reposição Frequênc OR O1 40197> Ordem Reposição Frequência OR O1 41755>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom O2 Figure 6.63. Logic diagram of the Frequency Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-112 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.19. CENTRALISED VOLTAGE RESTORATION TPU S420 can perform the Shedding and Voltage Restoration automatism, interacting with a busbar unit, the TPU B420. This function shares its goal with the Voltage Restoration described already, however, its implementation is completely different. While on the distributed implementation the automatism is entirely made on the protection, in this version the shedding and restoration control of each one of the output units are made by a managing unit, namely the TPU B420, which is the only one that needs to access the voltage values. This interaction can be performed through the communication by the local area network, particularly through the distributed database. 6.19.1. OPERATION METHOD On this automatism centralised implementation, the TPU S420 does not requires the Undervoltage Protection, once this function is made by the managing unit. The TPU S420 only requires receiving and executing the commands given by the managing unit, and that are obtained through the local area network. This function is independently performed in each one of the substation output protections and obviously on the managing unit, the TPU B420. In order to make a sequential restoration of all the loads, it is necessary to stage properly the confirmation time of the stable voltage in each one of the inserted protection on the restoration cycle, as can be seen on Figure 6.64, which is entirely configured on the managing unit. About the TPU S420 configuration, it basically consists on the function activation. TPU B420 T U P S3 0 0 UU == IrIr=r2=r2 220 0AA 220 K 0 K 22 VV Response T U P S3 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 220 02 0AA K K 2 VV TPU S420 Load shedding and restoration command T U P S3 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 220 02 0AA K K 2 VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU == IrIr== rr2 20 A 220 220 K2 0 KA 2 VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU = IrIr== r= r 22 220 220 0 0 K 2AA 2K VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU = IrIr== r= r 22 220 220 0 0 K 2AA 2K VV TPU S420 Figure 6.64. Voltage Centralised Restoration Functioning. The functioning principle, from the TPU S420 side, is characterized by the reception of shedding and restoration commands and by the decision taking concerning each one. That decision taking implies the analysis of all the conditionings, interlockings and the following response to the managing unit. This response can be the received command confirmation or that command denial, depending the defined interlockings. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-113 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions This automatism working mechanism consists on a state and actions sequence associated to well defined state transitions. All the transitions are conceived through logical conditions that may be changed on the function programmable logic. The algorithm can be observed on the Figure 6.65 that is described next. Function Algorithm The first state, called SHEDDING, is the state where the function is when it picks up. The transition of this state is provoked by the activation of the DeslUCS_Pickup_Shedding variable. The shedding command sent by the managing unit must be connected to this variable, through the distributed database. When this happens the function turns to RESET state and enables the running load shedding indication. Once the load shedding is running, the variable defined as DeslUCS_State_Answer has the result of the answer to be sent to the managing unit. For that purpose, this variable should be sent for the distributed database. This variable has information about the circuit-breaker state in order to check if the load shedding is the responsible for the circuit-breaker opening. The function remains on the RESET state while the managing unit keeps the starting variable enabled. When the managing unit disables this variable the function will turn to RESTORATION state. On the RESTORATION state the function will turn to the next state when the managing unit sends the restoration command. This command is received on the DeslUCS_Startup_Restoration variable and it will have as a result the activation of the answer variable showing the received operation result. So, if the circuit-breaker has meanwhile been closed the answer will show the non-acceptance of the restoration command, on the contrary, the restoration will be initiated. It may happen that, during the RESTORATION state and before receiving the restoration command, the load shedding will be activated once more. In this situation, the function will turn to RESET state. LOAD SHEDDING Load Shedding command RESET Load Shedding reset RESTORATION Load Shedding startup Restoration command Figure 6.65. Operation sequence of Load Shedding and Voltage Centralised Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-114 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.19.2. CONFIGURATION In order to enable the Centralised Voltage Restoration function, the Status parameter should be configured with the value ON. Then it must be configured the Operation parameter for the function, that is, if it will be executed only for the load shedding or for the load shedding and restoration. The remaning parameters associated the load shedding and restoration cycle are fully made on the managing unit, the TPU B420. Automatismos Deslastre/Reposição de Tensão Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Operação: DESLASTRE + REPOSIÇÃO ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.66. Set Menu 1 (Load Shedding/Voltage Restoration). Table 6.39. Centralised Voltage Restoration. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Operation LOAD SHEDDING / LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION 6.19.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The function starting-up results from the logic variable activation of load shedding starting-up, which the command coming from the distributed database must be connected. Besides that information the pickup is still conditioned to the TPU S420 local interlockings, for example the manual operation mode. The restoration is enabled through the activation of the logical variable of restoration starting-up, which, like the load shedding, is conditioned to the protection local interlockings. Another important part on the Voltage Centralised Restoration logic is related to the answer of the managing unit commands, both load shedding and restoration. For each case the circuitbreaker and its interlockings are taken into account. The connections to the Circuit-Breaker module are similar to distributed Voltage Restoration, the load shedding command is connected to the opening command by the automatisms to opening circuit-breaker uses. It is also used to block the remaing automatisms closing. The restoration command is connected by its turn to the automatisms closing command, which is locked by the interlocking defined on the Circuit-breaker module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-115 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions A variable for the restoration blocking is also available without disturbing the load shedding, and a set of indications that show the algorithm state, that is, if the load shedding or the running restoration. Table 6.40. Logical variables description of the Centralised Voltage Restoration module. Id Name Description 39936 Voltage Shedding Startup load shedding condition 39937 Voltage Restoration Restoration reset condition 39938 Voltage Shedd CB Status Circuit-breaker state image 39939 Voltage Response Status Answer condition to the received commands 39940 Voltage Shedding Status Indication of the running load shedding 39941 Voltage Restoration Status Indication of the running restoration 39942 Volt Restoration MMI Lock General conditions of restoration local blocking 39943 Volt Restoration LAN Lock General conditions of restoration remote block 39944 Voltage Restoration Lock General conditions of restoration blocking 39945 Volt Shedding Lock MMI General conditions of the function local blocking 39946 Volt Shedding Lock LAN General conditions of the function remote block 39947 Voltage Shedding Lock General conditions of the function blocking Additionally to the variables referred on the Table 6.40, are also available the indications corresponding to the parameters, logic and descriptions change, as well as gates associated with sets logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-116 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 39945> Bloqueio Deslast Tens MMI OR O1 O2 39936> Deslastre Tensão AND 39946> 39947> Bloqueio Deslast Tens Bloqueio Deslastre LAN Tensão OR OR O1 I1 O1 O2 10256>Modo Operação M/A I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I2 I3 I4 39942> Bloqueio Reposic Tens MMI OR O1 O2 39937> Reposição Tensão AND 39944> Bloqueio Reposição 39943> Tensão Bloqueio Reposic Tens OR LAN I1 O1 OR O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I2 I3 39938> Estado Disj Deslastre Tens OR 41775>Estado Disjuntor 39960> Gate 1 Deslastre Tensão AND 39962> Gate 3 Deslastre Tensão AND 39939> Estado Resposta Tensão OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 I2 O2 I3 I3 O3 I3 39961> Gate 2 Deslastre Tensão OR I3 39963> Gate 4 Deslastre Tensão AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 39940> Estado Deslastre Tensão OR O1 I3 O1 O2 41731>Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom O3 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom O4 6 39941> Estado Reposição Tensão OR O1 O2 41755>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom O3 Figure 6.67. Logic diagram of the Voltage Centralised Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-117 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.20. CENTRALISED FREQUENCY RESTORATION TPU S420 can perform the Load Shedding and Frequency Restoration automatism, interacting with the bus-bar unit, the TPU B420. This function shares the objective with the Frequency Restoration described behind, however, its implementation is different. On the distributed implementation the automatism is fully made on the protection, on this version the shedding control and restoration of each output units is made by a managing unit, namely the TPU B420, which is the only one that needs to have access to voltages. This interaction is based on the communications by the local area network, in particular through the distributed database. 6.20.1. OPERATION METHOD On this automatism centralised implementation, the TPU S420 does not requires the Underfrequency Protection, once this function is made by the managing unit. The TPU S420 only requires receiving and executing the commands given by the managing unit, and that are obtained through the local area network. This function is independently performed in each one of the substation output protections and obviously on the managing unit, the TPU B420. In order to make a sequential restoration of all the loads, it is necessary to stage properly the confirmation time of the stable voltage in each one of the inserted protection on the restoration cycle, as can be seen on Figure 6.64, which is entirely configured on the managing unit. About the TPU S420 configuration, it basically consists on the function activation. TPU B420 T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 220 0 AA K0 2 K 2 VV Response T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 K 0 K 22 VV TPU S420 Load shedding and restoration command T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r2r= 2 220 0AA 220 K 0 K 22 VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU = IrIr== r= r 22 220 220 0 K0 2 KAA 2 VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 K2 0 K 2 VV TPU S420 T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 K2 0 K 2 VV TPU S420 Figure 6.68. Frequency Centralised Restoration Functioning. The functioning principle, from the TPU S420 side, is characterized by the reception of shedding and restoration commands and by the decision taking concerning each one. That decision implies the analysis of all the conditionings, interlockings and the following response to the managing unit. This response can be the received command confirmation or that command denial, depending the defined interlockings. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-118 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions This automatism functioning mechanism consists on a sequence of states and actions associated to well defined state transitions. All the transitions are conceived through logic conditions that may be changed on the function programmable logic. The algorithm can be seen on Figure 6.69, described next. Function algorithm The first state, called SHEDDING, is the state where the function is when it picks up. The transition of this state is provoked by the activation of the DeslUCS_Pickup_Shedding variable. The shedding command sent by the managing unit must be connected to this variable, through the distributed database. When this happens the function turns to RESET state and enables the running load shedding indication. Once the load shedding is running, the variable defined as DeslUCS_State_Answer has the result of the answer to be sent to the managing unit. For that purpose, this variable should be sent for the distributed database. This variable has information about the circuit-breaker state in order to check if the load shedding is the responsible for the circuit-breaker opening. The function remains on the RESET state while the managing unit keeps the starting variable enabled. When the managing unit disables this variable the function will turn to RESTORATION state. On the RESTORATION state the function will turn to the next state when the managing unit sends the restoration command. This command is received on the DeslUCS_Startup_Restoration variable and it will have as a result the activation of the answer variable showing the received operation result. So, if the circuit-breaker has meanwhile been closed the answer will show the non-acceptance of the restoration command, on the contrary, the restoration will be initiated. It may happen that, during the RESTORATION state and before receiving the restoration command, the load shedding will be activated once more. In this situation, the function will turn to RESET state, as can be seen on Figure 6.69. LOAD SHEDDING Load shedding command RESET Load Shedding reset RESTORATION Load Shedding startup Restoration command Figure 6.69. Operation sequence of the Load Shedding and Frequency Centralised Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-119 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.20.2. CONFIGURATION In order to activate the Centralised Frequency Restoration, the Status parameter should be configured with the value ON. Then, the Operation state should be configured for the function, that is, if it will be executed only for the load shedding or the load shedding and restoration. The remaining parameters associated to the load shedding and restoration cycle are fully made on the managing unit, the TPU B420. Automatismos Deslastre/Reposição de Frequência Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF Operação: DESLASTRE + REPOSIÇÃO ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.70. Setting group Menu 1 (Load Shedding/Frequency Restoration). Table 6.41. Centralised Frequency Restoration Parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Operation LOAD SHEDDING / LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION LOAD SHEDDING + RESTORATION 6.20.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The function starting-up results from the logic variable activation of load shedding starting-up, which the command coming from the distributed database must be connected. Besides that information the pickup is still conditioned to the TPU S420 local interlockings, for example the manual operation mode. The restoration is enabled through the activation of the logical variable of restoration starting-up, which, like the load shedding, is conditioned to the protection local interlockings. Another important part on the Centralised Frequency Restoration logic is related to the answer of the managing unit commands, both load shedding and restoration. For each case the circuitbreaker and its interlockings are taken into account. The connections to the Circuit-Breaker module are similar to distributed Frequency Restoration, the load shedding command is connected to the opening command by the automatisms to opening circuit-breaker uses. It is also used to block the remaing automatisms closing. The restoration command is connected by its turn to the automatisms closing command, which is locked by the interlocking defined on the Circuit-breaker module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-120 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions A variable for the restoration blocking is also available without disturbing the load shedding, and a set of indications that show the algorithm state, that is, if the load shedding or the running restoration. Table 6.42. Logic variables description of the Centralised Frequency Restoration. Id Name Description 40704 Frequency Shedding Load shedding pickup condition 40705 Frequency Restoration Restoration reset condition 40706 Frequency Shedd CB Status Circuit-breaker state image 40707 Frequency Response Status Answer condition to the received commands 40708 Frequency Shedding Status Indication of the running load shedding 40709 Frequency Restoration Stat Indication of the running restoration 40710 Freq Restoration MMI Lock General conditions of restoration local blocking 40711 Freq Restoration LAN Lock General conditions of restoration remote blocking 40712 Frequnecy Restoration Lock General conditions of restoration blocking 40713 Freq Shedding Lock MMI General conditions of the function local blocking 40714 Freq Shedding Lock LAN General conditions of the function remote blocking 40715 Frequency Shedding Lock General conditions of the function blocking Additionally to the variables referred on the Table 6.42, are also available the indications corresponding to the parameters change, logic or descriptions, as well as gates associated with sets logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-121 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 40713> Bloqueio Deslast Freq MMI OR O1 O2 40704> Deslastre Frequência AND 40714> 40715> Bloqueio Deslast Freq Bloqueio Deslastre LAN Freq OR OR O1 I1 O1 O2 10256>Modo Operação M/A I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I2 I3 I4 40710> Bloqueio Reposic Freq MMI OR O1 O2 40705> Reposição Frequência AND 40712> Bloqueio Reposição 40711> Freq Bloqueio Reposic Freq OR LAN I1 O1 OR O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I2 I3 40706> Estado Disj Deslastre Freq OR 41775>Estado Disjuntor 40728> Gate 1 Deslastre Frequênc AND 40730> Gate 3 Deslastre Frequênc AND 40707> Estado Resposta Frequência OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 I2 O2 I3 I3 O3 I3 40729> Gate 2 Deslastre Frequênc OR I3 40731> Gate 4 Deslastre Frequênc AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 40708> Estado Deslastre Frequênc OR O1 I3 O1 O2 41731>Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom O3 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom O4 6 40709> Estado Reposição Frequênc OR O1 O2 41755>Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom O3 Figure 6.71. Logic diagram of the Centralised Frequency Restoration. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-122 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.21. BLOCKING BY LOGICAL SELECTIVITY The Blocking by Logical Selectivity, also called protections acceleration, is a simple logic interlocking that allows an additional optimization of the substation protection units coordination. On the TPU S420 it is associated to the Overcurrent Protection. 6.21.1. OPERATION METHOD The Overcurrent Protection on the secondary side of the transformer works as a reserve to the protections located in each one of the substation outputs. In a first analysis, to guarantee the coordination it is necessary that the regulated timers on the transformer unit, for all the Overcurrent stages, have to be higher than the biggest timer suitable on the outputs protections. The operation threshold of the reserve protection should also be bigger to ensure that, in case of its overrange, there isn’t selectivity loss. However, this solution originates a very high fault elimination time by the reserve protection, in particular for bus-bar faults, which are not observed by the outputs protections and are extremely serious. The Logic Selectivity intends to accelerate the unit trip that protects the bus-bar, through the interaction of the downstream protections. For that, the high threshold stage is blocked after receiving the indication of some of the Overcurrent functions pickup of any outputs. This indication can be transmitted by cabling, using the available options for the physical inputs, or local area network, through horizontal communication among units. This way, the operational time of the bus-bar high threshold can be effectively reduced, and it is enough to engage a security margin sufficient to receive the indication. If the fault is on the busbar, only the protection will see it, eliminating it after that short timer (Figure 6.72). If, otherwise, the fault occurs on an output, the corresponding protection will pickup and block immediately the upstream protection trip (Figure 6.73). T U P S3 0 0 UU =r= I rI r=r= 22 220 220 0 K0 2AA K 2 VV T U P S3 0 0 UU I rI r== r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV T U P S3 0 0 UU =r= I rI r=r= 22 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV T U P S3 0 0 UU r2 I rI r== r== 2 220 0AA 220 0 K2 K 2 VV Figure 6.72. Fault elimination on the bus-bar. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-123 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions T U P S3 0 0 UU == IrIr== r2r2 220 0AA 220 K 0 K 22 VV Prot startup T U P S3 0 0 UU == IrIr== rr2 20 A 220 220 K 0 KA 22 VV T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== rr= 2 2 220 220 0 K0 2 KAA 2 VV T U P S3 0 0 UU IrIr== r r= 2 2 220 220 0 AA K0 2 K 2 VV Figure 6.73. Fautl elimination on an output (Logic Selectivity). The Logic Selectivity interlocking can be different for faults between phases and phase-to-earth, or it can even be the same. In this last solution, implemented by default, the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection pickup indication generated by the installed protections on the outputs should be mandatorily directional, because the earth short-circuits on the bus-bar are also observed by these protections. With this feature the independence between several units operation is lost, since they stay associated by an information exchange, either for cable or optical fibre. However, the functioning is always from the security side, once in the absence of this connection the fault continues to be eliminated, in spite of losing selectivity. 6.21.2. CONFIGURATION This function doesn’t have an associated configuration, and only the corresponding digital inputs or the distributed database should be configured if one choses a local area network communication. 6.21.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The effects on the automation logic of Logic Selectivity Blocking can be seen on the logic that corresponds to Earth or Phase Fault Overcurrent Protections, on Chapters 6.2 and 6.3, respectively. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-124 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.22. FAULT LOCATOR The fast location of a short-circuit after it has been cleared is essential because the availability of the line is influenced by the time necessary to locate and repair the fault. The TPU S420 has a module to rapidly and accurately locate a short-circuit just after it has been cleared by the Earth or Phase Fault Overcurrent Protections. The results referring to the most recent fault are available to be sent to SCADA. They can be remotely accessed and without the obligation of local consultation in the unit. 6.22.1. OPERATION METHOD In the TPU S420, the Fault Locator is an independent function from any other protection function, although its operation is triggered, by default by the tripping of the Earth or Phase Fault Overcurrent Protections. The Fault Locator continuously receives the indication of the fault phases sent through the logic by the Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection (A, B and C) and the pickup indication of the Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (N), until the moment of tripping, when it starts the calculations referring to that fault. Table 6.43 shows the pre-selection of loops depending on the fault phases. 6 Table 6.43. Pre-selection of loops depending on the fault phases. Fault Phases Possible fault loops A, B and C A and B B and C C and A A B C N - AB AB BC CA A B C A AB BC AB AB CA B CA CA BC BC C BC CA The final fault loop selected by the Fault Locator is, among those possible for each case, that which presents a calculated impedance value more suitable to the image of a line fault. The impedance calculations are made over a time window of the current and voltage signals determined according to the moment of the tripping signal send, in order to avoid as much as possible the transients on the signals in the moments following the appearance of the shortcircuit or during the circuit breaker opening. The statistical processing of the results ensures high accuracy of the final presented values, with an error less than 2% for sinusoidal signals. The records of the last ten occurred faults are saved in non-volatile memory. Besides the exact date and time of the fault, the recorded results include: Fault loop; Result validity; Distance to the fault (in km, in miles and in percentage); TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-125 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Fault resistance (in Ω secondary); Reactance and resistance (in Ω primary and secondary); Reactance standard deviation (in Ω secondary). The calculation algorithm of Fault Locator makes the necessary compensations for phase-toearth short-circuits, using the ko factor defined in the Line parameters. The Fault Locator calculation is constrained by the Supervision of VTs function: in case of failure of the voltage transformers circuits, the Fault Locator registers the fault with the result invalid. 6.22.2. CONFIGURATION The Status parameter should be configured to ON when one desires to activate the Fault Locator. Localizador Defeitos Parâmetros Parâmetros Estado: ON 6 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.74. Fault Locator Menu. The parameters referring to the line should be accessed in the Line menu. For correct operation of the Fault Locator, it is necessary to configure the data related with the protected line. If these parameters are not correctly configured, the results presented may not be accurate. The Rated Voltage and Rated Power parameters characterize the protected line. They are not necessary for the operation of the Fault Locator. The Impedance Values parameter defines whether the remaining parameters associated to impedances are configured in ohm concerning to the primary or to the secondary of the substation’s primary CT and VT. The relation between primary and secondary values is function of the ratios of CT and VT and automatically calculated by the TPU S420: Z primário nTT Z secundário nTI (6.11) The parameters indicated next are important for the Fault Locator function: the line length in Km or Miles (Length (km) and Length (mile)), the selection of which of the previous parameters TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-126 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions should be considered (Length Unit) and the reactance and impedance angle of the line (Line Reactance and Line Angle). Lastly, the line parameters include the k0 (6.12) compensation factor in the calculation of the direct impedance for short-circuits to earth. This factor is a complex number and is entered in magnitude and angle (ko> Magnitude and ko> Angle). k0 1 Z0 3 Zd (6.12) 1 Linha Parâmetros Parâmetros Tensão Nominal: 60.000 Potência Nominal: 20.000 Valores Impedância: SECUNDARIO Unidade Comprimento: KM Comprimento (km): 100.000 Comprimento (milhas): 62.100 Reactância Linha: 5.000 Ângulo Linha: 80.000 Ko> Amplitude: 1.000 Ko> Ângulo: 0.000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.75. Parameters Menu (Line). Table 6.44. Fault Locator parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Status OFF / ON - ON Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..1 - 1 Rated Voltage 1,00..1000.0 kV 60,0 Rated Power 1,00..1000.0 MVA 20,0 Impedance Values PRIMARY / SECONDARY - SECONDARY Length Unit Km / MILES - Km Length (km) 1,00..1000.0 Km 100,0 Length (mile) 0,65..650,0 Mile 62,1 Line Reactance 0,05 / In..500,0 / In Ohm 5,00 / In Line Angle 30,0..90,0 º 80,0 Ko> Magnitude 0,00..4,00 - 1,00 Ko> Angle -180,0..180,0 º 0,00 Table 6.45. Line parameters. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-127 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.22.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The indications of the fault phases allow the Fault Locator function selecting the correct fault loop to mesure the distance to the fault. The pickup indication shows when those calculations have to be made. Table 6.46. Logic variables description of the Fault Locator module. Id Name Description 33280 Loop A Fault Locator Indication of the fault phases. ... ... 33283 Loop N Fault Locator 33284 Start Fault Locator Start of Fault Locator. 33285 VT Malfunction Fault Lctr Failure indication of the voltage transformer. 33286 Valid Calculation Flt Loc Valid calculation indication. 33287 Invalid Calc Fault Locator Invalid calculation indication. 33284> Arranque Loc Defeitos 33286> Cálculo Válido Loc Def OR 15644>Disparo Prot MI Fases I1 16396>Disparo Protec MI Terra I2 OR O1 O1 I3 33280> Loop A Localiz Defeitos 33287> Cálculo Inválido Loc Def OR 15616>Protec MI Temp Def Fase A I1 15622>Protec MI Temp Inv Fase A I2 15628>Protec MI Universal Fase A I3 15634>Protec MI Amperim Fase A I4 OR O1 33288> Dados Localiz Defeitos 6 OR O1 O1 I5 33281> Loop B Localiz Defeitos 33289> Lógica Localiz Defeitos OR 15617>Protec MI Temp Def Fase B I1 15623>Protec MI Temp Inv Fase B I2 15629>Protec MI Universal Fase B I3 15635>Protec MI Amperim Fase B I4 OR O1 O1 I5 33282> Loop C Localiz Defeitos OR 15618>Protec MI Temp Def Fase C I1 15624>Protec MI Temp Inv Fase C I2 15630>Protec MI Universal Fase C I3 15636>Protec MI Amperim Fase C I4 O1 I5 33283> Loop N Localiz Defeitos 33285> Avaria TT Loc Defeitos OR 16392>Protecção MI Terra I1 33290> Estado Localiz Defeitos OR O1 I1 OR O1 O1 I2 Figure 6.76. Logic diagram of the Fault Locator module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-128 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.23. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE The Circuit Breaker Failure is a function of extreme importance and frequently used, that allows the fast operation of the back-up protections in case of a fault not cleared by the circuit breaker(s) closest to the point where the short-circuit occurred. The TPU S420 provides this function for the line circuit breaker. 6.23.1. OPERATION METHOD A hypothesis normally considered in the project of protections’ coordination is the existence of one or more back-up protections to ensure the clearance of fault in case of failure of the main protection system (relay, circuit-breaker and cabling). The back-up protections should be coordinated in time or otherwise with the main protection to avoid incorrect trippings of the main protection. Additionally or alternatively, the Circuit Breaker Failure allows recognizing failure situations in the protection system that can be effectively due to non-operation of the circuit breaker but also due to other causes, such as the incorrect connection or configuration of the trip circuit or its malfunction. The measure implemented in these situations is equivalent to the operation of a back-up protection function and it corresponds to the clearance of the fault by opening of an upstream circuit breaker, closer to the generation. The Circuit Breaker Failure starts with a tripping order from any protection function. After that order, a timer is initiated to allow the circuit breaker operation, the fault clearance and the consequent reset of all protection functions. If this reset does not occur before the end of the timer, which indicates the impossibility of circuit breaker operation in useful time, the tripping indication of Circuit Breaker Failure is generated. The failure indication is cancelled after the reset of all protection functions. Prot.Startup Prot. Trip CB Failure OpT OpT Figure 6.77. Time diagram of Circuit Breaker Failure operation. The Circuit Breaker Failure indication should be configured in a physical output and that contact should be directly connected to the trip circuit of an upstream circuit breaker or, as an option, to an input of a back-up protection unit. This information can also be transmitted by the local area network, although this option should not be considered, as it will make a critical function depend on the good operation of communications among the units and create an additional delay. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-129 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions In the occurrence of a Circuit Breaker Failure trip, the part of the energy system that is isolated from the rest of the network is higher than the minimum possible, which causes a loss of selectivity, against an operation safety warranty. 6.23.2. CONFIGURATION To activate the Circuit Breaker Failure the CB Fail> Status parameter should be configured as ON. The CB Fail> Top parameter represents the time from the circuit breaker trip order until the indication of Circuit Breaker Failure is sent, if in the meantime the reset of the protection functions does not occur. It should be regulated to a value higher than the time guaranteed for circuit breaker opening plus the longest reset time of the active protection. Automatismos Falha Disjuntor Parâmetros Parâmetros Falha Disj> Estado: OFF Falha Disj> Top: 0.200 Sup Circ Disparo> Estado: OFF Sup Circ Disparo> T Confirm: 0.200 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar 6 Figure 6.78. Setting group 1 Menu (Circuit Breaker Failure). The parameters associated with the Circuit Breaker Failure function appear together with the respective Trip Circuit Supervision function, described in the next section. Table 6.47. Circuit Breaker Failure parameters. Parameter Range Unit Current Set 1..1 1 CB Fail> Status OFF / ON OFF CB Fail> Top 0,05..10 s Default value 0,2 6.23.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The start conditions of the Circuit Breaker Failure, usually protection functions trips, are gathered in a dedicated variable. This variable is subjected to a possible blocking defined by the user before being used by the function. After the configured timer, the function trip is sent, which can also be blocked. The Circuit Breaker Failure logic also includes the logic of the Trip Circuit Supervision function described in the next chapter. This function starts when, with the circuit breaker closed, the variable associated with the supervision input changes to the 0 state. The start is also constrained by the function activation. When the respective timer ends, the corresponding failure indication is generated. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-130 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The logic of this function interacts with the logic of the previous function: the failure indication produces, together with that of the start of the Circuit Breaker Failure, immediate trip of the Circuit Breaker Failure. Table 6.48. Description of the logical variables of the Circuit Breaker Failure module. Id Name Description 41984 CB Failure Start Signal Start conditions of the circuit breaker failure. 41985 CB Failure Protection Start conditions of the circuit breaker failure (subject to blocking). 41986 CB Failure Protection Trip Trip indication of the circuit breaker failure (produced by the function). 41987 CB Fail Protec Trip Signal Circuit breaker failure trip (subject to blocking). 41988 CB Failure Protection Lock Blocking conditions of the circuit breaker failure function. 41989 CB Coil Supervision State of the circuit breaker trip circuit, accessible in an input. 41990 CB Supervis Circuit Status Circuit breaker state to be used by the trip circuit supervision function. 41991 CB Coil Failure Start conditions of the trip circuit supervision function. 41992 CB Coil Supervision Lock Blocking conditions of the trip circuit supervision function. 41993 CB Coil Failure Signal Failure indication of the trip circuit. Additionally to the indications referred in Table 6.48, are also available the variables corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-131 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 41997> Estado Falha Disjuntor OR O1 41984> Sin Arranque Falha Disjunt OR O2 41985> Protecção Falha Disjuntor AND I1 15644>Disparo Prot MI Fases I1 O1 I2 16396>Disparo Protec MI Terra I2 O2 I3 17156>Sin Disparo Terras Resist I3 O3 I4 23308>Disparo Protec Seq Inversa I4 O1 I5 41999> Gate 2 Falha Disjuntor AND 41993> Avaria Supervisão Bobine OR 41998> Gate 1 Falha Disjuntor OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 41986> Disparo Falha Disjuntor OR I3 O1 O1 O2 O2 I3 41988> Bloqueio Falha Disjuntor OR I1 O1 I1 O2 I2 O3 I3 41989> Supervisão Bobine Disjunt OR O2 41807>Gate 2 Disjuntor O1 41994> Dados Falha Disjuntor OR O1 41990> Estado Disjunt Supervisão OR 41987> Sin Disparo Falha Disjunt AND O1 41991> Arranque Avaria Sup Bobine AND I1 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 O1 41995> Lógica Falha Disjuntor OR O1 I4 41992> Bloqueio Supervisão Bobine OR I1 O1 41996> Strings Falha Disjuntor OR 6 O1 O2 Figure 6.79. Logical Diagram of the Circuit Breaker Failure module. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-132 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.24. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION In close interaction with the Circuit Breaker Failure, the TPU S420 implements the Trip Circuit Supervision of the circuit breaker. This function allows better discrimination of malfunction situations and consequent failure of future operations on the circuit breaker. 6.24.1. OPERATION METHOD One of the reasons for the non-operation of the circuit breaker after a trip order is a malfunction in the circuit that connects the protection output contact to the respective coil. The Circuit Breaker Failure function previously described covers this situation. However, it is possible to implement an additional supervision scheme that allows a special and more effective handling of this case. For this purpose, the continuity of the trip circuit should be permanently monitored in a binary input configured for that purpose. In normal situation, the state of that contact should coincide with the state of the circuit breaker, except in the transition periods, when they can be in momentary disagreement. + + _ Opening command Trip circuit supervision 6 _ Circuit breaker Figure 6.80. Trip Circuit Supervision. The Trip Circuit Supervision function starts when, with closed circuit breaker, is detected a discontinuity in the circuit. If, after a configured timer, this situation remains without circuit breaker state change, the existence of malfunction is assumed and an alarm indication is produced. Circuit status CB status Circuit failure Time Time Figure 6.81. Time diagram of the Trip Circuit Supervision operation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-133 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions The malfunction indication is cancelled as soon as the circuit breaker changes to open state or if the supervision input again indicates the circuit continuity. While these conditions remain valid, the success of circuit breaker opening operation is not guaranteed. For that reason, in case of trip circuit malfunction, the TPU S420 constrains the operation of the Circuit Breaker Failure function: if there a trip order from any of the protection functions, the circuit breaker failure is immediately indicated without any associated time delay so that the fault is cleared as soon as possible. 6.24.2. CONFIGURATION To activate the trip circuit supervision function, the Trip Circ Sup> Status parameter should be configured to ON. The Trip Circ Sup> Confirm Time parameter represents the maximum time that the supervision input can be at zero with the circuit breaker closed before the circuit malfunction is indicated. Its value should be enough to allow that the temporary disagreement of states during the circuit breaker normal operations will not trigger this indication. The regulation of these parameters is made together with the Circuit Breaker Failure function. Table 6.49. Trip Circuit Supervision parameters. Parameter Range Unit Current Set 1..1 1 Trip Circ Sup> Status OFF / ON OFF Trip Circ Sup> Confirm Time 0,05..10 s Default value 6 0,2 6.24.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The logic associated with the Trip Circuit Supervision can be consulted in Section 6.22, related to the Circuit Breaker Failure. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-134 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.25. PROTECTIONS TRIP TRANSFER The trip transfer orders is an important function in substations whose topology allows the use of a back-up circuit breaker during periods of unavailability of the circuit breaker associated with the bay. By default, the TPU S420 provides an automation of protection transfer to the line circuit breaker. 6.25.1. OPERATION METHOD Several substations present a topology similar to that indicated in Figure 6.82. This configuration allows doing maintenance of the line circuit breaker without loosing selectivity in the protections operation. B byp BI Sbar Dint Sbyp SisoI 6 Figure 6.82. Substation topology with bypass busbar. In this situation, insulation disconnectors (Sisol) and the busbar disconnector (Sbar) are open to ensure that the maintenance actions are safely performed; at the same time, the bypass disconnector (Sbyp) is closed and connects the equipment directly to the bypass busbar. This busbar is connected to the busbar in service by the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker (Dint). This is the circuit breaker that will open in case of fault in the equipment whose trip orders are transferred. This configuration assumes that from the several equipment that can be connected to the same bypass busbar, only one circuit breaker is unavailable at a time because the bus coupler circuit breaker serves as back-up for all of them. The Protection Trip Transfer only affects the tripping orders of the protection functions. They start to operate directly on bus coupler circuit breaker. The manual opening commands are not transferred so that it is possible to operate the circuit breaker in maintenance. The TPU S420 automatically activates the Protection Trip Transfer if the respective bypass disconnector is closed. The user can also activate this function by means of parameter change in the local or remote interface. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-135 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.25.2. CONFIGURATION The Status parameter should be set to ON when one desires to activate the transfer of protection trip orders to the bus coupler circuit breaker, independently of the state of the bypass disconnector. Automatismos Transferência de Protecções Cenário 1 Cenário 1 Estado: OFF ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.83. Setting group 1 Menu (Protection Trip Transfer). Table 6.50. Protection Trip Transfer parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default Value Current Set 1..4 1 Status OFF / ON OFF 6 6.25.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC In the function state variable is indicated the activation of trip transfer to the bus coupler circuit breaker. It can be activated by the parameter defined by the user or by the close of the respective bypass disconnector. Function blocking is available with user defined conditions. The command of the bus coupler circuit breaker can be configured in an output that is activated in case of trip from a protection function. Table 6.51. Description of the logical variables of the Protection Trip Transfer module. Id Name Description 40960 Protection Transfer Trip Tripping of protection functions. 40961 Protection Transfer Cmd Open command of the bus coupler circuit breaker by protection trip transfer. 40962 Protection Transfer State State of protection trip transfer, activated by the close of the bypass disconnector or by user’s command. 40963 Protection Transfer Lock Blocking conditions of the function. There are also available the indications corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptions as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-136 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 40960> Disparo Transfer Protecção OR 41735>Gate Abert Disjunt Protec 40966> Automat Transfer Protec 40975> Gate 1 Transferência Prot OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 O2 49946>Estado Secc Bypass 40961> Cmd Transfer Protecções 40962> Estado Transfer Protecções AND I1 AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O1 I2 41764>Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom I3 40963> Bloqueio Transfer Protec OR I1 O1 O2 Figure 6.84. Logic diagram of the Protection Trip Transfer module. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-137 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.26. CIRCUIT-BREAKER SUPERVISION The TPU S420 provides supervision functions for the manoeuvres of the line circuit breaker and additional information about its operation and implements a full command and control logic for this apparatus. 6.26.1. OPERATION METHOD Besides the automation functions associated with the circuit breaker already described, the TPU S420 executes the supervision of its manoeuvres. This function allows controlling its operation and indicating different types of failures. The purpose of the manoeuvre supervision is to monitor the correct execution of the commands sent to the circuit breaker. For the correct operation of the manoeuvre supervision function, the inputs corresponding to the circuit breaker state (closed, open or both) should be configured and cabled. The respective commands should also be configured and connected to the opening and closing circuits. When an opening or closing command is sent, a timer starts and after its end, if the expected state change has not occurred, a manoeuvre failure indication is triggered. Different timers can be configured for the opening and closing manoeuvres. The failure indications are cancelled by the change of state of the circuit breaker. Opening Cmd Closing Cmd CB status Opening Man Failure Closing Man Failure Closing Tman Opening Tman Figure 6.85. Time diagram of circuit breaker supervision operation. The supervision of the respective spring is also provided, which state can be configured to be accessible in a binary input. This function assumes that after a trip order there is an acceptable time before the spring reset occurs. If the time when the contact of loose spring remains active exceeds a user configured value, a spring failure indication will be generated. This indication is cancelled as soon as the spring resets. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-138 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Loose spring Spring failure SpringT SpringT Figure 6.86. Time diagram of the circuit breaker spring supervision operation. A counter with the number of opening manoeuvres and another counter only with the number of trips originated by the protection functions are also available. The commands with source external to the protection (for example those originated directly in the apparatus itself) are also considered in the manoeuvres counter. The cut currents by each pole of the circuit breaker are also calculated and the sums of the respective squares are accumulated in non-volatile memory. This information is important to evaluate the use of a specific circuit breaker and the strains it was submitted to, in order to calculate the probability of the circuit breaker operating incorrectly in the next manoeuvres and the need for its maintenance. For this purpose, the TPU S420 generates an alarm indication when the sum of the cut currents by any of the circuit breaker poles reaches a maximum threshold specified in the function data. An alarm indication is also generated when the number of opening manoeuvres equals a specified value. 6.26.2. CONFIGURATION To activate the circuit breaker manoeuvres supervision the CB Sup> Status parameter should be set to ON. The CB Sup> Open Time and CB Sup> Close Time parameters indicate the maximum time allowed for each of these manoeuvres. If after the opening or closing order, the respective timer ends before the correct change of state, the manoeuvre failure will be indicated. These times should be regulated to values higher than the respective opening and closing circuit breaker times also counting with the confirmation time of the binary inputs where the apparatus state is monitored. The Spring Sup> Status parameter allows activating the spring supervision function if set to ON. The Spring Sup> Confirm Time parameter is associated with this function: if the loose spring contact is active for a time higher than the configured, the corresponding failure indication will be generated. This time should consider the maximum guaranteed time for the spring reset after a trip manoeuvre. The circuit breaker maximum acceptable cut currents can be defined by regulating the CB Sup> I² Alarm parameter. As soon as the sum of square currents cut exceeds this limit in any of the poles, the respective alarm indication will be generated. The parameter equivalent for the maximum number of circuit breaker manoeuvres is CB Sup> Trip Count Alarm. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-139 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Parâmetros Parâmetros Sup Sup Sup Sup Sup Sup Sup Disj> Disj> Disj> Disj> Disj> Mola> Mola> Estado: OFF T Abertura: 0.100 T Fecho: 0.100 Alarme Manobras: 1000 Alarme I²: 100.000 Estado: OFF T Confirm: 0.100 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.87. Setting group 1 Menu (Circuit Breaker). Table 6.52. Circuit Breaker Manoeuvres Supervision parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..1 1 CB Sup> Status OFF / ON OFF CB Sup> Open Time 0,05..60 s 0,1 CB Sup> Close Time 0,05..60 s 0,1 CB Sup> Trip Count Alarm 1..25000 CB Sup> I² Alarm 1..99999 Spring Sup> Status OFF / ON Spring Sup> Confirm Time 0,05..60 1000 kA² 100 OFF s 6 0,1 6.26.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The module associated with the circuit breaker includes the logic of open and close commands. Logical variables are available for each of those manoeuvres to which the several open and close orders should be connected. The orders are organized according to their causes: Protections Order: commands originated by protection functions; Automation Order: commands originated by automation functions; Local Command: user command given in the local interface (for example by functional keys); Remote Command: user command given in the remote interface (local area network); External Command: manual command received in a protection input normally given in a button of the apparatus itself. The cause associated with protection functions is only available by default for opening commands. These causes have a direct correspondence with those that are part of the communications protocol with the SCADA system (see Chapter 5.3 - SCADA). The separation of the several orders by the associated cause allows considering different blocking conditions for each of them. These conditions can be specific for a certain cause or general to all manoeuvres of a specific type. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-140 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions For manual commands, it is considered the hypothesis of a bypass to the active blockings in case there are certain user defined conditions. By default, those conditions refer only to the Normal/Emergency Mode. The several opening orders of the circuit breaker, after constrained by the respective blockings, connect to command variables that can be configured in the protection outputs. A command variable is available exclusively associated with protection function trips and another for the remaining causes (opening by control functions or manual command). This option allows considering different circuits of trip and of circuit breaker opening with the respective orders configured in different contacts. It is also available a variable of general command of circuit breaker opening that should be used in case the trip circuit is unique. Regarding the close command, as it cannot be originated by the protection functions, there is only one variable for all possible orders which can be configured in an output contact. Besides the variables directly related with the opening and closing commands, in this module are considered several other gates. On one end, there are several variables available that can be configured as inputs and which correspond to the several indications related with the apparatus that can be monitored, such as the contacts associated with the circuit breaker state and position, the SF6 loss levels, the spring status or the absence of direct voltage in the bay. There are also available inputs associated with commands such as trip orders of the external protection functions, commands executed directly in the circuit breaker or indications of cell’s internal arc to open the circuit breaker. On the other hand, are considered the several indications generated by the TPU S420 associated with the supervision functions of open and close manoeuvres, circuit breaker spring and the sum of the square currents cut. Table 6.53. Description of the logical variables of the Circuit Breaker Supervision module. Id Name Description 41728 C Breaker Local Open Order ... ... Conditions of circuit breaker open order for each of the 5 causes. 41732 CB External Open Order 41733 C Breaker Local Open Gate ... ... 41737 CB External Open Gate 41738 CB Open Command Protection Circuit breaker open command when the cause is associated with the protection functions. 41739 CB Open Command Control Circuit breaker open command when the cause is not associated with the protection functions. 41740 Circ Breaker Open Command Circuit breaker general open command. 41741 CB Local Open Cmd Lock ... ... Blocking conditions of opening for each of the 5 opening causes. 41745 CB Extern Open Cmd Lock Circuit breaker open order associated with each of the causes (considering possible blocking). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-141 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 41746 CB Open Command Lock General conditions of open blocking. 41747 Permission CB Local Open ... ... 41749 Permission CB Extern Open Permission of open commands for each of the causes associated with manual commands, resulting from the absence of the respective blocking or active bypass conditions. 41750 CB Open Local Lock Bypass ... ... 41752 CB Open Extern Lock Bypass 41753 C Breaker Local Close Cmd ... ... 41756 CB External Close Cmd 41757 CB Local Close Gate ... ... 41760 CB External Close Gate 41761 CB Close Command Circuit breaker general close command. 41762 CB Local Close Cmd Lock ... ... Blocking conditions of close for each of the 4 closing causes. 41765 CB Extern Close Cmd Lock 41766 CB Close Command Lock General conditions of close blocking. 41767 Permission CB Local Close ... ... 41769 Permission CB Extern Close Permission of close commands for each of the causes associated with manual commands, resulting from the absence of the respective blocking or active bypass conditions. 41770 CB Close Local Lock Bypass ... ... 41772 CB Close Extern Lock Bypas 41773 Circuit Breaker Opened Input associated with open circuit breaker. 41774 Circuit Breaker Closed Input associated with close circuit breaker. 41775 Circuit Breaker State Circuit breaker state resulting from the two inputs Open Circuit Breaker / Close Circuit Breaker. 41776 Circ Breaker Invalid State Circuit breaker invalid state. 41777 Circuit Breaker Withdrawn Input associated with extracted circuit breaker. 41778 Circuit Breaker Introduced Input associated with inserted circuit breaker. 41779 Circuit Breaker Position Circuit breaker position resulting from the two inputs Extracted/Inserted Circuit Breaker. 41780 C Breaker Invalid Position Circuit breaker invalid position. 41781 C Breaker External Trip Input associated with trip indication external to the protection. 41782 Close Circuit Breaker MMI Input associated with external close order by button. 41783 Open Circuit Breaker MMI Input associated with external open order by button. Bypass conditions to open blockings for the causes associated with manual commands. Conditions of circuit breaker close order for each of the 4 causes. Circuit breaker close order associated with each of the causes (considering possible blocking). Bypass conditions to the close blockings for the causes associated with manual commands. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-142 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 41784 C Breaker Command Lock Input associated with circuit breaker command blocking (local mode level 0, commands only allowed in the circuit breaker itself). 41785 CB SF6 Leakage Level 1 Input associated with 1 level of SF6 loss. 41786 CB SF6 Leakage Level 2 Input associated with 2 41787 C Breaker Loose Spring Input associated with circuit breaker spring status. 41788 C Breaker DC Absence 41789 CB Motor DC Absence Inputs associated with direct voltage absence of supply in the bay. 41790 CB BUS Arcing Fault ... ... 41792 CB CCC Arcing Fault 41793 CB Loose Spring Failure Failure indication of circuit breaker spring. 41794 C Breaker Open Failure Failure indication of open manouevre. 41795 C Breaker Close Failure Failure indication of close manouevre. 41796 C Breaker Command Failure Manoeuvre failure indication. 41797 CB Maximum I² Alarm Indication of maximum sum of square currents cut. 41798 Circuit Breaker L/R Mode ... ... Bay operation command. 41800 Circuit Breaker N/E Mode 41801 CB Alarm Max Operations Indication of manoeuvres. 41815 Circuit Breaker State 11 Undefined state of the circuit breaker (open and close circuit breaker inputs both at 1). 41816 Circuit Breaker State 00 Undefined state of the circuit breaker (open and close circuit breaker inputs both at 0). st nd level of SF6 loss. Inputs associated with internal arcs in the compartments: mobile part, motor or cable end box. modes maximum for circuit number breaker of open Additionally to the variables referred in Table 6.53, are also available the indications corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. The connections to variables external to the logic module associated with the circuit breaker have slight variations depending on the TPU S420’s version. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-143 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 41781> Disparo Externo Disjuntor 41730> Ordem Abert Disjunt Protec OR 41805> Gate 1 Disjuntor OR 41790> Arco Interno CB O2 21781>Disparo Prot Frequência I1 O1 23308>Disparo Protec Seq Inversa I2 O2 10285>Modo Oper Disparo Protec 25605>Sin Disparo Prot Sobrecarg OR O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 O2 15644>Disparo Prot MI Fases I3 I3 16396>Disparo Protec MI Terra I4 I4 17156>Sin Disparo Terras Resist I5 I5 19471>Disparo Máximo U Fases I6 I6 20231>Disparo Max Tensão Terra I7 I7 41791> Arco Interno CPM OR O1 21009>Disparo Mínimo U Fases 41735> Gate Abert Disjunt Protec AND I8 41743> Bloq Cmd Abert Disj Protec I8 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 40960>Disparo Transfer Protecção O4 OR O1 O2 41731> Ordem Abert Disjunt Autom 41792> Arco Interno CCFC OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O1 O2 41785> Fuga SF6 Nível 1 Disjuntor AND 38671>Abert Disjuntor Religação I1 O1 I1 O1 39427>Estado Deslastre Tensão I2 O2 I2 O2 40195>Estado Deslastre Frequênc I3 I3 I4 41744> Bloq Cmd Abert Disj Autom OR 41746> Bloq Cmd Abert Disjuntor OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 I3 O1 I2 O2 41747> Permissão Abert Disj Local I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I1 O1 I1 O1 O4 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR O2 OR O5 O6 O3 I3 41750> Bypass Bloq Abert Local OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41729> Ordem Abert Disjunt Remoto OR I1 41799> Regime M/A Disjuntor O1 41742> Bloq Cmd Abert Disj Remoto OR O2 OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 O3 I3 41798> Regime L/R Disjuntor OR 10254>Modo Operação L/R I1 O2 I3 41741> Bloq Cmd Abert Disj Local O1 10255>Modo Operação M/A AND O1 O1 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41733> Gate Abert Disjunt Local OR OR 41784> Comando Disjuntor Inibido I2 41728> Ordem Abert Disjunt Local OR O1 41786> Fuga SF6 Nível 2 Disjuntor 41736> Gate Abert Disjunt Autom OR 41748> Permissão Abert Disj Remot OR 41751> Bypass Bloq Abert Remota 41734> Gate Abert Disjunt Remoto AND I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 I3 6 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41783> Desligar Disjuntor TPL 41732> Ordem Abert Disjunt Extern OR O3 41745> Bloq Cmd Abert Disj Extern OR O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 OR 41800> Regime N/E Disjuntor I1 O1 I2 O2 OR 10256>Modo Operação N/E I1 O1 I2 O2 41752> Bypass Bloq Abert Externa OR 41749> Permissão Abert Disj Exter 41737> Gate Abert Disjunt Extern AND I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 OR O3 I1 O1 I2 O4 I2 O2 I3 O5 O6 O7 Figure 6.88. Logic diagram of the Circuit-breaker module (opening commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-144 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 41738> Cmd Abert Disjunt Protec 41807> Gate 3 Disjuntor AND OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 I3 41808> Gate 4 Disjuntor AND I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 41740> Cmd Abertura Disjuntor 41811> Gate 7 Disjuntor OR OR I1 O1 I1 41809> Gate 5 Disjuntor I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 O1 I2 AND I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 I3 I5 41814> Gate 10 Disjuntor 41773> Disjuntor Aberto 41812> Gate 8 Disjuntor OR 41775> Estado Disjuntor OR AND AND I1 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 O5 41739> Cmd Abert Disjunt Controlo 41810> Gate 6 Disjuntor I1 O1 O2 O4 I1 O1 I2 O5 I2 O2 I3 O6 41813> Gate 9 Disjuntor OR AND I3 O7 39426>Estado Disj Deslastre Tens O8 40194>Estado Disj Deslastre Freq AND 41774> Disjuntor Fechado OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 41806> Gate 2 Disjuntor O2 OR O3 O4 41815> Estado Disjuntor 11 41776> Estado Indefinido Disjunt AND O5 I1 O1 41990>Estado Disjunt Supervisão I2 O2 49159>Bloq Cmd Abert Secc Isol O3 49171>Bloq Cmd Fecho Secc Isol O4 49927>Blq Cmd Abert Secc Bypass O5 49939>Blq Cmd Fecho Secc Bypass O6 48903>Bloq Cmd Abert Secc Terra O7 48915>Bloq Cmd Fecho Secc Terra O8 38658>Estado Disjuntor Religação OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 41816> Estado Disjuntor 00 AND I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 Figure 6.89. Logic diagram of the Circuit-breaker module (state). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-145 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 41819> Gate 15 Disjuntor 41777> Disjuntor Extraído 41817> Gate 13 Disjuntor 41779> Posição Disjuntor OR AND I1 O1 I1 O1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 OR AND I3 O4 O5 41818> Gate 14 Disjuntor AND 41778> Disjuntor Introduzido I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 O2 I3 OR O3 O4 41820> Gate 16 Disjuntor 41780> Posição Indefinida Disjunt AND O5 OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 41821> Gate 17 Disjuntor AND I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 Figure 6.90. Logic diagram of the Circuit-breaker module (position). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-146 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 41755> Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Autom OR 38672>Fecho Disjuntor Religação I1 O1 39429>Ordem Reposição Tensão I2 O2 40197>Ordem Reposição Frequência I3 41759> Gate Fecho Disjunt Autom I4 41764> Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Autom O1 55583>Pedido Fecho Autom 55587>Cmd Sinc Fecho Autom Vrf Sincro I1 O1 O1 I2 O2 55586>Cmd Fecho Manual Vrf Sincr I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 39427>Estado Deslastre Tensão I3 40195>Estado Deslastre Frequênc I4 40962>Estado Transfer Protecções I5 41753> Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Local I6 I7 41766> Bloq Cmd Fecho Disjuntor I1 41787> Mola Frouxa Disjuntor OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 O1 O4 O2 O5 8705>Arranque Temp Oscilografia I3 41757> Gate Fecho Disjunt Local OR AND O1 41762> Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Local OR OR I1 I1 OR 10246>Modo Exploração Normal 41761> Cmd Fecho Disjuntor AND 41767> Permissão Fecho Disj Local O2 OR 41770> Bypass Bloq Fecho Local O1 I2 O2 O1 I2 O2 41788> Falta CC Disjuntor 55582>Pedido Fecho Manual Sinc OR O1 I3 OR I1 I1 41789> Falta CC Motor OR I3 O1 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41793> Avaria Mola Frouxa Disjunt OR O1 41754> Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Remoto 41758> Gate Fecho Disjunt Remoto OR I1 AND O1 41763> Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Remoto 41768> Permissão Fecho Disj Remot O2 OR I1 41797> Alarme Máximo I² Disjuntor I1 O1 I2 O2 55582>Pedido Fecho Manual Sinc O1 41801> Alarme Max Manobras Disj I3 OR O1 OR I1 O1 41802> Dados Disjuntor OR OR I2 41771> Bypass Bloq Fecho Remota O2 I3 I2 O2 O1 O1 I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41803> Lógica Disjuntor OR O1 41756> Cmd Fecho Disjuntor Extern 41782> Ligar Disjuntor TPL OR 41760> Gate Fecho Disjunt Externo OR O1 O2 41765> Bloq Cmd Fecho Disj Extern AND I1 O1 I2 O2 41769> Permissão Fecho Disj Exter OR I1 O1 I2 O2 55582>Pedido Fecho Manual Sinc 41804> Estado Automat Disjuntor I3 OR OR O1 I2 I1 41772> Bypass Bloq Fecho Externa O2 I1 O1 I2 O2 O1 I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 41796> Avaria Manobra Disjuntor 41794> Avaria Abertura Disjuntor OR OR 41822> Gate 18 Disjuntor 41823> Gate 19 Disjuntor I1 41824> Gate 20 Disjuntor OR OR O1 I1 O1 I1 O2 I2 41795> Avaria Fecho Disjuntor O1 I3 OR O1 OR O1 I1 O1 O2 Figure 6.91. Logic diagram of the Circuit-breaker module (closing commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-147 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 6.27. DISCONNECTOR SUPERVISION Similarly to what is done for the circuit breaker, for the several disconnectors associated with a line bay, the TPU S420 also provides manoeuvre supervision functions. To complete those functions, it is implemented by default a full command logic for each of the disconnectors. 6.27.1. OPERATION METHOD The TPU S420 allows the supervision of a maximum of six disconnectors associated with the line bay. The maximum configuration is that presented in Figure 6.92. Are considered: Earth disconnector (Sterr): makes the connection of the equipment (line) to earth when the respective circuit breaker is disconnected; Isolation disconnector (SIsol): makes the connection between the equipment and the respective circuit breaker; Bypass disconnector (Sbyp): makes the direct connection of the equipment to the bypass busbar; Busbar disconnector (Sbar, Sbar1, Sbar2): makes the connection between the circuit breaker and a specific busbar. 6 B byp B II BI Sbar1 Sbar Sbar2 Sbyp SisoI Sterr Figure 6.92. Line bay configuration. However, other configurations are possible. The bypass disconnector should keep its logical meaning due to the existing interaction with the protection trip transfer. For each disconnector is executed as an option the supervision of the manoeuvres. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-148 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions For the correct operation of the supervision function, the inputs corresponding to the disconnector state (closed, open or both) should be configured and cabled. The respective commands should also be configured and connected to the opening and closing circuits. When an opening or closing command is sent, a timer starts and after its end, if the expected state change has not occurred, a manoeuvre failure indication is triggered. Different timers can be configured for opening and closing manoeuvres. In the situation where the contacts corresponding to open and close disconnector are simultaneously monitored, the timer stops as soon as the transition of one of the two inputs is detected (situation where the apparatus is in undefined state, which indicates it has started the manoeuvre). The failure indications are cancelled by the change of state of the disconnector. Opening Cmd Closing Cmd Disconnector status Opening Man Failure Closing Man Failure Closing Tman Opening Tman 6 Figure 6.93. Time diagram of disconnector supervision operation. The information of the number of opening manoeuvres is provided by the TPU S420. This information is also refreshed if are detected commands on the disconnector external to the protection (for example, directly in the apparatus itself). An alarm indication is generated when the number of opening manual actions is equal to the specified value. 6.27.2. CONFIGURATION To activate the disconnector manoeuvres supervision the Status parameter should be set to ON. The Open Time and Close Time parameters indicate the maximum time allowed for each of these manoeuvres. If after the opening or closing order, the respective timer ends before the correct change of state, the manoeuvre failure will be indicated. These times should be regulated to values higher than the respective opening and closing disconnector times also counting with the confirmation time of the binary inputs where the disconnector state is monitored. The maximum acceptable number of disconnector manoeuvres can be defined by configuring the Trip Count Alarm parameter. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-149 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Supervisão de Aparelhos Seccionador Isolamento Parâmetros Parâmetros Estado: OFF T Abertura: 0.100 T Fecho: 0.100 Alarme Manobras: 1000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 6.94. Setting group 1 Menu (Insulation Disconnector). This group of parameters is identical for each of the disconnectors monitored by the TPU S420. Table 6.54. Disconnectors Manoeuvres Supervision parameters. Parameter Range Unit Default value Current Set 1..1 1 Status OFF / ON OFF Open Time 0,05..60 s 0,1 Close Time 0,05..60 s 0,1 Trip Count Alarm 1..25000 1000 6 6.27.3. AUTOMATION LOGIC The module associated with each disconnector includes the logic of open and close commands. Logical variables are available for each of those manoeuvres to which the several open or close orders should be connected. When comparing with the circuit breaker are only considered two causes by default: Local Command: user command given in the local interface (for example by functional keys); Remote Command: user command given in the remote interface (local area network). Specific blocking conditions are considered for each of the commands causes as well as general blocking conditions to all manoeuvres of a specific type. It is considered the hypothesis of a bypass to the active blockings in case there are certain user defined conditions. By default those conditions refer only to the Normal/Emergency Mode. The several opening orders of the disconnector, after constrained by the respective blockings, connect to command variables that can be configured in the protection outputs. There are two: one for opening and one for closing. Besides the variables directly related with the opening and closing commands, in this module are considered several other gates. These can be variables associated with physical inputs such as the commands associated with the apparatus state or the inhibition of non-local commands; or can be indications generated by the opening and closing manoeuvres supervision. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-150 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Table 6.55. Description of the logical variables of the Insulation Disconnector Supervision module. Id Name Description 49152 Isol Discon Loc Open Cmd 49153 Isol Discon Rem Open Cmd Conditions of disconnector open order for each of the 2 causes. 49154 Isol Discon Loc Open Gate 49155 Isol Discon Rem Open Gate 49156 Isolation Discon Open Cmd Disconnector general open command. 49157 Isol Dis Loc Open Cmd Lock 49158 Isol Dis Rem Open Cmd Lock Blocking conditions of opening for each of the 2 opening causes. 49159 Isol Discon Open Cmd Lock General conditions of open blocking. 49160 Isol Dis Loc Open Permiss 49161 Isol Dis Rem Open Permiss Permission of open commands for each of the causes, resulting from the absence of the respective blocking or active bypass conditions. 49162 Isol Dis Loc Open Lock Byp 49163 Isol Dis Rem Open Lock Byp 49164 Isol Discon Loc Close Cmd 49165 Isol Discon Rem Close Cmd 49166 Isol Discon Loc Close Gate 49167 Isol Discon Rem Close Gate 49168 Isolation Discon Close Cmd Disconnector general close command. 49169 Isol Discon Loc Close Lock 49170 Isol Discon Rem Close Lock Blocking conditions of close for each of the two closing causes. 49171 Isol Discon Close Cmd Lock General conditions of close blocking. 49172 Isol Dis Loc Close Permiss 49173 Isol Dis Rem Close Permiss Permission of close commands for each of the causes, resulting from the absence of the respective blocking or active bypass conditions. 49174 Isol Dis Loc Clos Lock Byp 49175 Isol Dis Rem Clos Lock Byp 49176 Isolation Disconnec Opened Input associated with open disconnector. 49177 Isolation Disconnec Closed Input associated with close disconnector. 49178 Isolation Disconnect State Disconnector state resulting from the two inputs Open Disconnector / Closed Disconnector. 49179 Isol Discon Invalid State Disconnector invalid state. 49180 Isolation Discon Cmd Lock Input associated with disconnector command blocking (local mode level 0, commands only allowed in the disconnector itself) . 49181 Isolat Discon Open Failure Failure indication of open manouevre. 49182 Isolat Disc Close Failure Failure indication of close manouevre. 49183 Isolat Discon Cmd Failure Manouevre failure indication. 49184 Isolation Discon L/R Mode Bay operation modes for disconnector command. 49185 Isolation Discon N/E Mode 49186 Isol Disc Alarm Max Operat Disconnector open order associated with each of the causes (considering possible blocking). Bypass conditions to open blockings for each of the causes. Conditions of disconnector close order for each of the two causes. Disconnector close order associated with each of the causes (considering possible blocking). Bypass conditions to the close blockings for each of the causes. Indication of manouevres. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 maximum number of open 6-151 6 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions Id Name Description 49193 Isolation Discon State 11 Undefined state of the disconnector (open and close disconnector inputs both at 1). 49194 Isolation Discon State 00 Undefined state of the disconnector (open and close disconnector inputs both at 0). Additionally to the variables referred in Table 6.55, are also available the indications corresponding to change of parameters, logic or function descriptives as well as gates associated with scenarios logic and function activation. There are also auxiliary logical variables used in the module internal logic. The previous list given as example for the isolation disconnector is identical to all disconnectors. 6 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-152 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 48896> Cmd Abert Sec Terra Local 48898> Gate Abert Sec Terra Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 48903> Bloq Cmd Abert Secc Terra 48901> Bloq Cmd Abert S Terra Loc OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 48904> Perm Abert SecTerra Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 48900> Cmd Abertura Secc Terra OR I3 I1 48906> Byp Blq Abert SecTerra Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 48897> Cmd Abert Sec Terra Remoto 48899> Gate Abert Sec Terra Remot OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 48928> Regime L/R Seccionad Terra OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 48902> Bloq Cmd Abert S Terra Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 I3 O3 48905> Perm Abert SecTerra Remota OR 48907> Byp Blq Abert SecTerra Rem I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 OR 48924> Comando Secc Terra Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 48929> Regime N/E Seccionad Terra O3 48908> Cmd Fecho Sec Terra Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 48910> Gate Fecho Sec Terra Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O4 O5 48913> Bloq Cmd Fecho S Terra Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 48916> Perm Fecho SecTerra Local 48912> Cmd Fecho Secc Terra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 48918> Byp Blq Fecho SecTerra Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 48911> Gate Fecho Sec Terra Remot 48909> Cmd Fecho Sec Terra Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 48915> Bloq Cmd Fecho Secc Terra OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 48914> Bloq Cmd Fecho S Terra Rem 48917> Perm Fecho SecTerra Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 48919> Byp Blq Fecho SecTerra Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.95. Logical diagram of the Earth Disconnector module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-153 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 48920> Secc Terra Aberto 48936> Gate 3 Seccionador Terra 48934> Gate 1 Seccionador Terra OR 48922> Estado Seccionador Terra OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 AND I1 I3 48935> Gate 2 Seccionador Terra O5 AND 48921> Secc Terra Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 48923> Estado Indef Sec Terra 48937> Estado 11 Secc Terra AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 48938> Estado 00 Secc Terra AND I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 48931> Dados Seccionador Terra OR O1 48925> Avaria Manob Abert S Terra OR 48932> Lógica Seccionador Terra O1 O2 OR 48927> Avaria Manobra Secc Terra OR O1 48933> Estado Autom Secc Terra I1 48926> Avaria Manob Fecho S Terra OR O1 I2 I3 OR O1 O1 O2 48930> Alarme Max Manob Sec Terra OR O1 Figure 6.96. Logical diagram of the Earth Disconnector module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-154 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 49152> Cmd Abert Sec Isol Local 49154> Gate Abert Sec Isol Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49159> Bloq Cmd Abert Secc Isol 49157> Bloq Cmd Abert SecIsol Loc OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 49160> Perm Abert Sec Isol Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 49156> Cmd Abertura Secc Isol OR I3 I1 49162> Byp Blq Abert Sec Isol Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 49153> Cmd Abert Sec Isol Remoto 49155> Gate Abert Sec Isol Remot OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49184> Regime L/R Secc Isolamento OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 49158> Bloq Cmd Abert SecIsol Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 49161> Perm Abert Sec Isol Remota OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O3 49163> Byp Blq Abert Sec Isol Rem I3 OR 49180> Comando Secc Isol Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 49185> Regime N/E Secc Isolamento O3 49164> Cmd Fecho Sec Isol Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 49166> Gate Fecho Sec Isol Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O3 O4 O5 49169> Bloq Cmd Fecho S Isol Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 49172> Perm Fecho Sec Isol Local 49168> Cmd Fecho Secc Isolamento OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 49174> Byp Blq Fecho Sec Isol Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 49167> Gate Fecho Sec Isol Remot 49165> Cmd Fecho Sec Isol Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49171> Bloq Cmd Fecho Secc Isol OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 49170> Bloq Cmd Fecho S Isol Rem 49173> Perm Fecho Sec Isol Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 49175> Byp Blq Fecho Sec Isol Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.97. Logical diagram of the Insulation Disconnector module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-155 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 49176> Secc Isolamento Aberto 49192> Gate 3 Seccionador Isol 49190> Gate 1 Seccionador Isol OR 49178> Estado Secc Isolamento OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 AND I1 I3 49191> Gate 2 Seccionador Isol O5 AND 49177> Secc Isolamento Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 49193> Estado 11 Seccionador Isol 49179> Estado Indef Sec Isolament AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 49194> Estado 00 Seccionador Isol AND 49187> Dados Seccionador Isol OR O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 49188> Lógica Seccionador Isol OR O1 49181> Avaria Manob Abert S Isol OR O1 49189> Estado Autom Sec Isol O2 49183> Avaria Manobra Secc Isol OR OR O1 I1 49182> Avaria Manob Fecho S Isol 49186> Alarme Max Manob Secc Isol OR OR O1 I2 I3 O1 O2 O1 Figure 6.98. Logical diagram of the Insulation Disconnector module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-156 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 49920> Cmd Abert Sec Bypass Local 49922> Gate Abert Sec Bypas Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49927> Blq Cmd Abert Secc Bypass 49925> Blq Cmd Abert SecBypas Loc OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 49928> Perm Abert SecBypas Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 49924> Cmd Abertura Secc Bypass OR I3 I1 49930> Byp Blq Abert SecBypas Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 49921> Cmd Abert Sec Bypas Remoto 49923> Gate Abert Sec Bypas Remot OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49952> Regime L/R Secc Bypass OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 49926> Blq Cmd Abert SecBypas Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 49929> Perm Abert SecBypas Remota OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O3 49931> Byp Blq Abert SecBypas Rem I3 OR 49948> Comando Secc Bypas Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 49953> Regime N/E Secc Bypass O3 49932> Cmd Fecho Sec Bypass Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 49934> Gate Fecho Sec Bypas Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O3 O4 O5 49937> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBypas Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 49940> Perm Fecho SecBypas Local 49936> Cmd Fecho Secc Bypass OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 49942> Byp Blq Fecho SecBypas Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 49935> Gate Fecho Sec Bypas Remot 49933> Cmd Fecho Sec Bypas Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 49939> Blq Cmd Fecho Secc Bypass OR 41806>Gate 2 Disjuntor 49938> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBypas Rem 49941> Perm Fecho SecBypas Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 I3 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 49943> Byp Blq Fecho SecBypas Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.99. Logical diagram of the Bypass Disconnector module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-157 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 49960> Gate 3 Seccionador Bypass 49958> Gate 1 Seccionador Bypass 49944> Secc Bypass Aberto OR 49946> Estado Secc Bypass OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 AND I1 40975>Gate 1 Transferência Prot 49959> Gate 2 Seccionador Bypass O5 AND 49945> Secc Bypass Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 49961> Estado 11 Secc Bypass O4 O5 49947> Estado Indef Sec Bypass AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 49962> Estado 00 Secc Bypass AND I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 49955> Dados Seccionador Bypass 6 OR O1 49956> Lógica Seccionador Bypass 49949> Avaria Manob Abert S Bypas OR OR O1 O1 O2 49951> Avaria Manobra Secc Bypass OR 49957> Estado Autom Sec Bypass OR O1 I1 49950> Avaria Manob Fecho S Bypas OR O1 I2 I3 O1 O2 49954> Alarme Max Manob Sec Bypas OR O1 Figure 6.100. Logical diagram of the Bypass Disconnector module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-158 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 50688> Cmd Abert Sec Barra Local 50690> Gate Abert Sec Barra Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50695> Blq Cmd Abert Secc Barra 50693> Blq Cmd Abert SecBarra Loc OR 50696> Perm Abert SecBarra Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 50692> Cmd Abertura Secc Barra OR O3 I3 I1 50698> Byp Blq Abert SecBarra Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 50689> Cmd Abert Sec Barra Remoto 50691> Gate Abert Sec Barra Remot OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50720> Regime L/R Seccionad Barra OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 50694> Blq Cmd Abert SecBarra Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 50697> Perm Abert SecBarra Remota OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O3 50699> Byp Blq Abert SecBarra Rem I3 OR 50716> Comando Secc Barra Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 50721> Regime N/E Seccionad Barra O3 50700> Cmd Fecho Sec Barra Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 50702> Gate Fecho Sec Barra Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O3 O4 O5 50705> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBarra Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 50708> Perm Fecho SecBarra Local 50704> Cmd Fecho Secc Barra OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 50710> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarra Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 50703> Gate Fecho Sec Barra Remot 50701> Cmd Fecho Sec Barra Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50707> Blq Cmd Fecho Secc Barra OR 50706> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBarra Rem 50709> Perm Fecho SecBarra Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 50711> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarra Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.101. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-159 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 50712> Seccionador Barra Aberto 50728> Gate 3 Seccionador Barra 50726> Gate 1 Seccionador Barra OR 50714> Estado Seccionador Barra OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 AND I1 I3 50727> Gate 2 Seccionador Barra O5 AND 50713> Seccionador Barra Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 50715> Estado Indef Secc Barra 50729> Estado 11 Secc Barra AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 50730> Estado 00 Secc Barra AND I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 50723> Dados Seccionador Barra OR O1 50724> Lógica Seccionador Barra 50717> Avaria Manob Abert S Barra OR O1 OR O2 O1 50719> Avaria Manobra Secc Barra OR I1 50725> Estado Autom Sec Barra OR 50718> Avaria Manob Fecho S Barra OR O1 I2 I3 O1 O1 O2 50722> Alarme Max Manobras SecBar OR O1 Figure 6.102. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-160 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 50944> Cmd Abert SecBar 1 Local 50946> Gate Abert SecBar 1 Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50951> Bloq Cmd Abert Sec Barra 1 50949> Bloq Cmd Abert SecBar1 Loc OR 50952> Perm Abert SecBarr1 Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 50948> Cmd Abertura Secc Barra 1 OR O3 I3 I1 50954> Byp Blq Abert SecBarr1 Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 50945> Cmd Abert SecBar 1 Remoto 50947> Gate Abert SecBar 1 Remot OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50976> Regime L/R Secc Barra 1 OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 50950> Bloq Cmd Abert SecBar1 Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 50953> Perm Abert SecBarr1 Remota OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O3 50955> Byp Blq Abert SecBarr1 Rem I3 OR 50972> Comando SecBar 1 Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 50977> Regime N/E Secc Barra 1 O3 50956> Cmd Fecho SecBar 1 Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 50958> Gate Fecho SecBar 1 Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O3 O4 O5 50961> Bloq Cmd Fecho SecBar1 Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 50964> Perm Fecho SecBarr1 Local 50960> Cmd Fecho Secc Barra 1 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 50966> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarr1 Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 50959> Gate Fecho SecBar 1 Remoto 50957> Cmd Fecho SecBar 1 Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 50963> Bloq Cmd Fecho Sec Barra 1 OR 50962> Bloq Cmd Fecho SecBar1 Rem 50965> Perm Fecho SecBarr1 Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 50967> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarr1 Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.103. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector 1 module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-161 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 50968> Seccionador Barra1 Aberto 50984> Gate 3 Seccionador Barra 1 50982> Gate 1 Seccionador Barra 1 50970> Estado Seccionador Barra1 OR AND I1 O1 I1 O1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 OR AND O4 I3 50983> Gate 2 Seccionador Barra 1 O5 AND 50969> Seccionador Barra1 Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 50985> Estado 11 Secc Barra 1 50971> Estado Indef Secc Barra 1 AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 50986> Estado 00 Secc Barra 1 AND 50979> Dados Seccionador Barra 1 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 O1 50980> Lógica Seccionador Barra 1 OR 50973> Avaria Manob Abert SecBar1 OR O1 O1 O2 50975> Avaria Manobra Sec Barra 1 50981> Estado Autom Secc Barra 1 OR O1 OR I1 50974> Avaria Manob Fecho SecBar1 OR O1 I2 I3 O1 50978> Alarme Max Manob Sec Bar 1 O2 OR O1 Figure 6.104. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector 1 module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-162 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 51200> Cmd Abert SecBar 2 Local 51202> Gate Abert SecBar 2 Local OR I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 51207> Blq Cmd Abert Secc Barra 2 51205> Blq Cmd Abert SecBar 2 Loc OR 51208> Perm Abert SecBarr2 Local OR OR I1 O1 I1 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I2 O2 51204> Cmd Abertura Secc Barra 2 OR O3 I3 I1 51210> Byp Blq Abert SecBarr2 Loc OR I3 I1 O1 I2 O2 51201> Cmd Abert SecBar 2 Remoto 51203> Gate Abert SecBar 2 Remoto OR I2 O1 I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 51232> Regime L/R Secc Barra 2 OR 10288>Modo Operação Gate 1 51206> Blq Cmd Abert SecBar 2 Rem OR I1 O1 O2 I1 O1 I2 I2 O2 I3 51209> Perm Abert SecBarr2 Remota OR I1 O1 I2 O2 O3 51211> Byp Blq Abert SecBarr2 Rem I3 OR 51228> Comando SecBarra 2 Inibido I1 O1 I2 O2 OR O1 I2 O2 51233> Regime N/E Secc Barra 2 O3 51212> Cmd Fecho SecBar 2 Local OR OR 10290>Modo Operação Gate 3 I1 O1 I2 O2 51214> Gate Fecho SecBar 2 Local I2 AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 6 I3 O3 O4 O5 51217> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBar 2 Loc OR I1 O1 I2 O2 51220> Perm Fecho SecBarr2 Local 51216> Cmd Fecho Secc Barra 2 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 OR I1 O1 I3 I2 51222> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarr2 Loc I3 OR I1 O1 I2 O2 51215> Gate Fecho SecBar 2 Remoto 51213> Cmd Fecho SecBar 2 Remoto AND OR I2 O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 I3 51219> Blq Cmd Fecho Secc Barra 2 OR 51218> Blq Cmd Fecho SecBar 2 Rem 51221> Perm Fecho SecBarr2 Remota I1 O1 I2 O2 I1 O1 I1 O1 O3 I2 O2 I2 O2 OR OR I3 I3 51223> Byp Blq Fecho SecBarr2 Rem OR I1 O1 I2 O2 Figure 6.105. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector 2 module (Commands). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-163 Chapter 6 - Protection and Control Functions 51224> Seccionador Barra2 Aberto 51240> Gate 3 Seccionador Barra 2 51238> Gate 1 Seccionador Barra 2 OR 51226> Estado Seccionador Barra 2 OR AND O1 I1 O1 O2 I2 O2 O1 I1 O1 I2 O2 I2 O2 I3 O3 I3 O4 AND I1 I3 51239> Gate 2 Seccionador Barra 2 O5 AND 51225> Seccionador Barra2 Fechado OR I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 51241> Estado 11 Secc Barra 2 51227> Estado Indef Secc Barra 2 AND OR I1 O1 I1 I2 O2 I2 I3 O1 I3 51242> Estado 00 Secc Barra 2 AND I1 O1 I2 O2 6 I3 51235> Dados Seccionador Barra 2 OR O1 51236> Lógica Seccionador Barra 2 51229> Avaria Manob Abert SecBar2 OR O1 OR O2 O1 51231> Avaria Manobra Sec Barra 2 OR 51237> Estado Autom Secc Barra 2 OR O1 I1 51230> Avaria Manob Fecho SecBar2 OR O1 I2 I3 O1 O2 51234> Alarme Max Manob Sec Bar 2 OR O1 Figure 6.106. Logical diagram of the Busbar Disconnector 2 module (State). TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 6-164 7 Chapter 7. OPERATION This chapter describes in detail the operation of all the functions performed by the TPU S420. Chapter 7 - Operation TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.1. MEASURES .............................................................................................................7-3 7.1.1. Read Measures ............................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2. Clear Measures ............................................................................................................7-6 7.1.3. Remote Access ............................................................................................................7-8 7.1.4. Export ..........................................................................................................................7-9 7.2. EVENT LOGGING....................................................................................................7-10 7.2.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.2.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-11 7.2.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-11 7.2.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3. FAULT LOCATOR ...................................................................................................7-14 7.3.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.3.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.3.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-15 7.3.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-16 7.4. LOAD DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................7-17 7.4.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.2. Clear Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-18 7.4.3. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.5. OSCILLOGRAPHY ...................................................................................................7-21 7.5.1. Remote Access ......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.5.2. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.6. HARDWARE INFORMATION .......................................................................................7-25 7.6.1. Read Logs ................................................................................................................. 7-26 7.6.2. Export ....................................................................................................................... 7-27 7.7. OPERATION MODES................................................................................................7-28 7.8. MIMIC ................................................................................................................7-29 7.8.1. Apparatus ................................................................................................................. 7-29 7.8.2. Commands ............................................................................................................... 7-30 7.8.3. Measures................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.8.4. Parameters ................................................................................................................ 7-31 7.9. SCREENSAVER .......................................................................................................7-32 Total of pages of the chapter: 32 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-2 7 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.1. MEASURES The TPU S420 records the values of several analogue measurements, whether directly from its voltage and current inputs whether calculating values derived from those measurements. The values of discrete measurements, such as the counters of apparatus manoeuvres are also logged. The values of the analogue measures presented in the display are updated in real time whenever there is a change of the values higher than the precision thresholds of the TPU S420. In the case of discrete measures the update is made whenever there is a change of its value. The update is made in the same way for all measures presented in the Menus Interface and for all measures configured in the mimic presented in the Supervision and Control Interface. 7.1.1. READ MEASURES The measures obtained from the analogue inputs and their derived are presented in the Display Measures menu. 7 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-3 Chapter 7 - Operation Medida Aceder Medidas Aceder Medidas Corrente IA Corrente IB Corrente IC Corrente Inversa Corrente IN Soma Corrente IN Tensão UA Tensão UB Tensão UC Tensão Inversa Tensão UN Tensão UAB = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 A A A A A A kV kV kV kV kV kV ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Tensão UBC Tensão UCA Frequência Pot Activa Pot Reactiva Factor Potência E Activa Emitida E Reac Emitida E Activa Recebida E Reac REcebida Tensão UN Tensão U4 = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 kV 0.000 kV 0.000 Hz 0.000 kW 0.000 kVAr 1.000 ind 0.0000000 MWh 0.0000000 MVArh 0.0000000 MWh 0.0000000 MVArh 0.000 kV 0.000 kV ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Frequência U4 Dif Tensão Dif Frequência Dif Fase Temperatura Fase A Temperatura Fase B Temperatura Fase C Temperatura Média Temperatura Máxima Medida Genérica 1 Medida Genérica 2 Medida Genérica 3 = = = = = = = = = = = = 0.000 Hz 0.000 kV 0.000 Hz 0.000º 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 % 0.000 0.000 0.000 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Aceder Medidas Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Medida Genérica Pot Máxima Corrente Máxima 7 4 = 0.000 5 = 0.000 6 = 0.000 7 = 0.000 8 = 0.000 = 0.00000 MW 15-07 05:19 = 0.00000 kA 15-07 04:33 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 7.1. Display Measures Menu. The TPU S420 calculates and presents the RMS value of the fundamental harmonic of the following measures, obtained from the analogue inputs: Phase Currents: Current IA, Current IB, Current IC. Neutral Current: Current IN Single Voltages: Voltage UA, Voltage UB, Voltage UC. Fourth Voltage: Voltage U4 or Voltage UN Internally is also calculated the RMS value of the following measures: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-4 Chapter 7 - Operation Negative Current of the phase currents Fundamental Component: Inverse Current. Fundamental harmonic of the sum of the phase currents: Current IN Sum. Negative Voltage of the Voltage Fundamental Component: Inverse Voltage. Fundamental harmonic of the sum of the voltages: Voltage UN Sum. Composed Voltages: Voltage UAB, Voltage UBC, Voltage UCA. Frequency of the Voltage: Frequency. Frequency of the fourth voltage: Frequency U4. Active Power: Real Power. Reactive Power: Reactive Power. The TPU S420 keeps a record of the following analogue measures: Counter of Supplied Active Energy: Fw Energy. Counter of Supplied Reactive Energy: Fw React Energy. Counter of Received Active Energy: Rv Energy. Counter of Received Reactive Energy: Rv React Energy. The TPU S420 also keeps a record of the maximum value of the following measures, including the moment of occurrence: Maximum Active Power: Maximum Power. Maximum Phase Current: Maximum Current. The measures regarding the circuit breaker are presented in the Information menu related to the supervised circuit breaker. Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Informações Informações Manobras Disjuntor = 0 Disparos Disjuntor = 0 I Cort A Disjuntor = 0.000 I Cort B Disjuntor = 0.000 I Cort C Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² A Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² B Disjuntor = 0.000 Soma I² C Disjuntor = 0.000 Estado Alarme Manobras: OFF Estado Alarme I²: OFF Limpar Informações kA kA kA kA² kA² kA² ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.2. Information Menu – Circuit Breaker. The measures presented are: Number of opening manoeuvres executed by the apparatus. Number of trips executed by the apparatus originated from protection functions. RMS value of the current cut per phase relative to the last opening manoeuvre: A, B, C. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-5 7 Chapter 7 - Operation Sum of the square RMS currents cut per phase: A, B, C. The measures regarding the disconnector are presented in the Information menu related to the supervised disconnector. Supervisão de Aparelhos Seccionador Isolamento Informações Informações Manobras Secc Isol = 0 Estado Alarme Manobras: OFF Limpar Informações ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.3. Information Menu – Disconnector. The measures presented are: Number of opening manoeuvres executed by the apparatus. 7.1.2. CLEAR MEASURES In the Menus Interface of the TPU S420 is also possible to clear the value of all measures of cumulative type. This effectively corresponds to changing these measures to zero and from that moment on they will continue increasing as usual. The next figure shows how to clear the cumulative type measures of the TPU S420. 7 Energy Measures and Maximum Values Medida Medida Aceder Medidas Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Contador de Energia Limpar Registo de Potência Limpar Registo de Corrente Parâmetros Valores por Defeito Emitida Reac Emitida Recebida Reac Recebida Máxima Máxima ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.4. Measures Menu. In this menu, when selecting the desired item and executing the corresponding order it is possible to clear the following measures: Counter of Supplied Active Energy. Counter of Supplied Reactive Energy. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-6 Chapter 7 - Operation Counter of Received Active Energy. Counter of Received Reactive Energy. Maximum Active Power. Maximum Phase Current. The time-tag associated with measures of maximum will start logging the moment when the clearing was made until a new update of its value is made. Circuit Breaker Measurements Supervisão de Aparelhos Disjuntor Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Número de Manobras Número de Disparos I Cortada Fase A I Cortada Fase B I Cortada Fase C Soma I² Fase A Soma I² Fase B Soma I² Fase C ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.5. Clear Information Menu – Circuit Breaker. In this menu, when selecting the desired item and executing the corresponding order it is possible to clear the following measures: Number of opening manoeuvres executed by the apparatus; 7 Value of the last current cut by phase; Sum of the square RMS currents cut per phase: A, B, C. Disconnectors Measures Supervisão de Aparelhos Seccionador Isolamento Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Informações Limpar Número de Manobras ¤/¥ mudar página; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.6. Clear Information Menu – Disconnector. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-7 Chapter 7 - Operation In this menu, when selecting the desired item and executing the corresponding order it is possible to clear the following measures: Number of opening manoeuvres executed by the apparatus. The process is similar for clearing measures associated with other disconnectors supervised by the TPU S420. 7.1.3. REMOTE ACCESS All analogue and discrete magnitudes existing in the TPU S420 can be remotely consulted. Using WinReports, choose item Measures related to the unit that you wish to consult and click Receive to see a window with all the measures existing in the TPU S420. 7 Figure 7.7. WinReports – Measures Window. Unlike the local interface, this window is not updated in real time, only presents the values of the measures in the moment when the request was made to the unit. All measures, whose value can be changed in the TPU, can also be changed using WinReports. These measures are identified in the Change column with Yes indication. Double-click on the corresponding lines to see a window where you can enter the desired value for the measure. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-8 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.8. WinReports – Measures Change Window Value 0 can be entered, reproducing the action executed in the Menus Interface, or any other value. This process is more flexible. This record can be monitored in real time. There is an Update button to update the values of each measure. 7.1.4. EXPORT The user can also Print the list of values as well as Export the information to an .xls file of user’s choice. 7 Figure 7.9. File exported from Measures Record TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-9 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.2. EVENT LOGGING 7.2.1. READ LOGS The TPU S420 logs all logical transitions of the gates that constitute the automation logic, as long as they are configured accordingly. In the Menus Interface is possible to read the most recent 256 events by accessing the Event Logging menu. Registo de Eventos Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos Limpar Registo de Eventos Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos Ver Registo de Eventos -2003-03-12 10:38:00,289 Desligação Protecção -2003-03-12 10:38:13,000 Ligação Protecção -2003-03-12 10:38:13,009 Lógica Transform Medida -2003-03-12 10:38:13,012 Lógica Hora Local -2003-03-12 10:38:13,021 Entrada Genérica 16 -2003-03-12 10:38:13,046 Saída Genérica 13 - 0->1 - 0->1 - Alteração 7 - Alteração - 0->1 - 0->1 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 7.10. Visualization of Event Logging. The events are ordered by ascending chronological order. To navigate through the pages use and keys. The TPU S420 stores the events in RAM memory until there is a group of 256 events. When that happens, or when more than 5 minutes pass without the occurrence of a new event, a log containing the events existing in RAM memory that have not been saved yet, is saved in nonvolatile memory. When the content of the event logging in RAM reaches 256, the new events occurring will replace the oldest and are also saved in RAM memory. This log is called Most Recent Logging and it is its content that is presented in the Menus Interface. The description of the event and the transition occurred is configurable through WinProt. The configuration method is described in the WinProt User’s Manual. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-10 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.2.2. CLEAR LOGS To facilitate the consultation of the event logging, for example during commissioning, is possible to clear the content of the event logging presented in the Menus Interface. It is only necessary to select the item Clear Event Logging and give the corresponding order. This way of clearing the event logging does not effectively delete that log; it only prevents it from being displayed in the Menus Interface. When the user orders the clearing, all events that are not yet stored in non-volatile memory will be grouped and stored in a log of smaller size. From this moment on, it is only possible to read those events using WinReports. 7.2.3. REMOTE ACCESS All Event Records stored in the TPU S420, whether the Most Recent Logging or the logs saved in non-volatile memory can be remotely consulted. Using WinReports, choose item Event Logging related to the unit that you wish to read and click Receive to see a window with all the event logs existing in the TPU S420. 7 Figure 7.11. WinReports – List of Events Logs. By choosing one of the logs of the list and clicking again in Receive it will be presented the log content. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-11 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.12. WinReports – Visualisation of the Events Logs. In the remote interface is also possible to clear the most recent log or any of the logs saved in memory. To clear any of the logs, select it and click Clear. A clearing options window will appear. 7 Figure 7.13. WinReports – Clear Load Logs. The user can choose among clearing the diagram only in the unit, only in the WinProt database, or both. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-12 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.2.4. EXPORT As in the Measures log, each Events Log can be displayed, printed or exported to a file at user choice to be later analysed. 7 Figure 7.14. File exported from the Event Log TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-13 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.3. FAULT LOCATOR 7.3.1. READ LOGS The TPU S420 has a fault locator automation. The results of fault location are saved in logs that can be consulted both through the menus and remotely through WinProt. The last 10 faults are logged. Localizador Defeitos Informações Informações Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Defeito Mais Recente 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Localizador Defeitos Informações Defeito 1 Defeito 1 Data Defeito: 2001-01-01 00:00:00,000 Validade: INVÁLIDO Loop Defeito: INDISPONIVEL Distância Defeito = 0.000% Distância Defeito = 0.000 km Distância Defeito = 0.000 milha Resist secundário = 0.000 ohm Resist primário = 0.000 ohm React secundário = 0.000 ohm React primário = 0.000 ohm Resist Defeito = 0.000 ohm Desvio padrão = 0.000 ohm 7 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 7.15. Visualization of Fault Locator. For each fault detected, is logged: Fault Date: Date of fault occurrence. Validity: Indicates whether the log remaining data is valid or not. Fault Loop: Indicates which is the type of fault has occurred. Fault Distance: The distance to the fault is indicated in % of the line length, in km or in miles. Secondary Resist: Resistance value in secondary values. Primary Resist: Resistance value in primary values. Secondary React: Reactance value in secondary values. Primary React: Reactance value in primary values. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-14 Chapter 7 - Operation Fault Resist: Value of the fault resistance. 7.3.2. CLEAR LOGS It is possible to clear the information logged by the Fault Locator. An item in the Fault Locator menu called Clear Information resets default data in the Fault Locator, marking all faults as invalid. 7.3.3. REMOTE ACCESS The information saved by the Fault Locator can be remotely consulted. Using WinReports, choose item Fault Locator related to the unit that you wish to read and click Receive to see a window with the last logged faults. 7 Figure 7.16. WinReports Fault Locator Window. In the remote interface is also possible to clear the logged faults. To do so select the item Fault Locator and click Clear. A clearing options window will appear. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-15 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.17. WinReports – Clear Fault Locator The user can choose among clearing the log only in the unit, only in the WinProt database or both. 7.3.4. EXPORT As in the Measurements log, the Fault Locator log can be displayed, printed or exported to a file at user’s choice to be later analysed. 7 Figure 7.18. File exported from the Fault Locator log. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-16 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.4. LOAD DIAGRAM 7.4.1. READ LOGS The TPU S420 logs the evolution of the Active Power and the Reactive Power. For each measurement are logged the average values of each15 minutes. In the Menus Interface is possible to read these logs, in numerical format, by accessing the Load Diagram menu and choosing the desired measurement. Diagrama de Carga Diagrama de Carga Diagrama P Diagrama Q Limpar Diagramas de Carga Parâmetros Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mudar página; E aceitar; C cancelar Diagrama de Carga Diagrama P Diagrama P 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 2003-03-12 10:30 10:45 11:00 11:15 11:30 11:45 12:00 12:15 12:30 12:45 13:00 13:15 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.000 P=-0.001 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 7 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 7.19. Visualization of the Load Diagram in the Local Interface. The logged values are ordered by ascending chronological order. To navigate through the pages use the and keys. The load diagrams are stored by the TPU S420 in RAM memory until the 24:00 of each day are reached. When that happens, a log with the values of the last 24 hours, or those accumulated since the unit’s power on if it has not been operating for 24 hours, is saved in non-volatile memory. The new values saved replace those occurred 24 hours earlier and are also stored in RAM memory. This log is called Most Recent Load Diagram and it is its content that is presented in the Menus Interface. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-17 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.4.2. CLEAR LOGS To facilitate the consultation of the load diagram, for example during commissioning, is possible to clear the content of the load diagrams presented in the Menus Interface. It is only necessary to select in the Load Diagram menu the item Clear Load Diagram and give the corresponding order. This way of clearing the load diagram does not effectively delete that log; it only prevents it from being displayed in the Menus Interface. When the user orders the clearing, all logs that are not yet stored in non-volatile memory will be grouped and stored in a log of smaller size. From this moment on, it is only possible to read those events using WinReports. 7.4.3. REMOTE ACCESS All Load Diagrams stored in the TPU S420, whether the Most Recent Diagram or the diagrams saved in non-volatile memory can be remotely consulted. Using WinReports, choose item Load Diagrams related to the unit that you wish to read and click Receive to see a window with all the load diagrams existing in the TPU S420. 7 Figure 7.20. WinReports – Load Diagrams List. Choose one of the diagrams from the list and click Receive again to see the content of the log. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-18 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.21. WinReports – Visualization of the Load Diagrams. Besides the diagram itself, additional information is presented about the evolution of the measurements. This information is the minimum, average and maximum value for each of the logged measurements. In the remote interface is also possible to clear the most recent diagram or any of the diagrams saved in memory. To clear any of the diagrams, select it and click Clear. A clearing options window will appear. Figure 7.22. WinReports – Clear Load Diagrams. The user can choose among clearing the diagram only in the unit, only in the WinProt database, or both. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-19 7 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.4.4. EXPORT As in other logs, each load diagram can be displayed, printed or exported to a file at user choice to be later analysed. Figure 7.23. File exported from the Load Diagram log 7 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-20 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.5. OSCILLOGRAPHY The oscillographies are logged by the TPU S420 whenever occurs any of the events configured to cause the recording of an oscillography. This configuration is made through the automation logic, as described in Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic. From the moment when any of the configured events occurs, the TPU S420 collects and treats the sampled values for all analogue measures and for the configured digital channels and also creates the oscillography logs to save in non-volatile memory. Samples are collected corresponding to the event occurrence and also the necessary samples to ensure that the log includes a pre-occurrence and a post-occurrence time. The full group of samples constituting an oscillography log is temporarily saved in RAM memory. As soon as it is possible to make the recording in non-volatile memory the oscillographies accumulated in RAM memory will be definitely saved. There is always a RAM copy of the last oscillography generated since the TPU S420 was powered on. By default, oscillographies are generated by the following events: Start of the Protection Functions Circuit Breaker Close Orders It is not possible to visualize the oscillographies in the Local Interface due to the graphical display limitations. 7.5.1. REMOTE ACCESS 7 All Oscillographies stored in the TPU S420, whether the Most Recent Oscillography or the oscillographies saved in non-volatile memory can be remotely consulted. Using WinReports, choose item Oscillographies related to the unit that you wish to read and click Receive to see a window with all the oscillographies existing in the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-21 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.24. WinReports – Oscillographies List. Choose one of the oscillographies from the list and click Receive again to see the oscillography content. 7 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-22 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.25. WinReports – Visualization of Oscillographies. Besides the oscillography itself, the sample values and moment of occurrence are presented for each of the measures logged. In the remote interface is also possible to clear the Most Recent Oscillography or any of the oscillographies saved in memory. To clear any of the oscillographies, select it and click Clear. A clearing options window will appear. Figure 7.26. WinReports – Clear Oscillographies. The user can choose among clearing the log only in the unit, only in the WinProt database, or both. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-23 7 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.5.2. EXPORT The user also has available normal operations for the logs such as printing and exporting. However, this export is different from the export of the other logs. Its format follows the standard COMTRADE - IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange in order to allow its visualization in other applications based on this format (for example test sets). For that purpose are created two files associated with the COMTRADE format, namely the configuration file - name.cfg, which contains the general configuration of all the represented channels (scale factors, transformation ratio, frequency, etc) and the data file - name.dat, which contains the value of the samples of each of the channels defined in the previous file. 7 Figure 7.27. Files exported in COMTRADE format from the Oscillography log TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-24 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.6. HARDWARE INFORMATION Lastly the relay can provide the log with the Hardware Information. Similarly to the Measure log, both in terms of storing and in terms of visualization, this logging contains a wide and specific group of intrinsic information of the protection internal state, namely: Number of Resets and date of the last reset; Communications status among the several microcontrollers; Number of communications errors; Communication status; State of inputs and outputs; Status of resources; Current exception frame; Exception frames, with detailed information for each frame. 7 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-25 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.6.1. READ LOGS This information is represented in a graphical interface for easier interpretation. However, it is indispensable the knowledge of the internal operation of the protection to analyse all the information. Thus, this log is a system logging destined to specialized technicians who desire to know the internal state of the various protection components. 7 Figure 7.28. Hardware Information log interface This log, as the remaining ones, can be visualized, printed or exported to a text file at the user choice. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-26 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.6.2. EXPORT 7 Figure 7.29. File exported from the Hardware Information log TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-27 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.7. OPERATION MODES The TPU S420 has several Operation Modes that constrain the operation of its protection and automation functions. The several operation modes available in the TPU S420 can be changed through the menus in the local interface or through the WinSettings module of the WinProt. Some of the modes can also be changed through the digital inputs. In the local interface there are two mode keys with associated LEDs that can be configured with any of the existing modes. By pressing the key the mode associated with it changes between its two possible states. If the F1 key is associated with the local remote mode the LEDs have the following appearance: F1 Key: associated with the change of the operation mode from Local Mode to Remote Mode. LOCAL LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE Figure 7.30. Possible aspect of the Local Mode/Remote Mode LEDs. Another example is presented with the F2 key and the Manual/Automatic mode F2 Key: associated with the change of the operation mode from Manual Mode to Automatic Mode. MANUAL MANUAL AUTO AUTO 7 Figure 7.31. Possible aspect of the Manual Mode/Automatic Mode LEDs. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-28 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.8. MIMIC The TPU S420 allows visualizing the state of the apparatus associated with it as well as the state of internal logical variables or the current value of parameters of the unit’s function. Regarding the apparatus it is also possible to send manoeuvre orders directly from the mimic. To perform these functions it is necessary that a mimic is configured in the unit with all the necessary information. It is also necessary that the digital inputs and outputs associated with the apparatus to monitor and/or command are configured. The configuration of all the necessary parameters is described in the Configuration chapter. After sending all necessary configurations to the TPU S420 the mimic represented in the Supervision and Control Interface may look like this. 7 Figure 7.32. Example Mimic. 7.8.1. APPARATUS The apparatus are represented by bitmaps showing their states. There is a maximum of 6 bitmaps defined per apparatus that are presented according to the logical state of the automation logic gates associated with the bitmaps. The monitoring of apparatus is made through digital inputs which logical state constrains the logical value of the gates associated with the state of the apparatus. The mimic update is made in real time whenever occurs a transition of its state. In the case of circuit breakers the information usually presented is state and position. Figure 7.33. Circuit-breaker state aspects: Open/Closed/Undefined. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-29 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.34. Circuit breaker position aspects: Extracted/Inserted/Undefined Position. Regarding the disconnectors, normally is only visualized the state, so only three bitmaps are necessary to represent all possible states. Figure 7.35. Disconnector state aspects: Open/Closed/Undefined. To send manoeuvre orders to different apparatus the procedure is as follows: Using key, select the apparatus one desires to command. To facilitate the apparatus identification, in the bottom line will be presented a descriptive of the selected apparatus. To send a Close Order press To send an Open Order press key; key. 7.8.2. COMMANDS The objects of command type are represented through two bitmaps, each one associated with the states of a logical gate. Besides, it is possible to constrain the appearance of the object in the display by the logical state of any other automation logic gate. According to the logical state of the state gate and the activation gate, it is possible to have three possible states: invisible command, command associated with logical state 1 and command associated with logical state 0. Figure 7.36. Command state aspects: State 0 / State 1. To each command is associated the send of a logical indication to an automation logic gate. To execute the order associated with the command the procedure is as follows: Using key select the command over which you desire to give an order. To facilitate the command identification, in the bottom line will be presented a description of the selected command; To send indication press key or key. 7.8.3. MEASURES The analogue measures and discrete measures presented in the mimic are updated in real time with the values of the configured measures. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-30 7 Chapter 7 - Operation Figure 7.37. Measure Aspect. A change of the presented value will occur whenever the change of the measure value exceeds the precision threshold of the relay for that measure. 7.8.4. PARAMETERS The use of Parameter type objects has two different aspects: the visualization of parameters and the change of parameters. When the object is configured to visualization, its behaviour is similar to the measure type objects. The existing value of the configured parameter is presented and its update is made whenever occurs a change of parameters of the corresponding function. Figure 7.38. Parameter state aspects in Visualize mode. In case of use for sending parameters the operation is identical to that of apparatus and commands. Figure 7.39. Parameter state aspect in Change mode. To execute the parameter sending order it is necessary to take the following steps: Using key select the parameter one desires to send. To facilitate the parameter identification, in the bottom line will be presented a descriptive of each of the selected objects; To send the parameter press key or key. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-31 7 Chapter 7 - Operation 7.9. SCREENSAVER With the purpose to reduce the wearing out of the lamp that lights the LCD and reduce the equipment total consumption, the TPU S420 is equipped with a screensaver function. The function of this screensaver is to automatically turn off the lamp that lights the display if for approximately 5 minutes no key has been pressed. By pressing any key the screensaver mode will be abandoned and the lamp is back on. When the TPU S420 moves to the screensaver mode, it changes automatically to the Supervision and Control Interface and overrides all permissions associated with the passwords entered in the meantime. 7 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0., December 2011 7-32 8 Chapter 8. COMMISSIONING This chapter describes the necessary procedures to carry out the TPU S420 commissioning. The correct procedure to start the TPU S420 is also described. Chapter 8 - Commissioning TABLE OF CONTENTS 8.1. INITIAL CHECKS.......................................................................................................8-3 8.2. ANALOGUE INPUTS...................................................................................................8-7 8.2.1. Connections.................................................................................................................8-7 8.2.2. Measures Value ...........................................................................................................8-7 8.3. DIGITAL INPUTS.......................................................................................................8-9 8.4. DIGITAL OUTPUTS .................................................................................................8-11 8.5. ALARMS PAGE ......................................................................................................8-12 8.6. INTERFACE WITH THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK.................................................................8-13 8.7. PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................................8-15 8.8. PUT INTO SERVICE..................................................................................................8-16 Total of pages of the chapter: 17 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-2 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.1. INITIAL CHECKS To perform the TPU S420 commissioning it is necessary to have a deep knowledge about the unit’s operation and configuration through the careful reading of this manual as well as of the other documentation concerning this equipment. It is important to call the attention for more important aspects concerning the equipment and people security. Before accessing the interior of the TPU S420 is necessary to remove its back lid and as such all connectors must be disconnected to avoid the risk of electrical shock. This warning is also applicable for the removal of the front panel (user interface). Even when the unit is disconnected, it is possible to have dangerous voltage levels in the power supply circuits. After the supply is disconnected, it is advisable to wait at least 60 seconds for the energy storage capacitors to be discharged! The human body easily acquires electrostatic charges that may easily damage the electronic boards! Precaution should be taken when handling the boards. Avoid touching directly in the components or connectors! It is advisable the use of an anti-static bracelet. Otherwise, first touch a surface connected to earth to clear eventual static charges. Inputs/outputs expansion boards must be correctly configured to work properly. The configuration process is described in Chapter 4 – Configuration. Wrong configuration, besides causing malfunction in the TPU S420, may cause permanent damage in the expansion boards and/or processing board. It is necessary to assure the correct polarity of digital inputs, otherwise they will not work. Also check that the option of operating voltage and operation set is according to the control voltage used. The voltages in the connections of the TPU S420 are high enough to present a high risk of electrical shock. As such, precaution should be taken to avoid situations that may endanger the physical health of the technical personnel. Technical personnel should be adequately trained and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. The following should be considered: A solid earth protection connection should be the first to be made, before any other connections are made; Any connection may carry dangerous voltages; Even when the unit’s supply is off, it is possible to have dangerous voltages present. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-3 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning According to security regulations a suitable device should be installed to turn on and off the power supply of the TPU S420 that should cut both poles simultaneously. Protection device against over-currents in both poles of supply should also be installed. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Earth protection should be directly connected to the earth system using the shortest possible path. Earth protection symbol is: Conductor with a minimum section of 4 mm2. Preferably of copper braided wire should be used. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420, and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. The secondary circuits of current transformers must be short-circuited before connecting or disconnecting the respective terminals in the TPU S420! If there are test terminals that automatically short-circuit the secondary circuits of the current transformers, they may be put to test position as long as their correct operation has been previously verified. All the tests performed with the equipment to protect in service imply that there are voltage and current values extremely dangerous for the personnel, not only in TPU S420 terminals, but also in the installation itself. In this situation all tests should be carefully performed. It is mandatory to check the nominal values of current inputs before they are put to operation. The nominal values can be checked in the tag in the back of the TPU S420, they can be 0,04 A, 0,2 A, 1 A or 5 A. Incorrect nominal values may cause the unit to malfunction and/or damage. The same is applicable to the nominal values of voltage inputs. The values can be 100 V, 110 V, 115 V, or 120 V. The values of acceptable thermal capacity should also be verified for each of the input nominal values, both for permanent and short-time values. Subjecting analogue inputs to values higher than those specified will cause permanent damage to the inputs. During the commissioning tests, never apply in the inputs values higher than the indicated ones, not even in a transitory situation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-4 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning The phase change of the currents or voltages causes incorrect measurement of the respective negative sequence. Phase change can be detected by the existence of a non null measurement of the negative sequence of current (or voltage), similar to the phase currents (or phase voltages) in a normal situation of three-phase and symmetrical load. The polarity change of the currents or voltages causes incorrect measurement of the respective residual sequence (sum of the three currents or sum of the three voltages). Polarity change can be detected by the existence of a non null measurement of the sum of the three currents (or voltages), similar to the phase currents (or phase voltages) in a normal situation of three-phase and symmetrical load. Frequency measurement is obtained from the value of voltages direct sequence. Phases or polarities voltage changes cause incorrect measurement of frequency and can be detected by the existence of a null frequency measurement. Phases or polarities change, or the non correspondence of current and voltage phases causes incorrect measurement of active and reactive powers and power factor, as well as of the energy counters. Power supply terminals and conductors of the LonWorks network board carry dangerous voltages. Precaution should be taken to avoid situations that may endanger the physical health of the technical personnel. Technical personnel should be adequately trained and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. Any intervention in the interior of the TPU S420 should be carried out by authorised technical personnel. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Before starting the commissioning of a TPU S420, the following information about the unit should be registered: Protection model in test, according to the format of the ordering form annexed to the datasheets. Example TPU S420-Ed1-S-5A-5A-120V-120V-60Hz-D-2-2-ETH2-0-0-PT. BOOT code version in the [Version].[Release] format. NORMAL code version in the [Version].[Release] format. Software serial number, as shown in the Information menu. Hardware serial number indicated on the unit box. If there is any problem during the commissioning tests, this information should be reported to EFACEC, so that this problem can be identified and corrected. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-5 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning All commissioning tests should be performed according to the equipment’s safety instructions described in this manual. They should also respect all the instructions regarding the installations where the TPU S420 is used. The people responsible for the commissioning tests should have a deep knowledge of these safety instructions, of the operation of the equipment involved in the commissioning process and of the use of test equipment. They also should have solid knowledge about the operation principles of all protection and control functions to be tested. 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-6 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.2. ANALOGUE INPUTS 8.2.1. CONNECTIONS The purpose of this test is to verify whether the internal and external connections and the nominal values of the measurement transformers are correct and according to the TPU firmware. The following steps must be executed, where all the voltage and current values to be injected correspond to values in the secondary: In the Measurement Transformers protection menu check if the CTs and VTs transformation ratios are all configured for a 100.0 value. Enter the SCADA password if necessary and do not forget to confirm the changes at the end. As an alternative it is possible to use WinSettings to make these configurations. Inject nominal value current in each phase separately and, through the Display Measures menu, check the protection’s correct allocation of each measurement. Inject a three-phase current system in the three phases simultaneously. Check that the values of the residual current obtained by internal sum and of the negative current are approximately null. If that is not the case, there may be a change in the phase sequence of the currents. Apply nominal value voltage in each phase separately and, through the Display Measures menu, check the protection’s correct allocation of each measure. Apply a three-phase voltage system in the three phases simultaneously. Check that the values of the residual voltage obtained by internal sum and of the negative voltage are approximately null. If that is not the case, there may be a change in the phase sequence of the voltages. Inject current which nominal value on the neutral current input and check its correct allocation by the unit through the Display Measures menu. If any error is detected during these tests, it can be necessary to check the connections of the TPU S420 connectors comparing them with the connections scheme corresponding to the unit. If it is detected that the problem is internal to the TPU S420, intervention by EFACEC’s authorized personnel will be necessary. 8.2.2. MEASURES VALUE The purpose of checking the values of the measures is to verify the measures’ precision. The following steps should be followed: According to three-phase and symmetrical systems, inject current in all phases simultaneously for several magnitude values and check if the currents values presented on the Display Measures menu are within the precision specified for the unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-7 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning According o three-phase and symmetrical systems, apply voltages in all phases simultaneously for several magnitude values and check if the voltage and frequency values presented on the Display Measures menu are within the precision specified for the unit. According to three-phase and symmetrical systems, apply currents and voltages in all phases simultaneously for several magnitude values and check if the power values presented on the Display Measures menu are within the precision specified for the unit. Inject current on the neutral current input, for several magnitude values, and check if the current values presented on Display Measures menu are inside the specified precision for the unit. Apply the voltage on the fourth voltage input, for several magnitude values, and check if the value presented on the Display Measures menu is inside the specified precision for the unit. If any measurement precision error is detected during these tests, you may need to repeat the TPU S420’s calibration process. 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.3. DIGITAL INPUTS To check the correct operation of the digital inputs use the logical commands tool of the WinLogic module. This test allows checking whether the TPU S420 correctly reflects the state changes of the inputs in the associated logical variables. If there are logical conditions that cause direct operation of the outputs from logical states in inputs (external trips, for example), this test can originate the effective operation of the TPU outputs. If you do not desire that operation to cause for example, the sending of apparatus manoeuvre orders, the connectors of the corresponding digital outputs in the TPU back panel should be disconnected. First start the WinLogic program and select the TPU S420 to be commissioned and then start the application Logical Commands in the Tools menu. 8 Figure 8.1. WinLogic – Logical Commands. Each one of the digital inputs configured in the TPU S420 should be tested in the following way: In the Logical Commands window, configure the Module and Variable corresponding to the logical configuration of the input you wish to test. Impose the logical state 1 in the digital input you wish to test, whether directly in the corresponding connection terminals in the TPU or in the bay’s terminal blocks. Press the button Acquire State and check that the Current Logical State is 1. In case the state changes are being sent to the Event Recorder, the correct operation of the input may also be checked in this way. Impose the logical state 0 in the digital input you wish to test, whether directly to the corresponding connection terminals of the TPU or in the bay’s terminal blocks. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-9 Chapter 8 - Commissioning Press the button Acquire State and check that the Current Logical State is 0. As it was described above the operation of the digital input may also be checked by using the Event Recorder. It is possible to perform a more basic test at the digital inputs level by using the hardware test available in the System Menu. For more information see Chapter 9.1.3 - System Menu. As this process effectively imposes the logical state of gates existing in the automation logic, it is essential to reset the TPU S420 after the conclusion of this test to avoid inconsistent logical states in the automation logic. These inconsistencies may cause operation errors of the unit. 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-10 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.4. DIGITAL OUTPUTS To check the correct operation of the digital outputs use the logical commands tool of the WinLogic module. This test allows checking whether the digital outputs are effectively activated when a change of state occurs in the associated logical variable. This test originates the effective operation of the TPU outputs. If you do not desire that operation to cause for example, the sending of apparatus manoeuvre orders, the connectors of the corresponding digital outputs in the TPU back panel should be disconnected. First start the WinLogic program and select the TPU S420 to be commissioned and then start the application Logical Commands in the Tools menu. During this test the Command Type should be always configured as Pulse and with Logical State 1. Each one of the digital outputs configured in the TPU S420 should be tested in the following way: In the Logical Commands window, configure the Module and Variable corresponding to the logical configuration of the output you wish to test. Press Send button. Check if there is output activation. Checking the output activation can be done through direct inspection or by analysing the Event Recorder. If the output is configured as Indication, check if a command took place immediately followed by a reset. If it is configured as Pulse, check, through the Event Logging, if the configured Command Time was completed. It is possible to perform a more basic test on the digital outputs. For more information see Chapter 9.1.3 - System Menu. As this process effectively imposes the logical state of gates existing in the automation logic, it is essential to reset the TPU S420 after the conclusion of this test to avoid inconsistent logical states in the automation logic. These inconsistencies may cause operation errors of the unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-11 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.5. ALARMS PAGE To check the correct operation of the alarms page use the logical commands tool of the WinLogic module. This test allows checking whether the alarms configured in the Alarms Page were correctly activated when a change of state occurs in the associated logical variable. If there are alarms whose logical configuration corresponds to logical variables that will cause outputs activation (the most common situation), this test can originate the effective operation of the TPU outputs. If you do not desire that operation to cause for example, the sending of apparatus manoeuvre orders, the connectors of the corresponding digital outputs in the TPU back panel should be disconnected. First start the WinLogic program and select the TPU S420 to be commissioned and then start the application Logical Commands in the Tools menu. During this test the Command Type should be always configured as Pulse and with Logical State 1. Each one of the alarms in the TPU S420 Alarms Page should be tested in the following way: In the Logical Commands window, configure the Module and Variable corresponding to the logical configuration of the alarm you wish to test. Press Send button. Check if there was activation of the LED associated with the alarm. If the alarm is configured as Indication, check if the corresponding LED turned on and turned off immediately after. If it is configured as Alarm, check if the LED remains turned on after the 8 logical command is given. In the last case also check if the LED turns off by pressing the key. It is possible to perform a more basic test on the alarms. For more information see Chapter 9.1.3 - System Menu. As this process effectively imposes the logical state of gates existing in the automation logic, it is essential to reset the TPU S420 after the conclusion of this test to avoid inconsistent logical states in the automation logic. These inconsistencies may cause operation errors of the unit. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-12 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.6. INTERFACE WITH THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK If the TPU S420 is not integrated in a Local Network or if that feature is not used, it is not necessary to perform the procedures described in this section to commission the equipment. Before the TPU S420 is powered on, the several available functions related to its interaction with SCADA should be tested. The procedures described here are exemplified for a Lonworks network and therefore these tests are closely related to the protocol used (LonTalk). For an Ethernet network, the procedures are the same but according to the protocol used in that case. To perform these tests it is necessary to have at least two protections connected in network between them and to a Central Unit. The network configuration may be in open or close ring. To do these tests is necessary to know how to use and configure the CLP 500RTU. It is necessary to read its installation, configuration and user manuals. These manuals can be obtained from EFACEC. The checking of the communication status with the unit is done by the RTU, using the Diagnosis function of the LONWORKS Scanner. The following tests should be carried out: Check if the Location String configured in the protection is the same as that of the CLP 500RTU database and if the protection is operating correctly with NORMAL mode code. Start the CLP 500RTU. Wait until the reset of the protection’s Neuron Chip is made and check if the communication with the CLP 500RTU is correctly established, if after that the protection sends all indications and measurements configured in the database and then has General Control OK. Check the correct communication connection between WinProt and the unit through the LAN. Check if the unit’s time is correctly updated from the CLP 500RTU. Simulate all types of errors that can be sent by the relay to the CLP 500RTU and check that all of them appear correctly identified. These errors are: problems in the analogue inputs board, problems in the digital inputs/outputs boards, invalid protection configuration and protection internal problems. Check if the digital indications are correctly sent from the TPU S420 to the CLP 500RTU. Check if the analogue measures are correctly sent from the TPU S420 to the CLP 500RTU. Check if the discrete measures (counters) are correctly sent from the TPU S420 to the CLP 500RTU. Check if the CLP 500RTU digital controls are correctly sent to the TPU S420. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-13 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning Check if the remote configuration controls are correctly sent from the CLP 500RTU to the TPU S420. Check if the Distributed Database operation is correct, in what concerns digital indications, analogue measures and counters. There are control functions that use the Distributed Database as its own operation element. To test these functions it might be necessary a careful reading of the documentation about other units of the 420 range. These documents can be obtained from EFACEC. Testing the functions that use the Distributed Database should always be preceded by careful reading of the operating principles and configuration necessary to use it in all X420 range units. The most frequent problems that occur in this type of functions simply have to do with configuration errors. 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-14 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.7. PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS The test to the protection and control functions of the TPU S420 during the commissioning depends on the version of the unit to be tested and on the use and configuration of the unit itself for the desired application. Because of the infinite possible combinations for test execution, only a guide of procedures to perform them is presented. To be able to test any protection and control function, all other relay functions that may operate, due to the test execution on the function in test, must be disabled. Although this is not mandatory nor affects in any way the operation of the several functions, it will make easier to interpret and check the tests results, namely at the Event Log level. During the tests, to allow a quick view of the function’s operation, the alarms and digital outputs associated with the function can be configured. After these initial procedures the process must be carried out in the following way: Check if it is possible to configure all the parameters associated with the function and if their regulation ranges comply with the protection specifications. Particularly check if the configuration that will be used in service is correctly sent to the unit and if the resulting operation meets the expected. Check, for the protection functions, if the start and reset values correspond to the configured ones, according to the precision defined for the function. Check, for the control functions, if the operating conditions, operation and inhibition correspond to those defined in this manual. Check, for all functions, if the operation times correspond to the configured ones, according to the precision defined for the function. Check, for all functions, if the indications registered in the Event Recorder are correct and if they correctly represent the operating sequence. If further information is necessary, the relay automation logic should be configured to send the missing indications. The description of this configuration is presented in Chapter 4.5 - Programmable Logic. Check the correct operation of the alarms associated with the function. If the function’s operation causes the recording of oscillographies, check their correct generation and content. Check the correct operation of the digital outputs associated with the function. Each performed test should be documented in order to register the conditions of the test and its results. When a problem is detected, this information will be very useful to correct it. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-15 8 Chapter 8 - Commissioning 8.8. PUT INTO SERVICE After performing all commissioning tests and before the TPU S420 being put into service some final checks must be made. First, it should be checked if all TPU S420 connections are correct: power supply, digital inputs and outputs, analogue inputs, earth connections and communication connections with the local network. Then, it should be checked if all the configurations of the TPU S420 are according to what is required for its normal operation. Special attention must be given to the functions which may have been changed during the commissioning process. Apart from the configurations of the automation and protection functions, the remaining TPU S420 configurations must be carefully checked, especially those related to the Digital Inputs and Outputs. It also should be checked if the logical configuration is correct. If the TPU S420 is not connected to a local communications network that provides the time synchronization, the unit’s time and date must be set, by accessing the Set Date and Time menu. If there are any active alarms in the Alarms Page, the key should be pressed. If after pressing the key there are alarms still active, it should be checked if this situation is normal (in case of blockings, for example). To avoid confusion in the future upload of registers, all registers produced during the tests should be deleted before the TPU S420 is put in service. To carry out this operation the following procedures should be followed: In the Event Logs menu select the Clear Logs item and execute the associated order. In the Load Diagram menu select the Clear Load Diagrams item and execute the clear order for each load diagram stored by the TPU S420. 8 Enter the System Password: 097531; Access the System Menu and then the Calibration menu. Check if the indication Measures Converters Calibrated is ON. If not, it will be necessary to calibrate the relay according to the procedures. Access the System Menu and then the Clear Memory Registers menu. Access successively the items of this menu and give the clear order for all stored logs; Then all default passwords should be entered: Protections password: 000000. SCADA password: 000001. System password: 097531. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-16 Chapter 8 - Commissioning When all passwords have been entered, access the Change Password menu and change all passwords to values different from the default ones. The new passwords should be registered and kept in a safe place. Passwords are changed to ensure the security of the data existing in the TPU S420, as the default passwords are written in the documents supplied with the units, including this manual, anyone may have access to them. EFACEC is not responsible for operation failure of the equipment due to configuration errors. If the new passwords are forgotten, it is possible to recover the default values, by requiring an intervention of EFACEC’s authorized personnel. If there is no guarantee that the WinProt database is updated with the most recent data configured in the TPU S420, the TPU data should be updated to the several WinProt modules. From this moment on, the TPU S420 is ready to be put in service, you just need to access the System Menu and execute the Protection Reset order. 8 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 8-17 9 Chapter 9. MAINTENANCE This chapter describes the procedures that should be performed to ensure an efficient operation of the TPU S420 during its entire lifetime. Chapter 9 - Maintenance TABLE OF CONTENTS 9.1. ROUTINE CHECKS ....................................................................................................9-3 9.1.1. Torque .........................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.2. Logs .............................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.3. System Menu ...............................................................................................................9-4 9.2. FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................................................................9-13 9.3. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................................9-15 9.3.1. Hardware .................................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.2. Software.................................................................................................................... 9-27 9.3.3. Calibration ................................................................................................................ 9-27 9.4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) .......................................................................9-32 Total of pages of the chapter: 35 9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-2 Chapter 9 - Maintenance 9.1. ROUTINE CHECKS 9.1.1. TORQUE Checking torques in accordance with chapter 2.4.1 from this manual. 9.1.2. LOGS During its normal operation, the TPU S420 stores several types of records in non-volatile memory. According to the type of information there are two different processes to store those logs: accumulated logs and updated logs. Accumulated Logs Logs of the accumulated type are: Oscillographies; Event Logging; Load Diagrams. These logs are associated with the unit’s operation history so new logs will be stored as they are generated. The space reserved in memory for the recording of this type of logs is shared among all of them. When a situation arises where there is no available space to store a new record produced in the meantime, the TPU S420 automatically executes a memory cleaning process, deleting a group of the older existing registers. Therefore, time coherence is guaranteed for the records stored in non-volatile memory. Whenever there is an automatic memory cleaning is inevitable the loss of information. However, a minimum size of available space is foreseen for each type of record, ensuring that in any case will be deleted all the information in memory for each type. To avoid the loss of historical information of the logs produced during the operation of the TPU S420, it is essential that all records are collected to the WinProt database using the WinReports module. This upload should be periodical and can be made both through the existing serial ports and through the LAN when the unit is integrated in a local area network. After this process, the logs are guaranteed to be available for later consultation. After this process is completed, using WinReports, all records in the memory of the TPU S420 can be deleted. This is advisable for two reasons. Firstly, because it reduces the risk of exhausting the available space in the memory until a new upload is made and secondly because it facilitates posterior database update as the size of the list of records to upload will be smaller. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-3 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Updated Logs Records of the updated type are: Counter of Circuit Breaker Manoeuvres; Sum of Currents Cut by Circuit Breaker Phase; Counter of Disconnector Manoeuvres. The information contained in these logs does not need to be accumulated over time, as it is only important to know their current values. That is why the storage of these logs is performed in another memory zone, independent of that used for the accumulated logs. Each new update of values of these registers will be saved in non-volatile memory, replacing the previous values. 9.1.3. SYSTEM MENU The System Menu is a menu that is not normally accessible. Its display and access require entering the System Password, 097531, and then another item will appear in the Main Menu: System Menu. Select this new item and press and the menu will be displayed. Menu Sistema Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Limpar Registos em Memória Recuperar Parâmetros de Fábrica Limpar Erro de Dados Testes de Hardware Calibração Reiniciar a Protecção ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.1. System Menu. This menu provides several information that allows to verify the operation status of the TPU S420 software. Besides the information, there are menus that contain special commands executed by the TPU S420, related with the management of records and parameters in memory, hardware tests and calibration. System Information The system information presents the operational status of internal elements of the TPU S420, such as the status of the memory and of the communications operation. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-4 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações Informações Informações Informações MASTER SLAVE #1 SLAVE #2 SLAVE #3 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.2. System Information Menu. When accessing each item of this menu, the information corresponding to each of the microcontrollers of the TPU S420 is presented. Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações MASTER Informações MASTER Informação de Excepção Estado Comunicações Internas Estado FLASH CODIGO : 1 Erros Gravar CODIGO : 0 Erros Apagar CODIGO : 0 Estado FLASH MEMORIA : 1 Erros Gravar MEMORIA : 0 Erros Apagar MEMORIA : 0 Estado RAM Interna : 1 Erro de Parâmetros : 0 Entradas Avariadas: 0000000000000000 Saídas Avariadas : 000000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Informações MASTER Recursos Esgotados : 0 Índice Ocupação : 7651 Tempo Amostragem: 410 Recursos Disponíveis: 500 Recursos Mínimos : 440 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.3. Master Information Menu. The information available in this menu is the following: CODE FLASH Status: indicates whether the flash memory containing the code is operating correctly. CODE SAVE Errors: accumulated number of data recording errors in the code flash. CODE Clear Errors: accumulated number of clear operations errors in the code flash. MEMORY FLASH Status: indicates whether the flash memory containing the data and registers is operating correctly. MEMORY Save Errors: accumulated number of data recording errors in the Memory flash. MEMORY Clear Errors: accumulated number of clear operation errors in the Memory flash. INTERNAL RAM Status: indicates whether the RAM memory, internal to the microcontroller, is operating correctly. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-5 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Parameters Error: indicates whether there were situations of wrong group of parameters detected at unit start-up. Inputs Failure: indicates which inputs of the digital inputs and outputs boards associated with this microcontroller are invalid. Outputs Failure: indicates which outputs of the digital inputs and outputs boards associated with this microcontroller have operation failure. Exhausted Resources: indicates whether there have been situations of CPU’s excess occupation since the TPU is on. Occupation Index: indicates which is the CPU’s present occupation index. Sampling Time: indicates which sampling time was used to determine the CPU’s occupation index. Available Resources: indicates the number of free resources for communication among tasks. Minimum Resources: indicates the minimum value of free resources for communication among tasks since the TPU is on. There are two more items in the menu that allow accessing more specific information about the TPU S420 operation. Exception Information The Exception Information menu contains information about serious errors occurred during the TPU S420’s operation, which caused the microcontroller reset. Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações MASTER Informação de Excepção Informação de Excepção Contador de Resets: 238 Data do Último Reset: 2001-01-01 Hora do Último Reset: 00:00:12 FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 FRAME 4 Limpar Informação de Excepção ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar 9 Figure 9.4. Exception Information Menu – Master. The information available in this menu is the following: Resets Counter: accumulated number of microcontroller’s resets due to errors. Date of Last Reset: date when the last reset occurred. Time of Last Reset: time when last reset occurred. The FRAME 1 to FRAME 4 items contain debug information, collected after the detection, by the TPU S420 firmware, of the operation error. Four groups of information are stored corresponding to the four most recent errors. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-6 Chapter 9 - Maintenance This information will allow EFACEC’s technical assistance to identify the cause of the error and to correct it. Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações MASTER Informação de Excepção FRAME 1 FRAME 1 0x00: 0x08: 0x10: 0x18: 0x20: 0x28: 0x30: 0x38: 0x40: 0x48: 0x50: 0x58: 07D3 01E7 0000 10CC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 030A 4010 0010 0000 0000 0000 FFFF 0000 0000 0000 39C2 0000 0B26 0000 0E84 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0013 0000 0E5D 0078 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 B494 0000 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar FRAME 1 0x60: 0x68: 0x70: 0x78: 0x80: 0x88: 0x90: 0x98: 0000 0000 0201 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0101 0E30 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 12B6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 12B6 1204 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ¤/¥ mudar página; C cancelar Figure 9.5. FRAME 1 Menu. By executing the order associated with the item Clear Exception Information all the system information regarding the microcontroller is deleted and the error counters go back to 0. For all microcontrollers there is a similar group of menus and information. Internal Communications Status This menu presents the information about the status of the communications among the several microcontrollers of the unit. Menu Sistema Informações de Sistema Informações MASTER Estado Comunicações Internas Estado Comunicações Internas 9 SLAVE #1: ON Erros: 63 SLAVE #2: ON Erros: 47 ADC : ON Erros: 236 RTC : ON Erros: 0 Limpar Erros Comunicações ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.6. Internal Communications Status. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-7 Chapter 9 - Maintenance It is presented the current status and the accumulated number of errors occurred in the communications between the microcontroller corresponding to the current menu, and all the others with which it can communicate. By executing the order associated with the item Clear Communications Errors the counters of communications errors will go back to 0. Clear Memory Logs To facilitate the clearing of the logs stored in the TPU S420, for example after conclusion of the commissioning tests, the Clear Memory Registers menu is available. Menu Sistema Limpar Registos em Memória Limpar Registos em Memória Limpar Limpar Limpar Limpar Diagramas de Carga Oscilografias Medidas Registo de Eventos ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.7. Clear Memory Logs Menu. When accessing each of the items of the menu and executing the corresponding order the registers of the corresponding type will be deleted: Load Diagrams: all logs stored in non-volatile memory will be deleted; however all the accumulated values in the most recent load diagrams in RAM memory are kept and accessible in the Menus Interface. Oscillographies: all registers stored in non-volatile memory will be deleted, however the most recent oscillography saved in RAM memory is kept. Measures: all measures and counters stored in non-volatile memory will be deleted: maximum values of analogue measures, registers of the currents cut by circuit breakers (per phase), number of manoeuvres of circuit breakers and number of manoeuvres of disconnectors. Event Logs: all logs stored in non-volatile memory will be deleted, however all events corresponding to the most recent event logging are kept in RAM memory and accessible in the Menus Interface. After the completion of the cleaning process, there will no longer be logs of the chosen type stored in non-volatile memory. If has already been requested a list of registers with WinReports it is no longer possible to receive them, except for the most recent records. New requests of the list of records in memory should be made. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-8 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Restore Default Parameters To facilitate the restore of the TPU S420 default settings, for exemple after completion of the commissioning tests, the Restore Default Parameteres menu is available. Menu Sistema Recuperar Parâmetros de Fábrica Recuperar Parâmetros de Fábrica Dados de fábrica Lógica de fábrica Strings de fábrica ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.8. Restore Default Parameters Menu. The restore of default parameters by this process obligatorily implicates the simultaneous restore of the parameters of all functions of the TPU S420. To restore parameters of a specific functions see Restore of default parameters in Section 9.1 - Routine Checks. When accessing each item of the menu and executing the corresponding order, the logs of the corresponding type will be restored: Default Data: the default data of all Protection Functions, Automation Functions and Configurations of the TPU S420 will be restored. All these functions will be updated with the new data as soon as they are ready for it. Default Logic: the configurations of the default automation logic of all Protection Functions, Automation Functions and Configurations of the TPU S420 will be restored. It is necessary to reset the protection so that the unit starts using this new logic configuration. Default Strings: The default descriptions associated with the gates of the automation logic for all Protection Functions, Automation Functions and Configurations of the TPU S420 will be restored. The descriptions update will be immediately made in the Menus Interface, therefore, when accessing the Access Event Logs menu one can visualize the most recent Event Logging with the updated descriptions. The restore of default parameters of the automation logic is not immediately reflected in the TPU S420 operation. It is necessary to reset the unit so that the change is effective. Clear Data Error This menu allows clearing the indication of parameters error, previously activated during a unit’s reset. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-9 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Hardware Tests Test functions are available for the TPU S420 hardware to check the correct operation of the digital inputs and outputs boards. Menu Sistema Testes de Hardware Testes de Hardware Teste Teste Teste Teste das Entradas das Saídas dos LEDs do LCD ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.9. Hardware Test Menu. Inputs Test When accessing the Inputs Test menu is possible to visualize the state of all digital inputs of the TPU S420. Menu Sistema Testes de Hardware Teste das Entradas Teste das Entradas Carta Base: 000000000 Carta Exp1: 0000000000000000 Carta Exp2: 0000000000000000 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.10. Hardware Test Menu. For each board is presented the current state of each input, refreshed every second. Outputs Test When selecting the item Outputs Test and executing the associated command, the test of the digital outputs will be initiated. This test will operate all digital outputs of the boards existing in the TPU S420, and configure them as present. The outputs of all boards will be successively operated, with 1 second interval between outputs of the same board. The verification of the correct output operation can be made by consulting the Event Log. The outputs test causes the effective operation of the contacts of the output relays. Before doing the test, it is advisable to check that the cabling of the digital outputs to the command coils of the apparatus are disconnected, otherwise undesirable manoeuvres may be performed on them. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-10 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance LEDs Test Selecting this item and executing the associated command will start the test of the front plane LEDs. All LEDs in the front plane will be permanently on for 2 seconds and then go back to their normal state. This test easily allows verifying whether any of the front plane LEDs is damaged. LCD Test Selecting this item and executing the associated command with start the test of the LCD. All LCD pixels will be permanently in ON state for 2 seconds and then the Menus Interface is again displayed. This test easily allows verifying whether any of the LCD pixels is fuse damaged. Calibration The Calibration menu allows consulting the calibration status of the TPU S420, start a new calibration process or restore default calibrations. Menu Sistema Calibração Calibração Transf. de Medida Calibrados: ON Nova Calibração (Fases) Nova Calibração (Neutros) Recuperar Calibração de Fábrica ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.11. Calibration Menu. The line Measures Converters Calibrated presents the present status of calibration: OFF or ON. Every TPU S420 is calibrated after manufacture during the process of final tests, so the normal status of this information is ON. It is possible to restore the default calibration of the TPU S420 by executing the associated order in the item Restore Default Calibration. This is the only way to restore the default calibration data. When accessing the items New Calibration (Phases) and New Calibration (DCn) the user can start a new calibration process of the TPU S420. Calibration directly affects the operation of the unit. If the calibration process is incorrect, it can lead to serious failures. The correct procedure to use in the TPU S420 calibration is described in section 9.1. This procedure should only be performed by trained personnel. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-11 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Protection Reset By executing the command associated with the item Protection Reset, the TPU S420 will immediately reset. When resetting the TPU S420 by this process, the store of registers in non-volatile memory that are still in the RAM depends on the type of logs: The events, which have not yet been stored in non-volatile memory, will be saved before the protection resets. The values of the load diagrams, which have not yet been stored in non-volatile memory, will be lost. To avoid that it is necessary to execute the command Clear Load Diagrams in the Load Diagram menu. 9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-12 Chapter 9 - Maintenance 9.2. FIRMWARE UPDATE The TPU S420 allows, together with the PC interface program WinProt, updating its firmware by using the serial port communication. Whenever is necessary to update firmware of a TPU, a request to EFACEC should be made referring the following data: Complete ordering form of the unit. Present firmware version of the unit. The code to save in the protections will be supplied in ZIP format files containing the files with the firmware itself and a file named firmware.id, containing additional information about that code. When necessary, EFACEC will also supply additional information eventually necessary to correctly execute the firmware update. Each one of those ZIP format files will have a name equal to the relay ordering form. The firmware to save is contained in three files in Motorola S-Record format, each destined to one of the microcontrollers existing in the CPU board and called MASTER, SLAVE 1 and SLAVE 2. In case the unit foresees Ethernet communications, there is an additional file to save called SLAVE3. The firmware.id file has brief information about the firmware with the following information: Type – Completely specifies the type of unit it is destined for, in the same format as the identification made in the ordering form. For example: TPU S420-Ed1-S-5A-5A-120V-120V-50Hz-D-2-2-ETH2-0-0-PT The fields with X indicate that the firmware is suitable for any of the options existing in the ordering form, for that field. Version – In format [Version].[Release], indicates the firmware version and release; Release Date – Date when the firmware version was made; Release Notes – Additional information regarding the firmware. The three firmware files should be saved following the procedures described in the WinProt User’s Manual. After the process is completed, the TPU S420 should be reset. Firmware download should only be performed by EFACEC’s authorized personnel. During the firmware update process, the TPU S420 operates in a special mode where it does not perform any if its protection and automation functions. This non-operation as protection unit is signalized by the Watchdog output that stays in state 0 during the whole process. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-13 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance During the download process, it is essential to ensure that the power supply of the TPU S420 is not interrupted. If that happens there is the risk of the unit’s firmware becoming corrupted and therefore moving to a status that invalidates the unit’s normal operation. In the most common situation, the TPU S420 will restart its operation using the firmware version it had before the saving process, and it is enough to execute that process again to make the update. In more serious cases, there is the possibility of the TPU S420 not being able to restart its normal operation, situation signalized by the Watchdog output which will never change to state 1. In this case, it is necessary to contact EFACEC for a corrective intervention. 9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-14 Chapter 9 - Maintenance 9.3. TROUBLESHOOTING 9.3.1. HARDWARE Interventions at the hardware level should be limited to the absolutely necessary. These can comprise the exchange of boards, change of fuse of the power supply or boards’ reconfiguration (jumpers and/or switches). Any repair or change concerning hardware should only be performed by specialized personnel. Precaution should be taken when removing or inserting electronic boards, namely at the level of protection against electrostatic discharges. The boards should only be removed or inserted when the TPU S420 is completely disconnected from the installation. No modifications to the hardware of the TPU S420 that cause changes in the boards themselves should be made, including welding works. The human body easily acquires electrostatic charges that may easily damage the electronic boards! Precautions should be taken when handling the boards. Avoid touching directly in the components or connectors! It is advisable the use of an anti-static bracelet. Otherwise, first touch a surface connected to earth to clear eventual static charges. TPU S420 Disassembly Whenever necessary to disassemble the TPU S420 in order to remove, insert or exchange electronic boards, the following steps must be followed: A work area should be prepared where the boards to remove/insert will be placed. The surface should have anti-static characteristics or an anti-static mat should be used. The TPU S420 supply must be disconnected (both poles!) as well as the supply of the communications board, if there is one. The earth protection should be the last connection to be removed! All communication cables should be disconnected, including TP1 and TP2 connectors and optical fibre cables, if they exist. As for the last ones, precaution should be taken not to damage the optical fibres. The IO1 to IO6, P1 and IRIG-B connectors (if they exist) should be disconnected. To do so unscrew the screws in the ends of the connectors with the help of a screwdriver dimension 0,6 x 3,5 mm and remove the connectors by pulling them out. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-15 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Before disconnecting the T1 and T2 connectors, the current circuits should be short-circuited by the means available (normally, test boxes). If the current circuits are open when in charge, before being short-circuited, that may result in their destruction as well as in personnel damage. To disconnect the T1 and T2 connectors, pull out the red pin and then the body of the connector.. Remove the last connection present that should be the earth protection. Then it is possible to remove the back lid of the TPU S420, by unscrewing the ten screws that fix it to the body of the unit with the help of a small Philips type screwdriver. The boards are removed by pulling them out, being careful not to force any component present in the boards. The processing board (CPU) will require more effort due to the connectors used. The removed boards should be placed on the anti-static surface mentioned before. The boards should be handled with care to avoid any type of damage. TPU S420 Assembly To reassemble the TPU S420, the following steps should be taken: Make sure that all the boards are rightly fitted and in the correct position (see section 2.2 Hardware for details). Put the back lid of the TPU S420, by screwing the ten screws that fix to the body of the unit with the help of a small Philips type screwdriver. Make the connection of the earth protection that should be the first to be made for safety reasons. Then the IO1 to IO6, IRIG-B and P1 connectors (if they exist) should be connected. Fix them in the respective positions and screw the ends of the connectors with the help of screwdriver dimension 0,6 x 3,5 mm. All communication cables should be connected, including TP1 and TP2 connectors and optical fibre cables, if they exist. As for the last ones, precautions should be taken not to damage the optical fibres. Connect the T1 and T2 connectors, with the current circuits still short-circuited by the available means (normally, test boxes), ensuring its correct placement and fit. If the current circuits are open before the correct connection of the T1 connector, that may result in the destruction of the current circuits as well as in personnel damage. Only after the connector is properly connected should the current circuits be re-established. The supply of the TPU S420 and the communications board, if it exists, should be connected. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-16 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance The exchange of A/D Analogue Inputs boards and/or Processing (CPU) boards may cause alterations in the unit’s operation, besides requiring a new calibration process! Replacement of the power supply fuses (base board) There are two protection fuses in the supply input of the TPU S420. This fuse is in the I/O+ Power Supply base board (connectors IO1 and IO2). To replace it take the following steps: Disassemble the TPU S420 as previously described. Remove the I/O+ Power Supply base board and place it on the anti-static surface previously mentioned. The location of the fuses is indicated in Figure 9.12. Remove the protecting plastic cover. Remove the faulty fuse and replace it by a T3,15AH 250 V (for Option 19-72 V d.c.) or T1,25AH 250 V (for Option 80-265 V a.c. / 88-300 V d.c.), with dimensions 5 x 20 mm. Carefully confirm its characteristic (T), as well as the values of voltage and current. Put the protecting plastic cover again. Insert the I/O+ Power Supply base board in the TPU S420, ensuring that it is correctly fitted. Assemble the TPU S420 as previously described. 9 Figure 9.12. Location of fuses (FU4 and FU5) in the I/O+ Power Supply base board. Replacement of the fuse of the communications board with auxiliary power supply There is also a protection fuse in the supply input of the LonWorks network board with auxiliary supply, if this board exists. To replace it, take the following steps: TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-17 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Disassemble the TPU S420 as previously described. Remove the LonWorks communications board and place it on the anti-static surface previously mentioned. The location of the fuse is indicated in Figure 9.13. Remove the protecting plastic cover. Remove the faulty fuse and replace it by a fuse type T1A 250V, with dimensions 5 x 20 mm. Carefully confirm its characteristic (T), as well as the values of voltage and current. Put the protecting plastic cover again. Insert the LonWorks communications board in the TPU S420, ensuring that it is correctly fitted. Assemble the TPU S420 as previously described. During fuse replacement and even with the unit disconnected, it is possible to have dangerous voltage levels in the power supply circuits. It is advisable to wait at least 60 seconds for the energy storage capacitors to be discharged! Figure 9.13. Location of fuse (FU1) in the communications board. 9 HW Configuration of the LonWorks communications board The LonWorks communications board has a dip-switch for configuration of the type of transceiver used, as well as of the source of the reset signal for the communications processor (Neuron chip). To access this board, consider the procedure described in section . Figure 9.14 shows the location of the configuration dip-switch. The position of each switch is shown in black and is the default configuration. This configuration should not be changed, otherwise the board may not operate correctly. Any change in the configuration must only be performed by technical personnel from EFACEC. Table 9.1 has the description of the eight switches and again the default configuration for an optical fibre transceiver. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-18 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Figure 9.14. Location of the dip-switch (INT1) in the communications board. Table 9.1. Possible configurations for the communications board. Switch Number Signal Description Default state FO-10 TP/XF-1250 Optical Fibre 1.25Mbps Twisted Pair 1.25Mbps 1 XID0 Identifier # 0 of the transceiver type. OFF ON 2 XID1 Identifier # 1 of the transceiver type. OFF ON 3 XID2 Identifier # 2 of the transceiver type. OFF OFF 4 XID3 Identifier # 3 of the transceiver type. ON OFF 5 XID4 Identifier # 4 of the transceiver type. ON OFF 6 -- Not used. OFF OFF 7 N_RST Reset signal of the specific Neuron chip. ON ON 8 TPU_R ST Neuron chip reset signal common to that of the TPU S420. OFF OFF Disassembly of the piggy-back board of the CPU board There are three types of piggy-back boards for serial communication or by DNP 3.0 Serial Protocol. To replace it, take the following steps: Disassemble the TPU S420 as described in TPU S420 Disassembly. Remove the CPU board and place it on the anti-static surface previously mentioned. Unscrew both screws that fix the piggy-back board to the CPU board. Remove the distance pieces, rings and bolts. Unfix the male header of the piggy-back board from the female connector of the CPU board. Remove the original piggy-back board and replace it by the new one, with the shunts correctly placed in the jumpers and with the necessary communication characteristics. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-19 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Fix the board using the mentioned screws and rings. Put the distance pieces in the screws and fit the piggy-back in the female connector of the CPU board. Insert the CPU board in the TPU S420, ensuring the board is correctly fitted. Assemble the TPU S420 as described in TPU S420. In case the piggy-backs are incorrectly mounted, damage may occur in the CPU board and/or in the piggy-back board. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. Any assembly or disassembly of piggy-back boards of the processing board (CPU) should be carried out by authorised technical personnel. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. HW Configuration of the Ethernet communications board The Ethernet communications board of the TPU S420 has several configuration jumpers. To access this board, consider the procedure described in section TPU S420 Disassembly. Table 9.2 has the description of the functions of the several jumpers and Figure 9.15 shows their location. The communication mode of the Ethernet board can be defined by software through the CPU’s own instructions or by hardware during the power on of the TPU S420. Therefore, the configuration of the jumpers PP4, PP5, PP6, PP8 and PP9 define the communication mode of the board. Table 9.3, Table 9.4 and Table 9.5 describe possible pin configurations for the different operation modes loaded by hardware during the start of the Ethernet board. By default, the board will be supplied with the 100BASE-X Full Duplex operation mode for all copper and fibre transceivers and without the optical fibre exclusive mode. Any change in jumpers configuration should only be carried out by EFACEC technical personnel. 9 Table 9.2. Description of the different jumpers of the Ethernet communications board. Jumper Associated Signal Description Default State PP1 +5V Supply for external converter. Provided in the pin 9 of plug D9 +5V through the fuse FU1 for supply of an external converter. Maximum current of 100 mA. Open PP2 /OE2 Reserved. Open PP3 /OE1 Reserved. Open PP4 AN1 Auto Negotiation Mode of the PHY1. Open PP5 AN0 Auto Negotiation Mode of the PHY1. Pins 2-3 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-20 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Jumper Associated Signal Description Default State PP6 AN0 Auto Negotiation Mode of the PHY2. Pins 2-3 PP7 RESET Activation of Reset by hardware. Open PP8 FXEN Fibre Enable for PHY1 and PHY2. Open PP9 AN1 Auto Negotiation Mode of the PHY2. Open PP10 WDI Activation of Watchdog by hardware. Activates the Watchdog of the processing module. Closed PP11 /WE1 Reserved. Open PP13 INTR0 Reserved. Pins 1-2 PP14 /OE3 Reserved. Open PP15 AUISEL Reserved. Pins 2-3 Table 9.3. Possible hardware default operation modes for transceivers TP1and FO1. PHY 1 Transceiver Jumper Operation Mode Description Via Auto Negotiation No PP4 PP5 TP1 1-2 Open 10BASE-T Half Duplex FO1 2-3 Open 10BASE-T Full Duplex Open 1-2 100BASE-X Half Duplex Open 2-3 100BASE-X Full Duplex Open Open All Capable 1-2 1-2 10BASE-T Half / Full Duplex 1-2 2-3 100BASE-TX Half / Full Duplex 2-3 1-2 10BASE-T /100BASE-TX Half Duplex 2-3 2-3 10BASE-T Half Duplex Yes Table 9.4. Possible hardware default operation modes for transceivers TP2 and FO2. PHY 2 Transceiver Jumper Operation Mode Description Via Auto Negotiation No PP9 PP6 TP2 1-2 Open 10BASE-T Half Duplex FO2 2-3 Open 10BASE-T Full Duplex Open 1-2 100BASE-X Half Duplex Open 2-3 100BASE-X Full Duplex Open Open All Capable 1-2 1-2 10BASE-T Half / Full Duplex 1-2 2-3 100BASE-TX Half / Full Duplex 2-3 1-2 10BASE-T /100BASE-TX Half Duplex 2-3 2-3 10BASE-T Half Duplex TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9 Yes 9-21 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Table 9.5. Possible hardware default operation modes for transceivers TP1, TP2, FO1 and FO2. PHY Transceiver Jumper Shunt Pins Operation Mode Description 1 TP1 PP8 Closed 100 BASE-FX Operation (only optical fibre) 2 TP2 Open Normal Mode 1-2 Reserved 2-3 Normal Mode FO1 FO2 PP15 9 Figure 9.15. Location of the jumpers in the Ethernet communications board. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-22 Chapter 9 - Maintenance The technical personnel should be adequately trained in the application field and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. The human body easily acquires electrostatic charges that may easily damage the electronic boards! Precaution should be taken when handling the boards. Avoid touching directly in the components or connectors! It is advisable the use of an anti-static bracelet. Otherwise, first touch a surface connected to earth to clear eventual static charges. Do not place the welding side of this board on a metal or conducting surface in order to avoid short-circuits among components and/or involuntary discharge of the battery (BT1). The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. HW Configuration of the processing board (CPU) The processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 has several configuration jumpers. To access this board, consider the procedure described in section TPU S420 Disassembly. Table 9.6 has the description of the functions of the several jumpers and Figure 9.16 shows their location. Any change in jumpers’ configuration should only be carried out by EFACEC technical personnel. Table 9.6. Description of the different jumpers of the processing board. Jumper Description Default State PP1, PP2, PP3, PP4, PP5, PP6 Reserved Open PP13, PP14, PP15 Reserved Open PP16 Reserved Open PP7, PP8, PP10 Activation of Watchdog by hardware. Activates the Watchdog of the processing module. Closed PP9, PP11, PP12 Activation of Reset by hardware. Open TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9 9-23 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Figure 9.16. Location of the jumpers in the processing board. There are three types of piggy-back boards that can be installed in the COM1 and COM2 positions: interface RS232, interface RS485 and optical fibre, whether glass or plastic. These boards have several configuration jumpers. To access these boards, consider the procedure described in section Disassembly of the piggy-back board of the CPU board. Any change in piggy-back boards’ assembly should only be carried out by EFACEC technical personnel. The technical personnel should be adequately trained in the application field and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-24 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance The human body easily acquires electrostatic charges that may easily damage the electronic boards! Precaution should be taken when handling the boards. Avoid touching directly in the components or connectors! It is advisable the use of an anti-static bracelet. Otherwise, first touch a surface connected to earth to clear eventual static charges. Do not place the welding side of this board on a metal or conducting surface in order to avoid short-circuits among components and/or involuntary discharge of the batteries (BT1 to BT4). The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. HW Configuration of the piggy-back board for optical fibre interface The piggy-back boards for plastic or glass optical fibre interface belonging to the processing board (CPU) of the TPU S420 have one configuration jumper. To access this piggy-back board, consider the procedure described in section Disassembly of the piggy-back board of the CPU board. Table 9.7 has the description of the jumper’s functions and Figure 9.17 shows their location. Any change in jumper’s configuration should only be carried out by EFACEC technical personnel. Table 9.7. Description of the different jumpers of the piggy-back board for optical fibre interface. Jumper Shunt Pins Operation Mode Description PP1 1-2 Ring connection (RING) 2-3 Point to point connection (NORM) 9 Figure 9.17. Location of the jumper in the piggy-back board for optical fibre interface. The technical personnel should be adequately trained in the application field and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-25 Chapter 9 - Maintenance HW Configuration of the piggy-back board for RS485 interface The piggy-back board for RS485 interface has one configuration jumper. To access this board, consider the procedure described in section Disassembly of the piggy-back board of the CPU board. Table 9.8 has the description of the jumper’s functions and Figure 9.18 shows their location. The operation mode with parallel ending of 120 Ω of the bus 485 becomes necessary for high transmission rates or in situations with long transmission cables. As a general rule for good implementation of the bus 485, the transmission rate (in bps) multiplied by the cable length (in meters) should not exceed the value 108. Any change in jumper’s configuration should only be carried out by EFACEC technical personnel. Table 9.8. Description of the jumpers of the piggy-back board for RS485 interface. Jumper Shunt Pins Operation Mode Description PP1 Open Ending of bus 485 without line adjustment. Closed Ending of bus 485 with line adjustment of 120Ω. Open Ending of bus 485 without Open-Line Fail Safe Ending. Closed Fail safe ending in bus 485. Open Ending of bus 485 without Open-Line Fail Safe Ending. Closed Fail safe ending in bus 485. PP2 PP3 9 Figure 9.18. Location of the jumpers in the piggy-back board for RS485 interface (revision A). The technical personnel should be adequately trained in the application field and know the correct handling procedures of this type of equipment. The failure to comply with these recommendations may endanger the correct operation of the TPU S420 and cause personnel and/or equipment damage. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-26 Chapter 9 - Maintenance 9.3.2. SOFTWARE Restore of default parameters The TPU S420 allows restoring at any time the default parameters of the protection functions, automation functions and configuration. This function is useful when one desires to make an extensive change of the relay settings and ensures that the group of parameters will have again known values. It is important to mention that in the case of the functions data, the restore of default values implicates that the function changes automatically to the Out of Service state. Besides that, the active scenario will become Setting Group 1. There are two possibilities to restore the default parameters: full restore and restore per function. Full restore is executed through the system menu as described in Restore Default Parameters This process can be independently executed for the default data, logic and strings. The restore per function is only possible for data. There is not the same possibility for default logic and strings as it is obligatory to ensure the coherence of the unit’s automation logic as well as the strings of the different modules. To restore a specific group of data is necessary to enter the System Password: 097531. After entering the password a new item will be presented in each of the configuration menus of the TPU S420 functions: Default Values. Funções de Protecção Protecção Máximo Corrente de Fases Protecção Máximo Corrente de Fases Cenário 1 Cenário 2 Cenário 3 Cenário 4 Configuração Cenário Valores por Defeito ¤/¥ mudar página; E aceitar; C cancelar 9 Figure 9.19. Phase Overcurrent Menu – Default Values. By selecting this item and executing the associated order the default values will be restored. 9.3.3. CALIBRATION The calibration allows the TPU S420 to collect information about the hardware responsible for the analogue-digital conversion of the measurements. This information is used to compensate the non-linearity and deviations from the nominal value introduced by these elements in the several measurements. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-27 Chapter 9 - Maintenance New calibration is required whenever the CT&VT Board, the A/D Board or the CPU Board is replaced, both for reasons of malfunction or for the need to change the available options. To execute the calibration of the TPU S420, specific configurations of the Inputs and Outputs Base Board are necessary. Entradas e Saídas Carta I/O Base Parâmetros Saídas Configuração Lógica Configuração Lógica S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> Config: Config: Config: Config: Config: Comando Fecho Calibração Nada Atribuído Nada Atribuído Nada Atribuído Nada Atribuído ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Operação Operação S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: Operação: IMPULSO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO SINALIZACAO ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Tempo de Impulso Tempo de Impulso S1> S2> S3> S4> S5> T T T T T Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: Impulso: 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 9 ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.20. Configuration of the Inputs/Outputs Base Board for calibration. The configurations are shown in Figure 9.20 and can be consulted in the Menus Interface of the TPU S420. The configuration can be directly made in the TPU S420. It is necessary to enter the SCADA password and confirm the changes in the end. Alternatively, one can use the WinSettings module of the WinProt to make these configurations. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-28 Chapter 9 - Maintenance The calibration process consists in injecting known values of the analogue measurements in the corresponding inputs, with a pre-defined sequence. The control of that sequence is automatically made by the unit itself. As soon as it concludes the calculation of the compensation factors, it operates on a digital output indicating that the next group of values of analogue measurements should be applied. The process can become automatic by using a test bag with sequence definition capacity. Phases Calibration Three-phase systems of voltages and currents with the fundamental frequency should be injected in the analogue inputs of the TPU S420 corresponding to the phases. The initial state corresponds to applying voltages and currents with an effective value of 0,00 p.u. Then the phase calibration process should be initiated by executing the corresponding command in the Calibration menu. Menu Sistema Calibração Calibração Transf. de Medida Calibrados: ON Nova Nova Calibração Calibração (Fases) (Fases) Nova Calibração (Neutros) Recuperar Calibração de Fábrica ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.21. Phases Calibration. From this moment on, the values indicated in Table 9.9 must be injected on every new operation of the output 1 of the Base Board. Table 9.9. Phases Calibration Values. State Single Voltages RMS Value [V] Currents RMS Value [p.u.] Initial State 0,00 0,00 State #1 3,00 0,05 State #2 38,00 0,20 State #3 38,00 0,70 State #4 38,00 1,20 State #5 64,00 0,20 State #6 64,00 0,70 State #7 64,00 1,20 State #8 110,00 0,20 State #9 110,00 0,70 State #10 110,00 1,20 State #11 125,00 2,00 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9 9-29 Chapter 9 - Maintenance The values are presented in p.u., regarding the nominal values of the CTs and VTs. The absolute values to apply to CTs and VTs are obtained by multiplying the previous values by the respective nominal values. Neutral Calibration Voltages and currents should be injected with the fundamental frequency in the analogue inputs of the TPU S420 corresponding to the neutral current and fourth voltage input. The initial state corresponds to applying the currents with an effective value of 0,00 p.u. Then the neutral calibration process should be initiated by executing the corresponding command in the Calibration menu. Menu Sistema Calibração Calibração Transf. de Medida Calibrados: ON Nova Calibração (Fases) Nova Calibração (Neutros) Recuperar Calibração de Fábrica ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.22. Neutral Calibration. From this moment on, the values indicated in Table 9.10 must be injected on every new operation of the output 1 of the Base Board. Table 9.10. Neutral Calibration Values. State Voltage RMS Value [V] Current RMS Value [p.u.] Initial State 0,00 0,00 State #1 3,00 0,05 State #2 38,00 0,20 State #3 64,00 0,70 State #4 110,00 1,20 State #5 125,00 2,00 9 The values are presented in p.u., regarding the nominal current of the CTs. The absolute values to apply to CTs are obtained by multiplying the previous values by the respective nominal current. Default Calibration Restore In the event of a problem occurring in the calibration it is possible to use again the default defined calibration values. For that purpose execute the command existing in the Calibration menu. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-30 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Menu Sistema Calibração Calibração Transf. de Medida Calibrados: ON Nova Calibração (Fases) Nova Calibração (Neutros) Recuperar Calibração de Fábrica ¤/¥ mover cursor; E aceitar; C cancelar Figure 9.23. Calibration Menu – Default Calibration Restore. The indication Calibrated Measurement Transf.: OFF should be presented after the completion of the restoring process. When restoring the default calibration, the precision of the measurement indicated in the datasheet in no longer guaranteed. Therefore, after default data restore, a new calibration process should always be performed. 9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-31 Chapter 9 - Maintenance 9.4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) I have changed the automation logic using WinLogic, I have downloaded it correctly to the protection, but the changes do not seem to have been updated. What is the problem? For the automation logic changes to be effective, the relay must be reset after sending the new data. There are two options to do so: Option 1 - in the TPU: Enter System Password: 097531. Give the order Protection Reset with the "E" key and confirm that order again with the "E" key. Option 2 - in WinLogic: In Communications menu click TPU Reset. I need to change the Location String of a TPU. How should I do it? Is it necessary to reset the protection? To change the Location String of any protection of the X420 range is only necessary to do the following: Change the Location String in the SCADA Configuration > Hardware Configuration > Parameters menu. In the SCADA Configuration > Hardware Configuration > Information menu give the order Neuron Chip Reset. Note: this process only works if the Neuron Chip is synchronized with the TPU, which can be checked through the information Neuron Status: 0x1* in the Information menu. It is not necessary to disconnect neither the LAN nor the RTU. Is the distributed database implemented in the TPU x420 compatible with what was implemented in the previous generations of TPUs? The architecture currently implemented allows the broadcast of digital signals, represented to the bit, analogue measurements and counters. It is compatible with the units of the previous generation, TPU x410, but not with generations prior to that. Can I configure the system to communicate with two different units, for example a TD420 and a S420? TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-32 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Yes. Among all units of the x420 family the distributed database structure is exactly the same: 64 digital entities, 3 measurements and 3 counters. It is possible to configure any of the units to send or receive information through the DDB for any of the others. In the configuration of the earth fault overcurrent protections, which is the nominal current referred as "p.u." in the WinProt? The "p.u." is always referred to the nominal current of the source chosen for the residual current. For the external transformer, that current input is the input of the auxiliary CT. For the sum it is the input of the phase CTs because it is from them that the sum of the currents is made. For example, for a TPU with phase CT = 5A and neutral CT = 1A, the nominal value will be equal to: 1A for the external source, and 5A in the case of the internal sum of the phase currents. How can I easily clear all registers stored during the tests to one protection? The quickest way to clear is the following: In the TPU: Enter the System Password: 097531. Go to the System Menu > Clear Registers in Memory Select each one of the types of registers, give the clear order with the "E" key and confirm that order again with the "E" key. The TPU S420 does not work. What can I do? To solve this problem check the following: Check if the supply connections are well executed by checking the connection scheme. Check if the supply is on and with the correct supply voltage. 9 Check if the fuse of the unit’s internal power supply is not broken. I cannot make the TPU S420 to have the flag GC OK from CLP 500URT in ON state. What is the problem? For the TPU S420 to have GC OK in ON state it is necessary that it is configured to send all entities that are configured in the database of the CLP 500URT to be received from that unit. Confirm in the database of the CLP 500URT which are the entities to send and then confirm if the unit is actually sending them. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-33 Chapter 9 - Maintenance In case some of the expected digital entities are not being sent, it can happen that it has not been reset yet after the sending of the automation logic data. Do not forget that the changes in the logic data are only effective after the TPU reset. I cannot communicate with the TPU S420 through LAN. What is going on? To communicate through LAN it is necessary that all elements of the network are correctly configured. Check the following: Check if the database of the CLP 500URT has the correct configuration to communicate with the unit. Check if the Location String allocated to the unit is coherent in the database of the CLP 500URT and in the TPU itself. Check if the Neuron Chip is correctly configured. Otherwise, it is necessary to execute the LoadNodes program to configure it. Check if the serial number in the WinProt database is in accordance with that of the TPU. The current measurements presented by the TPU S420 are wrong. How can I correct them? The current measurements executed by the TPU S420 depend on several factors, including the error inherent to the calculation of the measurements values. In case these errors are clearly above the precision specified for the unit, it can be due to one of the following causes: The TPU is not correctly calibrated, so it is not able to make the necessary corrections to the measurements values. To correct that, it is necessary to calibrate the TPU again. The saved firmware is not in accordance with the transformers board existing in the unit. Confirm if the information presented in the Information menu corresponds exactly to the existing transformers board and if the frequency for which the firmware is prepared corresponds to operational frequency. The transformation ratio of the measurement transformers configured in the TPU is not correct. For the measurements of the differential currents, check if the configuration of the transformer nominal values (nominal voltages and connections group) is correct. I cannot communicate with the TPU S420 through the serial port. What is going on? To communicate through the serial port it is necessary to: Check if the serial port configuration is in accordance with the defined for the serial port used. To determine the correct configuration see the WinProt User’s Manual. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-34 9 Chapter 9 - Maintenance Check if the cable used is the appropriate. A transparent serial cable with D9 plugs should be used. Check if the serial number in the WinProt database is in accordance with that of the TPU. The TPU S420 does not register the transitions of the digital inputs and cannot operate on the digital outputs of an expansion board. What is the problem? To identify and correct this problem it is necessary to: Check if the voltage range applied in the digital inputs corresponds to the operation voltage of the board’s inputs. Check the polarity of the inputs connections. Check that the expansion board is correctly mounted in the TPU. Check that the configuration of the board type is in accordance with the board mounted. Check if the board is configured as PRESENT. 9 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, Revision 2.2.0, N. ASID09000127, December 2011 9-35 10 Chapter 10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This chapter presents in detail all technical and functional characteristics of the TPU S420, the protection and control of Medium Voltage line unit. Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Analogue current inputs Analogue voltage inputs Power Supply Binary Inputs Binary Outputs Communication Interfaces Frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz Rated Current 1A/5 A Thermal Withstand 5 A / 15 A continuous 50 A / 200 A for 1 s 4th Input Rated Current 5 A / 1 A / 0,2 A / 0,04 A Thermal Withstand 15 A / 5 A / 1,5 A / 0,5 A continuous 200 A / 50 A / 10 A / 4 A for 1 s Burden < 0,25 VA @ In Frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz Rated voltage (phase-to-phase) 100 / 110 / 115 / 120 V Overvoltage 1,5 Un continuous; 2,5 Un for 10 s Burden < 0,25 VA @ Un Voltage range 24 V d.c. (19 - 72 V d.c.) 48 V d.c. (19 - 72 V d.c.) 110 / 125 V a.c./ d.c. (88 - 300 V d.c./ 80 - 265 V a.c.) 220 / 240 V a.c./ d.c. (88 - 300 V d.c./80 - 265 V a.c.) Burden 12 to 30 W / 20 to 60 VA Ripple at DC Auxiliary Power Supply < 12% Rated Voltage / Working Range 24 V 48 V 110/125 V 220/250 V (19 ... 138) V d.c. (30 ... 120) V d.c. (80 ... 220) V d.c. (150…300) V d.c. Power Consumption < 0,05 W (1,5 mA @ 24 V d.c.) < 0,1 W (1,5 mA @ 48 V d.c.) < 0,2 W (1,5 mA @ 125 V d.c.) < 0,4 W (1,5 mA @ 250 V d.c.) Debounce Time 24 V 48 V 110/125 V 220/250 V 1 .. 128 ms Chatter Filter 1 .. 255 Validation Time of double inputs 1 .. 60 s Rated Voltage 250 V a.c./ d.c. Rated Current 5A Making Capacity 1 s @ 10 A; 0,2 s @ 30 A Breaking Capacity d.c. : 1/0,4/0,2 A @ 48/110/220 V; L/R < 40 ms a.c. : 1250 VA (250 V / 5 A); cos > 0,4 Voltage between open contacts 1 kV rms 1 min Operating Mode Pulsed / Latched Pulse Duration 0,02 .. 5 s Lonworks Fibre Type Wavelength Connector Max. Distance Ethernet Fibre Type Wavelength Connector Max. Distance Glass optical fibre Piggy-back Fibre Type Wavelength Connector Max. Distance Plastic optical fibre Piggy-back Fibre Type Wavelength Max. Distance TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 Multimode glass optical fibre 50/125 µm or 62,5/125 µm 880 nm or 1320 nm ST 30 km Multimode glass optical fibre 50/125 µm or 62,5/125 µm 1300 nm ST (SC optional) 2 km 10 Multimode glass optical fibre 50/125 µm or 62,5/125 µm 820 nm ST 1,7 km Plastic optical fibre (POF) 1 mm 650 nm 45 m 10-2 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Insulation Tests EMC – Immunity Tests EMC – Emission Tests CE Marking High Voltage Test EN 60255-5 2,5 kV a.c. 1 min 50 Hz 3 kV d.c. 1 min (power supply) Impulse Voltage Test EN 60255-5 5 kV 1,2/50 s, 0,5 J Insulation Resistance EN 60255-5 > 100 M 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test IEC 60255-22-1 Class III EN 61000-4-12 2,5 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 EN 60255-22-2 Class IV 8 kV contact; 15 kV air Electromagnetic field EN 61000-4-3 80 MHz–1000 MHz; 10 V/m; 80% AM 900 5 MHz; 10 V/m; 50%; 200Hz Fast Transient Disturbance EN 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV 4 kV 5/50 ns Surge Immunity Test EN 61000-4-5 4/2 kV (power supply) 2/1 kV (I/O) Conducted RF Disturbance Test EN 61000-4-6 10 V rms, 150 kHz–80 MHz @ 1 kHz 80% am Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test EN 61000-4-8 30 A/m cont; 300 A/m 3 s Voltage Variations Immunity Tests EN 61000-4-11 IEC 60255-11 10 ms @ 70%; 100 ms @ 40% 1 s @ 40%; 5 s @ 0% Interruptions in Auxiliary Supply EN 61000-4-11 IEC 60255-11 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 and 200 ms Voltage range EN 61000-3-3 Class A Current harmonics EN 61000-3-2 Class A Radiated Emission EN 55011; EN 55022 30 – 1000 MHz class A Conducted Emission EN 55011; EN55022 0,15 – 30 MHz class A Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive Immunity EN 61000-6-2 : 2005 EN 50263 : 1999 Emission EN 61000-6-4 : 2007 EN 50263 : 1999 Low Voltage Directive Mechanical Tests Environmental Tests Weight @ 500 V d.c. EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11:2009 EN 60255-5 : 2001 Vibration Tests (sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1, IEC 60870-2-2, Class Cm, 2g, 6Hz to 200Hz Shock and Bump Tests IEC 60255-21-2, IEC 60870-2-2, Class Cm, 30g, 11ms Protection rate against mechanical actions (IK) EN 50102, IK07 Operating Temperature Range - 10 ºC to + 55 ºC Storage Temperature Range - 25 ºC to + 70 ºC Cold Test, IEC 60068-2-1 - 10 ºC, 72h Dry Heat Test, IEC 60068-2-2 + 55 ºC, 72h Salt Mist Test, IEC 60068-2-11 96h Damp Heat Test, IEC 60068-2-78 + 40 ºC, 93% RH, 96h Storage Temperature Test, IEC 60068-2-48 - 25 ºC + 70 ºC Degree of Protection according to EN 60529, frontal side, flush mounted IP54 Degree of Protection according to EN 60259, rear side IP20 10 8 kg TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10-3 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Definite/Inverse Time Low Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Phase Faults High Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Phase Faults Curves NI, VI, EI, LI of IEC standard NI, VI, EI, LI of IEEE standard Operational Current 0,2 .. 20 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s TM regulation 0,05 .. 1,5 Timer Accuracy 10 ms (definite time) 3% or 10 ms (inverse time) Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Start Value of Inverse Time Protection 1,2 Iop Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Static Reset Time 30 ms Operational Current 0,2 .. 40 pu Time Delay 0 .. 60 s Min. Operating Time 30 ms (with I Timer Accuracy Definite Time Universal Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Phase Faults Current Accuracy 5% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,95 Max. Reset time 30 ms Operational Current 0,2 .. 40 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s Timer Accuracy High Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Earth Faults Definite Time Universal Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Earth Faults 3% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Current 0,1 .. 40 pu Time Delay 0 .. 60 s Min. Operating Time 30 ms (with I Directional Earth Fault Protection 2 Iop) 10 ms Current Accuracy 5% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,95 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Curves NI, VI, EI, LI of IEC standard NI, VI, EI, LI of IEEE standard Operational Current 0,1 .. 20 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s TM regulation 0,5 .. 15 Timer Accuracy 10 ms (definite time) 3% or 10 ms (inverse time) Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Start Value of Inverse Time Protection 1,2 Iop Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Static Reset Time 30 ms Operational Current 0,1 .. 40 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s Timer Accuracy Directional Phase Fault Protection 10 ms Current Accuracy Timer Accuracy Definite/Inverse Time Low Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Earth Faults 2 Iop) 10 ms 10 ms Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Available Phase Relations 30º .. 60º (forward/reverse) Memory duration after voltage drop 2,5 s Available Phase Relations -90º .. 90º (forward/reverse) Min. Zero sequence Voltage 0,005.. 0,8 pu TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10 10-4 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Resistive Earth Fault Protection High Set Phase Balance Protection Operational Current 0,125 .. 5 pu TM Regulation 0,05 .. 1,5 Start set for recloser 0,125 .. 5 pu Timer Accuracy 3% or Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Current 0,1 .. 10 pu Time Delay 0 .. 60 s Min. Operating Time 30 ms (with I Timer Accuracy Definite/Inverse Time Low Set Phase Balance Protection Negative Vs. Direct Sequence Overcurrent Protection Ratio 5% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,95 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Curves NI, VI, EI, LI of IEC standard NI, VI, EI, LI of IEEE standard Operational Current 0,1 .. 5 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s TM Regulation 0,5 .. 15 Timer Accuracy 10 ms (definite time) 3% or 10 ms (inverse time) Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Start Value of Inverse Time Protection 1,2 Iop Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Static Reset Time 30 ms Negative sequence / direct sequence ratio 20 .. 100 % Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s Minimum value of the negative sequence 10 % I n 5% (minimum 3% I n) Reset Ratio 0,92 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Voltage 0,05 .. 1 pu (VREF = VPHASE-TO-PHASE) Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s 10 ms Voltage Accuracy 2% Voltage Absence Validation Current < 3% I n Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Voltage 0,5 .. 1,5 pu (VREF = VPHASE-TO-PHASE) Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s Timer Accuracy Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection 10 ms Current Accuracy Timer Accuracy Overvoltage Protection 2 Iop) 10 ms Current Accuracy Timer Accuracy Undervoltage Protection 10 ms 10 ms Voltage Accuracy 2% Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Voltage 0,005 .. 0,8 pu (VREF = V ZERO SEQUENCE) Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s Timer Accuracy 10 ms Voltage Accuracy 2% Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Reset Time 30 ms TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10 10-5 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Underfrequency Protection Operational Frequency 0,8 .. 1 pu Changing Rate - 0,1 .. -10 Hz/s Time Delay 0,07 .. 120 s Minimum Voltage of Operation 0,05 .. 1 pu (VREF = VPHASE-TO-PHASE) Timer Accuracy Overfrequency Protection 10 ms Frequency Accuracy 0,1 % (0,05 Hz) Max. Reset Time 30 ms Operational Frequency 1 .. 1,2 pu Changing Rate + 0,1 .. 10 Hz/s Time Delay 0,07 .. 120 s Minimum Voltage of Operation 0,05 .. 1 pu (VREF = VPHASE-TO-PHASE) Timer Accuracy Overload Protection 2nd Definite/Inverse Time Low Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Phase Faults 2nd Definite/Inverse Time Low Set Overcurrent Protection for Phase to Earth Faults Automatic Reclosing 10 ms Frequency Accuracy 0,1 % (0,05 Hz) Max. Reset Time 30 ms Curves IEC 60255-8 Base Current 0,2 .. 4 pu Trip Threshold 50 .. 250 % (I base) Alarm Level 50 .. 100 % (Trip Temperature) Reset Level 10 .. 100 % (Trip Temperature) Time Constant 1 .. 500 min Timer Accuracy 5% Curves NI, VI, EI, LI of IEC standard NI, VI, EI, LI of IEEE standard Operational Current 0,2 .. 20 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s TM Regulation 0,05 .. 1,5 Timer Accuracy 10 ms (definite time) 3% or 10 ms (inverse time) Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Start value of inverse time protection 1,2 Iop Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Static Reset Time 30 ms Curves NI, VI, EI, LI of IEC standard NI, VI, EI, LI of IEEE standard Operational Current 0,1 .. 20 pu Time Delay 0,04 .. 300 s TM regulation 0,05 .. 1,5 Timer Accuracy 10 ms (definite time) 3% or 10 ms (inverse time) Current Accuracy 3% (minimum 3% I n) Start value of inverse time protection 1,2 Iop Reset Ratio 0,96 Max. Static Reset Time 30 ms Type of Cycle Fast/ Delayed Reclose Time of the Fast Cycles 0 .. 1 s Isolation Time 0,1 .. 60 s Blocking Time 1 .. 60 s Circuit Breaker Manoeuvre Time 0,05 .. 60 s Maximum Number of Cycles 5 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10 10-6 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications Synchronism and Voltage Check Operation Mode Manual / Automatic (independent) Verification Type OFF / LLLB / DLLB / LLDB / DLDB / Release (independent for each operation mode) Bar voltage source A / B / C / AB / BC / CA Bar/Line Voltage Ratio 0,10 .. 10,0 pu Bar voltage angle -180,0 .. 180,0 º Threshold for voltage absence 0,05 .. 0,80 pu Threshold for voltage presence 0,20 .. 1,20 pu Maximum voltage 0,50 .. 1,50 pu Minimum Frequency 47,0 .. 50,0 Hz (nominal freq = 50Hz) 57,0 .. 60,0 Hz (nominal freq = 60Hz) Maximum Frequency 50,0 .. 53,0 Hz (nominal freq = 50Hz) 60,0 .. 63,0 Hz (nominal freq = 60Hz) Voltage difference 0,01 .. 0,50 pu (independent for each mode) Frequency difference 0,02 .. 4,00 Hz (independent for each mode) Phase difference 2,00 .. 60,0 º (independent for each mode) Command time 0,0 .. 600,0 s (independent for each mode) Confirmation time 0,0 .. 60,0 s (independent for each mode) Time accuracy 10 ms Voltage accuracy 0,5% Frequency accuracy 20 mHz Angle accuracy 2º Program Shedding/ Shedding+Restoration Confirmation Time of Stable Voltage 1 .. 300 s Time Delay 1 .. 300 s Program Shedding/ Shedding+Restoration Confirmation Time of Stable Frequency 1 .. 3600 s Time Delay 1 .. 300 s Time Delay 0,05 .. 10 s Confirmation Time of Trip Circuit Failure 0,05 .. 10 s Circuit Breaker and Disconnector Supervision Open Confirmation Time 0,05 .. 60 s Close Confirmation Time 0,05 .. 60 s Measurement Accuracy Currents 0,5 % I n Voltages 0,5 % Vn Power 1 % Sn Frequency 0,05 % f n Accuracy 2 % (Line length) Maximum number of logged faults 10 Resolution 1 ms Maximum Number of Events per Register 256 Number of Logged Events > 28000 Sampling Frequency 1000 Hz@ 50 Hz Total Time Logged 60 sec. Configurable Settings High Level Value Low Level Value Timer Accuracy 1s Measurements P, Q Total Time Logged 1 month Voltage Restoration Frequency Restoration Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Fault Locator Event Chronological Logging Oscillography Analogue Comparators Load Diagram TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10 10-7 Chapter 10 - Technical Specifications SNTP Synchronization SNTP servers number 2 Server requested time 1 .. 1440 min Maximum variation 1 .. 1000 ms Packages minimum number 1 .. 25 Server timeout 1 .. 3600 s Functioning mode Multicast/Unicast 10 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 10-8 11 Chapter 11. ANNEXES The annexes presented next provide complementary information to the previous chapters such as the versions and the ordering form of the TPU S420. It also provides all the information necessary to the configuration of the protection, including the databases of measures and the option list of inputs, outputs and alarms. Chapter 11 - Annexes TABLE OF CONTENTS ANNEX A. ORDERING FORM.........................................................................................11-3 ANNEX B. MEASUREMENTS TABLE ..................................................................................11-5 ANNEX C. INPUTS OPTIONS TABLE .................................................................................11-9 ANNEX D. OUTPUT OPTIONS TABLE .............................................................................11-13 ANNEX E. ALARM OPTIONS TABLE................................................................................11-18 Total of pages of the chapter: 19 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-2 Chapter 11 - Annexes Annex A. ORDERING FORM The available functions list of each one of the three TPU S420 versions is presented on the following table. VERSION AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS S420 – I S420 – C S420 – S Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51) Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51N) Directional Phase Fault Overcurrent (67) Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent (67N) Resistive Earth Fault (51N) Phase Overvoltage Protection (59) Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (59N) Undervoltage Protection (27) Underfrequency and Overfrequency Protection (81) Phase Balance Protection (46) Overload Protection (49) 2nd Time Low Set Phase Faults Overcurrent Protection (51/51N) Automatic Reclosing (79) Synchronism Check and Voltage Presence (25) Load Shedding and Restoration after Voltage Trip Load Shedding and Restoration after Frequency Trip Load Shedding and Restoration after Voltage Trip (centralised version) Load Shedding and Restoration after Frequency Trip (centralised version) Circuit Breaker Failure (62BF) Trip Circuit Supervision (62) Logical Trip Lock (68) Protection Trip Transfer (43) Circuit Breaker and Disconnector Supervision Programmable Logic Distributed Automation Oscillography Analogue Comparators Event Chronological Logging Load Diagram Fault Locator The next page shows the ordering form of the TPU S420, including the different selectable options. For example: TPU S420-Ed1-S-5A-1A-100V-100V-50Hz-D-1-2-ETH2-0-1-PT Indicates it is a TPU S420 protection, edition 1, version S, with phases CT of 5A nominal value, fourth current input of 1A nominal value, phase VT of 100V nominal value (phase-to-phase voltage), fourth voltage input of 100V, all inputs with 50Hz nominal frequency prepared to operate with a supply voltage of 220/250V (option D), with the first inputs/outputs expansion board of type 1 (9 inputs and 6 outputs) and the second expansion board of type 1 (9 inputs and 6 outputs), with communications board redundant Ethernet Isolated Copper + Optical Fibre Interface (2x100BaseTX + 2x100BaseFX) (ETH2), RS232 interface on serial port 1 and RS485 on serial port 2 and man-machine interface in Portuguese. TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-3 11 Chapter 11 - Annexes - TPU S420 – Ed1 Version TPU S420 – I TPU S420 – C TPU S420 – S - - - - - - - - - - - I C S Rated current on phase current transformers 1A 5A 1A 5A th Rated current on 4 input current 0,04 A 0,2 A 1A 5A Rated voltage on input voltage (V PHASE-TO-PHASE) 100 V 110 V 115 V 120 V 0,04A 0,2A 1A 5A 100V 110V 115V 120V th Rated voltage on 4 input voltage (VPHASE-TO-PHASE) 100 V 110 V 115 V 120 V Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 100V 110V 115V 120V 50Hz 60Hz Power Supply Nominal Value 24 V d.c. 48 V d.c. 110/125 V d.c./V a.c. 220/240 V d.c./V a.c. Expansion Board I/O 1 Absent Type 1 - 9 Inputs + 6 Outputs Type 2 - 16 Inputs Type 3 - 15 Outputs Expansion Board I/O 2 Absent Type 1 - 9 Inputs + 6 Outputs Type 2 - 16 Inputs Type 3 - 15 Outputs Communication Protocols Absent Serial DNP 3.0 Lonworks with optical interface, without Auto Power Supply Lonworks with optical interface, with Auto Power Supply Lonworks with twisted-pair interface, without Auto Power Supply Lonworks with twisted-pair interface, with Auto Power Supply IEC 60870-5-104 over Ethernet 100BaseTx redundant IEC 60870-5-104 over Ethernet 100BaseFx redund ant IEC 61850 over Ethernet 100BaseTx redundant IEC 61850 over Ethernet 100BaseFx redundant Serial Interface Port 1 RS 232 (by default) RS 485 Plastic Optical Fibre Glass Optical Fibre Serial Interface Port 2 RS 232 (by default) RS 485 Plastic Optical Fibre Glass Optical Fibre Language Portuguese English French Spanish TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 A B C D 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 DNP LON1 LON2 LON3 LON4 ETH1 ETH2 850T 850F 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 PT UK FR ES 11-4 11 Chapter 11 - Annexes Annex B. MEASUREMENTS TABLE The measurements table presents the information related to all measurements internally available on the TPU S420. This information should be used to perform the configuration of the database of the CLP 500RTU whenever you desire to receive measurements from the TPU through LAN. The content of the table fields is described below. Field Description Identifier Measurement internal identifier. Internal Descriptive Measurement internal descriptive. Interface Descriptive Descriptive associated with the measurement presented to the user. Measurement Description Description of the measurement content. 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-5 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Internal Descriptive Interface Descriptive Measurement Description Measurements (floats) 1 idIA IA Current Phase A Current 2 idIB IB Current Phase B Current 3 idIC IC Current Phase C Current 4 idII Negative Current Negative Current 5 idI03 IN Current Sum Corrente Residual por soma 6 idIMAX Maximum Current Current Peak 37 idI0 IN Current Corrente de neutro / cuba 43 idUA UA Voltage Phase A Voltage 44 idUB UB Voltage Phase B Voltage 45 idUC UC Voltage Phase C Voltage 46 idUI Negative Voltage Negative Voltage 47 idU03 UN Voltage Sum Zero Sequence Voltage (by sum) 48 idUAB UAB Voltage Phases AB Composed Voltage 49 idUBC UBC Voltage Phases BC Composed Voltage 50 idUCA UCA Voltage Phases CA Composed Voltage 51 idFREQ Frequency Frequency 52 idPA Phase A Active Power Active Power Phase A 53 idQA Phase A Reactive Power Phase A Reactive Power 54 idPB Phase B Active Power Active Power Phase B 55 idQB Phase B Reactive Power Phase B Reactive Power 56 idPC Phase C Active Power Active Power Phase C 57 idQC Phase C Reactive Power Phase C Reactive Power 58 idPACT Active Power Three-phase Active Power 59 idPREACT Reactive Power Three-phase Reactive Power 60 idFPOT Power Factor Power Factor 61 idPMAX Active Power Peak Active Power Peak 62 idENERG Active Energy Supplied Counter of Active Energy Supplied 63 idENREACT Reactive Energy Supplied Counter of Reactive Energy Supplied 64 idENERG_REVERSE Active Energy Received Counter of Active Energy Received 65 idENREACT_REVERSE Reactive Energy Received Counter of Reactive Energy Received 112 idU0 UN Voltage Zero Sequence Voltage 113 idU4 Voltage U4 4th Voltage (ex Busbar) 114 idFREQ4 U4 Frequency 4th Voltage Frequency 115 idUDIF Voltage Dif Voltage Difference 116 idFDIF Frequency Dif Frequency Difference 117 idPHDIF Phase Dif Frequency Difference 146 idSUMIA_D Sum I² A Circuit Breaker Sum of I² cut in Phase A (Circuit Breaker) 147 idSUMIB_D Sum I² B Circuit Breaker Sum of I² cut in Phase B (Circuit Breaker) 148 idSUMIC_D Sum I² C Circuit Breaker Sum of I² cut in Phase C (Circuit Breaker) 179 idTEMPA Temperature Phase A Phase A Temperature 180 idTEMPB Temperature Phase B Phase B Temperature 181 idTEMPC Temperature Phase C Phase C Temperature 182 idTEMPMED Average Temperature Average Temperature 183 idTEMPMAX Maximum Temperature Maximum Temperature 187 idICORTA_D I Cut A Circuit Breaker Current cut in Phase A (Circuit Breaker) 188 idICORTB_D I Cut B Circuit Breaker Current cut in Phase B (Circuit Breaker) 189 idICORTC_D I Cut C Circuit Breaker Current cut in Phase C (Circuit Breaker) TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-6 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Internal Descriptive Interface Descriptive Measurement Description 223 idLD_DISTANPERCET Fault Distance (%) Distance to the Fault (%) 224 idLD_DISTANKM Fault Distance (km) Distance to the Fault (km) 225 idLD_DISTANMILE Fault Distance (mile) Distance to the Fault (mile) 226 idLD_RESITPRIM Resistance Primary Resistance (values of the Primary) 227 idLD_RESISTSECUN Resistance Secondary Resistance (values of the Secondary) 228 idLD_REACTPRIM Reactance Primary Reactance (values of the Primary ) 229 idLD_REACTSECUN Reactance Secondary Reactance (values of the Secondary) 230 idLD_RESISTDEF Fault Resistance Resistance of the fault 232 idGENERIC1 Generic Measurement 1 Measurement derived from other measurements 233 idGENERIC2 Generic Measurement 2 Measurement derived from other measurements 234 idGENERIC3 Generic Measurement 3 Measurement derived from other measurements 235 idGENERIC4 Generic Measurement 4 Measurement derived from other measurements 236 idGENERIC5 Generic Measurement 5 Measurement derived from other measurements 237 idGENERIC6 Generic Measurement 6 Measurement derived from other measurements 238 idGENERIC7 Generic Measurement 7 Measurement derived from other measurements 239 idGENERIC8 Generic Measurement 8 Measurement derived from other measurements Measurements (shorts) 4099 4107 4108 4111 idNUMMANOB_D idNUMMANOB_SECTERR idNUMMANOB_SECISOL idNUMMANOB_SECBYP CB Switch Count Gnd Disc Swit Count Isol Disc Swit Count Byp Disc Swit Count Number of Manoeuvres of the Circuit Breaker Number of Earth Disconnector Manoeuvres Number of Ins Disconnector Manoeuvres Number of Bypass Disconnector Manoeuvres 4114 idNUMMANOB_SECBAR Bus Disc Swit Count Number of Manoeuvres of Bar Disconnector 4115 idNUMMANOB_SECBAR1 Bus Disc1 Swit Count Number of Manoeuvres of Bar Disconnector 1 4116 idNUMMANOB_SECBAR2 Bus Disc2 Swit Count Number of Manoeuvres of Bar Disconnector 2 4122 idNUMDISP_D CB Trip Count Number of the Circuit-breaker trips Measurements BDD (floats) 256 idPACT_BDD_2 DDB Measurement 1 Generic Measurement 1 of the DDB 257 idPREACT_BDD_2 DDB Measurement 2 Generic Measurement 2 of the DDB idPACT_BDD_3 DDB Measurement 3 Generic Measurement 3 of the DDB 259 idPREACT_BDD_3 DDB Measurement 4 Generic Measurement 4 of the DDB 260 idPACT_BDD_4 DDB Measurement 5 Generic Measurement 5 of the DDB 261 idPREACT_BDD_4 DDB Measurement 6 Generic Measurement 6 of the DDB 262 idPACT_BDD_5 DDB Measurement 7 Generic Measurement 7 of the DDB 263 idPREACT_BDD_5 DDB Measurement 8 Generic Measurement 8 of the DDB 264 idPACT_BDD_6 DDB Measurement 9 Generic Measurement 9 of the DDB 265 idPREACT_BDD_6 DDB Measurement 10 Generic Measurement 10 of the DDB 266 idUAB_BDD_2 DDB Measurement 11 Generic Measurement 11 of the DDB 267 idUAB_BDD_3 DDB Measurement 12 Generic Measurement 12 of the DDB 268 idUAB_BDD_4 DDB Measurement 13 Generic Measurement 13 of the DDB 269 idUAB_BDD_5 DDB Measurement 14 Generic Measurement 14 of the DDB 270 idUAB_BDD_6 DDB Measurement 15 Generic Measurement 15 of the DDB 271 idMEDIDA_BDD_1 DDB Measurement 16 Generic Measurement 16 of the DDB 272 idMEDIDA_BDD_2 DDB Measurement 17 Generic Measurement 17 of the DDB 273 idMEDIDA_BDD_3 DDB Measurement 18 Generic Measurement 18 of the DDB 274 idMEDIDA_BDD_4 DDB Measurement 19 Generic Measurement 19 of the DDB 275 idMEDIDA_BDD_5 DDB Measurement 20 Generic Measurement 20 of the DDB 258 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-7 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Internal Descriptive Interface Descriptive Measurement Description Measurements BDD (shorts) 4352 idTOMADA_BDD_2 DDB Counter 1 Generic Counter 1 of the DDB 4353 idTOMADA_BDD_3 DDB Counter 2 Generic Counter 2 of the DDB 4354 idTOMADA_BDD_4 DDB Counter 3 Generic Counter 3 of the DDB 4355 idTOMADA_BDD_5 DDB Counter 4 Generic Counter 4 of the DDB 4356 idTOMADA_BDD_6 DDB Counter 5 Generic Counter 5 of the DDB 4357 idCONTADOR_BDD_1 DDB Counter 6 Generic Counter 6 of the DDB 4358 idCONTADOR_BDD_2 DDB Counter 7 Generic Counter 7 of the DDB 4359 idCONTADOR_BDD_3 DDB Counter 8 Generic Counter 8 of the DDB 4360 idCONTADOR_BDD_4 DDB Counter 9 Generic Counter 9 of the DDB 4361 idCONTADOR_BDD_5 DDB Counter 10 Generic Counter 10 of the DDB 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-8 Chapter 11 - Annexes Annex C. INPUTS OPTIONS TABLE The inputs options table presents the information related to all available options for the logical configuration of digital inputs of the TPU S420. The content of the table fields is described below. Field Description Identifier Internal identifier of the logical gate associated with the input. Corresponds to what is presented in the default logic schemes. Descriptive Default descriptive that identifies the gate, presented in the Event Logging whenever there is a change of state of the input. This descriptive is also presented in the configuration menu of the inputs logic. Note: the values presented on the following tables correspond to the TPU S420 default configuration, but some of them are possible to be changed by using WinProt tools. 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-9 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive Measurement Transformers 4352 VT 1 Disconnected 4353 VT 1 Connected 4354 VT 1 Extracted 4355 VT 1 Inserted 4356 VT 2 Disconnected 4357 VT 2 Connected 4358 VT 2 Extracted 4359 VT 2 Inserted IO Base Board 4864 Generic Input 1 4865 Generic Input 2 4866 Generic Input 3 4867 Generic Input 4 4868 Generic Input 5 4869 Generic Input 6 4870 Generic Input 7 4871 Generic Input 8 4872 Generic Input 9 4873 Generic Input 10 4874 Generic Input 11 4875 Generic Input 12 4876 Generic Input 13 4877 Generic Input 14 4878 Generic Input 15 4879 Generic Input 16 4880 Generic Input 17 4881 Generic Input 18 4882 Generic Input 19 4883 Generic Input 20 4884 Generic Input 21 4885 Generic Input 22 4886 Generic Input 23 4887 Generic Input 24 4888 Generic Input 25 4889 Generic Input 26 4890 Generic Input 27 4891 Generic Input 28 4892 Generic Input 29 4893 Generic Input 30 4894 Generic Input 31 4895 Generic Input 32 Oscillography 8704 11 Oscillography Logging TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-10 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive Operation Modes 10240 Local Operation Mode 10241 Remote Operatio Mode 10242 Manual Operation Mode 10243 Automatioc Operation Mode 10244 Normal Operation Mode 10245 Emergency Operation Mode 10249 Gener Oper Mode 1 Inactive 10250 Gener Oper Mode 1 Active 10251 Gener Oper Mode 2 Inactive 10252 Gener Oper Mode 2 Active 10271 Normal Exploitation Mode I/O 10272 Special Exploitation Mode A I/O 10273 Special Exploitation Mode B I/O 10276 Test Operation Mode I/O 10283 Inst Trip Oper Mode 10284 Time Delay Trip Oper Mode Phase Fault Overcurrent 15651 Phase OC Logic Select Block Earth Fault Overcurrent 16403 Earth OC Logic Select Block Phase Balance 23315 Neg Seq OC High Set Lock Overload 25609 Therm Overload Stage Chang Circuit-breaker 41773 Circuit Breaker Open 41774 Circuit Breaker Close 41777 Circuit Breaker Extracted 41778 Circuit Breaker Inserted 41781 Circuit Breaker External Trip 41782 TPL Close Circuit Breaker 41783 TPL Open Circuit Breaker 41784 Circuit Breaker Command Inhibit 41785 Circuit Breaker Level 1 SF6 Loss 41786 Circuit Breaker Level 2 SF6 Loss 41787 Circuit Breaker Loose Spring 41788 Circuit Breaker DC Failure 41789 Motor DC Failure 41790 CB Internal Arc TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-11 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive 41791 CPM Internal Arc 41792 CCFC Internal Arc Circuit-breaker Failure 41989 Circuit Breaker Coil Supervision Earth Disconnector 48920 Earth Disconnector Open 48921 Earth Disconnector Close 48924 Earth Disconnector Command Inhibited Isolation Disconnector 49176 Isolation Disconnector Open 49177 Isolation Disconnector Close 49180 Isolation Disconnector Command Inhibited Bypass Disconnector 49944 Bypass Disconnector Open 49945 Bypass Disconnector Close 49948 Bypass Disconnector Command Inhibited Busbar Disconnector 50712 Busbar Disconnector Open 50713 Busbar Disconnector Closed 50716 Busbar Disconnector Command Inhibited Busbar 1 Disconnector 50968 Busbar 1 Disconnector Open 50969 Busbar 1 Disconnector Close 50972 Busbar 1 Disconnector Command Inhibited Busbar 2 Disconnector 51224 Busbar 2 Disconnector Open 51225 Busbar 2 Disconnector Close 51228 Busbar 2 Disconnector Command Inhibited Synchronism Check 55584 Manual Sync Close Permiss 55585 Autom Sync Close Permiss 55586 Manual Sync Vrf Close Cmd 55587 Autom Sync Vrf Close Cmd 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-12 Chapter 11 - Annexes Annex D. OUTPUT OPTIONS TABLE The outputs options table presents the information related to all available options for the logical configuration of digital outputs of the TPU S420. The content of the table fields is described below. Field Description Identifier Internal identifier of the logical gate associated with the output. Corresponds to what is presented in the default logic schemes. Descriptive Default descriptive that identifies the gate, presented in the Event Logging whenever there is a change of state of the output. This descriptive is also presented in the configuration menu of the outputs logic. Note: the values presented in the next tables correspond to the default configuration of the TPU S420, but some of them are possible to be changed by using WinProt tools. 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-13 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive IO Base Board 4914 Generic Output 1 4915 Generic Output 2 4916 Generic Output 3 4917 Generic Output 4 4918 Generic Output 5 4919 Generic Output 6 4920 Generic Output 7 4921 Generic Output 8 4922 Generic Output 9 4923 Generic Output 11 4924 Generic Output 12 4925 Generic Output 13 4926 Generic Output 14 4927 Generic Output 15 4928 Generic Output 16 4929 Generic Output 17 Calibration 9728 Calibration Close Command Phase Fault Overcurrent 15640 15641 15642 15643 15644 15645 15646 15647 Phase OC Protection Time-lag Phase OC Protec High Phase OC Protec Universal Phase OC Protec Phase OC Prot Trip Time-lag Phase OC Trip High Phase OC Trip Universal Phase OC Trip Earth Fault Overcurrent 16392 16393 16394 Earth OC Protection Time-lag Earth OC Protec Universal Earth OC Protec 16395 16396 16397 16398 16399 High Earth OC Protec Earth OC Protec Trip Time-lag Earth OC Trip Universal Earth OC Trip High Earth OC Trip Resistive Earth Fault 17155 Resist Earth Start-up Ind 17156 Resist Earth Trip Ind 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-14 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive Phase Fault Overcurrent (2nd) 17420 Time-lag Phase 2nd OC Protec 17421 Time-lag Phase 2nd OC Trip Earth Fault Overcurrent (2nd) 17668 Time-lag Phase 2nd OC Protec 17669 Time-lag Phase 2nd OC Trip Phase Overvoltage 19468 Phase Overvoltage Protec 19469 Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 19470 Phase Overvoltage Stage 2 19471 Phase Overvoltage Trip 19472 Ph Overvoltage Stg 1 Trip 19473 Ph Overvoltage Stg 2 Trip Earth Overvoltage 20228 Ground Overvoltage Protec 20229 Gnd Overvolt St1 Start Sig 20230 Gnd Overvolt St2 Start Sig 20231 Ground Overvoltage Trip 20232 Gnd Overvolt St1 Trip Sig 20233 Gnd Overvolt St2 Trip Sig Phase Undervoltage 21006 Phase Undervoltage Protec 21007 Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 21008 Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 21009 Phase Undervoltage Trip 21010 Ph Undervoltage Stg 1 Trip 21011 Ph Undervoltage Stg 2 Trip Frequency 21764 Underfrequency Protection 21765 Underfreq Prot Stage1 Sign 21766 Underfreq Prot Stage2 Sign 21767 Underfrequency Protec Trip 21768 Underfreq Stage1 Trip Sign 21769 Underfreq Stage2 Trip Sign 21774 Overfrequency Protection 21775 Overfreq Prot Stage 1 Sign 21776 Overfreq Prot Stage 2 Sign 21777 Overfrequency Protec Trip 21778 Overfreq Stage 1 Trip Sign 21779 Overfreq Stage 2 Trip Sign TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-15 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive 21780 Frequency Protection 21781 Frequency Protection Trip Phase Balance 23304 Neg Seq Overcurrent Protec 23305 Low Set Neg Seq OC Protec 23306 High Set Neg Seq OC Protec 23307 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Protec 23308 Neg Seq Overcurrent Trip 23309 Low Set Neg Seq OC Trip 23310 High Set Neg Seq OC Trip 23311 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Trip Overload 25603 Therm Overload Signal 25604 Therm Overload Alarm Sign 25605 Therm Overload Trip Sign Reclosing 38662 Automatic Reclosing 38671 Auto Recloser Open CB Cmd 38672 Auto Recloser Close CB Cmd 38673 Auto Recloser Final Trip Voltage Load Shedding 39427 Voltage Load Shedding State 39428 Voltage Reclosing State 39429 Voltage Reclosing Command Centralised Voltage Load Shedding (SLAVE) 39940 Voltage Load Shedding State 39941 Voltage Reclosing State Frequency Load Shedding 40195 Frequency Shedding Status 40196 Frequency Restoration Stat 40197 Freq Restoration Command Centralised Frequency Load Shedding (SLAVE) 40708 Frequency Shedding Status 40709 Frequency Restoration Stat Protections Transfer 40961 11 Protection Transfer Cmd TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-16 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Descriptive Circuit-breaker 41738 CB Open Command Protection 41739 CB Open Command Control 41740 Circ Breaker Open Command 41761 CB Close Command Circuit-breaker Failure 41985 CB Failure Protection 41987 CB Failure Trip Ind 41993 Supervision Coil Failure Earth Disconnector 48900 Earth Disc Open Cmd 48912 Earth Disc Close Cmd Insulation Disconnector 49156 Ins Disc Open Cmd 49168 Ins Disc Close Cmd Bypass Disconnector 49924 Bypass Disc Open Cmd 49936 Bypass Disc Close Cmd Busbar Disconnector 50692 Busbar Disc Open Cmd 50704 Busbar Disc Close Cmd Busbar Disconnector 1 50948 Busbar Disc Open Cmd 1 50960 Busbar Disc Close Cmd 1 Busbar Disconnector 2 51204 Busbar Disc Open Cmd 2 51216 Busbar Disc Close Cmd 2 Synchronism Check 55584 Manual Sync Close Permiss 55585 Autom Sync Close Permiss 55586 Manual Sync Vrf Close Cmd 55587 Autom Sync Vrf Close Cmd 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-17 Chapter 11 - Annexes Annex E. ALARM OPTIONS TABLE The alarms options table presents the information related to all available options for the logical configuration of the alarms existing in the alarms page of the TPU S420. The content of the table fields is described below. Field Description Identifier Internal identifier of the logical gate associated with the alarm. Corresponds to what is presented in the default logic schemes. Descriptive Default descriptive that identifies the gate, presented in the Event Logging whenever there is a change of state of the alarm. This descriptive is also presented in the configuration menu of the outputs logic. Note: the values presented in the next tables correspond to the default configuration of the TPU S420, but some of them are possible to be changed by using WinProt tools 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-18 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Events Logging Descriptive Unit Test 3072 Unit Operation Test Alarms 6912 Generic Alarm 1 6913 Generic Alarm 2 6914 Generic Alarm 3 6915 Generic Alarm 4 6916 Generic Alarm 5 6917 Generic Alarm 6 6918 Generic Alarm 7 6919 Generic Alarm 8 Measurement 9472 9473 9474 9475 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 High Alarm Measurement 1 High Alarm Measurement 2 High Alarm Measurement 3 High Alarm Measurement 4 High Alarm Measurement 5 High Alarm Measurement 6 High Alarm Measurement 7 High Alarm Measurement 8 Low Alarm Measurement 1 Low Alarm Measurement 2 Low Alarm Measurement 3 Low Alarm Measurement 4 Low Alarm Measurement 5 Low Alarm Measurement 6 Low Alarm Measurement 7 Low Alarm Measurement 8 Operation Modes 10246 10247 10248 10253 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 Normal Exploitation Mode Special A Exploitation Mode Special B Exploitation Mode Test Operation Mode L/R Operation Mode M/A Operation Mode N/E Operation Mode Generic 1 Operation Mode Generic 2 Operation Mode Phase Fault Overcurrent 15644 Phase OC Prot Trip 15645 Time-lag Phase OC Trip 15646 High Phase OC Trip 15647 Universal Phase OC Trip 15650 Phase OC Protec Block TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-19 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Events Logging Descriptive Earth Fault Overcurrent 16396 Earth OC Protec Trip 16397 Time-lag Earth OC Trip 16398 Universal Earth OC Trip 16399 High Earth OC Trip 16402 Earth OC Prot Block Resistive Earth 17156 Resistive Earth Trip Ind 17161 Resistive Earth Protec Block Phase Fault Overcurrent (2nd) 17421 Time-lag Phase 2nd OC Trip 17424 Phase 2nd OC Block Earth Fault Overcurrent (2nd) 17669 Time-lag Earth 2nd OC Trip 17672 Earth 2nd OC Block Phase Overvoltage 19471 Phase Overvoltage Trip 19472 Ph Overvoltage Stg 1 Trip 19473 Ph Overvoltage Stg 2 Trip 19476 Ph Overvoltage Block Bloqueio Prot Max U Fases Earth Overvoltage 20231 Ground Overvoltage Trip 20232 Gnd Overvolt St1 Trip Sig 20233 Gnd Overvolt St2 Trip Sig 20236 Ground Overvoltage Lock Phase Undervoltage 21009 Phase Undervoltage Protec 21010 Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 21011 Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 21014 Phase Undervoltage Lock Frequency 21767 Underfrequency Trip 21768 Underfrequency Trip Ind Stage 1 21769 Underfrequency Trip Ind Stage 2 21777 Overfrequency Trip 21778 Overfrequency Trip Ind Stage 1 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-20 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Events Logging Descriptive 21779 Overfrequency Trip Ind Stage 2 21781 Frequency Protection Trip 21787 Underfrequency Protection Block 21788 Overfrequency Protection Block Phase Balance 23308 Neg Seq Overcurrent Trip 23309 Low Set Neg Seq OC Trip 23310 High Set Neg Seq OC Trip 23311 Neg Seq/ Pos Seq OC Trip 23314 Neg Seq OC Protection Lock Overload 25604 Overload Protection Alarm Ind 25605 Overload Protection Trip Ind 25608 Overload Protection Block Reclosing 38662 Automatic Reclosing 38663 Fast Reclosing 38664 Slow Reclosing 38665 Reclosing Confirmation 38666 Reclosing Cycle 1 38667 Reclosing Cycle 2 38668 Reclosing Cycle 3 38669 Reclosing Cycle 4 38670 Reclosing Cycle 5 38673 Reclosing Definite Trip 38676 Reclosing Block 38677 Ready Reclosing Load Shedding Voltage 39427 Voltage Load Shedding State 39428 Voltage Reclosing State 39432 Voltage Reclosing Block 39435 Voltage Load Shedding Block Centralised Voltage Load Shedding (SLAVE) 39940 Voltage Load Shedding State 39941 Voltage Reclosing State 39944 Voltage Reclosing Block 39947 Voltage Load Shedding Block Frequency Load Shedding 40195 Freq Load Shedding State 40196 Freq Reclosing State TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-21 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Events Logging Descriptive 40200 Freq Reclosing Block 40203 Freq Load Shedding Block Centralised Frequency Load Shedding (SLAVE) 40708 Freq Load Shedding State 40709 Freq Reclosing State 40712 Freq Reclosing Block 40715 Bloqueio Deslastre Freq Circuit-breaker 41785 41786 41793 Circuit-breaker Level 1 SF6 Loss Circuit-breaker Level 2 SF6 Loss Circuit-breaker Loose Spring Failure 41796 41797 41801 Circuit-breaker manoeuvres failure Circuit Breaker Maximum I² Alarm Circuit Breaker Max Manoeuvre Alarm Circuit-breaker Failure 41987 CB Failure Trip Ind 41993 Supervision Coil Failure Earth Disconnector 48927 48930 Earth Disc Manouevre Alarm Earth Disc Max Manoeuvre Alarm Insulation Disconnector 49183 49186 Ins Disc Manouevre Failure Ins Disc Max Manouevre Alarm Bypass Disconnector 49951 49954 Bypass Disc Manouevre Failure Bypass Disc Max Manouevre Alarm Busbar Disconnector 50719 50722 Busbar Disc Manouevre Failure Busbar Disc Max Manouevres Alarm Busbar Disconnector 1 50975 Busbar Disc Manouevre 1 Failure 50978 Busbar Disc Manouevre 1 Alarm Busbar Disconnector 2 51231 51234 Busbar Disc Manouevre 2 Failure Busbar Disc Manouevre 2 Alarm TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11 11-22 Identifier Chapter 11 - Annexes Events Logging Descriptive Synchronism Check 55574 Manual Sync in Progress 55575 Autom Sync in Progress 55576 Synchronism Manual Cmd 55577 55580 55581 55584 55585 55610 Synchronism Automatic Cmd Manual Close Override Automatic Close Override Manual Close Release Sinc Autom Close Release Sinc Synchrocheck Lock 11 TPU S420 Edition 1 - User Manual, N. ASID09000127, Rev. 2.2.0, December 2011 11-23
